P44x Ent E44 Web PDF

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Numerical Distance Protection

VC2.x
Technical Guide
P44x/EN T/E44
Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN T/E44 Page 1/2
Numerical Distance Protection MiCOM P44x GENERAL CONTENT

Safety Section Addendum Introduction Hardware Description Application Guide Technical Data Installation Commissioning & Maintenance Commissioning Test & Record Sheet Connection Diagrams Relay Menu Database Menu Content Tables Version Compatibility Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 P44x/EN AD/E44 P44x/EN IT/E33 P44x/EN HW/E33 P44x/EN AP/E33 P44x/EN TD/E33 P44x/EN IN/E33 P44x/EN CM/E33 P44x/EN RS/E33 P44x/EN CO/E33 P44x/EN GC/E44 P44x/EN HI/E44 P44x/EN VC/E44
P44x/EN T/E44 Page 2/2
Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section Page 1/10
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
Symbols: Labels
3 3 4
4 4
4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective Class: Installation Category: Environment:
5 7 7 8
8 8 8 8
8. 9.
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA
9 10
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 2/10 Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
1.
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA T&D is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient. The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols:
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal
Note This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: 3.2 Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information. THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning or servicing the equipment. be consulted before installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable); Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 6/10 Equipment Use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment. CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. Safety Section
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed. Page 7/10
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning: The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock. Exposure of live parts Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.
7.
7.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER CTS MUST NOT BE FUSED SINCE OPEN CIRCUITING THEM MAY PRODUCE LETHAL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES.
7.2
Protective Class: IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
7.3
Installation Category: IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits
7.4
Environment: The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 Altitude operation up to 2000 m IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
8.
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

The following European directives may be applicable to the equipment, if so it will carry the relevant marking(s) shown below: Compliance with all Community directives: relevant European
Marking Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 60255-5: 2001 Relevant clauses of EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 60664-1: 2003.
Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC. The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity: EN 50263 : 2000 Where applicable :
Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.
II (2) G
The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, Ex e, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.
ATEX Potentially Explosive CAUTION Equipment with this marking is not itself Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, suitable for operation within a potentially explosive for equipment. atmosphere. Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.
Radio and Telecommunications Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, directive 95/5/EC. down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.
9.
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

CSA - Canadian Standards Association UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America
If applicable, the following marks will be present on the equipment: UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements
UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements
Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44
UPDATE DOCUMENTATION VERSION C2.X
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 1/82
P44X UPDATE DOCUMENTATION

In the firmware version C2.x of P441, P442 & P444, several changes in hardware & software on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
Release April 2004 Version P44x/EN T/E33 Documentation Technical Manual (Firmware version B1.2) Document Ref. P44x/EN IT/E33 Section 2. Page No. 4/24 Description Introduction to MiCOM Guide: Ref P440/EN BR/Eb has been removed UCA2 has been added New Front Panel: Front panel new design (hotkeys explanations-LCD contrast) Ethernet board + InterMicom/2nd rear port added UCA2 added in the table+DNP3Floc in% Hotkeys menu navigation Second rear communication port InterMiCOM teleprotection Ethernet Rear Port: UCA2 Communication Inputs & Outputs Boards: P444 option with 46 outputs Fast outputs in option Hysteresis remark 1.1.7 1.1.8 2.1 2.2 5/44 5/44 8/44 8/44 Second rear port & InterMiCOM Ethernet board Section 2 Hardware Module TMS 150MHz Coprocessor board item corrected & section removed Duals optos Second rear port Ethernet board Platform Software: DNP3-UCA2 Record Login: 96 alarms P440 Overview : 48 samples / 24 samples Disturbance Recorder: Additive commentsr Distance Algorithms: Priority between the 2 algorithms Distance & Resistance Measurement: 24 Samples & remark Rfault Dfault Delta Algorithms: computed in parallel Network Status monitoring: 48 samples since C1.x Conventional Algorithms: Comments added Convergence Analysis: 15 loops
3.1.1
5/24
3.1.2 3.2 3.6.3 3.9 3.10 3.11 P44x/EN HW/E33 1.1.5
6/24 9/24 14/24 23/24 24/24 24/24 5/44
2.4.3 2.7 2.8 3.3 3.3.1 3.4.1 3.4.5 4 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.3 4.3.1
9/44 11/44 11/44 14/44 14/44 15/44 16/44 17/44 18/44 21/44 22/44 28/44 29/44

Document Ref. Section 4.3.5 4.5 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.4 4.9 P44x/EN AP/E33 1.2.1 1.3 2.1 Page No. 32/44 33/44 36/44 36/44 37/44 37/44 40&41/44 8/220 10/220 12/220

Description New page make up & I>3 comment & SOTF settings with 13 bits Tripping Logic: Comments about General trip equation & Timers initiated with the start Power Swing Detection: Out Of Step (OOS) comments Pswing (PS) updated (Ph/Ph detection) Power Swing during Open Pole (Ph/Ph detection) Pswing (PS) & OOS updated (Delta Current) DEF: comments added Iev corrected in Irev & settings range Protection Features: 49:Thermal Overlaod 68:Out Of Step DDB& model n 30 comments added Configuration column : new features added Distance characteristic with Tilt fig1 Fig2 2.5.1 2.7.1 2.7.2.1 2.7.7 2.9.3 2.12.2 2.13.2 2.13.5 2.17 2.18.3 4.4.5.1 4.5.1 4.9 5.1.1 6.1 8 15/220 18/220 20/220 27/220 47-49/220 61/220 69/220 NEW 82/220 89/220 123/220 126/220 166/220 176/220 181/220 189/220 Z1X opto New distance settings Fig3- remark about symbols in Scheme Logic Single ph loop R value new PS detected on PP loop Weak Infeed improved PAP function for RTE TOR-SOTF bits ref Power Swing Delta Current New Section: Out Of Step Logic IN>3 IN>4 created DEF improved Bus/line cells for synchrocheck 5bits added in AR lockout (Zsp / IN>3 / IN>4 / PAP / Thermal) Event Recorder: AREVA name Zsp Function: Diagram amended with Ta Reference of Software version Comments for ref models n by branch New Additional functions Version C2x New reference 030G/H/J Hardware new features Function Improved : Distance New Function Description : Out Of Step & Stable Swing Function Improved: DEF New Function Description: IN>3 IN>4 New Function Description: Thermal Overload (as P443) New Function Description: PAP RTE feature
P44x/EN AP/E33 NEW SECTION
9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7

Document Ref. Section 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.9 9.9.1 9.9.2 9.9.3 9.10 P44x/EN TD/E33 3.3 3.3 10/30 11/30 Page No. Description
New Elements: Miscellaneous Hot Keys Control Input Dual Optos New Elements: PSL features DDB Cells New Tools in S1 and PSL MiCOM Px40 GOOSE Editor New Function: InterMiCOM Features IN>3 IN>4 Thermal overload
BLANK PAGE
P44X/ EN IT/ E33 : INTRODUCTION
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

/ P44x/EN AP Application Notes Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P44x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0/UCA2 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Default Programmable Scheme Logic /
3.
3.1.1
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

New Front panel New design of front pane (2 additive Hotkeys) used since version C2.X.
Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover
SER No DIAG No
In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz Vx V Vn V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed function LEDs
ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER
Hotkeys
User programable function LEDs
Keypad
Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

P0103ENb
RELAY FRONT VIEW a 16-character by 3-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). a 9-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys !, ", # and $), an enter key (%), a clear key (&), and a read key (').
Hotkey functionality: SCROLL Starts scrolling through the various default displays. STOP Stops scrolling the default display for control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation. 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. / To improve the visibility of the settings via the front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the LCD Contrast setting with the last cell in the CONFIGURATION column.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port (IEC103 or UCA2 by Ethernet) which are both optional.A second rear port(Courier) and an interMiCOM port are also available. 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options
Keypad/ LCD Display & modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault records Time synchronisation Control commands Courier Modbus (Floc in %) IEC8705-103 DNP3.0 UCA2
TABLE 1 3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display the direct access key below the HOTKEY text must be pressed. Once in the hotkey menu the and keys can be used to scroll between the available options and the direct access keys can be used to control the function currently displayed. If neither the or keys are pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below: 3.6.3.1 Setting group selection The user can either scroll using <<NXT GRP>> through the available setting groups or <<SELECT>> the setting group that is currently displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the user is prompted with the <<NXT GRP>> or <<SELECT>> options again. The user can exit the sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. For more information on setting group selection refer to Changing setting group section in the Application Notes (P440/EN AP).
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 10/82 3.6.3.2 Control inputs user assignable functions
The number of control inputs (user assignable functions USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is user configurable in the CTRL I/P CONFIG column. The chosen inputs can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer to the Control Inputs section in the Application Notes (P44x/EN AP). 3.6.3.3 CB control* The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the hotkey menu refer to the Circuit breaker control section of the Application Notes (P440/EN AP).
Default Display
MiCOM P140
HOTKEY CB CTRL
(See CB Control in Application Notes)
<USR ASSX
STG GRP>
<MENU
USR ASS1>
<STG GRP
USR ASS2>
<USR ASS1
USR ASSX>
<USR ASS2
MENU>
HOT KEY MENU

EXIT
SETTING GROUP 1
NXT GRP SELECT
CONTROL INPUT 1
EXIT ON
CONTROL INPUT 2
EXIT ON
CONTROL INPUT 2
EXIT ON
<MENU
USR ASS1>
<MENU
USR ASS2>
SETTING GROUP 2
NXT GRP SELECT
CONTROL INPUT 1
ON
Confirmation screen dispalyed for 2 seconds
Confirmation screen displayed for 2 seconds
<MENU
USR ASS1>
<MENU
USR ASS2>
SETTING GROUP 2
SELECTED
CONTROL INPUT 1
OFF EXIT
NOTE: <<EXIT>> Key returns the user to the Hotkey Menu Screen
P1246ENa
HOTKEY MENU NAVIGATION
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.9 Second rear Communication Port
K-Bus Application example
Master 1
Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
st
Master 2
To SCADA
POWER SUPPLY
modem EIA(RS)232
modem
K-Bus KITZ102
EIA(RS)232
R.T.U.
EIA(RS)232 port 1
1st RP (Courier)
Master 3
KITZ 201
EIA(RS)232 port 0
K-Bus port 3
2nd RP (Courier)
3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC
P2084ENA
SECOND REAR PORT K-BUS APPLICATION

EIA(RS)485 Application example
Master 1
st Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol,nd RP is always Courier 2
Master 2
To SCADA
CE NT RAL PR OC ESS OR
EIA232
modem
modem
EIA232
EIA485
CK222
EIA232
PO WE R SU PPL Y
R.T.U.
1st RP (Modbus / IEC103) KITZ202/4 CK222 EIA485

Front port EIA232 MiCOMS1
2nd RP (EIA485)
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access
P2085ENA
SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)485 EXAMPLE
EIA(RS)232 Application example

Master 1 Master 2
Note:
1st
RP could be any chosen protocol,
2nd
RP is always Courier
To SCADA
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
POWER SUPPLY
EIA232
modem
modem
EIA232
EIA485
CK222
EIA232
R.T.U.
EIA232 splitter EIA232
1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)
m 15 ax m
Front port
EIA232 MiCOMS1
2nd RP (EIA232)
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access
P2086ENA
SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)232 EXAMPLE 3.10 InterMiCOM Teleprotection InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the users application. 3.10.1 Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin D type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below:
Pin Acronym InterMiCOM Usage
1 2 3 4
DCD RxD TxD DTR
Data Carrier Detect is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4. Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. Signal Ground Ready To Send is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. -
5 6 7 8 9
GND Not used RTS Not used Not used
Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.10.2 Direct Connection
The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fibre optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fibre used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.
This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line. 3.10.3 Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.
This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. See P443/EN AP for setting guidelines.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 14/82 3.10.4 Settings
The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled INTERMICOM COMMS contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled INTERMICOM CONF selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following table shows the relay menu for the communication channel including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Menu Text INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status IM Input Status Source Address Receive Address Baud Rate Remote Device Ch Statistics Reset Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test pattern 00000000 00000000 1 2 9600 Px40 Invisible No Invisible Disabled 11111111 1 1 10 10 1 1 Default Setting Setting Range Min Max Step Size
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 Px30 / Px40 Invisible / Visible No / Yes Invisible / Visible Disabled / Internal / External 00000000 11111111 -
3.11
Ethernet Rear Port (option) If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See P44x/EN UC/E44 section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware.
P44X/ EN HW/ E33 : RELAY DESCRIPTION
1.
1.1.5
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Input and output boards
P441 Opto-inputs Relay outputs 8 x UNI 6 N/O 8 C/O
(1)
P442 16 x UNI 9 N/O 12 C/O

(1)
P444 24 x UNI(1) 24 N/O 8 C/O
Universal voltage range opto inputs 1.1.7
N/O normally open C/O change over
P444 could manage in option : 46 outputs Fast outputs can be ordered following the cortec reference (available in the Technical Data Sheet document) See also the hysteresis values of the optos in the 6.2 from chapter AP
Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional) The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic. It is denoted SK4. Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232. The port supports full local or remote protection and control access by MiCOM S1 software. The second rear port is also available with an on board IRIG-B input. The optional board also houses port SK5, the InterMiCOM teleprotection port. InterMiCOM permits end-to-end signalling with a remote P440 relay, for example in a distance protection channel aided scheme. Port SK5 has an EIA(RS)232 connection, allowing connection to a MODEM, or compatible multiplexers.
1.1.8
Ethernet board This is a mandatory board for UCA2.0 enabled relays. It provides network connectivity through either copper or fibre media at rates of 10Mb/s or 100Mb/s. This board, the IRIG-B board and second rear comms board are mutually exclusive as they both utilise slot A within the relay case.
2.
2.1
HARDWARE MODULES
Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320VC33-150MHz (peak speed) floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 75MHz.,
2.2
Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the distance protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at power-on to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processors built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. (section removed) From software version B1.0, coprocessor board works at 150Mhz.
2.4.3
Universal opto isolated logic inputs Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised (available since version C2.0). Duals optos are available since C2.0 (hysteresis value selectable between 2 ranges)
The P440 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. From software version C2.x they can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints. Threshold levels are as follows:
This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. 2.7 Second rear communications board For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port,which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3.
2.8
Ethernet board The ethernet board, presently only available for UCA2 communication variant relays, supports network connections of the following type: 10BASE-T 10BASE-FL 100BASE-TX 100BASE-FX
For all copper based network connections an RJ45 style connector is supported. 10Mb fibre network connections use an ST style connector while 100Mb connections use the SC style fibre connection.An extra processor, a Motorola PPC, and memory block is fitted to the ethernet card that is responsible for running all the network related functions such as TCP/IP/OSI as supplied by VxWorks and the UCA2/MMS server as supplied by Sisco inc. The extra memory block also holds the UCA2 data model supported by the relay.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 20/82 3.3 Platform software
To provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103; DNP3 ,UCA2). 3.3.1 Record logging / The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 96 alarms (with 64 application alarms: 32 alarms in alarm status 1 and another group of 32 alarms in alarm staus 2 and 32 alarms platform (see GC annex for mapping), 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling / For the P441-442-444 feeder protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 24 samples for the sample rate of 48 samples per power cycle used by the relay/ 3.4.5 Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed (with Kbus or ModBus only IEC is not compressed) disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. Since C1.x the disturbance files are no more compressed. This version manage the disturbance task with 24 samples by cycle (since B1x & C1x). Maximum storage capacity is equivalent to 28 events of 3sec which gives 84sec of duration max.
4.
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS
The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. Since version C1.x no priority is managed any more. The fastest algorithm will give the immediate directional decision.
4.1
Distance and Resistance Measurement Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (24 samples per cycle). NOTA: See also in 4.3.1 of that chapter the Rn and Dn (Xn) conditions of convergence.
4.2
"Deltas" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions which are computed in parallel.
4.2.1
Network Status Monitoring / Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (48 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz).
4.3
"Conventional" Algorithms NOTA: The distance measurement of the fault is taken on the loop selected by the "Deltas" or "conventional" phase selection algorithms. This measurement uses the fault values which are computed by Gauss Seidel method.
4.3.1
Convergence Analysis This analysis is based on the measurements of distance and resistance of the fault. These measurements are taken on each single-phase and two-phase loops (15 loops in total).
4.3.5
Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose) / If a stored voltage does not exist (SOTF) when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the directional is forced forward and the trip is instantaneous (if SOTF All Zones is set or according to the zone location if SOTF Zone 2, etc. is set). If the settable switch on to fault current threshold I>3 is exceeded on reclosure, the relay instantaneously trips three-phase (No timer I>3 is applied see also the chapter AP in 2.12). / Other modes can be selected to trip selectively by SOFT or TOR according to the fault location (SOTF Zone 1, SOTF Zone 2, etc., TOR Zone 1, TOR Zone 2, etc. depending from the software version - from A3.1 available).There are 13 bits of settings in TOR/SOTF logic.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 22/82 4.5 Tripping Logic /
There are five time delays associated with the six zones present. Zone 1 and extended zone 1 have the same time delay. NB: NB: 4.7 See general trip equation in 2.5 from AP chapter All the timers are initiated when the general start of the relay picks up (Z3Z4 convergence)
Power swing detection / The power swing detection element may be used to selectively prevent when the measured impedance point moves into the start-up characteristic from a power swing and still allows tripping for a fault (fault evolving during a power swing). The power swing detection element may also be used to selectively trip once an out-of-step condition has been declared. For such feature a dedicated PSL must be designed in the internal logic of the relay by using the graphic tool available in S1.(See AP chapter section 2.13). When the locus of the 3 phase-phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 phase-phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. Figure 14 illustrates the characteristics of power swing: Stable swing same resistance sign Unstable swing (Out Of Step) opposite resistance sign
4.7.1
Power swing detection /... The protection P44x differentiates since version C1.0 a stable power swing from a loss of synchronism (out of step) condition. A power swing is detected and declared if: At least one phase-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5 ms. The three impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms. At least two poles of the breaker are closed (impedance measurement possible on two phases). Remark : During Power swing the residual compensation factor Ko are not applied in the detection of the characteristic.(the extended limit in R gives: R1=R2=R3=RpFwd)
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 4.7.2 Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip)
In this case, the power swing only occurs on two phases. A power swing is detected if: At least one phase-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5ms. NOTA: During an open-pole condition, the P44x monitors the power swing on the healthy phase-phase loop. No external information is needed if the voltage transformers are on the line side. If the voltage transformers are on the bus side, the pole discrepancy signal should be used. The pole discrepancy input represents a onecircuit-breaker-pole-open condition.
4.7.4
Tripping logic Depending on the blocking or unblocking selected, the P44x will trip or block as the swing (stable or unstable) passes through the zones. NOTA: If selected, tripping will occur if the impedance stays in any zone longer than its time delay.(See Chapter AP section 2.13)
There is a master unblocking timer that is used to override any blocked zone (unblocking time delay). This is used to separate the sources (open the breaker, 3-phase trip) in the event that a block was taking place, and the impedance remained in the blocked zone for a relatively long time. This would be indicative of a serious overcurrent condition as a result of too great a power transfer after a disturbance (a power swing that does not pass through or recover). If the impedance point moves out of the start-up characteristic again before the time delay expires, a trip is not issued and the adjustable time delay is reset. Unblocking the Zones Blocked due to Faults In order to protect the network against a fault that may occur during power swing, blocking signals can be stopped when current thresholds are exceeded. For detecting any type of fault during a power swing, the P44x uses the adjustable unblocking current thresholds : A residual current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (kr x Imax(t)). A negative-sequence current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (ki x Imax(t)). A phase current threshold: IMAX. A Delta phase current criteria can be enabled in S1 (since version C1.0) to detect the 3phase fault (with faulty current lower than Swing current) during Power swing
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 24/82 4.9
DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults /. In backup-operating mode SBEF (Stand-By Earth Fault), an inverse/definite time ground overcurrent element with 4 stages is selectable. A communication channel is not used-OR- azero sequence power (since version B1.x) with IDMT Time Delay (see section 5 in chapter P44x/EN AP)
/ When used on the same signalling channel (shared scheme selected by MiCOM S1) as the distance protection, if the distance protection picks up, it has priority (the output from the DEF element is blocked from asserting the Carrier Send common output). / Legend For Tripping Logic Diagrams (DEF)
Abbreviation Vr> IRev Forward Reverse DEF blocking Carrier Receive DEF Iev Tripping mode Z< starting t_cycle t_delay t_trans Definition Threshold of residual or zero sequence voltage (3Vo) Threshold of residual current (settable in S1 default:0,6IN) Forward directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation Reverse directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation Blocking of DEF element Carrier received for the principal line protected (same channel as distance protection) Threshold of residual current (0.6 x Ied) Single or three-phase tripping (selectable) Convergence at least 1 of 6 loops within the tripping characteristic (internal starting of the distance element) Additional time delay (150ms) of 1 pole AR cycle Tripping time delay Carrier Send delay settable
APPLICATION GUIDE (P44X/EN AP/E33)
1.
1.2.1
INTRODUCTION
Protection Features 27: Undervoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. 49: Thermal overload Protection as P540 with dual time constant. This element can provide an alarm and a trip delayed 59: Overvoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. / 78 68 :Power swing blocking & Out Of Step detection - Selective blocking of distance protection zones ensures stability during the power swings experienced on sub-transmission and transmission systems (stable swing or Out of Step conditions = loss of synchronism).
1.3
Remark: It is recommended to check in the DDB table, the reference number of each cell, included in the chapter P44x/EN GC/E33 (Relay menu Data base) Version C2.x uses the model 030 G / 030 H / 030 J
2.
2.1
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Configuration column The following table shows the Configuration column:Menu text CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults No Operation No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Select via Menu Select via Optos Group1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 No Operation Save Abort Group1,2,3 or 4 No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4 Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Default setting Available settings
Setting Group Active Settings
Select via Menu Group 1
Save Changes
No Operation
Copy From Copy To Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Distance Power Swing Back-up I> Neg Sequence O/C Broken Conductor Earth Fault O/C Zero Sequence Power (*) (ZSP) Aided DEF Volt Protection CB Fail & I< Supervision System Checks Thermal Overload (***) Internal A/R Input Labels Output Labels CT & VT Ratios Record Control Disturb Recorder
Group 1 No Operation Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible

Menu text Measuret Setup Comms Settings Commission Tests Setting Values Control Inputs (***) Ctrl I/P Config (***) Ctrl I/P Labels (***) Direct Access (***) Inter MiCOM (**) Default setting Invisible Visible Visible Primary Visible Visible Visible Enabled Enabled

Available settings Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Primary or Secondary Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled
(*) Since B1.0 (**) Since C1.0 (***) Since C2.0 2.2 Phase fault distance protection Figure 1: Completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1p manages the tilt characteristic for phase fault) 2.3 Earth fault distance protection Figure 2: Completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1m manages the tilt characteristic for earth fault)
2.5.1
General distance trip logic Equation: Remark: The inputs Z1X must be polarised for activating Z1X the logic Remark: For the 1P 3P trip logic check in section 2.8.2.5 Tripping logic
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 30/82 2.7.1 Settings table:
Remark: New settings from C1.x dealing with the tilt and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad (due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms)
2.7.2.1
Zone Logic : Remark Fig 3: Explanation about the symbols used in the logical schemas.
Represent an internal logic status from the logic of the protection ( the line is dead or the pole is dead )
Represent a setting adjusted or selected by MiCOM S1
Represent a command / a logical external status linked to an opto input from the protection 2.7.7 Resistive Reach Calculation Earth fault element : / However, where Power Swing is used, a larger impedance surrounds zone 3 and zone 4 , a,d it is essential also, that load does not encroach upon the characteristic.(With previous version) Since version C1.x there is an earth detection criteria (10% IN + 5% IphaseMax) which blocks the start of the relay if not enough residual current has been detected (it secures the start in case of load encroachment for Deltas algorithms). Another improvement since C1.x in the Power Swing detection is made by using Phase-Phase detector. In that case phase ground start can be bigger from the previous version, because the band R is applied only to the phase phase loop.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 2.9.3 2.9.3.3 Weak Infeed Features :
PAP Weak infeed for RTE application (PAP= Protection Antenne Passive) That specific request from RTE is an exclusive choice with the export Weak infeed logic:
If the PAP has been selected then the following settings are activated with MiCOM S1: For internal logic description , check the RTE manual ref P440 user guide EF GS
2.12.2
TOR-SOTF Trip Logic During the TOR/SOTF 500ms window (or close pulse time/reclaim time), individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the TOR-SOTF Mode function links (TOR logic bit0 to bit3 & SOTF logic bit7 to bit 0B)
2.13.2
Unblocking of the relay for faults during Power swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN > 0.1 In + ((IN> / 100) . (I maximum)).
A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phase-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I2> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I2 > 0.1 In + ((I2> / 100) . (I maximum)).
A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A). A Criteria in Delta Current can be activated in MiCOM S1 since version C1.0:
That flat delta criteria (Enabled by S1) will improve the detection of a 3 Phase fault during a power swing (in case of faulty current lower than the Imax line threshold settable in S1) 100ms are requested for unblocking the logic. With the exaggerated delta current (activated all the time in the internal logic) the phase selection has been improved in case of unblocking logic applied with a fault detected during a power swing. Regarding the presence of negative current or zero sequence current , the exaggerated deltas current detection are calculated on the phase-phase loop or ground phase loop. 2.13.5 Out Of Step (OOS) - (New section) A new feature has been integrated since C1.0, which can detect the out of step (OOS) conditions. How MiCOM Detect the out of step ? :
When the criteria for power swing detection are met, and when out of step tripping is selected, then the distance protection with all of its stages is blocked in order to prevent tripping by the distance protection (The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing as there are different criteria which can be used by monitoring current & delta current). When the locus of the 3 single phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 single phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. In the both cases the MiCOM P440 will provide a monitoring of the number of cycles and control if the setting from S1 has been reached. In that case a trip order is performed by the relay.
X Zone C X X lim Zone B Z3 R +R +R -R lim Z4 R lim -X lim +R R Zone A
-R Out Of Step
Stable swing
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 What are the settings and logic used in MiCOM S1 ? :
The settings are located with the Power-Swing function :
And a dedicated PSL must be created by the user if such logic must be activated in the relay. Outputs for Out of Step:
DDB N350 : The first out of step cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the opposite R sign)& the Out Of Step start picks-up DDBN352 : The number of cycles settable by S1 has been reached & Out Of Step is now confirmed
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 34/82 Outputs for stable swing :
DDB N351 : The first stable swing cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the same R sign) & the Stable Swing start picks-up DDBN353 : The number of cycles settable by S1 has been reached & Stable Swing is now confirmed DDBN269 : Power Swing is detected (3 single phase loop inside the quad & crossing the R band in more than 5ms in a 50hz network) Remark: Out-of-step tripping systems should be applied at proper network locations to detect Out of step conditions and separate the network at pre-selected locations only in order to create system islands with balanced generation and load demand that will remain in synchronism.
2.17
Directional and non-directional earth fault protection Three elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: IN> element IN>1 element IN>2 element IN>3 element IN>4 element Channel aided directional earth fault protection; Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed. Directional or non-directional, DT delayed. Directional or non-directional, DT delayed. Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
The IN>1,IN>2 ,IN>3 and IN>4 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). These current thresholds are activated as an exclusive choice with Zero sequence Power Protection.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults.
Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block or Non directional 0.08 x In 0 0 0.025 0.5 DT or Inverse 0 100s 0.01s 4.0 x In 200s 200s 1.2 15 0.01 x In 0.01s 0.01s 0.025 0.1 Max Step size
IN>1 Directional IN>1 VTS Block IN>1 Current Set IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 Time Delay VTS IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Status IN>2 Directional IN>2 VTS Block IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 Time Delay VTS IN>3 Status IN>3 Directional IN>3 VTS Block IN>3 Current Set IN>3 Time Delay IN>3 Time Delay VTS IN>4 Status IN>4 Directional IN>4 VTS Block IN>4 Current Set IN>4 Time Delay IN>4 Time Delay VTS
Directional Fwd Non directional 0.2 x In 1s 0.2s 1 7 DT 0 Enabled Non Directional Non directional 0.3 x In 2s 0.2s Enabled Non Directional Non directional 0.3 x In 2s 0.2s Enabled Non Directional Non directional 0.3 x In 2s 0.2s
Disabled or Enabled Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block or Non directional 0.08 x In 0 0 32 x In 200s 200s 0.01 x In 0.01s 0.01s
IN> DIRECTIONAL
IN> Char Angle Polarisation
45 Zero Sequence
95
95
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 36/82 2.18.3 Aided DEF protection schemes
The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. Since C1.0 a better sensitivity has been created by using a settable threshold for the residual current in case of reverse fault for creating quicker blocking scheme logic. The IN Rev factor can be adjusted from 10% to 100% of IN As well in case of independent channel logic with a blocking scheme an independent transmission timer Tp has been created with a short step at : 2ms
When a separate channel for DEF is used, the above DEF schemes are independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must Share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table:
Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status Polarisation V> Voltage Set IN Forward Time Delay Scheme Logic Tripping Tp (if blocking scheme not shared) IN Rev Factor Enabled Zero Sequence 1V 0.1 x In 0 Shared Three Phase 2ms 0,6 Disabled or Enabled Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence 0.5V 0.05 x In 0 20V 4 x In 10s 0.01V 0.01 x In 0.1s Max Step size
Shared, Blocking or Permissive Three Phase or Single Phase 0 ms 0 1000ms 10s 2ms 0.1s
4.
4.4.5.1
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

These following DDB cells MCB/VTS Bus MCB/VTS Line Are managed dynamically since version C1.1 (regarding where the main VT are located :bus side or line side then the Csync ref is assigned to the other VT which is managed as the Csync ref)
4.5.1
Autorecloser Functional Description The new features have created some additive bits in the AR lock out logic.

Menu text Default setting

Setting range Min Max Step size
GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE MODE AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT Bit 0: Block at tZ2 Bit 1: Block at tZ3, Bit 2: Block at tZp Bit 3: Block for LoL Trip, Bit 4: Block for I2> Trip, Bit 5: Block for I>1 Trip, Bit 6: Block for I>2 Trip, Bit 7: Block for V<1 Trip, Bit 8: Block for V<2 Trip, Bit 9: Block for V>1 Trip, Bit 0A: Block for V>2 Trip, Bit 0B: Block for IN>1 Trip, Bit 0C: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 0D: Block for Aided DEF Trip. Bit 0E: Block ZSP Trip Bit 0F: Block IN>3 Trip Bit 10: Block IN>4 Trip Bit11: Block PAP Trip Bit12: Block Therm Overload Trip
Block A/R
1111 1111 1111 1111 111
4.9
Event recorder
Report Type These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to AREVA T&D P&C Ltd.
Report Data
5.
5.1.1
NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS VERSION B1.X

ZSP Function Description: Logical scheme corrected with Ta as RTE request:
Zsp Timer Block
Dclenchement Triphas
Ir(t)
Ir(t) > Ir
&
Zsp Trip
Vr(t)
Sr(t) = Vr(t)*Ir(t)*cos(phi-phi0)
Sr(t) > Sr
Tb
Ta
Zsp Start
6.
6.1
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC DEFAULT SETTINGS

HOW TO USE PSL Editor? :
Software Version A2.11 A3.3 A4.8 B1.6 C1.1 C2.6 Model N 04A 06A 06B 07A 07B 09C 020G 020H 030G 030H 030J
8.
DDB DESCRIPTION FOR ALL TYPES P441/P442 & P444 RELAYS

Using model 07 in version A4.8 Using model 09 in version B1.2 Using model 20 in version C1.1 Using model 30 in version C2.6
9.
9.1
NEW ADDITIONNAL FUNCTIONS VERSION C2.X (MODEL 030G/H/J)

Hardware new features: Integration of the new CPU board at 150 MHz Optional fast static outputs (selected by Cortec code) Optional 46 outputs in P444-model 20H/ 30H Integration of Dual optos with/without filter Integration of InterMiCOM Integration of Ethernet board with UCA2 protocol (61850 -8-1 available soon)
NEW FEATURES HARD & SOFT SINCE VERSION C2.X 9.2 Function Improved : Distance Addition of a settable time delay to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation
Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 1 (independent setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase). Settable between 45
Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 2 and zone P (common setting for phase-toground and phase-to-phase/Z2 and Zp). Settable between 45
9.3
New DDB:
New Function Description: OUT OF STEP & STABLE SWING improved An out of step function has been integrated in the firmware.That logic manage the start of the OOS by the monitoring of the sign of the biphase loops:
X Zone C X X lim Zone B Z3 R +R +R -R lim Z4 R lim -X lim +R R Zone A
-R Out Of Step
Stable swing
For additive details check the section 4.7 of HW Chapter and 2.13.5 of that AP chapter. New settings (Delta I) have been created also in Power swing (stable swing) with Delta I as a criteria for unblocking the Pswing logic in case of 3 phase fault (see 2.13.2 in the AP chapter). Phase selection has been improved with exaggerated Deltas current (See 2.13.2 of AP Chapter).
9.4
New DDB :
Function Improved: DEF Some improvements have been integrated in DEF function (see HW section 4.9 and AP section 2.18.3)
New settings are: 9.5 New Function Description: SBEF with IN>3 &IN>4 Two new thresholds of IN have been added (see AP section 2.17)
New DDB cells:
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.6 New Function Description: THERMAL OVERLOAD
A NEW THERMAL OVERLOAD (with 2 time constant) function has been created as in the other transmission protection of the MiCOM Range, which offer alarm & trip (see section 1.2.1)
New DDB cells:
Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 46/82 9.6.1 Single time constant characteristic
This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/) Where: t FLC k P = = = = = = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, ; Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; Largest phase current; Full load current rating (relay setting Thermal Trip); 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 FLC. Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload. = (2 - (k.FLC)2) / (2 - P2)
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from hot or cold. 9.6.2 Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling (e.g. type ONAN). The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant, except that two time constants must be set. The thermal curve is defined as: 0.4 exp(-t/1) + 0.6 exp(-t/2) Where: 1 2 = = Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings; Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil. = (2 - (k.FLC)2) / (2 - P2)
For marginal overloading, heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil. Thus, at low current, the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil. This provides protection against a general rise in oil temperature. For severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings, with little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Thus, at high current, the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This provides protection against hot spots developing within the transformer windings. Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimise gas production by overheated oil. Note, however, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. The following table shows the menu settings for the thermal protection element:
THERMAL Thermal Char Thermal Trip Thermal Alarm Time Constant 1 Time Constant 2 Default Single 1n 70% 10 minutes 5 minutes Min Max Step
Disabled, Single, Dual 0.08n 50% 1 minutes 1 minutes 3.2n 100% 200 minutes 200 minutes 0.01n 1% 1 minutes 1 minutes
THERMAL PROTECTION MENU SETTINGS
The thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the measurement column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu, for example to reset after injection testing. The reset function in the menu is found in the measurement column with the thermal state. 9.6.3 9.6.3.1 Setting guidelines Single time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The relay setting, Time Constant 1, is in minutes. Time constant (minutes) Air-core reactors Capacitor banks Overhead lines Cables Busbars 40 10 10 60 - 90 60 TYPICAL PROTECTED PLANT THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be Thermal Trip = 70% of thermal capacity. 9.6.3.2 Dual time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio. Typical time constants: 1 (minutes) Oil-filled transformer 5 2 (minutes) 120 Limits Rating 400 - 1600 kVA Cross section 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al Typical, at 66kV and above Limits
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be Thermal Alarm = 70% of thermal capacity. Note that the thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 48/82 9.7 New Function Description: PAP (RTE feature)
That new function is based on a RTE specification with a dedicated application equivalent to a customised weak infeed. The settings are above:
New Outputs DDB cells:
New Inputs DDB cells:
For further details check datas in the RTE manual P440 EF GS. 9.8 9.8.1 New Elements : Miscellaneous features HOTKEYS / Control input
The 2 Hotkeys in the front panel (see also IT Chapter 3.1.1 & 3.6.3.3) can perform a direct command if a dedicated PSL has been previously created using CONTROL INPUT cell. In total the MiCOM P440 offers 32 control inputs which can be activated by the Hotkey manually or by the IEC 103 remote communication (if that option has been flashed with the firmware of the relay (see also cortec code)):
The control input can be linked to any DDB cell as: led, relay , internal logic cell (that can be useful during test & commissioning) see also the section 9.9 in chapter AP - Different condition can be managed for the command as:
And also the text for passing the command can be selected between:
The labels of the control inputs can be fulfilled by the user (text label customised)
The digits in this table allow to provide filtering on selected DDB cells (changed from 1 to 0), to avoid the transfer of these special cells to a remote station connected to the relay with IEC 103 protocol. It gives the opportunity to filter the not pertinent data.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 52/82 9.8.2 Optos : Dual hysteresis and filter removed or not
The MiCOM P44x is fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints (Dual Opto). Threshold levels are as follows:
Nominal Battery Voltage (Vdc) 24 / 27 30 / 34 48 / 54 110 / 125 220 / 250 Standard 60% - 80% 50% - 70%
No Operation (logic 0) Operation (logic 1) Vdc No Operation (logic 0) Operation (logic 1) Vdc Vdc Vdc <16.2 <20.4 <32.4 <75.0 <150.0 >19.2 >24.0 >38.4 >88.0 >176.0 <12.0 <15.0 <24.0 <55.0 <110 >16.8 >21.0 >33.6 >77.0 >154
TABLE 1 This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.9 9.9.1 New Elements : PSL features DDB Cells: New DDB cells have been added See the GC chapter INPUTS DDB:
OUTPUTS DDB:
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 54/82 9.9.2 New Tools in S1 & PSL: Toolbar and Commands Standard tools
Blank Scheme Create a blank scheme based on a relay model. Default Configuration Create a default scheme based on a relay model. Open Open an existing diagram. Save Save the active diagram. Print Display the Windows Print dialog, enabling you to print the current diagram. Undo Undo the last action. Redo Redo the previously undone action. Redraw Redraw the diagram. Number of DDBs Display the DDB numbers of the links. Calculate CRC Calculate unique number based on both the function and layout of the logic. Compare Files Compare current file with another stored on disk. Select Enable the select function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow. This is the default mouse pointer. It is sometimes referred to as the selection pointer. Point to a component and click the left mouse button to select it. Several components may be selected by clicking the left mouse button on the diagram and dragging the pointer to create a rectangular selection area.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Zoom and pan tools
Zoom In Increases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Out Decreases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Enable the zoom function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying glass. Right-clicking will zoom out and left-clicking will zoom in. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Click and drag to zoom in to an area. Zoom to Fit Display at the highest magnification that will show all the diagrams components. Zoom to Selection Display at the highest magnification that will show the selected component(s). Pan Enable the pan function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a hand. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the diagram to pan. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Logic symbols
This toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram. Not all elements are available in all devices. Icons will only be displayed for those elements available in the selected device. Link Create a Link between two logic symbols. Opto Signal Create an Opto Signal. Input Signal Create an Input Signal. Output Signal Create an Output Signal. GOOSE in Create an input signal to logic to receive a UCA 2.0 GOOSE message transmitted from another IED. GOOSE out Create an output signal from logic to transmit a UCA 2.0 GOOSE message to another IED.
Integral Tripping in Create an input signal to logic that receives an InterMiCOM message transmitted from another IED. Integral Tripping out Create an output signal from logic that transmits an InterMiCOM message to another IED. Control in Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external command. Function Key Create a Function Key input signal. Trigger Signal Create a Fault Record Trigger. LED Signal or
Create an LED Signal. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LEDs i.e. mono-colour or tri-colour. Contact Signal Create a Contact Signal. LED Conditioner or
Create an LED Conditioner. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LEDs i.e. monocolour or tri-colour. Contact Conditioner Create a Contact Conditioner. Timer Create a Timer. AND Gate Create an AND Gate. OR Gate Create an OR Gate. Programmable Gate Create a Programmable Gate.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Alignment tools
Align Top Align all selected components so the top of each is level with the others. Align Middle Align all selected components so the middle of each is level with the others. Align Bottom Align all selected components so the bottom of each is level with the others. Align Left Align all selected components so the leftmost point of each is level with the others. Align Centre Align all selected components so the centre of each is level with the others. Align Right Align all selected components so the rightmost point of each is level with the others. Drawing tools
Rectangle When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move it to where you want the diagonally opposite corner to be. Release the button. To draw a square hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Ellipse When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move until the ellipse is the size you want it to be. Release the button. To draw a circle hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Line When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the line to start, hold down left mouse, move to the position of the end of the line and release button. To draw horizontal or vertical lines only hold down the SHIFT key. Polyline When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polyline to start and click the left mouse button. Now move to the next point on the line and click the left button. Double click to indicate the final point in the polyline. Curve When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polycurve to start and click the left mouse button. Each time you click the button after this a line will be drawn, each line bisects its associated curve. Double click to end. The straight lines will disappear leaving the polycurve. Note: whilst drawing the lines associated with the polycurve, a curve will not be displayed until either three lines in succession have been drawn or the polycurve line is complete.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 58/82 Text
When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the text to begin and click the left mouse button. To change the font, size or colour, or text attributes select Properties from the right mouse button menu. Image When selected, the Open dialog is displayed, enabling you to select a bitmap or icon file. Click Open, position the mouse pointer where you want the image to be and click the left mouse button. Nudge tools
The nudge tool buttons enable you to shift a selected component a single unit in the selected direction, or five pixels if the SHIFT key is held down. As well as using the tool buttons, single unit nudge actions on the selected components can be achieved using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Nudge Up Shift the selected component(s) upwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units upwards. Nudge Down Shift the selected component(s) downwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units downwards. Nudge Left Shift the selected component(s) to the left by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the left. Nudge Right Shift the selected component(s) to the right by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the right. Rotation tools
Free Rotate Enable the rotation function. While rotation is active components may be rotated as required. Press the ESC key or click on the diagram to disable the function. Rotate Left Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the left. Rotate Right Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the right. Flip Horizontal Flip the component horizontally. Flip Vertical Flip the component vertically.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Structure tools
The structure toolbar enables you to change the stacking order of components. Bring to Front Bring the selected components in front of all other components. Send to Back Bring the selected components behind all other components. Bring Forward Bring the selected component forward one layer. Send Backward Send the selected component backwards one layer. 9.9.3 MiCOM Px40 GOOSE editor
To access to Px40 GOOSE Editor menu click on The implementation of UCA2.0 Generic Object Orientated Substation Events (GOOSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. UCA2.0 GOOSE is based upon the principle of reporting the state of a selection of binary (i.e. ON or OFF) signals to other devices. In the case of Px40 relays, these binary signals are derived from the Programmable Scheme Logic Digital Data Bus signals. UCA2.0 GOOSE messages are event-driven. When a monitored point changes state, e.g. from logic 0 to logic 1, a new message is sent. GOOSE Editor enables you to connect to any UCA 2.0 MiCOM Px40 device via the Courier front port, retrieve and edit its GOOSE settings and send the modified file back to a MiCOM Px40 device.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 60/82 Menu and Toolbar The menu functions
The main functions available within the Px40 GOOSE Editor menu are: File Edit View Device
File menu
Open Displays the Open file dialogue box, enabling you to locate and open an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the current file. Save As Save the current file with a new name or in a new location. Print Print the current GOOSE configuration file. Print Preview Preview the hardcopy output with the current print setup. Print Setup Display the Windows Print Setup dialogue box allowing modification of the printer settings. Exit Quit the application.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Edit menu
Rename Rename the selected IED. New Enrolled IED Add a new IED to the GOOSE configuration. New Virtual Input Add a new Virtual Input to the GOOSE In mapping configuration. New Mapping Add a new bit-pair to the Virtual Input logic. Delete Enrolled IED Remove an existing IED from the GOOSE configuration. Delete Virtual Input Delete the selected Virtual Input from the GOOSE In mapping configuration. Delete Mapping Remove a mapped bit-pair from the Virtual Input logic. Reset Bitpair Remove current configuration from selected bit-pair. Delete All Delete all mappings, enrolled IEDs and Virtual Inputs from the current GOOSE configuration file.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 62/82 View menu
Toolbar Show/hide the toolbar. Status Bar Show/hide the status bar. Properties Show associated properties for the selected item. Device menu
Open Connection Display the Establish Connection dialog, enabling you to send and receive data from the connected relay. Close Connection Closes active connection to a relay.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Send to Relay Send the open GOOSE configuration file to the connected relay. Receive from Relay Extract the current GOOSE configuration from the connected relay. Communications Setup
Displays the Local Communication Settings dialogue box, enabling you to select or configure the communication settings. The toolbar Open Opens an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the active document. Print Display the Print Options dialog, enabling you to print the current configuration. View Properties Show associated properties for the selected item. How to Use the GOOSE Editor The main functions available within the GOOSE Editor module are: Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED Configure GOOSE settings Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED Save IED GOOSE setting files Print IED GOOSE setting files
Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. Enter the relay password. Extract the current GOOSE configuration settings from the device by selecting Receive from Relay from the Device menu.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 64/82 9.9.3.1 Configure GOOSE settings
The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor is used to enrol devices and also to provide support for mapping the Digital Data Bus signals (from the Programmable Scheme Logic) onto the UCA2.0 GOOSE bit-pairs. If the relay is interested in data from other UCA2.0 GOOSE devices, their "Sending IED" names are added as enrolled devices within the GOOSE Scheme Logic. The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor then allows the mapping of incoming UCA2.0 GOOSE message bitpairs onto Digital Data Bus signals for use within the Programmable Scheme Logic. UCA2.0 GOOSE is normally disabled in the MiCOM Px40 products and is enabled by downloading a GOOSE Scheme Logic file that is customised. 9.9.3.2 Device naming Each UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled device on the network transmits messages using a unique "Sending IED" name. Select Rename from the Edit menu to assign the "Sending IED" name to the device. 9.9.3.3 Enrolling IEDs Enrolling a UCA2.0 GOOSE device is done through the Px40s GOOSE Scheme Logic. If a relay is interested in receiving data from a device, the "Sending IED" name is simply added to the relays list of interested devices. Select New Enrolled IED from the Edit menu and enter the GOOSE IED name (or "Sending IED" name) of the new device. Enrolled IEDs have GOOSE In settings containing DNA (Dynamic Network Announcement) and User Status bit-pairs. These input signals can be configured to be passed directly through to the Virtual Input gates or be set to a forced or default state before processing by the Virtual Input logic.
The signals in the GOOSE In settings of enrolled IEDs are mapped to Virtual Inputs by selecting New Mapping from the Edit menu. Refer to section below for use of these signals in logic. 9.9.3.4 GOOSE In settings Virtual inputs The GOOSE Scheme Logic interfaces with the Programmable Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual Inputs. The Virtual Inputs are then used in much the same way as the Opto Input signals. The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the relays GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any enrolled device, using logic gates onto a Virtual Input.
The following gate types are supported within the GOOSE Scheme Logic: Gate Type AND OR PROGRAMMABLE Operation The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when all bitpairs match the desired state. The GOOSE Virtual Input will be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when any bit-pair matches its desired state. The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when the majority of the bit-pairs match their desired state.
To add a Virtual Input to the GOOSE logic configuration, select New Virtual Input from the Edit menu and configure the input number. If required, the gate type can be changed once input mapping to the Virtual Input has been made. Mapping GOOSE In signals from enrolled IEDs are mapped to logic gates by selection of the required bit-pair from either the DNA or User Status section of the inputs.
The value required for a logic 1 or ON state is specified in the State box. The input can be inverted by checking Input Inversion (equivalent to a NOT input to the logic gate). GOOSE Out settings The structure of information transmitted via UCA2.0 GOOSE is defined by the Protection Action (PACT) common class template, defined by GOMFSE (Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment). A UCA2.0 GOOSE message transmitted by a Px40 relay can carry up to 96 Digital Data Bus signals, where the monitored signals are characterised by a two-bit status value, or "bit-pair". The value transmitted in the bit-pair is customisable although GOMFSE recommends the following assignments:
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 66/82 Bit-Pair Value 00 01 10 11
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Represents A transitional or unknown state A logical 0 or OFF state A logical 1 or ON state An invalid state
The PACT common class splits the contents of a UCA2.0 GOOSE message into two main parts; 32 DNA bit-pairs and 64 User Status bit-pairs. The DNA bit-pairs are intended to carry GOMSFE defined protection scheme information, where supported by the device. MiCOM Px40 implementation provides full end-user flexibility, as it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to any of the 32 DNA bitpairs. The User Status bit pairs are intended to carry all user-defined state and control information. As with the DNA, it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to these bitpairs.
To ensure full compatibility with third party UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled products, it is recommended that the DNA bit-pair assignments are as per the definition given in GOMFSE. Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED 1. Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. Enter the relay password. Send the current GOOSE configuration settings to the device by selecting Send to Relay from the Device menu.
2. 3. 4.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Save IED GOOSE setting files 1. Select Save or Save As from the File menu.
Print IED GOOSE setting files 1. 2. 3. 9.10 9.10.1 Select Print from the File menu. The Print Options dialogue is displayed allowing formatting of the printed file to be configured. Click OK after making required selections.
New Function : Inter MiCOM features InterMiCOM Teleprotection InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the users application.
9.10.2
Protection Signalling In order to achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere within a high voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection relays are connected. Two distinct types of protection signalling can be identified:
9.10.2.1
Unit protection Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey analog data concerning the power system between relays, typically current magnitude and/or phase. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM, with the MiCOM P54x range of current differential and phase comparison relays available.
9.10.2.2
Teleprotection Channel Aided Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF data (from a local protection device) thereby providing some additional information to a remote device which can be used to accelerate in-zone fault clearance and/or prevent out-of-zone tripping. This kind of protection signalling has been discussed earlier in this chapter, and InterMiCOM provides the ideal means to configure the schemes in the P443 relay.
In each mode, the decision to send a command is made by a local protective relay operation, and three generic types of InterMiCOM signal are available: Intertripping In intertripping (direct or transfer tripping applications), the command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection relay and simply causes CB operation. Since no checking of the received signal by another protection device is performed, it is absolutely essential that any noise on the signalling channel isnt seen as being a valid signal. In other words, an intertripping channel must be very secure. In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. Since this applies a second, independent check before tripping, the signalling channel for permissive schemes do not have to be as secure as for intertripping channels. In blocking applications, tripping is only permitted when no signal is received but a protection operation has occurred. In other words, when a command is transmitted, the receiving end device is blocked from operating even if a protection operation occurs. Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is imperative that a signal is received whenever possible and as quickly as possible. In other words, a blocking channel must be fast and dependable.
Permissive
Blocking
The requirements for the three channel types are represented pictorially in figure 19.
Speed
Permissive
faster
Blocking
slower
low high
Security
Direct Intertrip
Dependability
P1342ENa
PICTORIAL COMPARISON OF OPERATING MODES This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.2.3 Communications Media
InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to 8 commands over one communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most signalling channels are now digital schemes utilising multiplexed fibre optics and for this reason, InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using digital signalling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable devices to any communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232 output may alternatively be connected to a MODEM link. Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements of teleprotection commands are governed by an international standard IEC60834-1:1999 and InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this standard. This standard governs the speed requirements of the commands as well as the probability of unwanted commands being received (security) and the probability of missing commands (dependability). 9.10.2.4 General Features & Implementation InterMiCOM provides 8 commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the IM# Cmd Type cell. Blocking mode provides the fastest signalling speed (available on commands 1 4), Direct Intertrip mode provides the most secure signalling (available on commands 1 8) and Permissive mode provides the most dependable signalling (available on commands 5 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay. Since many applications will involve the commands being sent over a multiplexed communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is used. Both relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses that correspond with each other in the Source Address and Receive Address cells. For example, at the local end relay if we set the Source Address to 1, the Receive Address at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a Source Address set to 2, the Receive Address at the local end must also be set to 2. All four addresses must not be set identical in any given relay scheme if the possibility of incorrect signalling is to be avoided. It must be ensured that the presence of noise in the communications channel isnt interpreted as valid messages by the relay. For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described above, basic signal format checking and for Direct Intertrip commands an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is also performed. This CRC calculation is performed at both the sending and receiving end relay for each message and then compared in order to maximise the security of the Direct Intertrip commands. Most of the time the communications will perform adequately and the presence of the various checking algorithms in the message structure will ensure that InterMiCOM signals are processed correctly. However, careful consideration is also required for the periods of extreme noise pollution or the unlikely situation of total communications failure and how the relay should react. During periods of extreme noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message structure will be lost and it may become impossible to decode the full message accurately. During this noisy period, the last good command can be maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the IM# FallBackMode cell to Latched. Alternatively, if the synchronisation is lost for a period of time, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by setting the IM# FallBackMode cell to Default. In this latter case, the time period will need to be set in the IM# FrameSynTim cell and the default value will need to be set in IM# DefaultValue cell. As soon as a full valid message is seen by the relay all the timer periods are reset and the new valid command states are used. An alarm is provided if the noise on the channel becomes excessive. When there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line (see section 9.10.2.5).
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 70/82 9.10.2.5 Physical Connections
InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin D type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Acronym DCD RxD TxD DTR GND Not used RTS Not used Not used InterMiCOM Usage Data Carrier Detect is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4. Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. Signal Ground Ready To Send is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel. -
TABLE 2 : INTERMiCOM D9 PORT PIN-OUT CONNECTIONS Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below. 9.10.2.6 Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fiber used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM

DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND RTS
P1150ENa
DIRECT CONNECTION WITHIN THE LOCAL SUBSTATION This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.2.7 Modem Connection
For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.

DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RxD TxD GND
Communication Network

DCD RxD TxD GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND RTS
P1341ENa
INTERMiCOM TELEPROTECTION VIA A MODEM LINK This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. 9.10.3 Functional Assignment Even though settings are made on the relay to control the mode of the intertrip signals, it is necessary to assign interMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) if InterMiCOM is to be successfully implemented. Two icons are provided on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 for Integral tripping In and Integral tripping out which can be used to assign the 8 intertripping commands. The example shown below in figure 2 shows a Control Input_1 connected to the Intertrip O/P1 signal which would then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the Intertrip I/P1 signal could then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1 is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact, R1.
EXAMPLE ASSIGNMENT OF SIGNALS WITHIN THE PSL It should be noted that when an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands initiated at the remote end.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 72/82 9.10.4 InterMiCOM Settings
The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled INTERMICOM COMMS contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled INTERMICOM CONF selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following tables show the relay menus including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min INTERMICOM COMMS Source Address Receive Address Baud Rate Ch Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test pattern 1 2 9600 Invisible Invisible Disabled 11111111 1 1 10 10 1 1 Max Step Size
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 Invisible / Visible Invisible / Visible Disabled / Internal / External 00000000 11111111 -
TABLE 3 : INTERMiCOM GENERIC COMMUNICATIONS SET-UP
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min INTERMICOM CONF IM Msg Alarm Lvl IM1 Cmd Type IM1 Fallback Mode IM1 DefaultValue IM1 FrameSyncTim IM2 to IM4 IM5 Cmd Type IM5 Fallback Mode IM5 DefaultValue IM5 FrameSyncTim IM6 to IM8 25% Blocking Default 1 20ms 0% 100% Max
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 73/82 Step Size
1%
Disabled/ Blocking/ Direct Default/ Latched 0 10ms 1 1500ms 1 10ms
(Cells as for IM1 above) Direct Default 0 10ms Disabled/ Permissive/ Direct Default/ Latched 0 10ms 1 1500ms 1 10ms
(Cells as for IM5 above)
TABLE 4 : PROGRAMMING THE RESPONSE FOR EACH OF THE 8 INTERMiCOM SIGNALS
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 74/82 9.10.4.1 Setting Guidelines
The settings required for the InterMiCOM signalling are largely dependant upon whether a direct or indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used. Direct connections will either be short metallic or dedicated fiber optic based and hence can be set to have the highest signalling speed of 19200b/s. Due to this high signalling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type signals is so small that the most secure signalling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signalling requires the full checking of the message frame structure and CRC checks, it would seem prudent that the IM# Fallback Mode be set to Default with a minimal intentional delay by setting IM# FrameSyncTim to 10msecs. In other words, whenever two consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the relay will immediately revert to the default value until a new valid message is received. For indirect connections, the settings that should be applied will become more application and communication media dependent. As for the direct connections, it may be appealing to consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high baud rates may suffer from data jams during periods of interference and in the event of communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods. Both of these factors will reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9600b/s. It should be noted that as the baud rate decreases, the communications become more robust with fewer interruptions, but that overall signalling times will increase. Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signalling mode becomes significant. However, once the signalling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If Blocking mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal, which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message. In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Default with a reasonably long IM# FrameSyncTim. If Direct Intertrip mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Default with a minimum IM# FrameSyncTim setting i.e. whenever a nonvalid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. If Permissive mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the Blocking and Direct Intertrip modes. In this case, it is possible that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Latched. The table below highlights the recommended IM# FrameSyncTim settings for the different signalling modes and baud rates: Baud Rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Minimum Recommended IM# FrameSyncTim Setting Direct Intertrip Mode 100 50 30 20 10 10 Blocking Mode 250 130 70 40 20 10 100 50 30 20 10 10 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Minimum Setting Maximum Setting
TABLE 5 : RECOMMENDED FRAME SYNCHRONISM TIME SETTINGS
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 NOTA:
No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that Latched operation will be selected. However, if Default mode is selected, the IM# FrameSyncTim setting should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the IM# FrameSyncTim setting is set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the relay will monitor a correct change in message as a corrupted message. A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.
9.10.4.2
InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the Ch Statistics and/or Ch Diagnostics cells to Invisible. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the Reset Statistics cell.
9.10.5 9.10.5.1
TESTING InterMiCOM Teleprotection InterMiCOM Loopback Testing & Diagnostics A number of features are included within the InterMiCOM function to assist a user in commissioning and diagnosing any problems that may exist in the communications link. Loopback test facilities, located within the INTERMICOM COMMS column of the relay menu, provide a user with the ability to check the software and hardware of the InterMiCOM signalling. By selecting Loopback Mode to Internal, only the internal software of the relay is checked whereas External will check both the software and hardware used by InterMiCOM. In the latter case, it is necessary to connect the transmit and receive pins together (pins 2 and 3) and ensure that the DCD signal is held high (connect pin 1 and pin 4 together). When the relay is switched into Loopback Mode the relay will automatically use generic addresses and will inhibit the InterMiCOM messages to the PSL by setting all eight InterMiCOM message states to zero. The loopback mode will be indicated on the relay frontplate by the amber Alarm LED being illuminated and a LCD alarm message, IM Loopback.

DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P1343ENa
Connections for External Loopback mode Once the relay is switched into either of the Loopback modes, a test pattern can be entered in the Test Pattern cell which is then transmitted through the software and/or hardware. Providing all connections are correct and the software is working correctly, the Loopback Status cell will display OK. An unsuccessful test would be indicated by FAIL, whereas a hardware error will be indicated by UNAVAILABLE. Whilst the relay is in loopback test mode, the IM Output Status cell will only show the Test Pattern settings, whilst the IM Input Status cell will indicate that all inputs to the PSL have been forced to zero. Care should be taken to ensure that once the loopback testing is complete, the Loopback Mode is set to Disabled thereby switching the InterMiCOM channel back in to service. With the loopback mode disabled, the IM Output Status cell will show the InterMiCOM messages being sent from the local relay, whilst the IM Input Status cell will show the received InterMiCOM messages (received from the remote end relay) being used by the PSL.
Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column see section 10.2. It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the Ch Statistics and/or Ch Diagnostics cells to Invisible. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the Reset Statistics cell. Another indication of the amount of noise on the channel is provided by the communications failure alarm. Within a fixed 1.6 second time period the relay calculates the percentage of invalid messages received compared to the total number of messages that should have been received based upon the Baud Rate setting. If this percentage falls below the threshold set in the IM Msg Alarm Lvl cell, a Message Fail alarm will be raised. Settings The settings available in the INTERMiCOM COMMS menu column are as follows: Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status IM Input Status Source Address Receive Address Baud Rate Ch Statistics Reset Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test pattern 00000000 00000000 1 2 9600 Invisible No Invisible Disabled 11111111 1 1 10 10 1 1 Max Step Size
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 Invisible / Visible No / Yes Invisible / Visible Disabled / Internal / External 00000000 TABLE 6 11111111 -
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.5.2 InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics
Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column and are explained below: Ch Statistics Rx Direct Count Rx Perm Count Rx Block Count No. of Direct Tripping messages received with the correct message structure and valid CRC check. No. of Permissive Tripping messages received with the correct message structure. No. of Blocking messages received with the correct message structure.
Rx NewDataCount No. of different messages received. Rx ErroredCount Lost Messages Elapsed Time Ch Diagnostics Data CD Status Indicates when the DCD OK = DCD is energised line (pin 1) is energised. FAIL = DCD is de-energised Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present FrameSync Status Indicates when the OK = valid message structure and message structure and synchronisation synchronisation is valid. FAIL = synchronisation has been lost Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present Message Status Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the IM Msg Alarm Lvl setting within the alarm time period. OK = acceptable ratio of lost messages FAIL = unacceptable ratio of lost messages Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present No. of incomplete or incorrectly formatted messages received. No. of messages lost within the previous time period set in Alarm Window cell. Time in seconds since the InterMiCOM channel statistics were reset.
Channel Status
Indicates the state of the OK = channel healthy InterMiCOM FAIL = channel failure communication channel. Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present
IM H/W Status
Indicates the state of the OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy InterMiCOM hardware. Read Error = InterMiCOM hardware failure Write Error = InterMiCOM hardware failure
Absent = InterMiCOM board is either not fitted or failed to initialise TABLE 7 It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the Ch Statistics and/or Ch Diagnostics cells to Invisible. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the Reset Statistics cell.
BLANK PAGE
TECHNICAL DATA (P44X/EN TD/E33)
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.3 Protection accuracy Earth Fault Measuring Element (IN>1 IN>2 IN>3 IN>4) Thermal Overload Accuracy
Pick-up Thermal alarm Thermal overload Cooling time accuracy Repeatability Calculated trip time 10%* Calculated trip time 10%* 15% of theoretical <5%
* Operating time measured with applied current of 20% above thermal setting.
BLANK PAGE
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN IT/E33
INTRODUCTION
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 1/24
CONTENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 3.7 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.9
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
Introduction to the relay Front panel Relay rear panel Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Menu structure Protection settings Disturbance recorder settings Control and support settings Password protection Relay configuration Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) Default display and menu time-out Menu navigation and setting browsing Password entry Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records Setting changes Front communication port user interface Rear communication port user interface Courier communication Modbus communication IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication DNP 3.0 Communication Second rear Communication Port
3 4 5
5 5 6 9 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 14 14 14 15 15 16 18 18 20 21 22 23
BLANK PAGE
1.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D Protection and Control. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: P range protection relays; C range control products; M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring; S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.areva-td.com
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application. The technical manual include the previous technical documentation, as follows: Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system. Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the relay. The chapter content within the technical manual is summarised below: Safety Guide P44x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using the relay. P44x/EN HW Relay Description Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This chapter includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P44x/EN AP Application Notes (includes a copy of publication P440/EN BR/Eb) Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P44x/EN TD Technical Data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommendedoperating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where appropriate. P44x/EN IN Installation Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating earthing recommendations. P44x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on thecalibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. P44x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to the relay. P44x/EN GC Relay Menu Database User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Default Programmable Scheme Logic P44x/EN HI P44x/EN VC Repair Form Menu Content Tables Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
3.
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get started using the relay.
3.1 3.1.1
Introduction to the relay Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
Serial N and I*, V Ratings Top cover
SER N o DIAG N o
Zn Vx Vn
1/5 A 50/60 Hz
V V
LCD
TRIP
Fixed function LEDs
ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER
User programable function LEDs
Keypad
SK 1 SK 2
Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

P0103ENa
FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in figure 1: a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys ( !, ", # and $), an enter key (%), a clear key (!), and a read key (&). 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. Under the top hinged cover: the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*. Under the bottom hinged cover: battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records. a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection. a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. 3.1.2 Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in figure 2. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port which are both optional.
Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks B & E)
Power supply connection (Terminal block F)
Rear comms port (RS485)
Current and voltage Digital input input terminals (Terminal block C) connections (Terminal block D)
P3023ENa
FIGURE 2A - RELAY REAR VIEW 40TE CASE

Optional IRIG-B board (Terminal Block A)
A B C D
Digital output (relays) connections (Terminal blocks F & H)

E F G
Power supply connection (TB J)

H J
IRIG -B
TX RX
Optional fibre optic connection (Terminal block A)
Current and voltage input terminals (Terminal block C)
Digital input connections (Terminal blocks D & E)
Rear comms port (RS485) (TB J)

P3024ENa
FIGURE 2B - RELAY REAR VIEW 60 TE
Optional IRIG-B board
Programmable digital outputs (relays) connections (Terminal blocks J, K, L & M)

C
1
Power supply connection (Terminal block N)

H
1
B
1 2
D
1
19
E
1
J
1
K
1
L
1
20
IRIG-B
6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 8 9 21
7 8 9
7 8 9
8 9
10
11
12
22
10
10 10
11 10 10
10
11 10
10 10
10
10
11 11 13 13
11
11
11
11
11
12
13 12 12
12 12
12
13 12
12
12 12
12
13
13
13
14
15
23
13
13
13
TX RX
16 17 18 24
14
15 14 14
14 14
14
14
15 14
14 14
14 14
15 15 17 17
15
15
15
15
15
Optional fibre optic connection IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW)
Programmable 1A/5A Rear comms port digital input Current and voltage (RS485) connections input terminals (Terminal block C) (Terminal blocks D, E & F) P3025ENa
FIGURE 2C - RELAY REAR VIEW 80 TE
Refer to the wiring diagram in chapter P44x/EN CO for complete connection details. (for 2nd rear port in model 42 or 44)
16 18
17 16 16
16
17 16
16 16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
18 18
18 18
18
18
18
18
18 18
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces: the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad. the front port which supports Courier communication.
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three interfaces are summarised in Table 1. Keypad /LCD Display & modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault records Time synchronisation Control commands Courier Modbus IEC870-5- DNP3.0 103

TABLE 1
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 10/24 3.3 Menu structure
The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in figure 3, the top row of each column contains the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual.
Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data
View records
Overcurrent
Earth fault
Column data settings
Control & support
Group 1 Repeated for Groups 2, 3, 4

P4003ENa
FIGURE 3 - MENU STRUCTURE All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings, disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at the same time.
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.3.1 Protection settings The protection settings include the following items: protection element settings scheme logic settings
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)* fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is used by the protection elements. 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position, selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger the recording. 3.3.3 Control and support settings The control and support settings include: relay configuration settings open/close circuit breaker* CT & VT ratio settings* reset LEDs active protection setting group password & language settings circuit breaker control & monitoring settings* communications settings measurement settings event & fault record settings user interface settings commissioning settings
may vary according to relay type/model
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 12/24 3.4 Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in Table 2. Access level Level 0 No password required Level 1 Password 1 or 2 Operations enabled Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. Password 2 required All other settings. TABLE 2 Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact AREVA with the relays serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options. The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the Password control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled. The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation.
Level 2 As level 1 plus:
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station. 3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. The ', (, ", # and $ keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
System frequency
Other default displays
3-phase voltage Alarm messages
Date and time
C C
Column 1 System data
Column 2 View records
Column n Group 4 Overcurrent
Data 1.1 Language
Data 2.1 Last record
C
Note: The C key will return to column header from any menu cell
Data n.1 I>1 function
Data 1.2 Password
Data 2.2 Time and date
Data n.2 I>1 directional
Other setting cells in column 1 Data 1.n Password level 2
Other setting cells in column 2 Data 2.n C - A voltage
Other setting cells in column n Data n.n I> char angle

P0105ENa
FIGURE 4 - FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 14/24 3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out
The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the ! and " keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message. 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the # key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the ( and " keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the $ and # keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key !. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the # key or the clear key ! from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the # key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the # key must be released and pressed again. 3.6.3 Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 NOTE: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the # and $ keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the ( and " keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key %. The display will revert to Enter Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key !. Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell of the System data column. For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key ! instead of entering a password.
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key &. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the & key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press !; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press &. Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the & key, the ! key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing ! again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing ! once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.5 Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key % which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or " keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the ' and " keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing %. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button ! is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given: Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing % will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing ! will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without Update settings? prompt.
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 16/24 3.7 Front communication port user interface
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK 2
25 pin download/monitor port
Battery
9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)
Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2)

P0107ENa
FIGURE 5 - FRONT PORT CONNECTION The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Transmit data Rx Receive data 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way Pin no. Pin no. Pin no. 3 2 7 9 Way 2 Rx Receive data 3 Tx Transmit data 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.
PC
MiCOM relay
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
DTE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ENa
FIGURE 6 - PC RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol Baud rate Courier address Message format Courier 19,200 bits/s 1 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked.
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 18/24 3.8 Rear communication port user interface
The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides KBus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port. 3.8.1 Courier communication Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information. A typical connection arrangement is shown in figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.

Twisted pair 'K-Bus' RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232 PC
K-Bus
PC serial port
KITZ protocol converter
Modem
Public switched telephone network
Courier master station eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station eg. area control center
P0109ENa
FIGURE 7 - REMOTE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION ARRANGEMENTS Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay: Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins
The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements: Measuret period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre optic. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group. Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications protocol: Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay: DNP 3.0 address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s
DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay 1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s, 9600bits/s, 19200bits/s and 38400bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by the relay: Time Synch Enabled The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.9 Second rear Communication Port For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port, (P442 and P444 only) which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of this chapter. Move down the settings unit the following sub heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration. RP2 Port Config EIA232 The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2
The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. The next cell down controls the comms port address. RP2 Address 255 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses a integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then use by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any massages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate. For KBus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN HW/E33
RELAY DESCRIPTION
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 1/44
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5

Hardware overview Power supply module Main processor board Co-processor board Input module Input and output boards IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) Software overview Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Protection & control software Disturbance Recorder
5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.7 2.8
HARDWARE MODULES
Processor board Co-processor board Internal communication buses Input module Transformer board Input board Universal opto isolated logic inputs Power supply module (including output relays) Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) Output relay board IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) 2nd rear communication and InterMiCOM teleprotection board (optional) Mechanical layout
8
8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 11 11 11 11 12
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3
RELAY SOFTWARE
Real-time operating system System services software Platform software Record logging Settings database Database interface
13
13 13 14 14 14 14
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 2/44 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 Protection and control software Overview - protection and control scheduling Signal processing Programmable scheme logic Event and Fault Recording Disturbance recorder Fault locator
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 14 15 15 16 16 16 16
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.8
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS
Distance and Resistance Measurement Phase-to-earth loop impedance
17
17 19
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage).20 Phase-to-phase loop impedance "Deltas" Algorithms Fault Modelling Detecting a Transition Confirmation Directional Decision Phase Selection Summary "Conventional" Algorithms Convergence Analysis Start-Up Phase Selection Directional Decision Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose) Faulted Zone Decision Tripping Logic Fault Locator Selecting the fault location data Processing algorithms Power swing detection Power swing detection Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip) Conditions for isolating lines Tripping logic Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (one-pole-open condition) Double Circuit Lines 20 21 21 23 26 26 27 27 28 29 29 30 31 31 32 33 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 37 38 38
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults High Resistance Ground Fault Detection Directional determination Phase selection Tripping Logic SBEF Stand-By earth fault (not communication-aided)
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 3/44 40 40 40 40 41 42
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

Start-up self-testing System boot Initialisation software Platform software initialisation & monitoring Continuous self-testing
43
43 43 43 44 44
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1

Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the users requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1
Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains relays which provide the output contacts.
1.1.2
Main processor board The processor board performs most of the calculations for the relay (fixed and programmable scheme logic, protection functions other than distance protection) and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).
1.1.3
Co-processor board The co-processor board manages the acquisition of analogue quantities, filters them and calculates the thresholds used by the protection functions. It also processes the distance algorithms.
1.1.4
Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for the co-processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.5
Input and output boards P441 Opto-inputs Relay outputs 8 x UNI(1) 6 N/O 8 C/O P442 16 x UNI(1) 9 N/O 12 C/O P444 24 x UNI(1) 24 N/O 8 C/O N/O normally open C/O change over
Universal voltage range opto inputs
1.1.6
IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them.
Alarm, event, fault, disturbance & maintenance record
Present values of all settings
CPU code & data, setting database data
Default settings & parameters, language text, software code
Battery backed-up SRAM
EPROM
SRAM
Flash EPROM
Front LCD panel
RS232 Front comms port CPU
Parallel test port LEDs Main processor board
Timing data IRIG-B signal IRIG-B board optional Fibre optic rear comms port optional
Comms between main & coprocessor boards
CPU code & data
FPGA
SRAM
CPU
Serial data bus (sample data)
Coprocessor board
Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status

Output relay contacts (x14 or x21 or x32)
Parallel data bus Digital input values

Digital inputs (x8 or x16 or x24)
P3026ENb
Output relays
Relay board
ADC
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Power supply board
Transformer board
Power supply
Watchdog contacts
Field voltage
Rear RS485 communication port
Current & voltage inputs (6 to 8)
FIGURE 1 - RELAY MODULES AND INFORMATION FLOW
Opto-isolated inputs
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2 Software overview
The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here: 1.2.1 Real-time operating system The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relays software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages. 1.2.2 System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relays software from the nonvolatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relays hardware and the rest of the relay software. 1.2.3 Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all setting changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software. 1.2.4 Protection & control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital optoisolated inputs. 1.2.5 Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.
2.
HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1
Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs. The processor board is located directly behind the relays front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processors calculations. The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values.
2.2
Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the current differential protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at poweron to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processors built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. The co-processor board also handles all communication with the remote differential relay(s). This is achieved via optical fibre communications and hence the co-processor board holds the optical modules to transmit and receive data over the fibre links. From software version B1.0, coprocessor board woks at 150Mhz.
2.3
Internal communication buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.4 Input module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consist of two PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P441, P442 and P444 relays provide three voltage inputs and four current inputs. They also provide an additional voltage input for the check sync function. 2.4.1 Transformer board The transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the nominal voltage input is 110V. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relays electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise. 2.4.2 Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry. 2.4.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs The P441, P442 and P444 relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages 80% of the set voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages 60% of the set voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. (See also section 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP for the hysteresis values of universal optos).
Up to 5 current inputs
Up to 5
3/4 voltage inputs

CT VT VT
4
CT
Diffn to single Low pass filter
Transformer board Input board

4 Anti-alias filters
Diffn to single Diffn to single
Up to 5 Up to 5 Sample control Calibration EPROM Parallel bus Trigger from processor board Serial sample data bus Buffer
16:1 Multiplexer
Optical isolator Noise filter
FIGURE 2 - MAIN INPUT BOARD The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relays electronics from the power system environment. A 48V field voltage supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. 2.5 Power supply module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface.
Diffn to single Low pass filter
Low pass filter
Low pass filter
8 digital inputs
16-bit ADC Serial Interface Noise filter
Optical isolator
Parallel bus
Buffer
P3027ENa
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.5.1 Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)
One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below. Nominal dc range 24 48V 48 110V 110 250V Nominal ac range dc only 30 100V rms 100 240V rms TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs. The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485 interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.5.2 Output relay board The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model seven additional output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards. 2.6 IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only). 2.7 2nd rear communication and InterMiCOM teleprotection board (optional) On ordring this board within a relay, both 2nd rear communications K-Bus and InterMiCOM (available in next version C1.0) will become connection and settings options. The user may then either one, or both, as demanded by the installation. SK4 : The second rear communications port runs the courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links : twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pai EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.
SK4 : The InterMiCOM board (available with next version C1.0) is used to connect to an EIA(RS)232 link, allowing up to eight programmable signalling bits to be transferred from/to the remote line end relay. A suitable EIA(RS)232 link must exist between the two line ends, for example a MODEM, or via a compatible multiplexer (check compatibility before ordering the relay). The second rear comms/InterMiCOM board, and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available ; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. (See also the Cortec code in P44x/EN BR). 2.8 Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
3.
RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: the real-time operating system the system services software the platform software the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software.
Protection & Control Software Disturbance recorder task Programables & fixed scheme logic Protection task Platform Software Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging Remote communications interface CEI 60870-5-103
Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records
Fourier signal processing
Protection algorithms
Protection & control settings
Supervisor task Settings database Remote communications interface - Modbus
Sampling function copies samples into 2 cycle buffer
Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs
Front panel interface - LCD & keypad
Local & Remote communications interface - Courier
Sample data & digital logic input
Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records System services software
Relay hardware
P0128ENa
FIGURE 3 - RELAY SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 3.1 Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages. 3.2 System services software As shown in figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 14/44 3.3 Platform software The platform software has three main functions:
to control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records. to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile memory. to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103).
3.3.1
Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this chapter.
3.3.2
Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform softwares management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a scratchpad in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM. (See also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3
Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relays user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
3.4
Protection and control software The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling
After initialisation at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a sampling function which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection and control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P140 feeder protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place. 3.4.2 Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection and control software.
12 Samples per Cycle
Transformation & Low Pass Filter
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
A-D DFT
Converter 24 Samples per Cycle
LOW PASS FILTER
ONE-SAMPLE DELAY
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
If
FIR DERIVATOR
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
I'f
Transformation & Low Pass Filter
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
LOW PASS FILTER
ONE-SAMPLE DELAY
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
FIR = Impulse Finite Response Filter

P3029ENa
FIGURE 4 - SIGNAL ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signals phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection and control task. When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 16/44 3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic
The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection and control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support MiCOM S1. 3.4.4 Event and Fault Recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an event record to be created. When this happens, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisors buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information. 3.4.5 Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. 3.4.6 Fault locator The fault locator task is also separate from the protection and control task. The fault locator is invoked by the protection and control task when a fault is detected. The fault locator uses a 12-cycle buffer of the analogue input signals and returns the calculated location of the fault to the protection and control task wich includes it in the fault record for the fault. When the fault record is complete (i.e. includes the fault location), the protection and control task can send a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record.
4.
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS
The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: "Deltas" algorithms using the superimposed current and voltage values that are characteristic of a fault. These are used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms using Gauss-Seidel. "Conventional" algorithms using the impedance values measured while the fault occurs. These are also used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms." Using Gauss-Seidel.
The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. 4.1 Distance and Resistance Measurement MiCOM P44x distance protection is a full scheme distance relay. To measure the distance and apparent resistance of a fault, the following equation is solved on the loop with a fault:
I
IL
Z SL
Relay
(n).ZL
(1-n).ZL
Relay
Z SR
VL RF
I F = I + I'
VR
Local Source
Remote Source
V L = (ZL x I x D)+ RF x IF = ((r +jx) x I x D) +RF x IF

V L = local terminal relay voltage r = line resistance (ohm/mile) x = line reactance (ohm/mile) IF = current flowing in the fault (I + I') I = current measured by the relay on the faulty phase = current flowing into the fault from local terminal I' = current flowing into the fault from remote terminal D = fault location (permile or km from relay to the fault) R = fault resistance R F = apparent fault resistance at relay; R x (1 + I'/I)
where
Assumed Fault Currents: For Phase to Ground Faults (ex., A-N), IF = 3 I0 for 40ms, then IA after 40 ms For Phase to Phase Faults (ex., A-B), IF =IAB
P3030ENa
FIGURE 5 - DISTANCE AND FAULT RESISTANCE ESTIMATION The impedance measurements are used by High Speed and Conventional Algorithms.
The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D fault distance and R fault resistance). The line model used will be the 33 matrix of the line impedance (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases.
Raa + j Laa Rab + j Lab Rac + j Lac

Where:
Rab + j Lab Rbb + j Lbb Rbc + j Lbc
Rac + j Lac Rbc + j Lbc Rcc + j Lcc
Raa=Rbb=Rcc and Rab=Rbc=Rac
Laa = Lbb = Lcc =

and
2. X 1 + X 0 3 and
Lab = Lbc = Lac =
X 0 X1 3
X1 : positive sequence reactance X0 : zero-sequence reactance The line model is obtained from the positive and zero-sequence impedance. The use of four different residual compensation factor settings is permitted on the relay, as follows: kZ1: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 1 and 1X. kZ2: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone 2. kZp: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone p. kZ3/4: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 3 and 4. The solutions "Dfault " and "Rfault " are obtained by solving the system of equations (one equation per step of the calculation) using the Gauss Seidel method.
(VL.Ifault ) Dfault.( n 1). (Z 1.IL.IFault )

n0 n0
R fault (n) =
(I
n0
fault
)
n
(V
n0
L.
Z 1. IL ) Rfault.( n 1). ( Z 1. IL.IFault )

n0
Dfault (n) =
(Z .I )
1 L n0
Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (12 samples per cycle). With IL equal to I+k0.3 x I0 for phase-to-earth loop or IL equal to I for phase-to-phase loop.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1 Phase-to-earth loop impedance
Zs i C Zs iB Zs iA VCN VBN VAN
Z1 Z1 Z1
X / Phase
R Fault / (1+k 0)
Z1 Z Fault
kS ZS VA VB VC k0 Z1 Location of Distance Relay
RFault
R / Phase
P3031ENa
FIGURE 6 - PHASE-TO-EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-earth loop is : VN = Z1 x Dfault x (I + kO x 3 I0) + Rfault x Ifault with = phase A, B or C The model for the current IF circulating in the fault is (3 x I0) during the first 40 ms and then I. The (3 x I0) current is used for the first 40 milliseconds to model the fault current, thus eliminating the load current before the circuit breakers are operated during the 40ms (one pole tripping). After the 40ms, the phase current is used. VAN = Z1.Dfault.(IA+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault VBN = Z1.Dfault.(IB+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault VCN = Z1.Dfault.(IC+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault x 4 kO residual compensation factors = 12 phase-to-earth loops are continuously monitored and computed for each samples.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 20/44 VN = Z1.Dfault.(I + k0.3I0) + Rfault.Ifault VN = Z1.Dfault.(I + Z0Z1 .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3 R0R1 + j.(X0X1) .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3.(R1-jX1)
VN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.(I + VN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.I + VN = R1.Dfault.I + VN = R1.Dfault.I + VAN = R1.Dfault.IA + VAN = R1.Dfault.IA + VAN = R1.Dfault.IA + VBN = R1.Dfault.IB + VCN = R1.Dfault.IC + 4.1.2
R0R1 + j.(X0X1) .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3
R0R1 j.(X0X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.I + .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3 3 R0R1 j.(X0X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.I + .Dfault.(IA+IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3 R0R1 j.(X0+2.X1) j.(X0X1) .Dfault.3I0 + .Dfault.IA + .Dfault.(IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3 3 R0R1 (X +2.X1) dI (X X ) dI (X X ) dI .Dfault.3I0 + 0 .Dfault. A + 0 1 .Dfault. B + 0 1 .Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt 3 3 3 R0R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAA.Dfault. A + LAB.Dfault. B + LAC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt R0R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAB.Dfault. A + LBB.Dfault. B + LBC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt R0R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAC.Dfault. A + LBC.Dfault. B + LCC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter.
4.1.3
Phase-to-phase loop impedance
Zs i C Zs iB
Z1
X / Phase Z1
R Fault/ 2
Z1 Z1 RFault
Z Fault
Zs iA VCN VBN V AN
VC Location of Distance Relay
R / Phase
P3032ENa
FIGURE 7 - PHASE-TO-PHASE LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-phase loop is : V = ZL x Dfault x I + Rfault /2 x Ifault with = phase AB, BC or CA
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 The model for the current Ifault circulating in the fault I. VAB = 2Z1.Dfault.IAB + Rfault.Ifault VBC = 2Z1.Dfault.IBC + Rfault.Ifault VCA = 2Z1.Dfault.ICA + Rfault.Ifault
= 3 phase-to-phase loops are continuously monitored and computed for each sample. V = 2Z1.Dfault.I + Rfault.Ifault V = 2(R1 + j. X1).Dfault.I + Rfault.Ifault V = 2R1.Dfault.I + 2j. X1.Dfault.I + Rfault.Ifault V = 2R1.Dfault.I + 2X1.Dfault. dI + Rfault.Ifault dt dIA dI dI R + (LABLBB).Dfault. B + (LACLBC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2 dIA dI dI R + (LBBLBC).Dfault. B + (LBCLCC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2 dIA dI dI R + (LBCLAB).Dfault. B + (LCCLAC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2
VAB = R1.Dfault.(IA IB) + (LAALAB).Dfault.
VBC = R1.Dfault.(IB IC) + (LABLAC).Dfault.
VCA = R1.Dfault.(IC IA) + (LACLAA).Dfault.
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter. 4.2 "Deltas" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions: Detection of the fault By comparing the superimposed values to a threshold which is low enough to be crossed when a fault occurs and high enough not to be crossed during normal switching outside of the protected zones. Establishing the fault direction Only a fault can generate superimposed values; therefore, it is possible to determine direction by measuring the transit direction of the superimposed energy. Phase selection As the superimposed values no longer include the load currents, it is possible to make highspeed phase selection. 4.2.1 Fault Modelling Consider a stable network status-the steady-state load flow prior to any start. When a fault occurs, a new network is established. If there is no other modification, the differences between the two networks (before and after the fault) are caused by the fault. The network after the fault is equivalent to the sum of the values of the status before the fault and the values characteristic of the fault. The fault acts as a source for the latter, and the sources act as passive impedance in this case.

VR
R

IR
F R
VR ZL ZL
Relay
IR
F
ZS
Relay
ZR
V F (prefault voltage) V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location
Unfaulted Network (steady state prefault conditions)

VR'
R
I R'
F R
VR' ZL ZL
Relay
I R'
F
ZS
Relay
ZR
V R ' = Voltage at Relay Location I R ' = Current at Relay Location
RF
Faulted Network (steady state)

VR
R
IR
F R
VR ZL ZL
Relay
IR
F
ZS
Relay
ZR
-V F V R= Voltage at Relay Location I R= Current at Relay Location RF
Fault Inception
P3033ENa
FIGURE 8 - PRE, FAULT AND FAULT INCEPTION VALUE Network Status Monitoring The network status is monitored continuously to determine whether the "Deltas" algorithms may be used. To do so, the network must be "healthy," which is characterised by the following: The circuit breaker(s) should be closed just prior to fault inception (2 cycles of healthy pre-fault data should be stored) the line is energised from one or both ends, The source characteristics should not change noticeably (there is no power swing or out-of-step detected). Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (24 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz).
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 No fault is detected :
all nominal phase voltages are between 70% and 130% of the nominal value. the residual voltage (3.V0) is less than 10% of the nominal value the residual current (3.I0) is less than 10% of the nominal value + 3.3% of the maximum load current flowing on the line
The measured loop impedance are outside the characteristic, when these requirements are fulfilled, the superimposed values are used to determine the fault inception (start), faulty phase selection and fault direction. The network is then said to be "healthy" before the fault occurrence. 4.2.2 Detecting a Transition In order to detect a transition, the MiCOM P441, P442 and P444 compares sampled current and voltage values at the instant "t" with the values predicted from those stored in the memory one period and two periods earlier.
2T
G = Current or Voltage
G(t)
G(t-2T)
G(t-T) Gp(t)
Time
t-2T t-T t
P3034ENa
FIGURE 9 - TRANSITION DETECTION Gp(t) = 2G(t-T) - G(t-2T) where Gp(t) are the predicted values of either the sampled current or voltage A transition is detected on one of the current or voltage input values if the absolute value of (G(t) - Gp(t)) exceeds a threshold of 0.2 x IN (nominal current) or 0.1 x UN / 3 = 0.1x VN (nominal voltage) With: U = line-to-line voltage V = line-to-ground voltage = U / 3 G(t) = G(t) - Gp(t) is the transition value of the reading G. The high-speed algorithms will be started if U OR I is detected on one sample.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 24/44 Example: isolated AC fault
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 26/44 4.2.3 Confirmation
In order to eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of three sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop for which the two following conditions are met: and I > threshold l, where threshold I= 0.2 In. V > threshold V, where threshold V = 0.1 Un /3 = 0.1 Vn
The start-up of the high-speed algorithms will be confirmed if U AND I are detected on three consecutive samples. 4.2.4 Directional Decision The "Delta" detection of the fault direction is determined from the sign of the energy per Phase for the transition values characterising the fault.
VR IR
F
ZS
Relay
ZL
ZL
ZR
-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location RF
Forward Fault
VR IR
R
ZS
ZL
ZL
Relay
ZR
-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location RF
Reverse Fault
P3035ENa
FIGURE 10 - DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SUPERIMPOSED VALUES To do this, the following sum per phase is calculated:
SA =
ni n 0 + 5
n0
(VANi . IA i )
SB =
ni n 0 + 5
n0
(VBNi . IB i )
SC =
ni n 0 + 5 n0
(V
CNi
. ICi )
Where no is the instant at which the fault is detected, ni is the instant of the calculation and S is the calculated transition energy. If the fault is in the forward direction, then S i <0 (i = A, B or C phase). If the fault is in the reverse direction, then S i >0. The directional criterion is valid if S >5 x (10% x Vn x 20% x In x cos (85 ) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. RCA angle of the delta algorithms is equal to 60 (-30) if the protected line is not serie compensated (else RCA is equal to 0).
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.5 Phase Selection
Phase selection is made on the basis of a comparison between the transition values for the derivatives of currents IA, IB and IC:
I'A, I'B, I'C, I'AB, I'BC, I'CA

NOTE: Hence: The derivatives of the currents are used to eliminate the effects of the DC current component.
SAN =
ni n 0 + 4 n0
(I ' A i )
SAB =
ni n 0 + 4 n0
(I '
ABi
SBN =
ni n 0 + 4 n0
(I ' Bi ) (I ' C i )
n0
SBC =
ni n 0 + 4 n0
(I ' (I '
n0
BC i
SCN =
ni n 0 + 4
SCA =
ni n 0 + 4
CAi
The phase selection is valid if the sum (SAB+SBC+SCA) is higher than a threshold. This sum is not valid if the positive sequence impedance on the source side is far higher than the zero sequence impedance. In this case, the conventional algorithms are used to select the faulted phase(s). Sums on one-phase and two-phase loops are performed. The relative magnitudes of these sums determine the faulted phase(s). For examples, assume : If SAB<SBC<SCA and If SAB<<SBC, the fault has had little effect on the loop A to B. If SAN<SBN<SCN , the fault declared as single phase fault C. If the fault is not detected as single-phase by the previous criterion, the fault conditions are multi-phase. If SAN<SBN<SCN and If SAB<<SBC, the fault is B to C. If SAN<SBN<SCN and If SABSBCSCA and if SANSBNSCN, the fault is three-phase (the fault occurs on the three phases). 4.2.6 Summary A transition is detected if I > 20% x In or V >10% x Vn Then three tasks are starting in parallel: Fault confirmation : I and V Faulty phase selection Fault directional decision (3 consecutive samples) (4 consecutive samples) (5 consecutive samples)
Confirmation Phase selection Start Directional decision
P3036ENa
FIGURE 11 - DELTAS ALGORITHMS High speed algorithms are used only during the first 2 cycles following a fault detection. 4.3 "Conventional" Algorithms These algorithms do not use the superimposed values but use the impedance values measured under fault conditions. They are based on fault distance and resistance measurements. They are used in the following circumstances: The condition before the fault could not be modelled. The superimposed values are not exclusively generated by the fault.
This may be true if the following occurs: A breaker closing occurs during a fault. By SOTF, only the Conventional Algorithms can be used as there are not 2 cycles of healthy network stored. The fault is not recent and so the operating conditions of the generators have changed, or corrective action has been taken, i.e., opening the circuit breakers. This occurs generally after the first trip. High Speed algorithms are used only during the first 2 cycles after the fault detection. operating conditions are not linear.
The conventional algorithms are also suited to detect low current faults that do not have the required changes in current and voltage for the "high-speed" (superimposed) algorithms. Therefore, their use assures improved coverage. The "Conventional" algorithms run continuously with "high-speed" algorithms. If the "high speed" algorithms cannot declare faulted phase(s) and direction, the conventional algorithms will. NOTE: The distance measurement of the fault is taken on the loop selected by the "high-speed" or "conventional" phase selection algorithms. This measurement uses the fault values.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.3.1 Convergence Analysis
This analysis is based on the measurements of distance and resistance of the fault. These measurements are taken on each single-phase and two-phase loops. They determine the convergence of these loops within a parallelogram-shaped, start-up characteristic.
D
L = line length in km or mile s D3 = Z3/Zd x L = X3 D4 = Zd x L = X4
Dlim
= X3
For multi phase fault : = argument of Z1 (positive sequenceimpedance) For single phase fault :
= argument of (2Z 1 + Z 01 )/3 1 for zone 1 2 = argument of (2Z 1 + Z 02)/3 for zone 2, etc...
d -R lim -D = X4 lim
P3037ENa
lim
FIGURE 12 - START-UP CHARACTERISTIC Let Rlim and Dlim be the limits of the starting characteristic. The pair of solutions (Dfault (n-1), Rfault (n-1)) and (D fault (n), R fault (n)): Rfault (n-1)< Rlim, and Rfault (n)< Rlim, and Rfault (n-1) - Rfault (n)< 10% x Rlim Dfault (n-1)< Dlim and Dfault (n) < Dlim and Dfault (n-1) - Dfault (n) < 10% x Dlim
with Rlim being the resistance limit for the single and multi phase faults. This convergence is dependent on the equations not being collinear thus allowing the terms in Dfault and Rfault to be discriminated. Theoretically, zone limits are Z3, Z4, +/- R3G-R4G or +/- R3Ph-R4Ph, if zones 3 and 4 are enabled. The slope of the characteristic mimics the characteristic of the line. To model the fault current: Two-phase loops: the values (IA - IB), (IB - IC), or (IC - IA) are used. Single-phase loops: (IA+ k0.3 x I0), (IB + k0.3 x I0), or (IC + k0.3 x I0) are used.
The results of these algorithms are mainly used as a backup; therefore, the circuit breaker located at the other end is assumed to be open. 4.3.2 Start-Up Start-up is initiated when at least one of the six measuring loops converges within the characteristic (ZAN, ZBN, ZCN, ZAB, ZBC, ZCA).
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 30/44 4.3.3 Phase Selection
If the fault currents are high enough with respect to the maximum load currents currentbased phase selection is used; if not, impedance-based phase selection is required. Current Phase Selection Amplitudes I'A, I'B, I'C are derived from the measured three-phase currents IA, IB, IC. These values are then compared to each other and to the two thresholds S1 and S2: First threshold is S1= 3 x I'N Second threshold is S2 = 5 x I' N
Example: If I'A< I'B < I' C: If I'C > S2 and I'A > S1, the fault is three-phase. If I'C > S2, I'B > S1 and I'A < S1, the fault is two-phase, on phases B and C. If I'C > S2 and I'B < S1, the fault is single-phase, on phase C. If I'C < S2, the current phase selection cannot be used. Impedance phase selection should then be used.
Impedance Phase Selection Impedance phase selection is obtained by checking the convergence of the various measuring loops within the start-up characteristic, as follows: T ZAN ZBN ZCN ZAB ZBC ZCA = Presence of zero-sequence voltage or current(Logical Information : 0 or 1). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop A (Logical Information). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop B (Logical Information). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop C (Logical Information). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop AB (Logical Information). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop BC (Logical Information). = Convergence within the characteristic of the loop CA (Logical Information).
In addition, the following are also defined: RAN = ZAN x ZBC RBN = ZBN x ZCA RCN = ZCN x ZAB RAB = ZAB x ZCN RBC = ZBC x ZAN RCA = ZCA x ZBN with ZBC = convergence within the characteristic of the loop BC (Logical Information). with ZCA = convergence within the characteristic of the loop CA (Logical Information). with ZAB = convergence within the characteristic of the loop AB (Logical Information). with ZCN = convergence within the characteristic of the loop C (Logical Information). with ZAN = convergence within the characteristic of the loop A (Logical Information). with ZBN= convergence within the characteristic of the loop B (Logical Information).
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Following are the different phase selections: SAN = T x RAN x RBN x RCN SBN = T x RBN x RAN x RCN SCN = T x RCN x RBN x RCN SABN = T x RAB x ZAN x ZBN SBCN = T x RBC x ZBN x ZCN SCAN = T x RCA x ZAN x ZCN SAB = T x RAB x RBC x RCA BC = T x RBC x RAB x RCA CA = T x RCA x RAB x RBC SABC = ZAN x ZBN x ZCN x ZAB x ZBC x ZCA
single-phase A to ground fault single-phase B to ground fault single-phase C to ground fault double-phase A to B to ground fault double-phase B to C to ground fault double-phase C to A to ground fault double-phase A to B fault double-phase B to C fault double-phase B to C fault three-phase fault
For a three-phase fault, the fault resistance of one of the two-phase loops is less than half of the fault resistances of the other two-phase loops, it will be used for the directional and distance measuring function. If not, the loop AB will be used. NOTE: 4.3.4 Directional Decision The fault direction is defined on the basis of the calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the derivative of a current. The current and the voltage used are those of the measuring loop(s) defined by the phase selection. For the two-phase loops, the calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the derivative of the current on the faulty two-phases. For the single-phase loops, the calculation of the phase shift between the stored voltage and the current (I'x + k0 . 3 x I'0), where: I'x 3 x I0 k0 = derivative of current on the faulted single-phase where x = A, B, or C = derivative of residual current = ground compensation factor, where for example k01 = (Z0Z1)/3Z1 Impedance phase selection is used only if current phase selection is unable to make a decision.
The directional angle is fixed between-30 and +150 (RCA =60). 4.3.5 Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose) The directional information is calculated from the stored voltage values if the network is detected as healthy. The calculations vary depending on the type of fault, i.e., single-phase or multiphase. If the network frequency cannot be measured and tracked, the directional element cannot be calculated from the stored voltage. A zero sequence directional will be calculated if there are enough zero-sequence voltage and current. If the zero-sequence directional is not valid, a negative-sequence directional will be calculated if there are enough negative sequence voltage and current. If both directional cannot be calculated, the directional element will be forced forward.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 32/44 Single-phase fault
The reference voltage is stored in memory when the fault appears. When the fault is eliminated by single-phase tripping, the high-speed single-phase auto-reclose (HSAR) is started. If a fault appears less than three cycles after the AR starts, the stored voltage value remains valid as the reference and is used to calculate direction. If no fault appears during the three cycles after the AR starts, the reference voltage value becomes that of one of the healthy phases. If a fault appears during the continuation of the AR cycle or reclosure occurs, the stored voltage value remains valid for 10 seconds. If a stored voltage does not exist (SOTF) when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the directional is forced forward and the trip is instantaneous (if SOTF All Zones is set or according to the zone location if SOTF Zone 2, etc. is set). If the settable switch on to fault current threshold I>3 is exceeded on reclosure, the relay instantaneously trips three-phase. Two-phase or three-phase fault The reference voltage is stored in memory when the fault appears. When the fault is cleared, the stored voltage value remains valid for 10 seconds. If reclosure occurs during these 10 seconds, the direction is calculated using the stored voltage value. If a stored voltage does not exist when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the forward direction is forced and the trip is instantaneous when protection starts (SOTF All Zones). If the switch on to fault current threshold I>3 is exceeded on reclosure, the relay trips instantaneously three-phase (TOR All Zones). The distance element trips immediately as soon as one or more loops converge within the start-up characteristic during SOTF (SOTF All Zones). Other modes can be selected to trip selectively by SOFT or TOR according to the fault location (SOTF Zone 1, SOTF Zone 2, etc., TOR Zone 1, TOR Zone 2, etc. depending from the software version - from V3.1 available) (See section 2.12, in chapter P44x/EN AP). 4.4 Faulted Zone Decision The Decision of the faulted zone is determined by either the zone "Deltas" or "Conventional" algorithms. The zones are defined for a convergence between the Dfault and Rfault limits related to each zone. So, the solution pair (Rfault, Dfault) is said to be convergent if: Rfault (n-1) < Rfault (i) and Rfault (n) < Rfault (i) and |Rfault (n-1) Rfault (n)| < 10% x Rfault (i) Dfault (n-1) < Dfault (i) and Dfault (n) < Dfault (i) and |Dfault (n-1) - Dfault (n)| < k% x Dfault (i)
where . k= and 10% for other zones Z2, Z3, Zp and Z4. i=1, 1X, 2, p, 3 and 4. 5% for zones 1 and 1X

X
Z1
3 4..
0 R
P3028ENa
FIGURE 13 - PHASE-TO-EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE 4.5 Tripping Logic Three tripping modes can be selected (in MiCOM S1: Distance Scheme\Trip Mode): One-pole trip at T1 (if 1P. Z1 & CR is set): Single-phase trip for fault in zone 1 at T1 and Pilot Aided trip at T1. All other zones trip three-phase at their respective times for any fault types (-G, -, --G, --, ---G). One-pole trip at T1 and T2 (if 1P. Z1Z2 & CR is set): Single-phase trip for Z1 at T1, Pilot Aided trip at T1, and Z2 at T2. All other zones trip three-phase at their respective times for any fault types (-G, -, --G, --, ---G). See section 2.8.2.5 chapter AP (Tripping Mode). Three- pole trip for all zones (Forces 3 poles): Three-phase trip for all zones at their respective times for any fault types (-G, -, --G, --, ---G). Pilot aided trips will be three-phase with times corresponding to the pilot logic applied. Zone Z1 Z1X Z2 Zp Z3 Z4 Time T1 T1 T2 Tp T3 T4
There are five time delays associated with the six zones present. Zone 1 and extended zone 1 have the same time delay.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 34/44 4.6 Fault Locator
The relay has an integral fault locator that uses information from the current and voltage inputs to provide a distance to fault measurement. The fault locator measures the distance by applying the same distance calculation principle as that used for the fault-clearing, distance-measurement algorithm. The dedicated fault locator measurement is more accurate as it is based on a greater number of samples, and it uses the fault currents Ifault as models, as shown below: For a single-phase fault AN : BN : CN : For a two-phase fault AB : BC : CA : For a three-phase fault ABC : Ifault (IA I0) Ifault (IB I0) Ifault (IC I0) Ifault (IAIB) Ifault (IBIC) Ifault (ICIA) Ifault (IAIB)
The sampled data from the analogue input circuits is written to a cyclic buffer until a fault condition is detected. The data in the input buffer is then held to allow the fault calculation to be made. When the fault calculation is complete the fault location information is available in the relay fault record. When applied to parallel circuits mutual flux coupling can alter the impedance seen by the fault locator. The coupling will contain positive, negative and zero sequence components. In practice the positive and negative sequence coupling is insignificant. The effect on the fault locator of the zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated by using the mutual compensation feature provided. This requires that the residual current on the parallel line is measured, as shown in Appendix B. The calculation for single phase loop is based on the following equation: VAN = R1.Dfault.IA + VBN = R1.Dfault.IB + VCN = R1.Dfault.IC + With: Rm: zero-sequence mutual resistance Lm: zero-sequence mutual inductance Im: zero-sequence mutual current Ifault: fault current = I I0 The calculation for phase-to-phase loop is based on the following equation: VAB = R1.Dfault.(IA IB) + (LAA LAB).Dfault. dIA dI dI R + (LAB LBB).Dfault. B + (LAC LBC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2 dIA dI dI R + (LBB LBC).Dfault. B + (LBC LCC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2 dIA dI dI R + (LBC LAB).Dfault. B + (LCC LAC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2 R0R1 dI dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAA.Dfault. A + LAB.Dfault. B + LAC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault + Rm.Im + Lm. m 3 dt dt dt dt R0R1 dI dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAB.Dfault. A + LBB.Dfault. B + LBC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault + Rm.Im + Lm. m 3 dt dt dt dt R0R1 dI dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAC.Dfault. A + LBC.Dfault. B + LCC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault + Rm.Im + Lm. m 3 dt dt dt dt
VBC = R1.Dfault.(IB IC) + (LAB LAC).Dfault. VAC = R1.Dfault.(IC IA) + (LAC LAA).Dfault.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 With: Ifault= I (I = I' - I")
IA - IB IB - IC IC - IA
4.6.1 Selecting the fault location data Selection of the analogue data that is used depends on 4.6.2 How the fault is processed by the algorithms. The line model.
Processing algorithms Distance to fault calculation will use the high speed algorithms if A fault is detected by the high-speed algorithms The tripping occurred within the T1 or T2 time delays The distance to the fault is less than 105% of the line.
In this case, the distance to fault saved in the fault report will be displayed as: Distance to the fault = 24.48 km (L) accuracy 3%
If all three of these conditions are not met, the distance to fault value will be the same value used by the distance protection. The format of the display will then be as follows: Distance to the fault = 31.02 km NOTE: accuracy 5%
The more accurate fault location will be post scripted with an (L). This will occur when conditions are favourable for using the more accurate algorithm for distance to fault calculation.
4.6.2.1
Line Model Selection The fault locator can distinguish between two types of line, as follows: Single lines. Parallel lines with mutual coupling.
Mutual coupling between transmission lines is common on power systems. Significant effects on distance relay operation during faults involving ground may occur. Typically, the positive and negative, mutual-sequence impedance are negligible, but zero-sequence mutual coupling may be large, and either must be factored onto the settings, or accommodated by measurement of parallel, mutually-coupled lines residual (ground) current, where zero-sequence current information is available. The value of the residual currents from parallel lines is then integrated into the distance measurement equation. The relay is capable of measuring and using mutually coupled residual current information from parallel lines. The mutual current is measured by a dedicated analogue input.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 36/44 4.7 Power swing detection
Power swings are caused by a lack of stability in the network with sudden load fluctuations. A power swing may cause the two sources connected by the protected line to go out of step (loose synchronism) with each other. The power swing detection element may be used to selectively prevent when the measured impedance point moves into the start-up characteristic from a power swing and still allows tripping for a fault (fault evolving during a power swing). The power swing detection element may also be used to selectively trip once an out-of-step condition has been declared. figure 14 illustrates the characteristics of power swing.
Powerswing Boundary Characteristic
Z3
Unstable Swing
Stable Swing
Z4 X
P3038ENa
FIGURE 14 - POWER SWING 4.7.1 Power swing detection The power swing detection element is used to detect a stable power swing or loss of synchronism condition (out-of-step) as it passes through near the loop convergence (startup) characteristic (Z3 and Z4 if enabled). Power swing detection is based on the status of the line to be protected: Power swings are characterised by the simultaneous appearance of three impedance points in the start-up zone, passing through the power swing boundary R/X .Their speed of entry (passing through the resistance limits that define the power swing detector) is slower than that in the case of three-phase faults, which is instantaneous. The P44x does not differentiate a stable power swing from loss of synchronism condition. A power swing is detected and declared if: At least one single-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5 ms. The three impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms. At least two poles of the breaker are closed (impedance measurement possible on two phases).
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.7.2 Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip)
In this case, the power swing only occurs on two phases. A power swing is detected if: At least one single-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5ms. The two impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms. NOTE: During an open-pole condition, the P44x monitors the power swing on two single-phase loops. No external information is needed if the voltage transformers are on the line side. If the voltage transformers are on the bus side, the pole discrepancy signal should be used. The pole discrepancy input represents a one-circuit-breaker-poleopen condition.
4.7.3
Conditions for isolating lines If there is a power swing, it may be necessary to trip and disconnect the two out-of-step sources. There are various tripping and blocking options available that are used to select if the line is tripped for power swings or not. The selective blocking of remote zones allows the P44x to separate the network near the electrical zero by tripping zone 1 only. Therefore, in the example given in figure 15, the relay D trips out.
Electrical Zero
A B C D E F
Relay set for out-of-step tripping, zone 1.
P3039ENa
FIGURE 15 - SELECTIVE PROTECTION BLOCKING 4.7.4 Tripping logic Depending on the blocking or unblocking selected, the P44x will trip or block as the swing (stable or unstable) passes through the zones. NOTE: If selected, tripping will occur if the impedance stays in any zone longer than its time delay.
There is a master unblocking timer that is used to override any blocked zone (unblocking time delay). This is used to separate the sources (open the breaker, 3-phase trip) in the event that a block was taking place, and the impedance remained in the blocked zone for a relatively long time. This would be indicative of a serious overcurrent condition as a result of too great a power transfer after a disturbance (a power swing that does not pass through or recover). If the impedance point moves out of the start-up characteristic again before the time delay expires, a trip is not issued and the adjustable time delay is reset. Unblocking the Zones Blocked due to Faults In order to protect the network against a fault that may occur during power swing, blocking signals can be stopped when current thresholds are exceeded. The adjustable unblocking current thresholds are A residual current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (kr x Imax(t)). A negative-sequence current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (ki x Imax(t)). A phase current threshold: IMAX.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 38/44 Where:
kr = an adjustable coefficient for residual or zero sequence current (3 x I0), ki: = an adjustable coefficient for negative sequence current (I2), Imax(t): maximum instantaneous current detected on one phase (A, B or C), IN: nominal current 4.7.5 Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (one-pole-open condition) After a circuit breaker pole has opened, there is no current and voltage on the applicable phase, which allows the protection unit to detect whether a one-pole cycle of the voltage transformer are on a line side. The reception of poles discrepancy input signal allows the protection unit to detect onepole-open condition blocking if the voltage transformer is on the bus side. If another fault appears during a one-pole cycle or just after the voltage has been restored on the applicable phase, direction is defined and phase selection performed. 4.8 Double Circuit Lines Double circuit lines must be taken into account in the operating principle of the protection scheme to avoid unwanted tripping of sound phases, which could be the result of an excessively general phase selection. Phase selection for an inter-circuit fault During a two-phase fault selection, for example on loop AB, the P44x checks direction on the two adjacent ground loops, (A to Neutral and B to Neutral). The direction is determined using either the conventional algorithm or the high-speed algorithm (using superimposed quantities), depending on fault severity. If superimposed components are used, the transient (fault) energy is summated phase by phase.
FaultDirec tionLoop =
_ AN
(V AN .I A )
n0
FaultDirec tionLoop_ BN =
and
Z1 BN fault
(V
n0
BN.IB
Z1 AN fault
AN
Trip single pole
Trip single pole
BN
P3040ENa
The directions of the two adjacent ground loops are compared, as follows: If the two directions are forward, the fault is a two-phase fault on the protected line. If only one of the directions is forward, for instance Sa, the fault is single-phase (A to Neutral) on the protected line. If the two directions are reverse, the fault is not on the protected line.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Protection against Current Reversal (Transient Blocking)
When a fault occurs on a line, which is parallel to the protected line, the pilot schemes on the protected line may be subjected current reversals from sequential clearing on the parallel line. A fault on the parallel line may start by appearing external to the protected line in the reverse direction, and then, after a sequential operation of one of the parallel line breakers, the fault appears forward. This situation can affect security of certain pilot schemes on the protected line.
Reverse
Forward
3
3
4
4
Weak Source
1
1
Forward
2
Forward 2
Strong Source
All breakers closed Relay 3 senses reverse current
3
3 Forward
4
Reverse 4
Weak Source
1
1
2
Forward 2
Strong Source
Breaker 1 opens Relay 3 senses forward current

P3041ENa
FIGURE 16 - DIRECTION REVERSAL FROM SEQUENTIAL CLEARING OF PARALLEL LINES The P44x provides protection against the effects of this phenomenon by employing transient blocking. An adjustable timer is available that will block direct and permissive transfer trip signals from being used in the P44x logic, and will also block the P44x from sending direct or permissive transfer trip signals. This timer is designated as Reverse Guard Timer. This provides protection against fault current reversal and will still allow fast tripping in the event of faults occurring in zone 1, if zone 1 is independent (not used as overreach zone).
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 40/44 4.9
DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults Protection against high-resistance ground faults, also called DEF (Directional Earth Fault), is used to protect the network against highly resistive faults. High resistance faults may not be detected by distance protection. DEF Protection can be applied in one of the two following modes: faults using the following: The main operating mode, directional comparison protection uses the signalling channel and is a communication-aided scheme. In backup-operating mode SBEF (Stand-By Earth Fault), an inverse/definite time ground overcurrent element with 2 stages is selectable. A communication channel is not used - OR a zero sequence power with IDMT Time Delay (see section 5 in chapter P44x/EN AP)
Both the main and backup mode can use different methods for fault detection and directional determination (negative or zero sequence polarisation, RCA angle settable for backup SBEF protection, etc.) The use of Aided-Trip logic in conjunction with the DEF element allows faster trip times, and can facilitate single-phase tripping if single-phase tripping is applied to the breaker. The DEF directional comparison protection may be applied on the same signal channel as the distance protection, or it may be applied on an independent channel (facility to use two different aided-trip logic for distance or DEF element). When used on the same signalling channel as the distance protection, if the distance protection picks up, it has priority (the output from the DEF element is blocked from asserting the Carrier Send common output). The use of directional comparison protection with an independent signalling channel allows the distance functions and DEF function to operate in parallel. Each function is routed to its own Carrier Send output. If a ground fault is present where both the distance and DEF elements pick up, the faster of the two functions will perform the trip. 4.9.1 High Resistance Ground Fault Detection A high resistance fault is detected when residual or zero sequence voltage (3V0), and current thresholds are exceeded or using the high speed algorithms: I 0.05 IN V 0.1 VN (L-G)
A fault is confirmed if these thresholds are exceeded for more then 1 cycles 4.9.2 Directional determination The fault direction is determined by measuring the angle between the residual voltage and the residual current derivative. The fault is forward if the angle is between 14 and +166. A negative or zero sequence polarisation is selectable in order to determinate the earth fault direction. 4.9.3 Phase selection The phase is selected in the same way as for distance protection except that the current threshold is reduced (I 5% x IN and V 10% x VN) NOTE: If the phase has not been selected within one cycle, a three-phase selection is made automatically.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.9.4 Tripping Logic Legend For Tripping Logic Diagrams (DEF) Abbreviation Vr> Ied Forward Reverse DEF blocking Carrier Receive DEF Iev Tripping mode Z< starting t_cycle t_delay t_trans Definition
Threshold of residual or zero sequence voltage (3Vo) Threshold of residual current for forward fault Forward directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation Reverse directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation Blocking of DEF element Carrier received for the principal line protected (same channel as distance protection) Threshold of residual current (0.6 x Ied) Single or three-phase tripping (selectable) Convergence at least 1 of 6 loops within the tripping characteristic (internal starting of the distance element) Additional time delay (150ms) of 1 pole AR cycle Tripping time delay Carrier Send delay settable
Forward Startup
Vr>threshold Ied threshold Forward decision Reverse decision
&
&
& & &
Carrier Send DEF
Blocking DEF Carrier Received DEF
Single phase selection 0 Iev threshold T t-delay
Single Phase Trip
Single
Reverse decision Vr>threshold
&
&
Reversal Startup
Tripping mode 1 pole dead
1 &
0 T t-cycle
Z< starting Independant channels DIST/DEF
&
Three
Three Phase Trip
2 Pole or 3 Pole Selection
1
P3042ENa
FIGURE 17 - DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION PERMISSIVE SCHEME

Forward Startup
Vr>threshold Ied threshold Forward decision Reverse decision
&
&
&
0 T t-trans
Carrier Received DEF Blocking DEF Single phase selection 0 Iev threshold T t-delay
& &
Single Single Phase Trip
Reverse decision Vr>threshold
& &
Blocking Carrier Send
Tripping Mode
&
1 pole dead
Reversal Startup
1 &
0 T t-cycle
Z< starting Independant channels DIST/DEF
&
Three
Three Phase Trip
2 Pole or 3 Pole Selection
1
P3043ENa
FIGURE 18 - DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON PROTECTION BLOCKING SCHEME If the DEF directional comparison transmission is selected on the same channel that is used to transmit distance aided-trip messages, the DEF will have the same tripping logic as the main protection (permissive or blocking). 4.9.5 SBEF Stand-By earth fault (not communication-aided) This protection trips the local breaker directly, without a aided-trip signal, if a high resistance fault remains after a time delay. The time delay varies inversely with the value of the fault current. The selectable inverse time curves comply with the ANSI and IEC standards (see Appendix A). This protection three-pole trips and can block autoreclosing.
CTS Block IN>x start
& & &

Directional Check SBEF
Slow VTS Block Trip
Vx > Vs Ix > Is SBEF Timer Block
&
IDMT/DT
P3044ENa
FIGURE 19 - SBEF STAND-BY EARTH FAULT
5.
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS

The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact. If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to be notified to the user. The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a continuous selfchecking operation which checks the operation of the relays critical functions whilst it is in service.
5.1
Start-up self-testing The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to complete, during which time the relays protection is unavailable. This is signalled by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem, the relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order. The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
5.1.1
System boot The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution by the processor. When the copy has been completed the data then held in SRAM is compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that no errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM. The entry point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialisation code.
5.1.2
Initialisation software The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor registers and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating system and creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the initialisation process the relay checks: the status of the battery. the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and disturbance records. the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-isolated inputs. the operation of the LCD controller. the watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the process of starting the platform software.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 44/44 5.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring
In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of data; the presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the analogue data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage. At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and the protection started-up. 5.2 Continuous self-testing When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services software (see section on relay software earlier in this chapter) and the results reported to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows: the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a checksum. the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption. the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified with a checksum. the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum. the battery status. the level of the field voltage. the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the relay contacts is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed. The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of sampling the reference voltages. the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software that reads the time and date from the board.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relays subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status or the IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in operation. However, for problems detected in any other area the relay will initiate a shutdown and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay including all initialisations should clear most problems that could occur. As described above, an integral part of the start-up procedure is a thorough diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same problem that caused the relay to restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog contact which will operate.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN AP/E33
APPLICATION NOTES
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 1/220
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3
INTRODUCTION
Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits MiCOM distance relay Protection Features Non-Protection Features Additional Features for the P441 Relay Model Additional Features for the P442 Relay Model Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model Remark
7
7 7 8 9 9 9 10 10
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5

Configuration column Phase fault distance protection Earth fault distance protection Consistency between zones General Distance Trip logic Equation Inputs Outputs Type of trip Inputs Outputs Distance zone settings Settings table Zone Logic Applied Zone Reaches Zone Time Delay Settings Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements Resistive Reach Calculation - Phase Fault Elements Resistive Reach Calculation - Earth Fault Elements Effects of Mutual Coupling on Distance Settings Effect of Mutual Coupling on Zone 1 Setting Effect of Mutual Coupling on Zone 2 Setting Distance protection schemes Settings Carrier send & Trip logic The Basic Scheme Zone 1 Extension Scheme Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL)
11
11 12 13 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 17 19 22 24 24 25 27 27 27 28 29 30 31 33 36 38
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 2/220 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.11 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.12.5 2.12.6 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.13.4 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3 2.14.4 2.15 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.17 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.3 Channel-aided distance schemes Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes PUP Z2 and PUP Fwd Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Schemes POP Z2 and POP Z1 Permissive Overreach Schemes Weak Infeed Features Permissive Scheme Unblocking Logic Blocking Schemes BOP Z2 and BOP Z1 Distance schemes current reversal guard logic Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard Distance schemes in the open programming mode Switch On To Fault and Trip On Reclose protection Initiating TOR/SOTF Protection TOR-SOTF Trip Logic
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 41 41 44 46 49 53 56 56 56 57 57 59 61 63 63 65 66 67 68 69 72 72 72 75 75 75 75 78 78 79 79 79 80 80 81 82 84 84 85
Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose by I>3 Overcurrent Element (not filtered for inruch current): Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose by Level Detectors Setting Guidelines Inputs /Outputs in SOTF-TOR DDB Logic Power swing blocking (PSB) The Power Swing Blocking Element Unblocking of the Relay for Faults During Power Swings Typical Current Settings Removal of PSB to Allow Tripping for Prolonged Power Swings Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection Application of Timer Hold Facility Directional Overcurrent Protection Time Delay VTS Setting Guidelines Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) Setting Guidelines Negative phase sequence current threshold, I2> Current Set Time Delay for the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element, I2> Time Delay Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Broken conductor detection Setting Guidelines Example Setting Directional and non-directional earth fault protection Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) Application of Zero Sequence Polarising Application of Negative Sequence Polarising
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.18 2.18.1 2.18.2 2.18.3 2.19 2.19.1 2.20 2.20.1 2.21 2.21.1 2.21.2 2.21.3 Aided DEF protection schemes Polarising the Directional Decision Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme Aided DEF Blocking Scheme Undervoltage protection Setting Guidelines Overvoltage protection Setting Guidelines Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) Breaker Failure Protection Configurations Reset Mechanisms for Breaker Fail Timers Typical settings
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 3/220 85 86 87 88 90 91 91 92 92 92 94 98
3.
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9 3.1.10 3.1.11 3.1.12 3.1.13 3.1.14 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.3 3.3.1
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS-SETTINGS EXAMPLE

Distance Protection Setting Example Objective System Data Relay Settings Line Impedance Zone 1 Phase Reach Settings Zone 2 Phase Reach Settings Zone 3 Phase Reach Settings Zone 4 Reverse Settings with no Weak Infeed Logic Selected Zone 4 Reverse Settings with Weak Infeed Logic Selected Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements Resistive Reach Calculations Power Swing Band Current Reversal Guard Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection Teed feeder protection The Apparent Impedance Seen by the Distance Elements Permissive Overreach Schemes Permissive Underreach Schemes Blocking Schemes Alternative setting groups Selection of Setting Groups
99
99 99 99 99 99 100 100 100 100 100 101 101 102 102 102 103 103 103 104 105 105 106
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2

Fault locator Mutual Coupling Setting Guidelines
108
108 109 109
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 4/220 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.6 4.5.7 4.5.8 4.5.9 4.5.10 4.5.11 4.5.12 4.5.13 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 110 110 112 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 116 116 118 118 118 119 123 125 125 127 128 134 134 136 142 149 149 149 150 150 151 152 152 156 157 157 159 159 160 160 160
Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Main VT for minZ measurement VTS logic description The internal detection FUSE Failure condition Fuse Failure Alarm reset Loss of One or Two Phase Voltages Loss of All Three Phase Voltages Under Load Conditions Absence of Three Phase Voltages Upon Line Energisation Menu Settings INPUT / OUTPUT used in VTS logic: Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) The CT Supervision Feature Setting the CT Supervision Element Check synchronisation Dead Busbar and Dead Line Live Busbar and Dead Line Dead Busbar and Live Line Check Synchronism Settings Logic inputs / Outputs from synchrocheck function Autorecloser Autorecloser Functional Description Benefits of Autoreclosure Auto-reclose logic operating sequence Scheme for Three Phase Trips Scheme for Single Pole Trips Logical Inputs used by the Autoreclose logic Logical Outputs generated by the Autoreclose logic Setting Guidelines Choice of Protection Elements to Initiate Autoreclosure Number of Shots Dead Timer Setting De-Ionising Time Reclaim Timer Setting Circuit breaker state monitoring Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Features Inputs / outputs DDB for CB logic: Circuit breaker condition monitoring Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features Setting guidelines Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Setting the Operating Time Thresholds Setting the Excessive Fault Frequency Thresholds Inputs/Outputs for CB Monitoring logic
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.8 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10 4.10 Circuit Breaker Control Event Recorder Change of state of opto-isolated inputs. Change of state of one or more output relay contacts. Relay Alarm conditions. Protection Element Starts and Trips General Events Fault Records Maintenance Reports Setting Changes Resetting of Event / Fault Records Viewing Event Records via MiCOM S1 Support Software Disturbance recorder
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 5/220 161 165 167 167 168 168 168 169 169 169 169 170 171
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2
NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS VERSION C1.X

Maximum of Residual Power Protection Zero Sequence Power Protection Function description Settings & DDB cells assigned to zero sequence power (ZSP) function Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) Function description Settings & DDB cells assigned to Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) function
175
175 175 177 178 178 179
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6

HOW TO USE PSL Editor? Logic input mapping Relay output contact mapping Relay output conditioning Programmable led output mapping Fault recorder trigger
180
180 182 185 186 188 188
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

CT Knee Point Voltage for Phase Fault Distance Protection CT Knee Point Voltage for Earth Fault Distance Protection Recommended CT classes (British and IEC) Determining Vk for an IEEE C" class CT
189
189 189 189 189
8.
DDB DESCRIPTION FOR ALL TYPES P441/P442 & P444 MODELS
189
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Protection of overhead lines and cable circuits Overhead lines are amongst the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them provides secure and reliable operation. For distribution systems, continuity of supply is of para mount importance. The majority of faults on overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent in nature, and multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements to increase system availability. Thus, high speed, fault clearance is often a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network. The protection requirements for sub-transmission and higher voltage systems must also take into account system stability. Where systems are not highly interconnected the use of single phase tripping and high speed autoreclosure is commonly used. This in turn dictates the need for high speed protection to reduce overall fault clearance times. Underground cables are vulnerable to mechanical damage, such as disturbance by construction work or ground subsidence. Also, faults can be caused by ingress of ground moisture into the cable insulation, or its buried joints. Fast fault clearance is essential to limit extensive damage, and avoid the risk of fire, etc. Many power systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current. Methods such as resistance earthing make the detection of earth faults difficult. Special protection elements are often used to meet such onerous protection requirements. Physical distance must also be taken into account. Overhead lines can be hundreds of kilometres in length. If high speed, discriminative protection is to be applied it will be necessary to transfer information between the line ends. This not only puts the onus on the security of signalling equipment but also on the protection in the event of loss of this signal. Thus, backup protection is an important feature of any protection scheme. In the event of equipment failure, maybe of signalling equipment or switchgear, it is necessary to provide alternative forms of fault clearance. It is desirable to provide backup protection which can operate with minimum time delay and yet discriminate with the main protection and protection elsewhere on the system.
1.2
MiCOM distance relay MiCOM relays are a range of products from T&D EAI. Using advanced numerical technology, MiCOM relays include devices designed for application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the range is the series of distance relays. The relay series has been designed to cater for the protection of a wide range of overhead lines and underground cables from distribution to transmission voltage levels. The relay also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 8/220 1.2.1 Protection Features
The distance relays offer a comprehensive range of protection functions, for application to many overhead line and underground cable circuits. There are 3 separate models available, the P441, P442 and P444. The P442 and P444 models can provide single and three pole tripping. The P441 model provides three pole tripping only. The protection features of each model are summarised below: 21G/21P : Phase and earth fault distance protection, each with up to 5 independent zones of protection. Standard and customised signalling schemes are available to give fast fault clearance for the whole of the protected line or cable. 50/51 : Instantaneous and time delayed overcurrent protection - Four elements are available, with independent directional control for the 1st and 2nd element. The fourth element can be configured for stub bus protection in 1 circuit breaker arrangements. The 3rd element can be used for SOFT/TOR logic. 50N/51N : Instantaneous and time delayed neutral overcurrent protection. Two element are available and four threshold from next version C1.0 (model 020G or 020H). 67N : Directional earth fault protection (DEF) - This can be configured for channel aided protection, plus two elements are available for backup DEF. 32N : Maximum of Residual Power Protection - Zero sequence Power Protection This element can provide protection element for high resistance fault, eliminated without communication channel. 27 : Undervoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable to measure either phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. 59 : Overvoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable to measure either phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only. 67/46 : Directional or non-directional negative sequence overcurrent protection - This element can provide backup protection for many unbalanced fault conditions. 50/27 : Switch on to fault (SOTF) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied for manual circuit breaker closure. 50/27 :Trip on reclose (TOR) protection - These settings enhance the protection applied on autoreclosure of the circuit breaker. 78 : Power swing blocking - Selective blocking of distance protection zones ensures stability during the power swings experienced on sub-transmission and transmission systems. From version C1.0, the relay can differentiate between a stable power swing and a loss of synchronism (out of steps). VTS : Voltage transformer supervision (VTS). To detect VT fuse failures. This prevents maloperation of voltage dependent protection on AC voltage input failure. CTS : Current transformer supervision - To raise an alarm should one or more of the connections from the phase CTs become faulty. 46 BC : Broken conductor detection - To detect network faults such as open circuits, where a conductor may be broken but not in contact with another conductor or the earth. 50 BF : Circuit breaker failure protection - Generally set to backtrip upstream circuit breakers, should the circuit breaker at the protected terminal fail to trip. Two stages are provided.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2.2 Non-Protection Features
The P441, P442 and P444 relays have the following non-protection features: 79/25 : Autoreclosure with Check synchronism - This permits up to 4 reclose shots, with voltage synchronism, differential voltage, live line/dead bus, and dead bus/live line interlocking available. Check synchronism is optional. Measurements - Selected measurement values polled at the line/cable terminal, available for display on the relay or accessed from the serial communications facility. Fault/Event/Disturbance Records - Available from the serial communications or on the relay display (fault and event records only). Distance to fault locator - Reading in km, miles or % of line length. Four Setting Groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative power system arrangements or customer specific applications. Remote Serial Communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The following communications protocols are supported: Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5/103 and DNP3 (UCA2 soon available). Continuous Self Monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to provide maximum relay reliability and availability. Circuit Breaker State Monitoring - Provides indication of any discrepancy between circuit breaker auxiliary contacts. Circuit Breaker Control - Opening and closing of the circuit breaker can be achieved either locally via the user interface / opto inputs, or remotely via serial communications. Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs regarding the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and the breaker operating time. Commissioning Test Facilities.
1.2.3
Additional Features for the P441 Relay Model 8 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. 14 Output relay contacts control. For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote
1.2.4
Additional Features for the P442 Relay Model Single pole tripping and autoreclose. Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order). Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional). Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485) 16 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. 21 Output relay contacts control. For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 10/220 1.2.5 Additional Features for the P444 Relay Model 1.3 Single pole tripping and autoreclose.
Real Time Clock Synchronisation - Time synchronisation is possible from the relay IRIG-B input. (IRIG-B must be specified as an option at time of order). Fibre optic converter for IEC60870-5/103 communication (optional). Second rear port in COURIER Protocol (KBus/RS232/RS485) 24 Logic Inputs - For monitoring of the circuit breaker and other plant status. 32 Output relay contacts control. For tripping, alarming, status indication and remote
Remark The PSL screen copy extracted from S1, uses the different types of model P44x (07, 09). (See the DDB equivalent table with the different model number). Example : check synch OK (model 07) = DDB204 check synch OK (model 09) = DDB236
2.

The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are applied to the relay. The P441, P442 and P444 relays each include a column in the menu called the CONFIGURATION column. As this affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions, it is described in the following section.
2.1
Configuration column The following table shows the Configuration column:Menu text CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults No Operation No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Select via Menu Select via Optos Group1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 No Operation Save Abort Group1,2,3 or 4 No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4 Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Enabled or Disabled Default setting Available settings
Setting Group Active Settings
Select via Menu Group 1
Save Changes
No Operation
Copy From Copy To Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Distance Power Swing Back-up I> Neg Sequence O/C Broken Conductor Earth Fault O/C Aided DEF Zero Seq. power (*) Volt Protection CB Fail & I< Supervision System Checks
Group 1 No Operation Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 12/220 Menu text Internal A/R Input Labels Output Labels CT & VT Ratios Event Recorder Disturb Recorder Measuret Setup Comms Settings Commission Tests Setting Values (*) from B1.0 Default setting Disabled Visible Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible Visible Visible Primary
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Available settings Enabled or Disabled Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Invisible or Visible Primary or Secondary
The aim of the Configuration column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu. 2.2 Phase fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 5 zones of phase fault protection, as shown in the impedance plot Figure 1 below.
X( /phase)
ZONE 3
ZONE P
ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1

R1Ph/2 R2Ph/2 RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 = R4Ph/2 R (
/phase)
ZONE 4
P0470ENa
FIGURE 1 PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS ( /PHASE SCHEME) Remarks: 1. R limit value in MiCOM S1, are in ohms loop. 2. In a /phase scheme the R value must be divided by 2 (for phase/phase diagram). 3. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the positive impedance of the line (value adjusted in the settings)
All phase fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalied as follows: Zones 1, 2 and 3 - Directional forward zones, as used in conventional three zone distance schemes. Note that Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes (see page 17 2.5.2). Zone P - Programmable. Selectable in MiCOM S1 (Distance scheme\Fault type) as a directional forward or reverse zone. Zone 4 - Directional reverse zone. Note that zone 3 and zone 4 can be set with same Rloop value to provide a general start of the relay. Remark: If any zone i presents a Rloop i bigger than R3=R4, the limit of the start is always given by R3. See also the "Commissioning Test" chapter.
2.3
Earth fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 5 zones of earth (ground) fault protection, as shown in the earth loop impedance plot Figure 2 below. Type of fault can be selected in MiCOM S1 (only Phase/Phase or P/P & P/Ground)
X( /phase)
ZONE 3
ZONE P (Programmable)
ZONE 2 ZONE 1X
ZONE 1
R1G 1+KZ 1 R2G 1+KZ 2 RpG R3G = R4G 1+KZ 1+KZ 1+KZ p 3/4 3/4
R(
/phase)
ZONE P Reverse ZONE 4
P0471ENa
FIGURE 2 PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS ( /PHASE SCHEME) Remarks: 1. In a /phase scheme the R value must be divided by 1+KZ (for phase/ground diagram) 2. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the 2Z1+Z0 (Z1: positive sequence Z, Z0: zero sequence Z) 3. See calculation of KZ in section 2.6.5.
All earth fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalised as per the phase fault elements. The reaches of the earth fault elements use residual compensation of the corresponding phase fault reach. The residual compensation factors are as follows: 2.4 kZ1 - For zone 1 (and zone 1X); kZ2 - For zone 2; kZ3/4 - Shared by zones 3 and 4; kZp - For zone P.
Consistency between zones In order to understand how the different distance zones interact the parameters below should be considered: If Zp is a forward zone Z1 ! Z2 < Zp < Z3 tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3 R1G < R2G < RpG < R3G = R4G R1Ph < R1extPh < R2Ph < RpPh < R3Ph
If Zp is a reverse zone Z1 < Z2 < Z3 Zp > Z4 tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3 tZp < tZ4 R1G < R2G < R3G RpG < R3G = R4G R1Ph < R2Ph < R3Ph RpPh < R3Ph = R4Ph R3G < UN / (1.2 X 3 IN) R3Ph < UN / (1.2 X 3 IN) Remarks: 1. If Z3 is disabled, the forward limit element becomes the smaller zone Z2- (or Zp if selected forward) 2. If Z4 is disabled, the directional limit for the forward zone is: 30 (since version A4.0) 3. For older version than A4.0, the directional limit is: 0 (when Z4 is selected: disable).
Conventional rules are used as follows: Distance Timers are initiated as soon as the relay has picked up CVMR pickup distance (CVMR = Start & Convergence) The minimum tripping time even with Carrier received is T1 Zone 4 is always Reverse
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.5 2.5.1 General Distance Trip logic Equation Z1'.T1. BZ1 . PZ1 + Z1x'.(None + Z1xSiAnomTac.UNB_Alarm).[ T1. INP_Z1EXT] + UNB_CR.T1.[ PZ1.Z1'+PZ2.Z2'+PFwd.Aval]
+ UNB_CR .T1.(Tp +INP_COS(*)).[ Z1'.BZ1 + (Z2'.BZ2. INP_COS + T2 [ Z2' + PZ1.Z1' + BZ1.Z1'] + Z3'.T3 + Zp' .Tzp + Z4'.T4 [(*) from version A2.10 & A3.1] (See Figure 3 in section 2.7.2.1- Z logic description) Remarks:
(*)])
4. In case of COS (carrier out of service), the logic swap back to a basic scheme. 5. In the column Data Type:"Configuration" means MiCOM S1 Setting (the parameter is present in the settings).
With the inputs/outputs described above: 2.5.2 Inputs Data Type T1 to T4 Tp Z1' to Z4' (*) Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Description Elapse of Distance Timer 1 to 4 (T1/T2/T3/TZp/T4) Elapse of transmission time in blocking scheme Detection of fault in zones 1 to 4 (lock out by PSWing or Rev Guard) See figure 3 section 2.7.21 Fwd Fault Detection l (lockout by reversal guard) Carrier Received Carrier Out of Service Carrier send in case of zone 1 decision Carrier send in case of zone 2 decision Carrier send in case of zone 4 decision (Reverse) Scheme without carrier Permissive scheme Z1 Permissive scheme Z2 Permissive Scheme with directional Fwd Blocking scheme Z1 Blocking scheme Z2 Zone extension (digital input assigned to an opto by dedicated PSL) Z1x logic enabled if channel fail detected (Carrier out of service = COS) Carrier Out Of Service
Forward UNB_CR INP_COS CSZ1 CSZ2 CSZ4 None PZ1 PZ2 PFwd BZ1 BZ2 INP_Z1EXT
Internal logic Internal logic TS Opto Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Internal logic
Z1xChannel Fail Configuration UNBAlarm Internal logic
(*) the use of an apostrophe in the above logic (Z'1) is explained in section 2.7.2.1 Figure 3
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 16/220 2.5.3 Outputs Data Type PDist_Dec 2.6 Type of trip Single Pole Z1 0 1 0 Single pole Z2 1 0 0 T1 1 1 3 T2 1 3 3 Tzp 3 3 3 Internal logic Description Distance protection Trip
T3 3 3 3
T4 3 3 3
1 : Trip 1P if selected in MiCOM S1 otherwise trip 3P 3 : Trip 3P 2.6.1 Inputs Data Type INP_Dist_Timer_Block Single Pole T1 Single Pole T1 & T2 PDist_Trip T1 to T4 Fault A Fault B Fault C 2.6.2 Outputs Data Type PDist_Trip A PDist_Trip B PDist_Trip C 2.7 Distance zone settings NOTE: Individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the Zone Status function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable that zone, setting bits to 0 will disable that distance zones. Note that zone 1 is always enabled, and that zones 2 and 4 will need to be enabled if required for use in channel aided schemes. Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Trip Order phase A Trip Order phase B Trip Order phase C TS opto Configuration Configuration Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Input for blocking the distance function Trip 1pole at T1 3P in other cases Trip 1pole at T1 /T2 3P in other cases Trip by Distance protection End of distance timer by Zone Phase A selection Phase B selection Phase C selection
Remarks:
1. .Z3 disable means Fwd start becomes Zp .Z3 & Zp Fwd disable means Fwd start becomes Z2 .Z3 & Zp Fwd & Z2 disable means Fwd start becomes Z1 2. Z4 disable (see remark 1/2/3 in section 2.4)
2.7.1
Settings table Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle Zone Setting Zone Status 00011111 Bit 0: Z1X Enable, Bit 1: Z2 Enable, Bit 2: Zone P Enable, Bit 3: Z3 Enable, Bit 4: Z4 Enable. 0 0 0.001/In 0.001/In 0 0 0 0 0 0.001/In 0 0 0 0 7 360 500/In 500/In 400/In 400/In 10s 7 360 500/In 400/In 400/In 10s 7 0.001 0.1 0.001/In 0.001/In 0.01/In 0.01/In 0.002s 0.001 0.1 0.001/In 0.01/In 0.01/In 0.01s 0.01 1000 km (625 miles) 12/In 70 0.3 km (0.2 mile) 0.001/In 90 1000 km (625 miles) 500/In +90 0.010 km (0.005 mile) 0.001/In 0.1 Max Step size
KZ1 Res Comp KZ1 Angle Z1 Z1X R1G R1Ph tZ1 KZ2 Res Comp KZ2 Angle Z2 R2G R2Ph tZ2 KZ3/4 Res Comp
1 0 10/In 15/In 10/In 10/In 0 1 0 20/In 20/In 20/In 0.2s 1
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 18/220 Menu text Default setting Setting range Min KZ3/4 Angle Z3 R3G - R4G R3Ph - R4Ph tZ3 Z4 tZ4 Zone P - Direct. KZp Res Comp KZp Angle Zp RpG RpPh tZp Serial Cmp.line (*) Overlap Z Mode (*) Fault Locator KZm Mutual Comp KZm Angle 0 0 0 0 7 360 Enabled Enabled 0 30/In 30/In 30/In 0.6s 40/In 1s Directional Fwd 1 0 25/In 25/In 25/In 0.4s Disable Disable 0 0.001/In 0 0 0 0.001/In 0 Max 360 500/In 400/In 400/In 10s 500/In 10s
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Step size
0.1 0.001/In 0.01/In 0.01/In 0.01s 0.01/In 0.01s
Directional Fwd or Directional Rev 0 0 0.001/In 0 0 0 Enable Enable 7 360 500/In 400/In 400/In 10s Disable Disable 0.001 0.1 0.001/In 0.01/In 0.01/In 0.01s
0.001 0.1
(*) Serial Cmp. Line (*) Overlap Z Mode
(*) These parameters are available from version A4.0 onwards Serial Compensated Line : If enabled, the Directional used in the Deltas Algorithms is set at 90 (Fwd = Quad1&4 / Rev = Quad 2&3)
X
REV
FWD
R REV FWD
P0472ENa
If disable, the Directional of the Deltas algorithms is set at -30 like conventional algorithms
X
FWD
FWD R
REV REV
FWD
-30
P0473ENa
2.7.2
Overlap Z Mode: If enable, for a fault in Zp (fwd), then Z1 & Z2 will be displayed in LCD/Events/Drec The internal logic is not modified
Zone Logic Applied Normally the zone logic used by the distance algorithm is as below:
Z1' Z2' Z4'

P0462XXa
(with overlap logic the Z2 will cover also the Z1) 2.7.2.1 Zone Logic The relay internal logic will modify the zones & directionality under the following conditions: Power swing detection Settings about blocking logic during Power swing Reversal Guard Timer Type of Logical transmission scheme
For Power swing, two signals are considered: Presence of Power swing Unblocking during power swing
During Power swing the zones are blocked; but can be unblocked with: Start of unblocking logic Unblocking logic enable in MiCOM S1 on the concerned zone or all zones
During the Reversal guard logic (in case of parallel lines), the reverse directional decision is latched (until that timer is issued) from the switch from Reverse to Forward (for distance scheme with Z1>ZL).

Z1x
& 1 &
Z1x'
unblock PS in Z1
Z1<ZL
1 1
Z1
&
Z1'
Reversal Guard
&
PermZ2
1 1 & Z2'
Power Swing Unblock PS
unblock PS in Z2
Z2
&
PermFwd Forward
&
Forward'
unblock PS in Z3
1 & Z2' 1 &
Z3'
Z3
unblock PS in Z4
Z4 Zp_Fwd
unblock PS in Zp
Z4'
& 1 & Zp'
Zp
Reverse
Reverse'
P0474ENa
FIGURE 3 - ZONES UNBLOCKING/BLOCKING LOGIC WITH POWER SWING OR REVERSAL GUARD
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.7.2.2 Inputs Data Type Z1 Z1x Z2 Z3 Zp Z4 Forward Reverse Reversal Guard Unblock PS Power Swing INP_Distance_Timer_block Unblock Z1 Unblock Z2 Unblock Zp Unblock Z3 Unblock Z4 Zp_Fwd Z1<ZL Perm Z2 Perm Fwd Block Z1 Block Z2 Remarks: *. **. Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic TS opto Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Description Fault detected in zone 1
Fault detected in zone 1 extended Fault detected in zone 2 Fault detected in zone 3 Fault detected in zone p Fault detected in zone 4 FWD Fault Detected REV Fault Detected Reversal guard Unblocking Power Swing Power Swing Detected Zones blocked by external input Unblocking Pswing with Z1 Unblocking Pswing with Z2 Unblocking Pswing with Zp Unblocking Pswing with Z3 Unblocking Pswing with Z4 Directional Zp set Forward Internal Configuration which determine that Z1 is lower than the length of the line ZL Type of logical distance scheme (PUP Z2 POP Z2) Type of logical distance scheme (PUP Fwd) Type of logical distance scheme (BOP Z1) Type of logical distance scheme (BOP Z2) (**) (*)
Usefull for dedicated logic designed in PSL Facility in Commissioning Test For Aided Distace Scheme See description in the TRIP LOGIC Table (section 2.8.2.4)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 22/220 2.7.2.3 Outputs Data Type Z1x Z1 Z2 Z3 Zp Z4 Forward Reverse Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description
Fault detected in zone 1 extended Fault detected in zone 1 Fault detected in zone 2 Fault detected in zone 3 Fault detected in zone p Fault detected in zone 4 Fault Detected in Forward Direction Fault Detected in Reverse Direction
For guidance on Line Length, Line Impedance, kZm Mutual Compensation and kZm mutual compensation Angle settings, refer to section 4.1. 2.7.3 Zone Reaches All impedance reaches for phase fault protection are calculated in polar form: Z , where Z is the reach in ohms, and is the line angle setting in degrees, common to all zones. The line parameters can be adjusted in polar or rectangular mode to give the total positive impedance of the protected line:
Remark:
Z limit in MiCOM S1 are adjusted for /phase
The zone 1 elements of a distance relay should be set to cover as much of the protected line as possible, allowing instantaneous tripping for as many faults as possible. In most applications the zone 1 reach (Z1) should not be able to respond to faults beyond the protected line. For an underreaching application the zone 1 reach must therefore be set to account for any possible overreaching errors. These errors come from the relay, the VTs and CTs and inaccurate line impedance data. It is therefore recommended that the reach of the zone 1 distance elements is restricted to 80 - 85% of the protected line impedance (positive phase sequence line impedance), with zone 2 elements set to cover the final 20% of the line. (Note: Two of the channel aided distance schemes described later, schemes POP Z1 and BOP Z1 use overreaching zone 1 elements, and the previous setting recommendation does not apply). The zone 2 elements should be set to cover the 20% of the line not covered by zone 1. Allowing for underreaching errors, the zone 2 reach (Z2) should be set in excess of 120% of the protected line impedance for all fault conditions. Where aided tripping schemes are used, fast operation of the zone 2 elements is required. It is therefore beneficial to set zone 2 to reach as far as possible, such that faults on the protected line are well within reach. A constraining requirement is that, where possible, zone 2 does not reach beyond the zone 1 reach of adjacent line protection. Where this is not possible, it is necessary to time grade zone 2 elements of relays on adjacent lines. For this reason the zone 2 reach should be set to cover 50% of the shortest adjacent line impedance, if possible. When setting zone 2 earth fault elements on parallel circuits, the effects of zero sequence mutual coupling will need to be accounted for. The mutual coupling will result in the Zone 2 ground fault elements underreaching. To ensure adequate coverage an extended reach setting may be required, this is covered in Section 2.7.7. The zone 3 elements would usually be used to provide overall back-up protection for adjacent circuits. The zone 3 reach (Z3) is therefore set to approximately 120% of the combined impedance of the protected line plus the longest adjacent line. A higher apparent impedance of the adjacent line may need to be allowed where fault current can be fed from multiple sources or flow via parallel paths. Zone P is a reversible directional zone. The setting chosen for zone P, if used at all, will depend upon its application. Typical applications include its use as an additional time delayed zone or as a reverse back-up protection zone for busbars and transformers. Use of zone P as an additional forward zone of protection may be required by some users to line up with any existing practice of using more than three forward zones of distance protection. Zone P may also be useful for dealing with some mutual coupling effects when protecting a double circuit line, which will be discussed in section 2.7.7. The zone 4 elements would typically provide back-up protection for the local busbar, where the offset reach is set to 25% of the zone 1 reach of the relay for short lines (<30km) or 10% of the zone 1 reach for long lines. Setting zone 4 in this way would also satisfy the requirements for Switch on to Fault, and Trip on Reclose protection, as described in later sections. Where zone 4 is used to provide reverse directional decisions for Blocking or Permissive Overreach schemes, zone 4 must reach further behind the relay than zone 2 for the remote relay. This can be achieved by setting: Z4 ((Remote zone 2 reach) x 120%) minus the protected line impedance.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 24/220 2.7.4 Zone Time Delay Settings (initiated with CVMR (General start convergency))
The zone 1 time delay (tZ1) is generally set to zero, giving instantaneous operation. However, a time delay might be employed in cases where a large transient DC component is expected in the fault current, and older circuit breakers may be unable to break the current until zero crossings appear. The zone 2 time delay (tZ2) is set to co-ordinate with zone 1 fault clearance time for adjacent lines. The total fault clearance time will consist of the downstream zone 1 operating time plus the associated breaker operating time. Allowance must also be made for the zone 2 elements to reset following clearance of an adjacent line fault and also for a safety margin. A typical minimum zone 2 time delay is of the order of 200ms. This time may have to be adjusted where the relay is required to grade with other zone 2 protection or slower forms of back-up protection for adjacent circuits. The zone 3 time delay (tZ3) is typically set with the same considerations made for the zone 2 time delay, except that the delay needs to co-ordinate with the downstream zone 2 fault clearance. A typical minimum zone 3 operating time would be in the region of 400ms. Again, this may need to be modified to co-ordinate with slower forms of back-up protection for adjacent circuits. The zone 4 time delay (tZ4) needs to co-ordinate with any protection for adjacent lines in the relays reverse direction. If zone 4 is required merely for use in a Blocking scheme, tZ4 may be set high. Remark: In MiCOM S1, timers settable are: tZi but in the DDB corresponding cells are: Ti
2.7.5
Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements For earth faults, residual current (derived as the vector sum of phase current inputs (Ia + Ib + Ic) is assumed to flow in the residual path of the earth loop circuit. Thus, the earth loop reach of any zone must generally be extended by a multiplication factor of (1 + kZ0) compared to the positive sequence reach for the corresponding phase fault element. kZ0 is designated as the residual compensation factor, and is calculated as: kZ0 Res. Comp, kZ0 Angle, kZ0 kZ0 = = (Z0 Z1) / 3.Z1 (Z0 Z1) / 3.Z1 Ie: As a ratio. Set in degrees.
Where:
Z1 Z0 = = Positive sequence impedance for the line or cable; Zero sequence impedance for the line or cable.
kZ0 CALCULATION DESCRIPTION If we consider a phase to ground fault AN with analog values VA and IA. Using symetrical components, VA is described as above: (1) VA = V1 + V2 + V0 = Z1I1 + Z2I2 + Z0I0 Z2 = Z1 (for a line or a cable) (2) VA = Z1 (I1 + I2) + Z0I0 we can write also: IA = I1 + I2 +I0 (3) (I1 + I2) = IA I0 with (3) in (2) we obtain: (4) VA = Z1 (IA I0) + Z0I0
The physical fault current is IR = 3I0 if put in (4) we obtain: VA = Z1 [IA IR/3 + Z0IR/3Z1] = Z1 [IA + IR (Z0Z1)/3Z1] but: (Z0 Z1)/3Z1 = kZ0
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 (5) (6) VA = Z1 [IA + kZ0 IR] Z1 = VA/(IA + kZ0 IR)
Particular case Resistive fault (7) VA = Z1 [IA + kZ0 IR] + Rdef. Idef (Rdef = Rloop)
To determine the distance, Z1 term is extracted. (8) with Z1 = (VA Rdef. Idef)/(IA + kZ0 IR)
Rdef: fault resistance (loop) Idef: current crossing the fault resistance Open line: Ifault = IR = IA (9) (10) VA = Z1 IA (1 + kZ0) + Rfault IA Z1 = (VA/IA Rfault)/(1 + kZ0)
The impedance detected will be: Z = Z1 (1 + kZ0) + Rfault That is the form used for the result of Z measured with injector providing U, I, Separate compensation for each zone (KZ1, KZ2, KZ3/4 and KZp) allows more accurate earth fault reach control for elements which are set to overreach the protected line, such that they cover other circuits which may have different zero sequence to positive sequence impedance ratios (Example: underground cable & overhead line in the protected line). 2.7.6 Resistive Reach Calculation - Phase Fault Elements In MiCOM S1 all resistances are set per loop The P441, P442 and P444 relays have quadrilateral distance elements, thus the resistive reach (RPh) is set independently of the impedance reach along the protected line/cable. RPh defines the maximum amount of fault resistance additional to the line impedance for which a distance zone will trip, regardless of the location of the fault within the zone. Thus, the right hand and left hand resistive reach constraints of each zone are displaced by +RPh and -RPh either side of the characteristic impedance of the line, respectively. RPh is generally set on a per zone basis, using R1Ph, R2Ph and RpPh. Note that zones 3 and 4 share the resistive reach R3Ph-R4Ph. When the relay is set in primary impedance terms, RPh must be set to cover the maximum expected phase-to-phase fault resistance. In general, RPh must be set greater than the maximum fault arc resistance for a phase-phase fault, calculated as follows: Ra RPh Where: If L Ra = = = Minimum expected phase-phase fault current (A); Maximum phase conductor separation (m); Arc resistance, calculated from the van Warrington formula (). = (28710 x L) / If1.4 Ra
Typical figures for Ra are given in Table 1 below, for different values of minimum expected phase fault current. Conductor spacing (m) 2 5 8 Typical system voltage (kV) 33 110 220 If = 1kA 3.6 9.1 14.5 If = 5kA 0.4 1.0 1.5 If = 10kA 0.2 0.4 0.6
TABLE 1 - TYPICAL ARC RESISTANCES CALCULATED USING THE VAN WARRINGTON FORMULA The maximum phase fault resistive reach must be limited to avoid load encroachment trips. Thus, R3Ph and other phase fault resistive reach settings must be set to avoid the heaviest allowable loading on the feeder. An example is shown in Figure 3 below, where the worst case loading has been determined as point Z, calculated from: Impedance magnitude, Leading phase angle, Where: kV MVA PF = = = Rated line voltage (kV); Maximum loading, taking the short term overloading during out ages of parallel circuits (MVA); Worst case lagging power factor. Z Z = = kV2 / MVA cos1 (PF)
Zone 3
R
R3PG-R4PG
Z LOAD
Zone 4
P0475ENa
FIGURE 4 - RESISTIVE REACHES FOR LOAD AVOIDANCE As shown in the Figure, R3Ph-R4Ph is set such as to avoid point Z by a suitable margin. Zone 3 must never reach more than 80% of the distance from the line characteristic impedance (shown dotted), towards Z. However, where power swing blocking is used, a larger impedance (including R) characteristic surrounds zones 3 and 4, and it is essential also that load does not encroach upon this characteristic. For this reason, R3Ph would be set 60% of the distance from the line characteristic impedance towards Z. A setting between the calculated minimum and maximum should be applied. R/Z ratio: For best zone reach accuracy, the resistive reach of each zone would not normally be set greater than 10 times the corresponding zone reach. This avoids relay overreach or underreach where the protected line is exporting or importing power at the instant of fault inception. The resistive reach of any other zone cannot be set greater than R3Ph, and where zone 4 is used to provide reverse directional decisions for Blocking or Permissive Overreach schemes, the zone 2 elements used in the scheme must satisfy R2Ph (R3PhR4Ph) x 80%.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.7.7 Resistive Reach Calculation - Earth Fault Elements
The resistive reach setting of the relay earth fault elements (RG) should be set to cover the desired level of earth fault resistance, but to avoid operation with minimum load impedance. Fault resistance would comprise arc-resistance and tower footing resistance. In addition, for best reach accuracy, the resistive reach of any zone of the relay would not normally be greater than 10 times the corresponding earth loop reach. EXPERT SECTION As shown in Figure 4 (section 2.7.6), R3G R4G is set such as to avoid point Z (minimum load impedance) by a suitable margin. R3G R4G 80% 80% Z minimum load impedance Umin/3 1,2 x Imax
Umin: minimum phase/phase voltage in normal condition without fault Imax: maximum load current in normal condition without fault
However, where Power Swing blocking is used, a larger impedance surrounds zone 3 and zone 4, and it is essential also, that load does not encroach upon the characteristic. [(R3G R4G) R] 80% Z min load With R = 0,032 x f x R load min f: power swing frequency R load min: minimum load resistance
A typical resistive reach coverage would be 40 on the primary system. The same load impedance as in section 2.4.4 must be avoided. Thus R3G is set such as to avoid point Z by a suitable margin. Zone 3 must never reach more than 80% of the distance from the line characteristic impedance (shown dotted in Figure 3), towards Z. For high resistance earth faults, the situation may arise where no distance elements could operate. In this case it will be necessary to provide supplementary earth fault protection, for example using the relay Channel Aided DEF protection. 2.7.8 Effects of Mutual Coupling on Distance Settings Where overhead lines are connected in parallel or run in close proximity for the whole or part of their length, mutual coupling exists between the two circuits. The positive and negative sequence coupling is small and can be neglected. The zero sequence coupling is more significant and will affect relay measurement during earth faults with parallel line operation. Zero sequence mutual coupling will cause a distance relay to underreach or overreach, depending on the direction of zero sequence current flow in the parallel line. However, it can be shown that this underreach or overreach will not affect relay discrimination during parallel line operation (ie. it is not be possible to overreach for faults beyond the protected line and neither will it be possible to underreach to such a degree that no zone 1 overlap exists). A channel-aided scheme will therefore still respond to faults within the protected line and remain secure during external faults. Some applications exist, however, where the effects of mutual coupling should be addressed. 2.7.9 Effect of Mutual Coupling on Zone 1 Setting For the case shown in Figure 5, where one circuit of a parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends, an earth fault at the remote bus may result in incorrect operation of the zone 1 earth fault elements. It may be desirable to reduce the zone 1 earth loop reach for this application. This can be achieved using an alternative setting group within the relay, in which the residual compensation factor kZ1 is set at a lower value than normal (typically 80% of normal kZ1).

Z1 G/F (Optional) Z1 G/F (Normal)
ZMO
P3048ENa
FIGURE 5 - ZONE 1 REACH CONSIDERATIONS 2.7.10 Effect of Mutual Coupling on Zone 2 Setting If the double circuit line to be protected is long and there is a relatively short adjacent line, it is difficult to set the reach of the zone 2 elements to cover 120% of the protected line impedance for all faults, but not more than 50% of the adjacent line. This problem can be exacerbated when a significant additional allowance has to be made for the zero-sequence mutual impedance in the case of earth faults (see Section 2.4.6). For parallel circuit operation the relay Zone 2 earth fault elements will tend to underreach. Therefore, it is desirable to boost the setting of the earth fault elements such that they will have a comparable reach to the phase fault elements. Increasing the residual compensation factor kZ2 for zone 2 will ensure adequate fault coverage. Under single circuit operation, no mutual coupling exists, and the zone 2 earth fault elements may overreach beyond 50% of the adjacent line, necessitating time discrimination with other Zone 2 elements. Therefore, it is desirable to reduce the earth fault settings to that of the phase fault elements for single circuit operation, as shown in Figure 5. Changing between appropriate settings can be achieved by using the alternative setting groups available in the relay series relays.
Z2 ' Boost ' G/F Z2 PH
ZMO
(i) Group 1 Z2 ' Reduced ' G/F Z2 PH
(ii) Group 2
P3049ENa
FIGURE 6 - MUTUAL COUPLING EXAMPLE - ZONE 2 REACH CONSIDERATIONS
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.8 Distance protection schemes
The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. Alternatively, the aided DEF protection can share the distance protection signalling channel, and the same scheme logic. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. The relays include basic five-zone distance scheme logic for stand-alone operation (where no signalling channel is available) and logic for a number of optional additional schemes. The features of the basic scheme will be available whether or not an additional scheme has been selected.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 30/220 2.8.1 Settings Menu text Default setting Setting range Min Group 1 Distance schemes Program Mode Standard Mode Standard Scheme Basic + Z1X Standard Scheme Open Scheme Max
Step size
Basic + Z1X, POP Z1, POP Z2, PUP Z2, PUP Fwd, BOP Z1, BOP Z2. Phase to Ground Fault Enabled, Phase to Phase Fault Enabled, Both Enabled. Force 3 Poles, 1 Pole Z1 & CR, 1 Pole Z1 Z2 & CR. None, CsZ1, CsZ2, CsZ4. None, PermZ1, PermZ2, PermFwd, BlkZ1, BlkZ2. 0 0 1s 0.15s 0.002s 0.002s
Fault Type
Both Enabled
Trip Mode
Force 3 Poles
Sig. Send Zone Dist CR Tp tReversal Guard Unblocking Logic TOR-SOTF Mode
None None 0.02s 0.02s None 00000000110000
None, Loss of Guard, Loss of Carrier. Bit 0: TOR Z1 Bit 1: TOR Z2 Bit 2: TOR Z3 Bit 3: TOR All Zones Bit 4: TOR Dist. Scheme Bit 5: SOFT All Zones Bit 6: SOFT Lev. Det. Bit 7: SOFT Z1 Bit 8: SOFT Z2 Bit 9: SOFT Z3 Bit 0A: SOFT Z1 + Rev Bit 0B: SOFT Z2 + Rev Bit 0C: SOFT Dist. Scheme Bit 0D: SOFT Disable Disabled or Enabled
Z1 Ext. on Chan. Fail Weak Infeed WI: Mode Status WI: Single Pole Trip WI: V< Thres. WI: Trip Time Delay Loss of Load LoL: Mode Status LoL: Chan. Fail LoL: I< LoL: Window
Disabled
Disabled Disabled 45V 0.06s
Disabled, Echo, WI Trip & Echo. Disabled or Enabled 10V 0 70V 1s 5V 0.002s
Disabled Disabled 0.5 x In 0.04s
Disabled or Enabled Disabled or Enabled 0.05 x In 0.01s 1 x In 0.1s 0.05 x In 0.01s
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.8.2 2.8.2.1 Carrier send & Trip logic Carrier send can be triggered by Zone1 (CSZ1) Zone2 (CSZ2) Zone4 Reverse (CSZ4) Remarks:
1. CSZ1 means: "carrier send if Z1 detected" 2. The carrier send in Z4 is managed by "Reverse", instead of Z4 (because Reverse decision starts quicker than Z4).
The zones decision logic is described as below:
Z1' Z2' Z4' Z2'(*)
P0476XXa
Remark:
Z2'(*) if overlapping zone enabled in MiCOM S1
PDist-CS = (Z1' + Z2').CSZ2 + Z1'.CSZ1 + Reverse.CSZ4 + WI_CS The complete logic with DEF integrated is: CS CS_DEF = PDist_CS + ( Share_Logic Share_Logic_DEF. DEF_CS) logic with canal shared = Not Share_Logic_DEF. DEF_CS logic with canal independent
(There is a 10ms delay in drop of on the carried send to avoid a logic race between this signal and the zone pick up.) 2.8.2.2 Inputs Data Type CSZ1 CSZ2 CSZ4 Not Share_Logic_DEF Reverse' Z1' to Z4' Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Carrier send for zone 1 Carrier send for zone 2 Carrier send for zone 4 (reverse) DEF channel independent Fault detected Reverse Zone 1 to 4 decision (blocked by Pswing or Rguard) WI_CS DEF_CS Internal Logic Internal Logic Winfeed carrier send (Echo) DEF carrier send
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 32/220 2.8.2.3 Outputs Data Type CS CS_DEF 2.8.2.4 Trip logic IEC Standard 448.15.13 PUR (LFZR) or AUP PUR2 POR2 (LFZR) 448.15.14 BOR1 or BOP BOR2 BLOCK2 (LFZR) 448.15.11 448.15.16 PUP or PUTT POR1 or POP or POTT Carrier Trip Logic Send Z1 Z2.CR.T1 + Z1T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3T3... Internal Logic Internal Logic Description
Main channel Carrier send DEF channel Carrier send
Application Z1 = 80% ZL
Setting MiCOM PUP Z2
Z2
Z2.CR.T1 + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3T3...
Z1 = 80% ZL
POP Z2
Z4 Z4
Z1. CR .T1.Tp + Z1.T2 + Z2T2 + Z3T3... Z2. CR .T1.Tp + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3.T3...
Z1 > ZL Z1 = 80% ZL
BOP Z1 BOP Z2
Z1 Z1
Fwd.CR.T1 + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 +... Z1.CR.T1 + Z1.T2 Z2.T2 + Z3.T3...
Z1 = 80% ZL Z1 > ZL
PUP Fwd POP Z1
2.8.2.5
Tripping modes The tripping mode is settable (Distance scheme\Trip mode): Force 3P : Trip 3P in all cases 1PZ1 & CR : Trip 1Pole in T1 for fault in Z1 and also in case of Carrier Received (aided Trip) 1PZ1, Z2 & CR : Trip 1Pole for T1 & T2 in T1 for fault in Z1 and CR (aided Trip) and also in Z2 with CR
Several defined aided trip logic can be selected or an open logic can be designed by user (see also section 4.5 from chapter P44x/EN HW).
Unblocking
Basic + Aided Schemes + Weak-Infeed
Trip Distance Protection
PSB + RVG
TOR SOTF
LOL
PSB: Power swing blocking RVG: Reversal guard LOL: Loss of load
P0477ENa
FIGURE 7 - MIMIC DIAGRAM The zones unblocking/blocking logic with Power swing or Reversal guard is managed as explained in the scheme: Figure 3 (section 2.7) The unblocking function if enabled, carries out a function similar to Carrier receive logic. (see explanations in section 2.9.4) Weak infeed allows for the case where there may be no zone pick up from local end. TOR & SOTF applies specific logic in case of manual closing or AR closing logic. Trip Distance Protection manages the Trip order regarding the distance algorithm outputs, the type of trip1P or 3P, the distance timers, and the logic datas such as power swing blocking. Loss of Load manages a specific logic for tripping 3P in Z2 accelerated without carrier.
2.8.3
The Basic Scheme The Basic distance scheme is suitable for applications where no signalling channel is available. Zones 1, 2 and 3 are set as described in Sections 2.7.3 to 2.7.10. In general zones 1 and 2 provide main protection for the line or cable as shown in Figure 9 below, with zone 3 reaching further to provide back up protection for faults on adjacent circuits.
FIGURE 8 - SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1(GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\STANDARD MODE) 6 DIFFERENTS SETTABLE SCHEMES

Z2A ZL A Z1A Z1B Z2B
P3050XXa
FIGURE 9 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE BASIC SCHEME (NO REQUIREMENT FOR SIGNALLING CHANNEL) Key: A, B ZL = = Relay locations; Impedance of the protected line.

Protection A Z1' T1 tZ1 Z2' T2 tZ2 Z3' T3 tZ3 Zp' Tzp tZp Z4' T4 tZ4 & & & & & & Trip Trip & & & Protection B Z1' T1 tZ1 Z2' T2 tZ2 Z3' & T3 tZ3 Zp' Tzp tZp Z4' T4 tZ4
P0543ENa
FIGURE 10 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE BASIC SCHEME Figure 10 shows the tripping logic for the Basic scheme. Note that for the P441, P442 and P444 relays, zone timers tZ1 to tZ4 are started at the instant of fault detection, which is why they are shown as a parallel process to the distance zones. The use of an apostrophe in the logic (eg. the in Z1) indicates that protection zones are stabilised to avoid maloperation for transformer magnetising inrush current. The method used to achieve stability is based on second harmonic current detection. The Basic scheme incorporates the following features : Instantaneous zone 1 tripping. Alternatively, zone 1 can have an optional time delay of 0 to 10s. Time delayed tripping by zones 2, 3, 4 and P. Each with a time delay set between 0 and 10s. The Basic scheme is suitable for single or double circuit lines fed from one or both ends. The limitation of the Basic scheme is that faults in the end 20% sections of the line will be cleared after the zone 2 time delay. Where no signalling channel is available, then improved fault clearance times can be achieved through the use of a zone 1 extension scheme or by using loss of load logic, as described below. Under certain conditions however, these two schemes will still result in time delayed tripping. Where high speed protection is required over the entire line, then a channel aided scheme will have to be employed.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 36/220 2.8.4 Zone 1 Extension Scheme
Auto-reclosure is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish supply following a transient fault. A Zone 1 extension scheme may therefore be applied to a radial overhead feeder to provide high speed protection for transient faults along the whole of the protected line. Figure 11 shows the alternative reach selections for zone 1: Z1 or the extended reach Z1X.
Z1 Extension (A) ZL A Z1A B
Z1 Extension (B)
Z1B
P3052ENa
FIGURE 11 - ZONE 1 EXTENSION SCHEME DEFINIED AS DESCRIBED ABOVE: Z1 < Z1X < Z2 or Z1 < Z2 < Z1X
(with Z1 < ZL < Z1X)

In this scheme, zone 1X is enabled and set to overreach the protected line. A fault on the line, including one in the end 20% not covered by zone 1, will now result in instantaneous tripping followed by autoreclosure. Zone 1X has resistive reaches and residual compensation similar to zone 1. The autorecloser in the relay is used to inhibit tripping from zone 1X such that upon reclosure the relay will operate with Basic scheme logic only, to coordinate with downstream protection for permanent faults. Thus, transient faults on the line will be cleared instantaneously, which will reduce the probability of a transient fault becoming permanent. The scheme can, however, operate for some faults on an adjacent line, although this will be followed by autoreclosure with correct protection discrimination. Increased circuit breaker operations would occur, together with transient loss of supply to a substation. The time delays associated with extended zone Z1X are shown in Table 2 below: Scenario First fault trip Fault trip for persistent fault on autoreclose Z1X Time Delay = tZ1 = tZ2
TABLE 2 - TRIP TIME DELAYS ASSOCIATED WITH ZONE 1X The Zone 1 Extension scheme is selected by setting the Z1X Enable bit in the Zone Status function links to 1.
FIGURE 12 SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1 (GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\ZONE STATUS)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Remark:
To enable the Z1X logic, the DDB "Z1X extension" cell must be linked in the PSL (opto/reclaim time)
FIGURE 13 - DISTANCE SCHEME WITHOUT CARRIER & Z1 EXTENDED
Z1' T1
INP_Z1EXT
&
&
None
&
>1
Z1x'
Z1X channel fail
&
T2 Z2' & PDist_Trip
UNB_Alarm Z3' T3 Zp' Tzp Z4' T4 & & &
P0478ENa
FIGURE 14 Z1X TRIP LOGIC (Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic section 2.9.4)) 2.8.4.1 Inputs Data Type None INP_Z1EXT Z1x channel fail UNB_Alarm Z1x Z1 Z2 Z3 Configuration Digital input Configuration Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Description No distance scheme (basic scheme) Input for Z1 extended Z1X extension enabled on channel fail (UNB-CR. see Mode loss of guard or Loss of carrier) (See Unblocking logic) Z1X Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z1 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z2 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z3 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 38/220 Data Type Zp Z4 T1 T2 T3 Tzp T4 2.8.4.2 Outputs Data Type PDist_Dec 2.8.5 Internal logic Description Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Internal logic Description
Zp Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Z4 Decision (lock out by Power Swing) Elapse of distance timer 1 Elapse of distance timer 2 Elapse of distance timer 3 Elapse of distance timer p Elapse of distance timer 4
Trip order by Distance Protection
Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL) The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in Figure 15. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the advantage of not requiring a signalling channel. Alternatively, the logic can be chosen to be enabled when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed. This failure is detected by permissive scheme unblocking logic, or a Channel Out of Service (COS) opto input. Any fault located within the reach of Zone 1 will result in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker will be tripped in Zone 1 by the remote relay and the local relay can recognise this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy phases. This, coupled with operation of a Zone 2 comparator causes tripping of the local circuit breaker. Before an accelerated trip can occur, load current must have been detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip will occur if a Zone 2 comparator operates. A typical setting for this window is 40ms as shown in Figure 15, although this can be altered in the menu LoL: Window cell. The accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be deduced as follows : t Where: Z1d CB LDr = = = maximum downstream zone 1 trip time Breaker operating time Upstream level detector (LoL: I<) reset time = Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18ms
For circuits with load tapped off the protected line, care must be taken in setting the loss of load feature to ensure that the I< level detector setting is above the tapped load current. When selected, the loss of load feature operates in conjunction with the main distance scheme that is selected. In this way it provides high speed clearance for end zone faults when the Basic scheme is selected or, with permissive signal aided tripping schemes, it provides high speed back-up clearance for end zone faults if the channel fails. Note that loss of load tripping is only available where 3 pole tripping is used.
Z2 Z1
Z1
Z1
Z1 Z2
LOL-A LOL-B LOL-C
&
0 40ms
&
18ms 0
&
Z2
Trip
P3053ENa
FIGURE 15 - LOSS-OF-LOAD ACCELERATED TRIP SCHEME 2.8.5.1 Inputs Data Type Activ_LOL TRIP_Any LOL. channel fail Force_3P_Dist Force_3P_DEF Activ_WI WI_1pTrip PZ1, PZ2, PFwd, None Configuration Internal Logic Configuration Internal Logic Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Description Loss of Load activated (LOL) Any trip (internal or external) LOL enabled on channel fail (alarm carrier) Force Trip 3P in Distance Logic Force Trip 3P in DEF Logic Weak-infeed activated (Trip & Echo) WI 1Pole trip Underreach scheme : Z1 < ZL PZ1: permissive underreach Z1 PZ2: permissive underreach Z2 PFwd: permissive underreach forward None: no distance scheme (basic scheme) Underreach scheme in Z1 Carrier out of service Alarm Activated time window for Loss Of Load logic Threshold I< for phase A in LOL logic Threshold I< for phase B in LOL logic Threshold I< for phase C in LOL logic Faulty Phase A Faulty Phase B Faulty Phase C Faulty Phase AB Faulty Phase BC Faulty Phase AC Fault in Z2 (lockout by Pswing or RGuard)
Z1<ZL UNB_CR_Alarm LOL Wind IA_LOL< IB_LOL< IC_LOL< Flt A Flt B Flt C Flt AB Flt BC Flt AC Z2'
Configuration Internal Logic Configuration Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 40/220 2.8.5.2 Outputs Data Type LOL_Trip3p

Activ_LOL
TRIP _Any
Description 3P Trip by LOL logic
Internal Logic
Force_3P_Dist Force3P_DEF
Activ WI = WI/echo & WI_1pTrip = No
Yes 3p
&
LOL. channel fail UNB_CR_Alarm

PZ1, PZ2, PFwd
&
&
Z1<ZL
None
&
0 T
LOL Wind
Q R
&
IA_LOL<
IB_LOL<
&
IC_LOL<
&
Flt A Flt B Flt C Flt AB Flt BC Flt AC
1
&
T &
18 ms
S Q R
LOL_Trip3P
&
&
Z2'
P0479ENa
FIGURE 16 LOSS OF LOAD TRIP LOGIC
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.9 Channel-aided distance schemes
The following channel aided distance tripping schemes are available when the Standard program mode is selected: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes PUP Z2 and PUP Fwd; Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Schemes POP Z2 and POP Z1; Weak infeed logic to supplement permissive overreach schemes; Unblocking logic to supplement permissive schemes; Blocking Schemes BOP Z2 and BOP Z1; Current reversal guard logic to prevent maloperation of any overreaching zone used in a channel aided scheme, when fault clearance is in progress on the parallel circuit of a double circuit line.
2.9.1
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes PUP Z2 and PUP Fwd To provide fast fault clearance for all faults, both transient and permanent, along the length of the protected circuit, it is necessary to use a signal aided tripping scheme. The simplest of these is the permissive underreach protection scheme (PUP), of which two variants are offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. The channel for a PUP scheme is keyed by operation of the underreaching zone 1 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has detected a forward fault upon receipt of this signal, the relay will operate with no additional delay. Faults in the last 20% of the protected line are therefore cleared with no intentional time delay. Listed below are some of the main features/requirements for a permissive underreaching scheme: Only a simplex signalling channel is required. The scheme has a high degree of security since the signalling channel is only keyed for faults within the protected line. If the remote terminal of a line is open then faults in the remote 20% of the line will be cleared via the zone 2 time delay of the local relay. If there is a weak or zero infeed from the remote line end, (ie. current below the relay sensitivity), then faults in the remote 20% of the line will be cleared via the zone 2 time delay of the local relay. If the signalling channel fails, Basic distance scheme tripping will be available.
Z2A ZL A Z1A Z1B B
Z2B
P3054XXa
FIGURE 17 - ZONE 1 AND 2 REACHES FOR PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH SCHEMES
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 42/220 2.9.1.1
Permissive Underreach Protection, Accelerating Zone 2 (PUP Z2) This scheme is similar to that used in the other AREVA distance relays, allowing an instantaneous Z2 trip on receipt of the signal from the remote end protection. Figure 11 shows the simplified scheme logic. Send logic: Permissive trip logic:
Protection A
Zone 1 Zone 2 plus Channel Received.
Signal Send Z1' Z1' tZ1 Z3' tZ3 Zp' tZp Z4' tZ4 tZ2 & Z2' & & & & &
Protection B
Signal Send Z1' Z1' & tZ1 Z3' & tZ3 Zp' & tZp Z4' & tZ4 tZ2 & Z2' &
P3055ENa
Trip
Trip
FIGURE 18 - THE PUP Z2 PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.9.1.2
Permissive Underreach Protection Tripping via Forward Start (PUP Fwd) This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA EPAC and PXLN relays, allowing an instantaneous Z2 or Z3 trip on receipt of the signal from the remote end protection. Figure 19 shows the simplified scheme logic. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Zone 1 Underimpedance Start within any Forward Distance Zone, plus Channel Received.
Signal Send Z1'
Protection A
Protection B
Signal Send Z1' Z1'
Z1' tZ1 Z3' tZ3 Zp' tZp Z4' tZ4 tZ2 & Z2' Fwd' <Z & & & & & & Trip Trip & & & &
tZ1 Z3' tZ3 Zp'
1
&
tZp Z4' tZ4 tZ2 Z2' Fwd' <Z

P3056ENa
FIGURE 19 - THE PUP FWD PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4) Key: Fwd <Z = = Forward fault detection; Underimpedance start by Z2 or Z3.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 44/220 2.9.2
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Schemes POP Z2 and POP Z1 The P441, P442 and P444 relays offer two variants of permissive overreach protection schemes (POP), having the following common features/requirements: The scheme requires a duplex signalling channel to prevent possible relay maloperation due to spurious keying of the signalling equipment. This is necessary due to the fact that the signalling channel is keyed for faults external to the protected line. The POP Z2 scheme may be more advantageous than permissive underreach schemes for the protection of short transmission lines, since the resistive coverage of the Zone 2 elements may be greater than that of the Zone 1 elements. Current reversal guard logic is used to prevent healthy line protection maloperation for the high speed current reversals experienced in double circuit lines, caused by sequential opening of circuit breakers. If the signalling channel fails, Basic distance scheme tripping will be available.
2.9.2.1
Permissive Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 2 (POP Z2) This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP and LFZR relays. Figure 20 shows the zone reaches, and Figure 21 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the overreaching zone 2 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 2, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. The POP Z2 scheme also uses the reverse looking zone 4 of the relay as a reverse fault detector. This is used in the current reversal logic and in the optional weak infeed echo feature. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Zone 2 Zone 2 plus Channel Received.
Z2A ZL A Z1A Z1B B
Z2B
P3054XXa
FIGURE 20 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE POP Z2 SCHEME

Signal Send Z2' Z1' tZ1 Z3' tZ3 Zp' tZp Z4' tZ4 tZ2 & Z2' & & & Z2' & & & & & & Protection A Protection B Signal Send Z2' Z1' tZ1 Z3' tZ3 Zp'
Trip
Trip
&
tZp Z4'
1
&
tZ4 tZ2
P3058ENa
FIGURE 21 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE POP Z2 SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4) 2.9.2.2 Permissive Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 1 (POP Z1) This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 22 shows the zone reaches, and Figure 23 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of zone 1 elements set to overreach the protected line. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 1, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. The POP Z1 scheme also uses the reverse looking zone 4 of the relay as a reverse fault detector. This is used in the current reversal logic and in the optional weak infeed echo feature. NOTE: Send logic: Permissive trip logic: Should the signalling channel fail, the fastest tripping in the Basic scheme will be subject to the tZ2 time delay. Zone 1 Zone 1 plus Channel Received.
Z2A Z1A A ZL B
Z1B Z2B
P3059XXa
FIGURE 22 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE POP Z1 SCHEME

Protection A

Protection B
Signal Send Z1'
Signal Send Z1'

Z2'
Z2'
tZ2
Z3'
&
&
tZ2
Z3'
tZ3
Zp'
&
&
tZ3
Zp'
tZp
Z4'
&
&
1
&
Trip
Trip
1
&
tZp
Z4'
tZ4
tZ4
& & Z1' Z1' & &
tZ1
tZ1
P3060ENa
FIGURE 23 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE POP Z1 SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4) 2.9.3 Permissive Overreach Schemes Weak Infeed Features Weak infeed logic can be enabled to run in parallel with all the permissive schemes. Two options are available: WI Echo, and WI Tripping. NOTE: The 2 modes are blocked during Fuse failure conditions.
Power swing detection
Def_Reverse Reverse Distance start FFUS_Confirmed UNB_CR
0 T
150 ms
& WI Logic confirmed
0 T
60 ms
&
Pulse Timer
200 ms
Activ_WI
Echo or WI/echo
P0480ENa
FIGURE 24 - WEAK INFEED MODE ACTIVATION LOGIC
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Weak Infeed Echo
For permissive schemes, a signal would only be sent if the required signal send zone were to detect a fault. However, the fault current infeed at one line end may be so low as to be insufficient to operate any distance zones, and risks a failure to send the signal. Also, if one circuit breaker had already been left open, the current infeed would be zero. These are termed weak infeed conditions, and may result in slow fault clearance at the strong infeed line end (tripping after time tZ2). To avoid this slow tripping, the weak infeed relay can be set to echo back any channel received to the strong infeed relay (ie. to immediately send a signal once a signal has been received). This allows the strong infeed relay to trip instantaneously in its permissive trip zone. The additional signal send logic is:
WI logic
&
UNB_CR
WI_CS
Echo send: (NB: For UNB_CR explanation see Unblocking logic in next section 2.9.4) Weak Infeed Tripping
Weak infeed echo logic ensures an aided trip at the strong infeed terminal but not at the weak infeed. The P441, P442 and P444 relays also have a setting option to allow tripping of the weak infeed circuit breaker of a faulted line. Three undervoltage elements, Va<, Vb< and Vc< are used to detect the line fault at the weak infeed terminal, with a common setting typically 70% of rated phase-neutral voltage. This voltage check prevents tripping during spurious operations of the channel or during channel testing.
VA<_WI
&
CB 52a_phA VB<_WI
WI_A & FLT_A WI_B & FLT_B WI_C
&
CB 52a_phB VC<_WI
&
CB 52a_phC
UNB_CR
&
FLT_B
P0481ENa
FIGURE 25 - WEAK INFEED PHASE SELECTION LOGIC UNB_CR is used as a filter to avoid a permanent phase selection which could be maintained if Cbaux signals are not mapped in the PSL (when line is opened).
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 48/220 The additional weak infeed trip logic is: Weak infeed trip:
No Distance Zone Operation, plus reverse directional decision, plus V<, plus Channel Received.
Weak infeed tripping is time delayed according to the WI: Trip Time Delay value, usually set at 60ms. Due to the use of phase segregated undervoltage elements, single pole tripping can be enabled for WI trips if required. If single pole tripping is disabled a three pole trip will result after the time delay.
WI_A
WI_B
1
&
WI/echo
WI_C
WI_PhaseA
Activ_WI
Trip1P_WI
Yes
&
WI_PhaseB
&
1
&
WI_PhaseC
P0482ENa
FIGURE 26 WEAK INFEED TRIP DECISION LOGIC
WI_Phase A
T
WI_Phase B
1
TtripWI
WI_Phase C
&
WI_TripA
&
WI_TripB
&
Autor_WI
WI_TripC
P0531ENa
FIGURE 27 - WEAK INFEED TRIP LOGIC
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.9.3.1 Inputs Data Type Activ_WI Trip1P_WI Any Pole Dead Distance start Reverse FFUS_Confirmed Power swing UNB_CR VA<_WI VB<_WI VC<_WI CB52a_A, CB52a_B, CB52a_C TtripWI 2.9.3.2 Outputs Data Type WI_CS WI_TripA WI_TripB WI_TripC 2.9.4 Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Description Carrier Send (echo) Trip Phase A by WI logic Trip Phase A by WI logic Trip Phase A by WI logic Configuration Configuration Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Internal Logical Configuration Description
Weak infeed mode selection (Disable, Echo, WI/echo) Trip 1P in Weak infeed mode Minimum 1 pole is open Convergency of any impedance Loop start of distance Fault detected in Reverse direction Fuse Failure confirmed Power swing detection Carrier Received Phase A selection by WI Phase B selection by WI Phase C selection by WI Dead Pole by phase A/B/C (detected by interlocking contacts 52a/52b) Weak-Infeed Trip Timer
Permissive Scheme Unblocking Logic Two modes of unblocking logic are available for use with permissive schemes, (Blocking schemes are excluded). The unblocking logic creates the : "UNB_Alarm" and the : "UNB_CR" signals, which depend upon: Inputs signals [binary inputs: CR (Carrier Receive) COS (Carrier Out of Service)] Settings used for the distance channel & DEF aided trip channel Shared or independent logic between DEF & Distance Carrier Out of Service detected
Different modes are selectable : None (basic mode) Loss of Guard mode Loss of Carrier mode
Two types of carrier received signals are used: 2.9.4.1 None Carrier received (INP_CR - binary input) Carrier Out of Service (INP_COS - binary input for distance logic) and (INP_COS_DEF - binary input for DEF logic)
The status of opto is copied directly :

UNB_ALARM = INP_COS + INP_COS_DEF UNB_CR = INP_CR UNB_CR_DEF = INP_CR_DEF 2.9.4.2 Loss of Guard Mode This mode is designed for use with frequency shift keyed (FSK) power line carrier communications. When the protected line is healthy a guard frequency is sent between line ends, to verify that the channel is in service. However, when a line fault occurs and a permissive trip signal must be sent over the line, the power line carrier frequency is shifted to a new (trip) frequency. Thus, distance relays should receive either the guard, or trip frequency, but not both together. With any permissive scheme, the PLC communications are transmitted over the power line which may contain a fault. So, for certain fault types the line fault can attenuate the PLC signals, so that the permissive signal is lost and not received at the other line end. To overcome this problem, when the guard is lost and no trip frequency is received, the relay opens a window of time during which the permissive scheme logic acts as though a trip signal had been received. Two opto inputs to the relay need to be assigned, one is the Channel Receive opto, the second is designated Loss of Guard (the inverse function to guard received). The function logic is summarised in Table 3.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 System Condition Healthy Line Permissive Channel Received No Loss of Guard No Yes Yes No Permissive Trip Allowed No Yes Yes, during a 150ms window No
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 51/220 Alarm Generated No No Yes, delayed on pickup by 150ms Yes, delayed on pickup by 150ms
Internal Line Fault Yes Unblock Signalling Anomaly No Yes
TABLE 3 - LOGIC FOR THE LOSS OF GUARD FUNCTION The window of time during which the unblocking logic is enabled starts 10ms after the guard signal is lost, and continues for 150ms. The 10ms delay gives time for the signalling equipment to change frequency as in normal operation. For the duration of any alarm condition, zone 1 extension logic will be invoked if the option Z1 Ext on Chan. Fail has been Enabled.
150 ms
S Q
UNB Alarm
=1
Indicates by digital input the Loss of guard
INP COS
Pulse Timer
200 ms
&
INP CR
1
10 ms
UNB CR
0 &
Pulse Timer
150 ms
S Q R
P3061ENa
FIGURE 28 - LOSS OF GUARD LOGIC INP_CR 0 1 0 1 INP_COS 0 1 1 0 UNB_CR 0 1 1 (Window) 0 UNB_Alarm 0 0 1 (delayed) 1 (delayed)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 52/220 2.9.4.3 Loss of Carrier
In this mode the signalling equipment used is such that a carrier/data messages are continuously transmitted across the channel, when in service. For a permissive trip signal to be sent, additional information is contained in the carrier (eg. a trip bit is set), such that both the carrier and permissive trip are normally received together. Should the carrier be lost at any time, the relay must open the unblocking window, in case a line fault has also affected the signalling channel. Two opto inputs to the relay need to be assigned, one is the Channel Receive opto, the second is designated Loss of Carrier (the inverse function to carrier received). The function logic is summarised in Table 4. System Condition Healthy Line Permissive Channel Received No Loss of Guard No No Yes Yes Permissive Trip Allowed No Yes Yes, during a 150ms window No Alarm Generated No No Yes, delayed on pickup by 150ms Yes, delayed on pickup by 150ms
Internal Line Fault Yes Unblock Signalling Anomaly No No
TABLE 4 - LOGIC FOR THE LOSS OF CARRIER FUNCTION The window of time during which the unblocking logic is enabled starts 10ms after the guard signal is lost, and continues for 150ms. For the duration of any alarm condition, zone 1 extension logic will be invoked if the option Z1 Ext on Chan. Fail has been Enabled.
150 ms
S Q
UNB Alarm
Pulse Timer Indicates by digital input the Loss of Carrier INP COS INP CR
200 ms
& 1
10 ms
UNB CR
&
S Q R
Pulse Timer
150 ms
P3062ENa
FIGURE 29 - LOSS OF CARRIER
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 INP_CR 0 0 1 1 NOTE: INP_COS 0 1 0 1 UNB_CR 0 1 (Window) 1 0
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 53/220 UNB_Alarm 0 1 (delayed) 0 1 (delayed)
For DEF the logic will used depende upon which settings are enabled:
Same channel (shared)
In this case, the DEF channel is the Main Distance channel signal (the scheme & contacts of carrier received will be identical) 2.9.4.4 Independent channel (2 Different channels) (2 independent contacts)
Inputs Data Type INP_CR INP_CR_DEF INP_COS INP_COS_DEF Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Description Distance channel carrier received DEF channel carrier received Carrier Out of Service - Distance channel Carrier Out of Service DEF channel
2.9.4.5
Outputs Data Type UNB_CR UNB_CR _DEF UNB_Alarm internal logic internal logic internal logic Description Internal carrier received Distance channel Internal carrier received DEF channel Alarm channel Main & DEF
2.9.5
Blocking Schemes BOP Z2 and BOP Z1 The P441, P442 and P444 relays offer two variants of blocking overreach protection schemes (BOP). With a blocking scheme, the signalling channel is keyed from the reverse looking zone 4 element, which is used to block fast tripping at the remote line end. Features are as follows: BOP schemes require only a simplex signalling channel. Reverse looking Zone 4 is used to send a blocking signal to the remote end to prevent unwanted tripping. When a simplex channel is used, a BOP scheme can easily be applied to a multiterminal line provided that outfeed does not occur for any internal faults. The blocking signal is transmitted over a healthy line, and so there are no problems associated with power line carrier signalling equipment. BOP schemes provides similar resistive coverage to the permissive overreach schemes. Fast tripping will occur at a strong source line end, for faults along the protected line section, even if there is weak or zero infeed at the other end of the protected line. If a line terminal is open, fast tripping will still occur for faults along the whole of the protected line length. If the signalling channel fails to send a blocking signal during a fault, fast tripping will occur for faults along the whole of the protected line, but also for some faults within the next line section.
If the signalling channel is taken out of service, the relay will operate in the conventional Basic mode. A current reversal guard timer is included in the signal send logic to prevent unwanted trips of the relay on the healthy circuit, during current reversal situations on a parallel circuit. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping, Tp, must be used, as follows: = Max. signalling channel operating time + 14ms
Recommended Tp setting 2.9.5.1
Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 2 (BOP Z2) This scheme is similar to that used in the other ALSTOM distance relays. Figure 30 shows the zone reaches, and Figure 31 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse zone 4 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in zone 2, then it will operate after the Tp delay if no block is received. Send logic: Trip logic: Reverse Zone 4 Zone 2, plus Channel NOT Received, delayed by Tp.
Z2A ZL A Z1A B
Z4A
Z1B Z2B
Z4B
P3063XXa
FIGURE 30 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE BOP Z2 SCHEME

Protection A Protection B
Signal Emission Send Z4' Tlac

Z1'
Signal Emission Send Z4' Tlac

Z1'
tZ1 T1
Z3'
&
&
tZ1 T1
Z3'
tZ3 T3
Zp'
&
&
tZ3 T3
Zp'
tZp Tzp
Z4'
&
&
1
&
Trip
Trip
1
&
tZp Tzp
Z4'
tZ4 T4
tZ4 T4
Tp
&
&
Tp
Z2'
Z2' & &
tZ2 T2
tZ2 T2
P0533ENa
FIGURE 31 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE BOP Z2 SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.9.5.2 Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 1 (BOP Z1)
This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 32 shows the zone reaches, and Figure 33 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse zone 4 elements of the relay. If the remote relay has picked up in overreaching zone 1, then it will operate after the Tp delay if no block is received. NOTE: Send logic: Trip logic: The fastest tripping is always subject to the Tp delay. Reverse Zone 4 Zone 1, plus Channel NOT Received, delayed by Tp.
Z4A
Z2A Z1A A ZL B
Z1B Z2B
Z4B
P3065XXa
FIGURE 32 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE BOP Z1 SCHEME
Signal Send Z4' Z2' tZ2 Z3' tZ3 Zp' tZp Z4' tZ4 & & & &
Protection A
Protection B
Signal Send Z4' Z2' & tZ2
Z3' & tZ3 Zp' &
Trip
Trip
1
&
tZp Z4' tZ4
& Z1' tZ1 Tp &
&
Z1' & tZ1 Tp
P3066ENa
FIGURE 33 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE BOP Z1 SCHEME (SEE TRIP LOGIC TABLE IN SECTION 2.8.2.4)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 56/220 2.10 Distance schemes current reversal guard logic
For double circuit lines, the fault current direction can change in one circuit when circuit breakers open sequentially to clear the fault on the parallel circuit. The change in current direction causes the overreaching distance elements to see the fault in the opposite direction to the direction in which the fault was initially detected (settings of these elements exceed 150% of the line impedance at each terminal). The race between operation and resetting of the overreaching distance elements at each line terminal can cause the Permissive Overreach, and Blocking schemes to trip the healthy line. A system configuration that could result in current reversals is shown in Figure 34. For a fault on line L1 close to circuit breaker B, as circuit breaker B trips it causes the direction of current flow in line L2 to reverse.
t2(C) Fault A L1 B A L1 t2(D) Fault B
Strong source
L2
Weak source
L2
Note how after circuit breaker B on line L1 opens the direction of current flow in line L2 is reversed.
P3067ENa
FIGURE 34 - CURRENT REVERSAL IN DOUBLE CIRCUIT LINES (See the zone description in section 2.4 unblock/blocking logical scheme) 2.10.1 Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard The current reversal guard incorporated in the POP scheme logic is initiated when the reverse looking Zone 4 elements operate on a healthy line. Once the reverse looking Zone 4 elements have operated, the relays permissive trip logic and signal send logic are inhibited at substation D (Figure 34). The reset of the current reversal guard timer is initiated when the reverse looking Zone 4 resets. A time delay tREVERSAL GUARD is required in case the overreaching trip element at end D operates before the signal send from the relay at end C has reset. Otherwise this would cause the relay at D to over trip. Permissive tripping for the relays at D and C substations is enabled again, once the faulted line is isolated and the current reversal guard time has expired. The recommended setting is: tREVERSAL GUARD 2.10.2 = Maximum signalling channel reset time + 35ms.
Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard The current reversal guard incorporated in the BOP scheme logic is initiated when a blocking signal is received to inhibit the channel-aided trip. When the current reverses and the reverse looking Zone 4 elements reset, the blocking signal is maintained by the timer tREVERSAL GUARD. Thus referring to Figure 34, the relays in the healthy line are prevented from over tripping due to the sequential opening of the circuit breakers in the faulted line. After the faulty line is isolated, the reverse-looking Zone 4 elements at substation C and the forward looking elements at substation D will reset. The recommended setting is: Where Duplex signalling channels are used: tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel operating time + 14ms.
Where Simplex signalling channels are used: tREVERSAL GUARD = Maximum signalling channel operating time minimum signalling channel reset time + 14ms.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.11 Distance schemes in the open programming mode
When a scheme is required which is not covered in the Standard modes above, the Open programming mode can be selected. The user then has the facility to decide which distance relay zone is to be used to key the signalling channel, and what type of aided scheme runs when the channel is received. The signal send zone options are shown in Table 5, and the aided scheme options on channel receipt are shown in Table 6. Setting None CsZ1 CsZ2 CsZ4 Signal Send Zone No Signal Send Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 4 Function To configure a Basic scheme. To configure a Permissive scheme. To configure a Permissive scheme. To configure a Blocking scheme.
TABLE 5 - SIGNAL SEND ZONES IN OPEN SCHEMES Setting None PermZ1 PermZ2 PermFwd BlkZ1 BlkZ2 Aided Scheme None Function To configure a Basic scheme.
To configure a Permissive scheme where Zone 1 can only trip if a channel is received. To configure a Permissive scheme where Zone 2 can trip without waiting for tZ2 timeout if a channel is received. To configure a Permissive scheme where any forward distance zone start will cause an aided trip if a channel is received. To configure a Blocking scheme where Zone 1 can only trip if a channel is NOT received. To configure a Blocking scheme where Zone 2 can trip without waiting for tZ2 timeout if a channel is NOT received. TABLE 6 - AIDED SCHEME OPTIONS ON CHANNEL RECEIPT
Where appropriate, the tREVERSAL GUARD and Tp timer (in case of blocking scheme for covering the time transmission) settings will appear in the relay menu. Further customising of distance schemes can be achieved using the Programmable Scheme Logic to condition send and receive logic. 2.12 Switch On To Fault and Trip On Reclose protection Switch on to fault protection (SOTF) is provided for high speed clearance of any detected fault immediately following manual closure of the circuit breaker. SOTF protection remains enabled for 500ms following circuit breaker closure, detected via the CB Man Close input or CB close with CB control or Internal detection with all pole dead (see Figure 37), or for the duration of the close pulse on internal detection. [Instantaneous three pole tripping (and auto-reclose blocking) can be also selected (AR lock out by BAR Figure 80 in AR section) See BAR logic in Figure 80 AR description section]. Trip on reclose protection (TOR) is provided for high speed clearance of any detected fault immediately following autoreclosure of the circuit breaker. Instantaneous three pole tripping (TOR logic) can be selected for faults detected by various elements, (See MiCOM S1 settings description above). TOR protection remains enabled for 500ms following circuit breaker closure. The use of a TOR scheme is usually advantageous for most distance schemes, since a persistent fault at the remote end of the line can be cleared instantaneously after reclosure of the breaker, rather than after the zone 2 time delay. The options for SOTF and TOR are found in the Distance Schemes menu.
(7 additional settable bits are available from version A3.1) and are as shown below: Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 DISTANCE SCHEMES TOR-SOTF Mode Bit 0: TOR Z1 Enabled, Bit 1:TOR Z2 Enabled, Bit 2: TOR Z3 Enabled, TOR Dist scheme Bit 0 to 4 Default: bit 4 Bit 3:TOR All Zones, Bit 4:TOR Dist. Scheme . Bit 5 : SOTF All Zones Bit 6 : SOTF Lev. Detect. Max Step size
14 bits
From version A3.1: Bit 7 : SOTF Z1 Enabled Bit 8 : SOTF Z2 Enabled SOTF all Zones Bit 5 to D Default: bit 5 Bit 9 : SOTF Z3 Enabled Bit A: SOTF Z1+Rev Bit B: SOTF Z2+Rev Bit C: SOTF Dist. Scheme Bit D: SOTF Disable SOTF Delay 110sec 10sec 3600sec 1 sec
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.1 Initiating TOR/SOTF Protection SOTF/TOR Activated
2 signals are issued from the logic: TOR Enable - SOTF Enable (See DDB description in appendix from that chapter). There is a difference between them due to the AR (internal or external) which must be blocked in SOTF logic. The detection of open pole is based on the activation of : Any Pole Dead (at least one pole opened). It is a OR logic between the internal analog detection (level detectors) or the external detection (given by CB status : 52A/52B, which is requested in case of VT Bus side). The Dead pole Level Detectors V< and I< per phase are settable as described belows: V< is either a fixed threshold 20% Vn or equal to V Dead Line threshold of the check synchro function if enabled, (default value for V< dead line = 20% VN) I< is either a fixed threshold of 5% In or equal to the I< threshold of the Breaker Failure protection (default value for I< CB fail = 5% IN).
TOR Enable logic is activated in 2 cases : 1. When internal AR is activated or when the reclaim signal from an external AR is connected to a digital input (opto):
As soon as the reclaim time starts, the TOR Enable is activated . It will be reset at the end of the internal or external reclaim time. 2. Without any reclaim time (internal AR disabled or external opto input Reclaim Time not assigned in the PSL):
TOR Enable will be activated during a 200 ms time window, following the detection of pole dead detection. The TOR logic will be reset (TOR Enable) ONLY 500 ms after the drop off of any pole dead detection. This behaviour has been designed to avoid any maloperation on a parallel line, in case of an incorrect Any Pole Dead detection performed by the internal level detectors (Ex: Fault front of Busbar on a parallel line and weak source on the other end of the line) A delay of 200ms will allow the adjacent line to be tripped and the level detectors will then reset the timer : TOR protection logic is enabled any time that any circuit breaker pole has been open longer than 200ms but not longer than 110s default value (ie. First shot autoreclosure is in progress)- the timer is configurable from version A3.0 /allows variation of the duration when dead pole is detected before the internal logic detects line dead and activates the SOTF logic and also where the relay logic detects that further delayed autoreclose shots are in progress.
Trip
Reclosing
Any Pole Dead 200 ms TOR Enable P0532ENa 500 ms
SOTF protection is enabled any time that the circuit breaker has been open 3 pole for longer than 110s, that timer is configurable from version A3.0 /allows variation of the duration when dead pole is detected before the internal logic detects line dead and activates the SOTF logic and autoreclosure is not in progress. Thus, SOTF protection is enabled for manual reclosures, not for autoreclosure.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 60/220 SOTF Enable logic is activated in 2 cases:
1.
If no external closing command (manual or by remote communication via control system) is present :
When the internal levels detectors have detected a three pole open for more than 110 s (settable from A3.0); as soon as all poles are closed, then SOTF is enabled for 500 ms and then reset,
2.
When an external closing command (manual or by remote communication via control system) is present:
The SOTF logic is activated immediately. As soon as all the poles are closed (after the external closing order if a synchro condition is used in the PSL); SOTF is enable for 500msec and then is reset.
AR_RECLAIM >1 INP_RECLAIM
Pulse T
500 ms
>1
TOR Enable
1P or 3P AR INP_RECLAIM Assigned >1 T 0

200 ms
&
S >1 Q >1 R
Any Pole Dead
0 T
500 ms
>1 R Q
All Pole Dead
T 0
TSOTF Enable (by default:110 s)
SOTF Enable
>1 &
SOTF HS
CBC_Closing Order CB_Control activated &
INP_CB_Man_Close
&
P0485ENa
FIGURE 35 SOTF/TOR LOGIC - START
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.2 TOR-SOTF Trip Logic
During the TOR/SOTF 500ms window, individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the TOR-SOTF Mode function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable that zone, setting bits to 0 will disable distance zones. When enabled (Bit = 1), the zones will trip without waiting for their usual time delays. Thus tripping can even occur for close-up three phase short circuits where line connected VTs are used, and memory voltage for a directional decision is unavailable. Setting All Zones Enabled allows instantaneous tripping to occur for all faults within the trip characteristic shown in Figure 36 below. Note, the TOR/SOTF element has second harmonic current detection, to avoid maloperation where power transformers are connected in-zone, and inrush current would otherwise cause problems. Harmonic blocking of distance zones occurs when the magnitude of the second harmonic current exceeds 25% of the fundamental.
X Zone 4
Zone 3 Directional line (not used)

P0535ENa
FIGURE 36 - ALL ZONES DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC AVAILABLE FOR SOTF/TOR TRIPPING Test results from different settings selected in MiCOM S1. WARNING: MiCOM S1 DOES NOT DYNAMICALLY CHANGE THE SETTINGS, AND ONE SETTING MAY AFFECT ANOTHER.
SOTF Z2: means that an instantaneous 3 poles trip will occur for fault in Z1 or Z2 without waiting for the issue of the distance timer T1 or T2 only in case Z2 or Z1 are detected by the logic. T0 = instantaneous Trip Ts = Trip at the end of SOTF time window (500ms) T1 = 0, T2=200ms, Tzp=400ms, T3=600ms, T4=1s (Distance timer). The fault is maintained with a duration bigger than the 500msec SOTF time, until a trip occurs.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 62/220 SOTF Trip logic results Type of Fault Fault in Z1 Fault in Z2 SOTF selected Logic SOTF All Zone (Zp Fwd) SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 Fault in Zp Fwd Fault in Zp Rev
Fault in Z3
Fault in Z4
Same result SOTF trip if Zp Rev T0 T0 x DIST trip T3 DIST trip T3 SOTF trip T0 DIST trip T3 DIST trip T3 DIST trip T3 DIST trip T3 SOTF trip T3 DIST trip T3 DIST trip T3 SOTF trip T0
SOTF trip T0
SOTF Z1 (Zp Fwd) SOTF Z2 (Zp Fwd) SOTF Z3 (Zp Fwd) SOTF Z1+Rev (Zp Fwd) SOTF Z2+Rev (Zp Fwd) SOTF Z1+Rev (Zp Rev) SOTF Z2+Rev (Zp Rev) SOTF Dist. Sch. (Zp fwd) (With a 3Plogic) SOTF Disable (Distance scheme & 1P) No setting in SOTF (All Bits at 0) & No I>3 Level detectors
SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T1 DIST trip T1* DIST trip T1* SOTF trip T0
DIST trip T2 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 DIST trip T2 SOTF trip T0 DIST trip T2 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T2 DIST trip T2 DIST trip T2 SOTF trip T0
DIST trip TZp DIST trip TZp SOTF trip T0 DIST trip TZp DIST trip TZp x x SOTF trip TZp DIST trip TZp* DIST trip TZp SOTF trip T0
DIST trip T4 DIST trip T4 DIST trip T4 SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 DIST trip T4 DIST trip T4 SOTF trip T4 DIST trip T4 DIST trip T4 SOTF trip T0
x x x x SOTF trip T0 SOTF trip T0 x x x x
*No Ban Tri: Distance trip logic is applied without any 3P trip logic forced by SOTF. TOR Trip logic results Type of Fault Fault in Z1 TOR selected Logic TOR All Zone (Zp Fwd) TOR Z1 Enabled (Zp Fwd) TOR Z2 Enabled (Zp Fwd) TOR Z3 Enabled (Zp Fwd) TOR Dist.Scheme (logic POP/PUP) TOR trip T0 TOR trip T0 TOR trip T0 TOR trip T0 Dist trip T1 TOR trip T0 Dist trip T2 TOR trip T0 TOR trip T0 Dist trip T2 TOR trip T0 Dist trip Tp Dist trip Tp TOR trip T0 Dist trip Tp TOR trip T0 Dist trip Tp Dist trip Tp Dist trip Tp Dist trip Tp TOR trip T0 Dist trip T3 Dist trip T3 TOR trip T0 Dist trip T3 TOR trip T0 Dist trip T4 Dist trip T4 Dist trip T4 Dist trip T4 Fault in Z2 Fault in Zp Fwd Fault in Zp Rev Fault in Z3 Fault in Z4
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.3
Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose by I>3 Overcurrent Element (not filtered for inruch current): Inside the 500 ms time window initiated by SOTF/TOR logic, an instantaneous 3 phases trip logic will be issued, if a faulty current is measured over the I>3 threshold value (adjusted in MiCOM S1).
After the 500 ms TOR/SOTF time windows has ended, the I>3 overcurrent element remains in service with a trip time delay equal to the setting I>3 Time Delay. This element would trip for close-up high current faults, such as those where maintenance earth clamps are inadvertently left in position on line energisation. 2.12.4 Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose by Level Detectors TOR/SOTF level detectors (Bit6 in SOTF logic), allows an instantaneous 3 phases tripping from any low set I< level detector, provided that its corresponding Live Line level detector has not picked up within 20ms. When closing a circuit breaker to energize a healthy line, current would normally be detected above setting, but no trip results as the system voltage rapidly recovers to near nominal. Only when a line fault is present will the voltage fail to recover, resulting in a trip. SOTF/TOR trip by level detectors per phase: If Vphase< 70% Vn AND if Iphase> 5% In during 20 ms (to avoid any maloperation due to unstable contact during reclosing order), an instantaneous trip order is issued.
The logic diagram for this, and other modes of TOR/SOTF protection is shown in Figure 37:
T 0
20 ms
Va > Ia < Vb > Ib < Vc > Ic <
&
&
TOC A
&
T 0
20 ms
&
TOC B
&
T 0
20 ms
&
TOC C
SOTF LD Enable SOTF All Zones Enable
LD Enable
&
All Zones
SOTF Z1 Enable
&
Z1 &
&
SOTF Z1 + rev Enable
Zp Z4
Zp Reverse
& 1 &
SOTF Z2 + rev Enable
&
Z1+Z2
SOTF Z2 Enable SOTF Z3 Enable
&
1
SOTF/TOR trip
&
Z1+Z2+Z3
PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3
SOTF Enable
TOR Z1 Enable
Z1
TOR Z2 Enable
&
Z1+Z2
TOR Z3 Enable
&
& Z1+Z2+Z3
TOR All Zones Enable
& &
All Zones
Dist. Scheme Enable
&
Dist Trip
TOR Enable
P0486ENa
FIGURE 37 - SWITCH ON TO FAULT AND TRIP ON RECLOSE LOGIC DIAGRAM
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.5 Setting Guidelines
When the overcurrent option is enabled, the I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. Setting guidelines for the I>3 element are shown in more detail in Table below. When a Zone 1 Extension scheme is used along with autoreclosure, it must be ensured that only Zone 1 distance protection can trip instantaneously for TOR. Typically, TOR-SOTF Mode bit 0 only would be set to 1. Also the I>3 element must be disabled to avoid overreaching trips by level detectors.
2.12.5.1
Inputs Data Type Ia<, Ib<, Ic< Dist Trip AR_RECLAIM INP_RECLAIM CBC_closing order INP_CB_Man_Close CB Control activated 1P or 3 P AR TOR Zi Enable TOR All Zones Enable Dist. Scheme Enable SOTF LD Enable SOTF All Zones Enable Va>, Vb>, Vc> Valid_stx_PHOC PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3 Z1, Z2, Z3, all zones Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Digital Input Internal Logic Digital Input Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Internal Logic Configuration Internal Logic Internal Logic Description No current detected (I< threshold, by default 5% In or I< CB fail) Trip by Distance logic Internal AR reclaim in progress External AR in progress (by opto) Closing order in progress by CB Control CB Closing order (by opto) CB control activated 1P or 3P AR enabled TOR logic enabled in case of fault in Zi TOR logic enabled in case for all zones (Distance Start) Distance scheme aided Trip logic applied Levels detectors in SOTF activated SOTF logic enabled for all zones (Distance Start) Live Voltage detected ( V Live Line threshold, fixed at 70% Vn) Threshold I>3 must be activated Detection by I>3 overcurrents (not filtered by INRUSH.) Zones Detected
2.12.5.2
Outputs Data Type TOC_A TOC_B TOC_C SOTF/TOR trip Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Trip phase A by TOR /SOTF Trip phase B by TOR /SOTF Trip phase C by TOR /SOTF Trip by SOTF (manual close) or TOR (AR close) logic
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 66/220 2.12.6 Inputs /Outputs in SOTF-TOR DDB Logic See also, DDB description in appendix of the same section. 2.12.6.1 Inputs
Man Close CB
Digital input (opto) 6 is assigned by default PSL to "Man Close CB" The DDB Man Close CB if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will initiate the internal SOTF logic enable (see Figure 35) without CB control. If CB control is activated managed by CB control) SOTF will be enable by internal detection (CB closing order
AR Reclaim
The DDB AR Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will start the internal logic TOR enable (see Figure 35).- (External AR logic applied).
CB aux A CB aux B CB aux C

The DDB CB Aux if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will be used for Any pole dead & All pole dead internal detection 2.12.6.2 Outputs
SOTF Enable
The DDB SOTF Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that SOTF logic is enabled in the relay see logic description in Figure 37
TOR Enable
The DDB TOR Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that TOR logic is activated in the relay see logic description in Figure 37
TOC Start A
The DDB TOC Start A if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase A issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
TOC Start B
The DDB TOC Start B if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase B issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
TOC Start C
The DDB TOC Start C if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase C issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
Any Pole Dead

The DDB Any Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates that at least one pole is opened
All Pole Dead

The DDB All Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates all pole are dead (All 3 poles are opened)
SOTF/TOR Trip
The DDB SOTF/TOR Trip if assigned in PSL, indicates a 3poles trip by TOR or SOTF logic see Figure 37 2.13 Power swing blocking (PSB) Power swings are oscillations in power flow which can follow a power system disturbance. They can be caused by sudden removal of faults, loss of synchronism across a power system or changes in direction of power flow as a result of switching. Such disturbances can cause generators on the system to accelerate or decelerate to adapt to new power flow conditions, which in turn leads to power swinging. A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the case of a stable power swing it is important that the relay should not trip. The relay should also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled system break up during such an event. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 POWER SWING Delta R Delta X IN > Status IN > (% Imax) I2 > Status I2 > (% Imax) Imax line > Status Imax line > Unblocking Time delay Blocking Zones 0.5/In 0.5/In Enabled 40% Enabled 30% Enabled 3 x In 30s 00000000 0 0 400/In 400/In 0.01/In 0.01/In Max Step size
Disabled or Enabled 10% 100% 1%
Disabled or Enabled 10% 100% 1%
Disabled or Enabled 1 x In 0 20 x In 30s 0.01 x In 0.1s
Bit 0: Z1/Z1X Block, Bit 1: Z2 Block, Bit 2: Z3 Block, Bit 3: Zp Block.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 68/220 2.13.1 The Power Swing Blocking Element
PSB can be disabled on distribution systems, where power swings would not normally be experienced. Operation of the PSB element is menu selectable to block the operation of any or all of the distance zones (including aided trip logic) or to provide indication of the swing only. The Blocked Zones function links are set to 1 to block zone tripping, or set to 0 to allow tripping as normal. Power swing detection uses a R (resistive) and X (reactive) impedance band which surrounds the entire phase fault trip characteristic. This band is shown in Figure 38 below:
X Zone 3 Power swing bundary
Zone 4 X
P3068ENa
FIGURE 38 - POWER SWING DETECTION CHARACTERISTICS
FIGURE 39 - POWER SWING SETTINGS (SET HIGHZONE IS LOCKED OUT)
A fault on the system results in the measured impedance rapidly crossing the R band, en route to a tripping zone. Power swings follow a much slower impedance locus. A power swing is detected where all three phase-phase measured impedances have remained within the R band for at least 5ms, and have taken longer than 5ms to reach the trip characteristic (the trip characteristic boundary is defined by zones 3 and 4). PSB is indicated on reaching zone 3 or zone 4. Typically, the R and X band settings are both set with: 0.032 x f x Rmin load. NOTE: 2.13.2 f = Power swing frequency
Unblocking of the Relay for Faults During Power Swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN > 0.1 In + ( (IN> / 100) . (I maximum) ).
A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phasephase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I2> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I2 > 0.1 In + ( (I2> / 100) . (I maximum) ).
A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A).

AnyPoleDead
Loop AN detected in PS bundary
1
S
&
Q R
S Q R
PS loop AN
Tunb
&
1
Loop BN detected in PS bundary
Q R
S Q R
PS loop BN
Tunb
Loop CN detected in PS bundary
1
S Q R
t
S Q R
PS loop CN
&
S Q R Power Swing Detection
Tunb
Inrush AN Inrush BN Inrush CN Fault clear Healthy Network All Pole Dead & /Fuse Failure confirmed PS disabled
Iphase>(Imax line>) Unblocking Imax disabled
S Q R
IN> threshold
Tunblk
S Q R
S Q Power Swing unblocking
Unblocking IN disabled
Tunblk
I2> threshold
1
S Q R
Unblocking I2> disabled
P0488ENa
FIGURE 40 POWER SWING DETECTION & UNBLOCKING LOGIC

Z1x
& 1
Z1x'
Unblock Z1
Z1
Power Swing Detection Unblocking Power Swing
&
Z1'
Unblock Z2
1 &
Z2'
Z2 Unblock Z3
1 &
Z3'
Z3
Zp_Fwd Unblock Zp
1 &
Zp
&
Zp'
P0489ENa
FIGURE 41 - DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCK/UNBLOCKING LOGIC Data Type R X Tunbk Imax> IN> I2> Unblock Z1 Unblock Z2 Unblock Z3 Unblock Zp Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Description 0.1/In to 250/In by step 0.01/In 0.1/In to 250/In by step de 0.01/In 0 to 60 s by step de 1 s. 1 to 20 In by step de 0.01 0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax> 0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax> 0 => Z1 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z1 unblocked during PSwing 0 => Z2 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z2 unblocked during PSwing 0 => Z3 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z3 unblocked during PSwing 0 => Zp blocked during PSwing 1 => Zp unblocked during PSwing
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 72/220 2.13.3 Typical Current Settings
The three current thresholds must be set above the maximum expected residual current unbalance, the maximum negative sequence unbalance, and the maximum expected power swing current. Generally, the power swing current will not exceed 2.In. Typical setting limits are given in Table 7 and Table 8 below: Parameter Minimum Setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetry in power swing currents) > 30% > 10% Maximum Setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults) < 100% < 50% Typical Setting 40% 30%
IN> I2>
TABLE 7 - BIAS THRESHOLDS TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS Parameter Imax line> Minimum Setting 1.2 x (maximum power swing current) Maximum Setting 0.8 x (minimum phase fault current level)
TABLE 8 - PHASE CURRENT THRESHOLD TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS 2.13.4 Removal of PSB to Allow Tripping for Prolonged Power Swings It is possible to limit the time for which blocking of any distance protection zones is applied. Thus, certain locations on the power system can be designated as split points, where circuit breakers will trip three pole should a power swing fail to stabilise. Power swing blocking is automatically removed after the Unblocking Delay with typical settings: 2.14 30s if a near permanent block is required; 2s if unblocking is required to split the system.
Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection included in the P441, P442 and P444 relays provides two stage non-directional / directional three phase overcurrent protection and two non directional stages (I>3 and I>4), with independent time delay characteristics. One or more stages may be enabled, in order to complement the relay distance protection. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the four stages. The first two stages of overcurrent protection, I>1 and I>2 have time delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT). The third and fourth overcurrent stages can be set as follows: I>3 - The third element is fixed as non-directional, for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping. This element can be permanently enabled, or enabled only for Switch on to Fault (SOTF) or Trip on Reclose (TOR). It is also used to detect close-up faults (in SOTF/TOR tripping logic no timer is applied). I>4 - The fourth element is only used for stub bus protection, where it is fixed as nondirectional, and only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. All the stages trip three-phase only. (Could be used for back up protection during a VTS logic) The following Table shows the relay menu for overcurrent protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Note that all tripping via overcurrent protection is three pole.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu text GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function DT Default setting Setting range Min Max
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 73/220 Step size
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block, Non-Directional 0.08 x In 0 0 0.025 0.5 DT or Inverse 0 100s 0.01s Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block, Non-Directional 0.08 x In 0 0 0.025 0.5 DT or Inverse 0 0.08 x In 0s 0.08 x In 0s 100s 32 x In 100s 32 x In 100s 0.01s 0.01xIn 0.01s 0.01xIn 0.01s Disabled or Enabled 4.0 x In 100s 100s 1.2 15 0.01 x In 0.01s 0.01s 0.025 0.1 4.0 x In 100s 100s 1.2 15 0.01 x In 0.01s 0.01s 0.025 0.1
I>1 Direction I>1 VTS Block I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 Time Delay VTS I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function
Directional Fwd Non-Directional 1.5 x In 1s 0.2s 1 7 DT 0 DT
I>2 Direction I>2 VTS Block I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 Time Delay VTS I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay
Non Directional Non-Directional 2 x In 2s 2s 1 7 DT 0 Enabled 3 x In 3s Disabled 4 x In 4s
Disabled or Enabled
The inverse time delayed characteristics listed above, comply with the following formula: K t=T + L (I/Is)1 Where: t K I Is L T = = = = = = = operation time constant measured current current threshold setting constant ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves) Time multiplier Setting Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US US K constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394 constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.02 L constant 0 0 0 0 0.0114 0.491 0.1217 0.18 0.1694
Curve description Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Short Time Inverse
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.14.1 Application of Timer Hold Facility
The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P441, P442 and P444 relays are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay may not trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. Note that the timer hold facility should not be used where high speed autoreclose with short dead times are set. The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET. Note that this cell is not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting. 2.14.2 Directional Overcurrent Protection If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directional control to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct discrimination. Typical systems which require such protection are parallel feeders and ring main systems. Where I>1 or I>2 stages are directionalised, no characteristic angle needs to be set as the relay uses the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones (fixed superimposed power technique). 2.14.3 Time Delay VTS Should the Voltage Transformer Supervision function detect an ac voltage input failure to the relay, such as due to a VT fuse blow, this will affect operation of voltage dependent protection elements. Distance protection will not be able to make a forward or reverse decision, and so will be blocked. As the I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements in the relay use the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones, any directional zones would be unable to trip. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an I> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the I>1 and I>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay. 2.14.4 Setting Guidelines I>1 and I>2 Overcurrent Protection When applying the overcurrent or directional overcurrent protection provided in the P441, P442 and P444 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination. For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference should be made to AREVAs Protective relay Application Guide - Chapter 9. In general, where overcurrent elements are set, these should also be set to time discriminate with downstream and reverse distance protection. The I>1 and I>2 elements are continuously active. However tripping is blocked if the distance protection function starts. An example is shown in Figure 42.
Time
I>2 Z4, tZ4 I>1 Z3,tZ3 Zp,tZp Z2,tZ2 Z1,tZ1
Reverse
Forward
P3069ENa
FIGURE 42 - TIME GRADING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION (DT EXAMPLE) I>1 and I>2 Time Delay VTS The I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements should be set to mimic operation of distance protection during VTS pickup. This requires I>1 and I>2 current settings to be calculated to approximate to distance zone reaches, although operating non-directional. If fast protection is the main priority then a time delay of zero or equal to tZ2 could be used. If parallel current-based main protection is used alongside the relay, and protection discrimination remains the priority, then a DT setting greater than that for the distance zones should be used. An example is shown in Figure 43.
I phase
I 1> Trip I 2> No trip t tI1> tI2>

P0483ENa
FIGURE 43 - TRIPPING LOGIC FOR PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I>3 Highset Overcurrent and Switch on to Fault Protection The I>3 overcurrent element of the P441, P442 and P444 relays can be Enabled as an instantaneous highset just during the TOR/SOTF period. After this period has ended, the element remains in service with a trip time delay setting I>3 Time Delay. This element would trip for close-up high current faults, such as those where maintenance earth clamps are inadvertently left in position on line energisation. The I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. If a high current setting is chosen, such that the I>3 element will not overreach the protected line, then the I>3 Time Delay can be set to zero. It should also be verified that the remote source is not sufficiently strong to cause element pickup for a closeup reverse fault.
If a low current setting is chosen, I>3 will need to discriminate with local and remote distance protection. This principle is shown in Table 9. I>3 Current Setting Above load and inrush current but LOW Instantaneous Function After TOR/SOTF Function TOR/SOTF Period Yes - sensitive. Time Delay Required
Time delayed backup Longer than tZ3 to protection. grade with distance protection. Instantaneous highset to detect close-up faults. I>3 Time Delay = 0. (Note #.)
Yes - may detect HIGH, 120% of max. fault current for a fault at high current closethe remote line terminal up faults. and max. reverse fault current
TABLE 9 - CURRENT AND TIME DELAY SETTINGS FOR THE I>3 ELEMENT Key: As the instantaneous highset trips three pole it is recommended that the I>3 Time Delay is set tZ2 in single pole tripping schemes, to allow operation of the correct single pole autoreclose cycle. I>4 Stub Bus Protection When the protected line is switched from a breaker and a half arrangement it is possible to use the I>4 overcurrent element to provide stub bus protection. When stub bus protection is selected in the relay menu, the element is only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Thus, a set of 52b auxiliary contacts (closed when the isolator is open) are required.
I>4 Element: Stub Bus Protection

Busbar 1
VT
V=0 Protection's blocking using VTs I>0
Open isolator
Stub Bus Protection : I >4
Busbar 2
P0536ENa
Although this element would not need to discriminate with load current, it is still common practice to apply a high current setting. This avoids maloperation for heavy through fault currents, where mismatched CT saturation could present a spill current to the relay. The I>4 element would normally be set instantaneous, t>4 = 0s.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 78/220 2.15 Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS)
When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the elements sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. The following section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate. In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, an negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults downstream. Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, loss of a fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current and hence an upstream negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays. It may be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent element has a current pick up setting I2> Current Set, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer I2> Time Delay. The user may choose to directionalise operation of the element, for either forward or reverse fault protection for which a suitable relay characteristic angle may be set. Alternatively, the element may be set as non-directional. 2.15.1 Setting Guidelines The relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element is shown below: NEG SEQ O/C I2> Status I2> Directional I2> VTS I2> Current Set I2> Time Delay I2> Char Angle Default Enabled Non-Directional Non-Directionel 0.2In 10s 45 Min Disabled, Enabled Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block, Non-Directional 0.08In 0s 95 4In 100s +95 0.01In 0.01s 1 Max Step
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.15.2 Negative phase sequence current threshold, I2> Current Set
The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and setting at least 20% above this figure. Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting would have to be based upon an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current contribution to a specific remote fault condition. Note that in practice, if the required fault study information is unavailable, the setting must adhere to the minimum threshold previously outlined, employing a suitable time delay for coordination with downstream devices. This is vital to prevent unnecessary interruption of the supply resulting from inadvertent operation of this element. 2.15.3 Time Delay for the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element, I2> Time Delay As stated above, correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Hence, in practice, it would be associated with a long time delay. It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as: 2.15.4 Phase overcurrent elements Earth fault elements Broken conductor elements Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements
Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Where negative phase sequence current may flow in either direction through a relay location, such as parallel lines or ring main systems, directional control of the element should be employed. Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. A suitable relay characteristic angle setting (I2> Char Angle) is chosen to provide optimum performance. This setting should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted negative sequence voltage (- V2), in order to be at the centre of the directional characteristic. The angle that occurs between V2 and I2 under fault conditions is directly dependent upon the negative sequence source impedance of the system. However, typical settings for the element are as follows: For a transmission system the RCA should be set equal to -60 For a distribution system the RCA should be set equal to -45
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 80/220 2.16 Broken conductor detection
The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and hence in the majority of applications are easily detectable. Another type of unbalanced fault which can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved. 2.16.1 Setting Guidelines The sequence network connection diagram for an open circuit fault is detailed in Figure 1. From this, it can be seen that when a conductor open circuit occurs, current from the positive sequence network will be series injected into the negative and zero sequence networks across the break. In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%. It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations:g I1F = Z Z + Z 2Z + 0Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0
E (Z + Z ) E Z
g I2F = Z Z + Z Z 0+ Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0
Where: Eg Z0 Z1 Z2 = = = = System Voltage Zero sequence impedance Positive sequence impedance Negative sequence impedance
Therefore:
I2F Z0 = I1F Z0 + Z2
It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for. Note that a minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful relay operation. Since sensitive settings have been employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). Hence, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical. The following table shows the relay menu for the Broken Conductor protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor I2/I1 I2/I1 Time Delay I2/I1 Trip Enabled 0.2 60 Disabled* Enabled/Disabled 0.2 0s Enabled 1 100s Disabled N/A 0.01 1s N/A Max Step size
* If disabled, only a Broken Conductor Alarm is possible. 2.16.2 Example Setting The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning; Ifull load = 1000A I2 = 100A therefore the quiescent I2/I1 ratio is given by; I2/I1 = 100/1000 = 0.05 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set I2/I1 = 0.2 Set I2/I1 Time Delay = 60s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 82/220 2.17 Directional and non-directional earth fault protection Three elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: IN> element IN>1 element IN>2 element -
Channel aided directional earth fault protection; Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed. Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
The IN> element may only be used as part of a channel-aided scheme, and is fully described in the Aided DEF section of the Application Notes which follow. The IN>1 and IN>2 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). All Earth Fault overcurrent elements operate from a residual current quantity which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents. The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev Block or Non directional 0.08 x In 0 0 0.025 0.5 DT or Inverse 0 100s 0.01s 4.0 x In 200s 200s 1.2 15 0.01 x In 0.01s 0.01s 0.025 0.1 Max Step size
IN>1 Directional IN>1 VTS Block IN>1 Current Set IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 Time Delay VTS IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Status IN>2 Directional IN>2 VTS Block IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 Time Delay VTS IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle Polarisation
Directional Fwd Non directional 0.2 x In 1s 0.2s 1 7 DT 0 Enabled Non Directional Non directional 0.3 x In 2s 2s
45 Zero Sequence
95
95
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
Note that the elements are set in terms of residual current, which is three times the magnitude of zero sequence current (Ires = 3I0). The IDMT time delay characteristics available for the IN>1 element, and the grading principles used will be as per the phase fault overcurrent elements. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an IN> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the IN>1 and IN>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay.
V2 I2 VN IN IN
Negative sequence Polarisation Residual zero sequence Polarisation
Directional Calculation
SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev
IN>
IN> Pick-up
IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking Any Pole Dead IN> Timer Block
IDMT/DT
&
IN> Trip
IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking Any Pole Dead IN> Timer Block SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev MCB/VTS Line
Directionnal Check
& & & &

IN> TD VTS 0
IDMT/DT
>1
IN> Trip
P0490ENa
FIGURE 44 - SBEF CALCULATION & LOGIC

CTS Block SBEF Overcurrent
SBEF Start
SBEF Trip IDMT/DT SBEF Timer Block
SBEF Trip
P0484ENa
FIGURE 45 - LOGIC WITHOUT DIRECTIONALITY

CTS Block SBEF Overcurrent SBEF Start
Slow VTS Block Vx > Vs Ix > Is
Directional Check
IDMT/DT SBEF Trip SBEF Timer Block

P0533ENa
FIGURE 46 - LOGIC WITH DIRECTIONALITY 2.17.1 Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) The method of directional polarising selected is common to all directional earth fault elements, including the channel-aided element. There are two options available in the relay menu: Zero sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the residual current with respect to the inverted residual voltage: (Vres = (Va + Vb + Vc)) derived by the relay. Negative sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the derived negative sequence current with respect to the derived negative sequence voltage. NOTE: Even though the directional decision is based on the phase relationship of I2 with respect to V2, the operating current quantity for DEF elements remains the derived residual current.
2.17.2
Application of Zero Sequence Polarising This is the conventional option, applied where there is not significant mutual coupling with a parallel line, and where the power system is not solidly earthed close to the relay location. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The relay internally derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input which must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VTs. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore incompatible with the use of zero sequence polarising. The required characteristic angle settings for DEF will differ depending on the application. Typical characteristic angle settings are as follows: Resistance earthed systems generally use a 0 RCA setting. This means that for a forward earth fault, the residual current is expected to be approximately in phase with the inverted residual voltage (-Vres).
When protecting solidly-earthed distribution systems or cable feeders, a -45 RCA setting should be set. When protecting solidly-earthed transmission systems, a -60 RCA setting should be set.
Application of Negative Sequence Polarising In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT were fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist. In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still residual current. When negative sequence polarising is used, the relay requires that the Characteristic Angle is set. The Application Notes section for the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection better describes how the angle is calculated - typically set at - 45 (I2 lags (-V2)).
2.18
Aided DEF protection schemes The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. When a separate channel for DEF is used, the above DEF schemes are independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must Share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Menu text GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status Polarisation V> Voltage Set IN Forward Time Delay Scheme Logic Tripping Enabled Zero Sequence 1V 0.1 x In 0 Shared Three Phase Disabled or Enabled Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence 0.5V 0.05 x In 0 20V 4 x In 10s 0.01V 0.01 x In 0.1s Default setting Setting range Min Max Step size
Shared, Blocking or Permissive Three Phase or Single Phase
FIGURE 47 - MiCOM S1 SETTINGS

DIST. CR DEF. CR DIST CS DEF CS
Opto label 01 Opto Label 02
Relay Label 01 Relay Label 02

P0534ENa
FIGURE 48 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH AN INDEPENDANT CHANNEL

Opto label 01
DIST. CR DEF. CR DIST CS
>1
DEF CS
Relay label 01
P0544ENa
FIGURE 49 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH SHARED CHANNEL

V2 I2 VN IN V2 VN IN
Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation
Directionnal Calculation
DEF Fwd DEF Rev
V>
DEF V>
IN>
INRev = 0.6*INFwd
INRev> INFwd>
P0545ENa
FIGURE 50 - DEF CALCULATION NOTE: 2.18.1 The DEF is blocked in case of VTS or CTS
Polarising the Directional Decision The relative advantages of zero sequence and negative sequence polarising are outlined on the previous page. Note how the polarising chosen for aided DEF is independent of that chosen for backup earth fault elements. The relay has a V> threshold which defines the minimum residual voltage required to enable an aided DEF directional decision to be made. A residual voltage measured below this setting would block the directional decision, and hence there would be no tripping from the scheme. The V> threshold is set above the standing residual voltage on the protected system, to avoid operation for typical power system imbalance and voltage transformer errors. In practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (ie: 3% residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. This could equate to an overall error of up to 5% of phase-neutral voltage, although a setting between 2% and 4% is typical. On high resistance earthed and insulated neutral systems the settings might need to be as high as 10% or 20% of phase-neutral voltage, respectively. When negative sequence polarising is set, the V> threshold becomes a V2> negative sequence voltage detector. The characteristic angle for aided DEF protection is fixed at 14, suitable for protecting all solidly-earthed and resistance earthed systems.
FWD
FWD
R
-14 REV REV
P0491ENa
2.18.2
Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead
0 150 ms
& &
0
DEF CS
IN Rev>
DEF Trip
t_delay
UNB CR DEF
P0546ENa
FIGURE 51 - INDEPENDANT CHANNEL PERMISSIVE SCHEME
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start IN Rev>
&
>1
0 150 ms
DEF CS
&
DEF Trip
T 0
t_delay
UNB CR DEF
P0547ENa
FIGURE 52 - SHARED CHANNEL PERMISSIVE SCHEME This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 53 shows the element reaches, and Figure 54 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the forward IN> DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay has also detected a forward fault, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. Send logic: Permissive trip logic: IN> Forward pickup IN> Forward plus Channel Received.

IN> Fwd (A) ZL A
IN> Fwd (B)

P3070ENa
FIGURE 53 - THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME
FIGURE 54 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where t is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element, noting that the Time Delay for a permissive scheme aided trip would normally be set to zero. 2.18.3 Aided DEF Blocking Scheme This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 57 shows the element reaches, and Figure 58 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay forward IN> element has picked up, then it will operate after the set Time Delay if no block is received.
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> Reversal Guard IN Rev>

0 T 0 Tp 0
&
t_delay
&
DEF Trip
Any Pole Dead DEF Timer Block UNB CR DEF
150 ms
DEF Rev IN Rev> DEF V>
&
DEF CS
P0548ENa
FIGURE 55 - INDEPENDANT CHANNEL BLOCKING SCHEME
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> Reversal Guard IN Rev> Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start DEF Timer Block UNB CR DEF
T 0
&
t_delay
0
0 Tp
>1
150 ms
&
DEF Trip
DEF Rev IN Rev> DEF V>
&
DEF CS
P0549ENa
FIGURE 56 - SHARED CHANNEL BLOCKING SCHEME Send logic: Trip logic: DEF Reverse IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay.
IN> Fwd (A) ZL A B
IN> Rev (A)
IN> Fwd (B) IN> Rev (B)

P0550ENa
FIGURE 57 - THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME
Signal Send IN> Reverse
Protection A
Protection B
Signal Send IN> Reverse
IN>1
0 Trip Trip
IN>1
IN>2
>1
>1
IN>2
IN > Forward
&
&
IN> Forward
P0551ENa
FIGURE 58 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where t is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used. The recommended Time Delay setting = max. signalling channel operating time + 14ms.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 90/220 2.19 Undervoltage protection
Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: Increased system loading. Generally, some corrective action would be taken by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs or On Load Tap Changers, in order to bring the system voltage back to its nominal value. If the regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, then tripping by means of an undervoltage relay will be required following a suitable time delay. Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of the phases involved in the fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases is directly dependent upon the type of fault, method of system earthing and its location with respect to the relaying point. Consequently, co-ordination with other voltage and current-based protection devices is essential in order to achieve correct discrimination.
This function will be blocked with VTS logic or could be disabled if CB open. Both the under and overvoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu Volt Protection. The following table shows the undervoltage section of this menu along with the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 VOLT Protection V< & V> MODE UNDER VOLTAGE V< Measur't Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS V<2 Status V<2 Voltage Set V<2 Time Delay Phase-Neutral DT 50V 10s 1 Disabled 38V 5s Phase-phase or Phase-neutral Disabled, DT pr IDMT 10V 0s 0.5 120V 100s 100 1V 0.01s 0.5 0 V<1 Trip, V<2 Trip, V>1 Trip, V>2 Trip Max Step size
Disabled or Enabled 10V 0s 120V 100s 1V 0.01s
As can be seen from the menu, the undervoltage protection included within the P441, P442 and P444 relays consists of two independent stages. These are configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring within the V< Measurt Mode cell. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT, DT or disabled, within the V<1 Function cell. Stage 2 is DT only and is enabled/disabled in the V<2 Status cell. Two stages are included to provide both alarm and trip stages, where required. Alternatively, different time settings may be required depending upon the severity of the voltage dip. The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t= K 1M
Where: K T M = = = Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) Operating Time in Seconds Measured Voltage / relay Setting Voltage (V<)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.19.1 Setting Guidelines
In the majority of applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operate during system earth fault conditions. If this is the case, the element should be selected in the menu to operate from a phase to phase voltage measurement, as this quantity is less affected by single phase voltage depressions due to earth faults. The voltage threshold setting for the undervoltage protection should be set at some value below the voltage excursions which may be expected under normal system operating conditions. This threshold is dependent upon the system in question but typical healthy system voltage excursions may be in the order of -10% of nominal value. Similar comments apply with regard to a time setting for this element, i.e. the required time delay is dependent upon the time for which the system is able to withstand a depressed voltage. 2.20 Overvoltage protection Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: Under conditions of load rejection, the supply voltage will increase in magnitude. This situation would normally be rectified by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs or on-load tap changers. However, failure of this equipment to bring the system voltage back within prescribed limits leaves the system with an overvoltage condition which must be cleared in order to preserve the life of the system insulation. Hence, overvoltage protection which is suitably time delayed to allow for normal regulator action, may be applied. During earth fault conditions on a power system there may be an increase in the healthy phase voltages. Ideally, the system should be designed to withstand such overvoltages for a defined period of time.
As previously stated, both the over and undervoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu Volt Protection. The following table shows the overvoltage section of this menu along with the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min Group 1 Volt protection V> Measur't Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set V>2 Time Delay Phase-Neutral DT 75V 10s 1 Enabled 90V 0.5s Phase-phase or Phase-neutral Disabled, DT pr IDMT 60V 0s 0.5 185V 100s 100 1V 0.01s 0.5 Max Step size
Disabled or Enabled 60V 0s 185V 100s 1V 0.01s
As can be seen, the setting cells for the overvoltage protection are identical to those previously described for the undervoltage protection. The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula: t = K / (M - 1) Where: K T M = = = Time Multiplier Setting Operating Time in Seconds Measured Voltage / relay Setting Voltage (V>)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 92/220 2.20.1 Setting Guidelines
The inclusion of the two stages and their respective operating characteristics allows for a number of possible applications; Use of the IDMT characteristic gives the option of a longer time delay if the overvoltage condition is only slight but results in a fast trip for a severe overvoltage. As the voltage settings for both of the stages are independent, the second stage could then be set lower than the first to provide a time delayed alarm stage if required. Alternatively, if preferred, both stages could be set to definite time and configured to provide the required alarm and trip stages. If only one stage of overvoltage protection is required, or if the element is required to provide an alarm only, the remaining stage may be disabled within the relay menu.
This type of protection must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage relays at other locations on the system. This should be carried out in a similar manner to that used for grading current operated devices. 2.21 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage / further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be used to backtrip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed. 2.21.1 Breaker Failure Protection Configurations The phase selection must be performed by creating dedicated PSL. The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer, allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
CBF1_Status
Enable
tBF1
&
tBF1
tBF1 Trip 3Ph

Pulsed output latched in UI
Any Internal Trip A
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 4
&
S Q R
4 tBF1
>1
0 tBF2 - tBF1
>1 &
Breaker Fail Alarm
Ia<
tBF2 Trip 3Ph

0
&
>1
1 2
S
3 4
CBF2_Status Q
Enable
Any Internal Trip A Non Current Prot Trip CBA_A
&
1
>1
2 3 Setting: Non I Trip Reset: 0) I< Only 1) /Trip & I< 2) CB & I< 3) Disable 4) /Trip or I< 4
External Trip A
1 2 3 4
S Q R
Ia<
0 1
>1
4
& >1
CBA_A
2 3
Setting: Ext. Trip Reset: 0) I< Only 1) /Trip & I< 2) CB & I<
&
3) Disable 4) /Trip or I<
Any Internal Trip B Ib< Non Current Prot Trip CBA_B External Trip B WI Trip B WI Trip C V<1 Trip V<2 Trip Any Internal Trip C Ic< Non Current Prot Trip CBA_C External Trip C V>1 Trip V>2 Trip
PHASE B Same logic as A phase

WI Trip A
>1
Non Current Prot Trip
PHASE C Same logic as A phase
P0552ENa
FIGURE 59 - CB FAIL GENERAL LOGIC Simple CBF, where only CB Fail 1 Timer is enabled. For any protection trip, the CB Fail 1 Timer is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, CB Fail 1 Timer times out and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section. A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, CB Fail 1 Timer is used to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should re-tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an additional time delay. The backtrip uses CB Fail 2 Timer, which is also started at the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements CB Fail 1 Timer and CB Fail 2 Timer can be configured to operate for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection trip. The latter is achieved by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to External Trip using the programmable scheme logic. 2.21.2 Reset Mechanisms for Breaker Fail Timers It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required. This covers the following situations: Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped. Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example: Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating protection element might be a more reliable method. (in that case setting will be : "Prot. Reset or I<") Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.

I
Pole Live
Pole Dead
+
I<
+
T T
Pole Live
Pole Dead
+
I<
+
T
P0553ENa
FIGURE 60 - ALGORITHM FOR POLE DEAD DETECTION Description of open pole detection algorithm : Each half period after zero crossing of current, the algorithm detects if the current is bigger than the I< threshold. If yes, then the detection timer is restarted, if it is lower than the adjusted value nothing is done. At the end of the detection timer, open pole decision is given by the algorithm. Timer value given by: (Number of Samples/2 + 2) * ((1/Freq)/Number of Samples) With: T = 13,3 ms (50 Hz) T = 11,1 ms (60 Hz) The current used is the unfiltered current (only the analog lowPass ) Example: In the first example, the current line is interrupted by the CB opening. The detection is confirmed 3 ms after the pole is opened. In the second example, some residual current remains due to the CT; The detection is confirmed 12 / 15 msec after the pole is opened.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 96/220 2.21.2.1 Inputs Data Type CBF1_Status CBF2_Status CBF1_Timer CBF2_Timer CBF1_Reset CBF2_Reset CBF_I< Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip C CB 52a_A CB 52a_B CB 52a_C Ia<, Ib<, Ic< 2.21.2.2 Outputs Data Type CBF1_Trip_3p CBF2_Trip_3p CB Fail Alarm Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Trip 3P CB fail by TBF1 Trip 3P CB fail by TBF2 CB Fail alarm Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Internal Logic Description Breaker Failure 1 activated Breaker Failure 2 activated Timer Breaker Failure 1 Timer Breaker Failure 2
Type of reset (current, CB status, interlocks). Type of reset (current, CB Status, interlocks). Dead Pole threshold detection Trip phase A by internal or external protection function Trip phase B by internal or external protection function Trip phase C by internal or external protection function CB Pole A opened CB Pole B opened CB Pole C opened Under-current detection for dead pole
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relays pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are summarised in the following table.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Initiation (Menu selectable) Current based protection (eg. 50/51/46/21/87..) CB fail timer reset mechanism The resetting mechanism is fixed. [IA< operates] & [IB< operates] & [IC< operates] & [IN< operates]
Non-current based protection (eg. 27/59/81/32L..)
Three options are available. The user can select from the following options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [Protection element reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] Three options are available. The user can select any or all of the options. [All I< and IN< elements operate] [External trip reset] AND [All I< and IN< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and IN< elements operate]
External protection -
The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows: Menu text Default setting Setting range Min CB FAIL & I< BREAKER FAIL CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer CBF Non I Reset CBF Ext Reset UNDER CURRENT I< Current Set 0.05In 0.05In 3.2In 0.01In Enabled 0.2s Disabled 0.4s CB Open & I< CB Open & I< Enabled, Disabled 0s 10s 0.01s Max Step size
Enabled, Disabled 0s 10s 0.01s
I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<, Prot Reset or I<, Disable I< Only, CB Open & I<, Prot Reset & I<, Prot Reset or I<, Disable
The CBF Blocks I> and CBF Blocks IN> settings are used to remove starts issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail time out. The start is removed when the cell is set to Enabled.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 98/220 2.21.3 2.21.3.1 Typical settings Breaker Fail Timer Settings Typical timer settings to use are as follows: CB Fail Reset Mechanism Initiating element reset tBF time delay CB interrupting time + element reset time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin CB auxiliary contacts opening/closing time (max.) + error in tBF timer + safety margin
Typical delay for 2 cycle circuit breaker 50 + 50 + 10 + 50 = 160 ms 50 + 10 + 50 = 110 ms
CB open
Undercurrent elements
CB interrupting time + 50 + 25 + 50 undercurrent element operating = 125 ms time (max.) + safety margin
Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements. Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting should still be used if this proves to be the worst case. The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2 cycle circuit breaker. Note that where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10-15 ms must be added to allow for trip relay operation. 2.21.3.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF.
3.
3.1 3.1.1
OTHER PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS-SETTINGS EXAMPLE

Distance Protection Setting Example Objective To protect the 100Km double circuit line between Green Valley and Blue River substations using relay protection in the POP Z2 Permissive Overreach mode and to set the relay at Green Valley substation, shown in Figure 61.
Tiger Bay Green valley Blue River 80 Km 100 Km 60 Km Rocky bay
System Data Green Valley - Blue River transmission line 21 21 System voltage 230kv System grounding solid CT ratio 1200/5 VT ratio 230000/115 Line length 100km Line impedance Z1 = 0.089 + J0.476 OHM/km Z0 = 0.426 + J1.576 OHM/km Faults levels Green Valley substation busbars maximum 5000MVA, minimum 2000MVA Blue River substation busbars maximum 3000MVA, minimum 1000MVA
P3074ENa
FIGURE 61 - SYSTEM ASSUMED FOR WORKED EXAMPLE 3.1.2 System Data Line length: Line impedances: 100Km Z = 0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 / 79.4 /km 1
Z = 0.426 + j1.576 = 1.632 / 74.8 /km 0 Z /Z1 = 3.372 / -4.6 0 CT ratio: VT ratio: 3.1.3 Relay Settings It is assumed that Zone 1 Extension is not used and that only three forward zones are required. Settings on the relay can be performed in primary or secondary quantities and impedances can be expressed as either polar or rectangular quantities (menu selectable). For the purposes of this example, secondary quantities are used. 3.1.4 Line Impedance Ratio of secondary to primary impedance = Line impedance secondary Line Impedance 1200 / 5 = 0.12 230000 / 115 1 200 / 5 230 000 / 115
= ratio CT/VT x line impedance primary. = 100 x 0.484 / 79.4 (primary) x 0.12 = 5.81 / 79.4 secondary.
Relay Line Angle settings -90 to 90 in 1 steps. Therefore, select Line Angle = 80 for convenience. Therefore set Line Impedance and Line Angle: = 5.81 / 80 secondary.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 100/220 3.1.5 Zone 1 Phase Reach Settings
Required Zone 1 reach is to be 80% of the line impedance between Green Valley and Blue River substations. Required Zone 1 reach Z1 Z2 The Line Angle = 80. Therefore actual Zone 1 reach, Z1 = 4.64 / 80 secondary. 3.1.6 Zone 2 Phase Reach Settings Required Zone 2 impedance = (Green Valley-Blue River) line impedance + 50% (Blue River-Rocky Bay) line impedance Z2 = (100+30) x 0.484 / 79.4 x 0.12 = 7.56 / 79.4 secondary. The Line Angle = 80. Actual Zone 2 reach setting = 7.56 / 80 secondary 3.1.7 Zone 3 Phase Reach Settings Required Zone 3 forward reach = (Green Valley-Blue River + Blue River-Rocky Bay) x 1.2 = (100+60) x 1.2 x 0.484 / 79.4 x 0.12 Z3 = 11.15 / 79.4 ohms secondary = 0.8 x 100 x 0.484 / 79.4 x 0.12 = 4.64 / 79.4 secondary. = 100 x 0.484 / 79.4 + 50% x 60 x 0.484 / 79.4
Actual Zone 3 forward reach setting = 11.16 / 80 ohms secondary 3.1.8 Zone 4 Reverse Settings with no Weak Infeed Logic Selected Required Zone 4 reverse reach impedance = Typically 10% Zone 1 reach = 0.1 x 4.64 / 79.4 Z4 = 0.464 / 79.4
Actual Zone 4 reverse reach setting = 0.46 / 80 ohms secondary 3.1.9 Zone 4 Reverse Settings with Weak Infeed Logic Selected Where zone 4 is used to provide reverse directional decisions for Blocking or Permissive Overreach schemes, zone 4 must reach further behind the relay than zone 2 for the remote relay. This can be achieved by setting: Z4 ((Remote zone 2 reach) x 120%) minus the protected line impedance: Remote Zone 2 reach = (Blue River-Green Valley) line impedance + 50% (Green Valley-Tiger Bay) line impedance = = Z4 = (100+40) x 0.484 / 79.4 x 0.12 8.13 / 79.4 secondary. ((8.13 / 79.4) x 120%) - (5.81 / 79.4) 3.95 / 79.4
Minimum zone 4 reverse reach setting = 3.96 / 80 ohms secondary
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.1.10 Residual Compensation for Earth Fault Elements
The residual compensation factor can be applied independently to certain zones if required. This feature is useful where line impedance characteristics change between sections or where hybrid circuits are used. In this example, the line impedance characteristics do not change and as such a common KZ0 factor can be applied to each zone. This is set as a ratio kZ0 Res. Comp, and an angle kZ0 Angle: kZ0 Res. Comp, kZ0 Angle, kZ0 kZ0 Z -Z L0 L1 = = = = = kZ0 = 1.15 / 72.9 3 0.484 / 79.4 = (Z0 - Z1) / 3.Z1 (Z0 - Z1) / 3.Z1 Ie: As a ratio. Set in degrees.
(0.426 + j1.576) - (0.089 + j0.476) 0.337 + j1.1 1.15 / 72.9 0.79 / 6.5
Therefore, select: kZ0 Res. Comp kZ0 Angle 3.1.11 Resistive Reach Calculations All distance elements must avoid the heaviest system loading. Taking the 5A CT secondary rating as a guide to the maximum load current, the minimum load impedance presented to the relay would be: Vn (phase-neutral) / In = (115 / 3) / 5 = 13.3 (secondary) = = 0.79 6.5 (Set for kZ1, kZ2, kZp, kZ4). (Set for kZ1, kZ2, kZp, kZ4).
Typically, phase fault distance zones would avoid the minimum load impedance by a margin of 40% if possible (bearing in mind that the power swing characteristic surrounds the tripping zones), earth fault zones would use a 20% margin. This allows maximum resistive reaches of 7.9, and 10.6, respectively. From Table 1 (see 2.4.4), taking a required primary resistive coverage of 14.5 for phase faults, and assuming a typical earth fault coverage of 40, the minimum secondary reaches become: RPh (min) RG (min) = = 14.5 x 0.12 40 x 0.12 = = 1.74 (secondary); 4.8 (secondary).
Resistive reaches could be chosen between the calculated values as shown in Table 10. The zone 2 elements satisfy R2Ph (R3Ph x 80%), and R2G (R3G x 80%). Minimum Phase (RPh) Earth (RG) 1.74 4.8 Maximum 7.9 10.6 Zone 1 R1Ph = 3 R1G = 5 Zone 2 R1Ph = 4 R1G = 6 Zones 3 & 4 R3Ph-4Ph = 8 R3G-4G = 10
TABLE 10 - SELECTION OF RESISTIVE REACHES R3Ph-R4Ph should be set 80% Z minimum load R.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 102/220 3.1.12 Power Swing Band
Typically, the R and X band settings are both set between 10 - 30% of R3Ph. This gives a secondary impedance between 0.6 and 1.8. For convenience, 1.0 could be set. The width of the power swing band is calculated as follows: R = 1.3 tan( f t) RLOAD Assuming that the load corresponds to 60 angles between sources and if the resistive reach is set so that Rlim = RLOAD/2, the following is obtained: R = 0.032 f RLOAD To ensure that a power swing frequency of 5 Hz is detected, the following is obtained: R = 0.16 RLOAD Where: R f Rlim Z RLOAD 3.1.13 width of the power swing detection band power swing frequency (fA fB) resistive reach of the starting characteristic (=R3ph-R4ph) network impedance corresponding to the sum of the reverse (Z4) and forward (Z3) impedances load resistance
Current Reversal Guard The current reversal guard timer available with POP schemes needs a non-zero setting when the reach of the zone 2 elements is greater than 1.5 times the impedance of the protected line. In this example, their reach is only 1.3 times the protected line impedance. Therefore, current reversal guard logic does not need to be used and the recommended settings for scheme timers are: tREVERSAL GUARD Tp = = 0 98ms (typical).
3.1.14
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection To provide parallel high-speed fault clearance to the distance protection, it is possible to use the I>3 element as an instantaneous highset. It must be ensured that the element will only respond to faults on the protected line. The worst case scenario for this is when only one of the parallel lines is in service. Two cases must be considered. The first case is a fault at Blue River substation with the relay seeing fault current contribution via Green Valley. The second case is a fault at Green Valley with the relay seeing fault current contribution via Blue River. Case 1: Source Impedance Line Impedance Fault current seen by relay = = = = 2302 / 5000 48.4 (230000 / 3) / (10.58 + 48.4) 2251A = 10.58
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Case 2: Source Impedance Line Impedance Fault current seen by relay = = = = 2302 / 3000 48.4 (230000 / 3) / (17.63 + 48.4) 2011A = 17.63
The overcurrent setting must be in excess of 2251A. To provide an adequate safety margin a setting 120% the minimum calculated should be chosen, say 2800A. 3.2 Teed feeder protection The application of distance relays to three terminal lines is fairly common. However, several problems arise when applying distance protection to three terminal lines. 3.2.1 The Apparent Impedance Seen by the Distance Elements Figure 62 shows a typical three terminal line arrangement. For a fault at the busbars of terminal B the impedance seen by a relay at terminal A will be equal to : Za = Zat + Zbt + [ Zbt.(Ic/Ia) ]
Relay A will underreach for faults beyond the tee-point with infeed from terminal C. When terminal C is a relatively strong source, the underreaching effect can be substantial. For a zone 2 element set to 120% of the protected line, this effect may result in non-operation of the element for internal faults. This not only effects time delayed zone 2 tripping but also channel-aided schemes. Where infeed is present, it will be necessary for Zone 2 elements at all line terminals to overreach both remote terminals with allowance for the effect of teepoint infeed. Zone 1 elements must be set to underreach the true impedance to the nearest terminal without infeed. Both these requirements can be met through use of the alternative setting groups in the P441, P442 and P444 relays.
A Ia Zat Ib Zbt B
Ic Zct
C Va = Ia Zat + Ib Zbt Ib = Ia + Ic Va = Ia Zat + Ia Zbt + Ic Zbt Impedance seen by relay A = Va Ia Za = Zat + Zbt + Ic Zbt Ia
P3075ENa
FIGURE 62 - TEED FEEDER APPLICATION - APPARENT IMPEDANCES SEEN BY RELAY 3.2.2 Permissive Overreach Schemes To ensure operation for internal faults in a POP scheme, the relays at the three terminals should be able to see a fault at any point within the protected feeder. This may demand very large zone 2 reach settings to deal with the apparent impedances seen by the relays. A POP scheme requires the use of two signalling channels. A permissive trip can only be issued upon operation of zone 2 and receipt of a signal from both remote line ends. The requirement for an 'AND' function of received signals must be realised through use of contact logic external to the relay, or the internal Programmable Scheme Logic. Although a POP scheme can be applied to a three terminal line, the signalling requirements make its use unattractive.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 104/220 3.2.3 Permissive Underreach Schemes
For a PUP scheme, the signalling channel is only keyed for internal faults. Permissive tripping is allowed for operation of zone 2 plus receipt of a signal from either remote line end. This makes the signalling channel requirements for a PUP scheme less demanding than for a POP scheme. A common power line carrier (PLC) signalling channel or a triangulated signalling arrangement can be used. This makes the use of a PUP scheme for a teed feeder a more attractive alternative than use of a POP scheme. The channel is keyed from operation of zone 1 tripping elements. Provided at least one zone 1 element can see an internal fault then aided tripping will occur at the other terminals if the overreaching zone 2 setting requirement has been met. There are however two cases where this is not possible: Figure 63 (i) shows the case where a short tee is connected close to another terminal. In this case, zone 1 elements set to 80% of the shortest relative feeder length do not overlap. This leaves a section not covered by any zone 1 element. Any fault in this section would result in zone 2 time delayed tripping. Figure 63 (ii) shows an example where terminal 'C' has no infeed. Faults close to this terminal will not operate the relay at 'C' and hence the fault will be cleared by the zone 2 time-delayed elements of the relays at 'A' and 'B'. Figure 63 (iii) illustrates a further difficulty for a PUP scheme. In this example current is outfeed from terminal 'C' for an internal fault. The relay at 'C' will therefore see the fault as reverse and not operate until the breaker at 'B' has opened; i.e. sequential tripping will occur.
(i) A
Z1A
Z1C = area where no zone 1 overlap exists
C (ii) A B
Z1A
Z1B
Fault C No infeed
Fault seen by A & B in zone 2
(iii)
Relay at C sees reverse fault until B opens
P3076ENa
FIGURE 63 - TEED FEEDER APPLICATIONS
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.2.4 Blocking Schemes
Blocking schemes are particularly suited to the protection of teed feeders, since high speed operation can be achieved where there is no current infeed from one or more terminals. The scheme also has the advantage that only a common simplex channel or a triangulated simplex channel is required. The major disadvantage of blocking schemes is highlighted in Figure 63 (iii) where fault current is outfeed from a terminal for an internal fault condition. relay 'C' sees a reverse fault condition. This results in a blocking signal being sent to the two remote line ends, preventing tripping until the normal zone 2 time delay has expired. 3.3 Alternative setting groups The P441, P442 and P444 relays can store up to four independent groups of settings. The active group is selected either locally via the menu or remotely via the serial communications. The ability to quickly reconfigure the relay to a new setting group may be desirable if changes to the system configuration demand new protection settings. Typical examples where this feature can be used include: Single bus installations with a transfer bus; Double bus installations, with or without a separate transfer bus, where the transfer circuit breaker or bus coupler might be used to take up the duties of any feeder circuit breaker when both the feeder circuit breaker and the current transformers are by-passed. In the case of a double bus installation, it is usual for bus 1 to be referred to as the main bus and bus 2 as the reserve bus, and for any bypass circuit isolator to be connected to bus 2 as shown in Figure 64. This arrangement avoids the need for a current polarity reversing switch that would be required if both buses were to be used for by-pass purposes. The standby relay, associated with the transfer circuit breaker or the bus coupler, can be programmed with the individual setting required for each of the outgoing feeders. For bypass operation the appropriate setting group can be selected as required. This facility is extremely useful in the case of unattended substations where all of the switching can be controlled remotely.
Main bus (1)
Reserve bus (2)
21
P440
21 21
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
P3077ENa
FIGURE 64 - TYPICAL DOUBLE BUS INSTALLATION WITH BYPASS FACILITIES A further use for this feature is the ability to provide alternative settings for teed feeders or double circuit lines with mutual coupling. Similar alternative settings could be required to cover different operating criteria in the event of the channel failing, or an alternative system configuration (ie. lines being switched in or out).
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 106/220 3.3.1 Selection of Setting Groups
Setting groups can be changed by one of two methods selectable by MiCOM S1:
Automatic group selection by changes in state of two opto-isolated inputs, assigned as Setting Group Change bit 0 (opto 1), and Setting Group Change bit 1 (opto 2), as shown in Table 11 below. The new setting group binary code must be maintained for 2 seconds before a group change is implemented, thus rejecting spurious induced interference.(See also hysteresis value for level logic 0 & level logic 1 in section 6.1 of this chapter). When this selection is chosen, the two opto-isolated inputs assigned to this function will be opto inputs 1 and 2 and they must not be connected to any output signal in the PSL. Special care should be take into account to avoid use them for another purpose (i.e in the default PSL they have been used for another functions: DIST/DEF Chan. Recv. For opto 1 and DIST/DEF carrier out of service). Default PSL: To enable the setting group via binary inpputs, the opto input 1 and 2 must be removed from the PSL. (If assigned in the PSL, instead of Dist DEF Carrier Receive Logic Start, a setting group change will occur)
Note that each setting group has its own dedicated PSL, which should be configured and sent to the relay independently)
Or using the relay operator interface / remote communications. Should the user issue a menu command to change group, the relay will transfer to that settings group, and then ignore future changes in state of the bit 0 and bit 1 opto-inputs. Thus, the user is given greater priority than automatic setting group selection. Binary State of SG Change bit 0 Opto 1 0 1 0 1 TABLE 11 - SETTING GROUP SELECTION Setting Group Activated 1 2 3 4
Binary State of SG Change bit 1 Opto 2 0 0 1 1
REMINDER :
IF SELECTED IN THE MENU (CHANGEMENT GROUPS BY OPTOS), OPTO 1 & 2 MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE PSL (THEY ARE DEDICATED FOR GROUPS SELECTION ONLY)
4.
4.1

Fault locator The relay has an integral fault locator that uses information from the current and voltage inputs to provide a distance to fault measurement. The sampled data from the analogue input circuits is written to a cyclic buffer until a fault condition is detected. The data in the input buffer is then held to allow the fault calculation to be made. When the fault calculation is complete the fault location information is available in the relay fault record. When calculated the fault location can be found in the fault record under the VIEW RECORDS column in the Fault Location cells. Distance to fault is available in km, miles, impedance or percentage of line length. The fault locator can store data for up to five faults. This ensures that fault location can be calculated for all shots on a typical multiple reclose sequence, whilst also retaining data for at least the previous fault.
FIGURE 65 - FAULT LOCATION INFORMATION INCLUDED IN AN EVENT:
The following table shows the relay menu for the fault locator, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle 1000 km (625 miles) 12 / In 70 0.3 km (0.2 mile) 0.001 / In 90 1000 km (625 miles) 500 / In +90 0.015 km (0.005 mile) 0.001 / In 0.1 Max Step size
FAULT LOCATOR kZm Mutual Comp kZm Angle 4.1.1 Mutual Coupling When applied to parallel circuits mutual flux coupling can alter the impedance seen by the fault locator. The coupling will contain positive, negative and zero sequence components. In practice the positive and negative sequence coupling is insignificant. The effect on the fault locator of the zero sequence mutual coupling can be eliminated by using the mutual compensation feature provided. This requires that the residual current on the parallel line is measured, as shown in Appendix B. It is extremely important that the polarity of connection for the mutual CT input is correct, as shown. 4.1.2 Setting Guidelines The system assumed for the distance protection worked example will be used here, refer to section 3.1. The Green Valley Blue River line is considered. Line length: CT ratio: VT ratio: Line impedances: 100Km 1 200 / 5 230 000 / 115 Z 1 = = 0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 / 79.4 /km 0.107 + j0.571 = 0.581 / 79.4 /km (Mutual) 1200 / 5 = 0.12 230000 / 115 0 0 0 0 7 +360 0.01 1
ZM 0
Ratio of secondary to primary impedance = Line Impedance = =
100 x 0.484 / 79.4 x 0.12 5.81 / 79.4 secondary.
Relay Line Angle settings 0 to 360 in 1 steps. Therefore, select Line Angle = 80 for convenience.
Therefore set Line Impedance and Line Angle: = 5.81 / 80 (secondary). No residual compensation needs to be set for the fault locator, as the relay automatically uses the kZ0 factor applicable to the distance zone which tripped. Should a CT residual input be available for the parallel line, mutual compensation could be set as follows: kZm Mutual Comp, kZm Angle, kZm kZm = = ZM0 / 3.Z1 ZM0 / 3.Z1 Ie: As a ratio. Set in degrees.
The CT ratio for the mutual compensation may be different from the Line CT ratio. However, for this example we will assume that they are identical. kZm = ZM0 / 3.Z1 = = Therefore set kZm Mutual Comp kZm Angle 4.2 4.2.1 = = 0.581 / 79.4 / (3 x 0.484 / 79.4) 0.40 / 0 0.40 0
Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) Main VT for minZ measurement VTS logic description The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the analog ac voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults, overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation of the distance element. The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure (with internal thresholds or external opto input), and automatically adjust the configuration of protection elements (Distance element is blocked but may be unblocked on I1,I2 or I0 conditions in case of fault during VTS conditions) whose stability would otherwise be compromised (Distance, DEF, Weak infeed, Directionnal phase current& all directional elements used in the internal logic). A settable time-delayed alarm output is also available (min1sec to Max 20sec). The condition of this alarm is given by:
FFUS_Confirmed = (Fuse_Failure And VTS Timer) Or INP_FFUS_Line

INP_F.Failure_Line VN >F.Failure I2 >F.Failure
&
I0 >F.Failure I >F.Failure
VTS Time delay
1
S Q R FFUS_Confirmed
I>F.Failure Any_pole_dead V<F.Failure S
Fuse_Failure
&
Q R
Healthy network All Pole Dead
1
P0530ENa
FIGURE 66 - VTS LOGIC (SEE ALSO DDB DESCRIPTION IN THE END OF THAT SECTION)
FIGURE 67 - VT SUPERVISION: VTS SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1 VTS Timer: A settable alarm from 1 to 20s by step of 1s gives the possibility to signal by an alarm the Failure. This alarm is instantaneous in case of opto energized by external INP FFU signal (issued from contact of MCB). During no load, the timer covers the duration of Dead time1 HSAR cycle (Vo&/IO in case of no load) which could be detected as VT failure 1 pole. INP_FFUS Line :The external information given by the MCB to the opto input is secure and will block instantaneously the distance function and the functions which are use directional element.
FIGURE 68 - DEFAULT PSL EXTRACTED Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three phase output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated input assigned to MCB Open on the relay will therefore provide the necessary block. Fuse failure conditions are confirmed instantaneously if the opto input "INP_FFus line" is energised and assigned in PSL, or after elapse of the VTS Time delay in case of 1, 2 or 3 phases Fuse Failure. The confirmed Fuse Failure blocks all protection functions which use the voltage measurement (Distance, Weak infeed, Directional overcurrent,). The directional overcurrent element may be blocked or set to become non directional with dedicated timer (Time VTS in MiCOM S1)- I>1 or IN>1. A non confirmed Fuse Failure will be a detection of an internal fuse failure before the timer is issued. In that case a fault can be detected by the I2>,I0>,I1>, I> criteria and will force the unblocking functions: Distance Protection DEF Protection Weak-infeed Protection I> Directional U>, U<
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 112/220 4.2.2 The internal detection FUSE Failure condition Is verified by follows (Fuse Failure not confirmed logic)
(Vr AND /I0 AND /l2 Et /I>) OR (FusFus_tri AND /Any_pole_dead AND V< AND / )
Vr>_FFUS I0>_FFUS I2>_FFUS I>_FFUS V<_FFUS >_FFUS : The residual voltage is bigger than a fixed threshold := 0,75Vn : The zero sequence current is bigger than a settable threshold : From 0.01 to 1.00 In by step of 0.01 : The negative sequence current is bigger than a settable threshold identical to the I0 threshold. : The direct current is bigger than a fixed threshold equal to 2,5IN. : All the voltages are lower than a settable threshold from 0.05 1 Un by step of 0.1 : The line currents have a variation bigger than a settable value from 0.01 to 0.5 In by step of 0.01 In
FuseFailure_3P : Parameter in MiCOM S1 which allows the FFU tri pole detection Any pole dead : Cycle in progress.
The I0 criteria (zero sequence current threshold) gives the possibility to UNBLOCK the distance protection in case of phase to ground fault (if the fuse failure has not been yet confirmed). The I2 criteria (negative sequence current threshold) gives the possibility to UNBLOCK the distance protection in case of insulated phase to phase fault (if the fuse failure has not been yet confirmed). The criteria (V< AND /) gives the possibility to detect the 3Poles Fuse Failure(No more phase voltage and no variation of current) (no specific logic about line energisation).
4.2.3
Fuse Failure Alarm reset In case of Fuse Failure confirmed, the condition which manages the Reset are given by : Fusion_Fusible = 0 And INP_FFUS_Line = 0 And /All Pole Dead Or Healthy Network All Pole Dead: No current AND no voltage OR CB Opened ((52a) if assigned in PSL) UN . V0 . I0 . CVMR (convergence) . PSWING Healthy Network: Rated Line voltage AND No V0 and No I0 AND No start element AND No Power Swing
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply. These are defined below: 1. 2. 3. 4.2.4 Loss of one or two phase voltages Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
Loss of One or Two Phase Voltages The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of residual voltage without the presence of zero and negative phase sequence current, and earth fault current (Iph). This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of I0 and/or I2 current. Also, VTS operation is blocked (and distance element unblocked) when any phase current exceeds 2.5 x In. Zero Sequence VTS Element: The thresholds used by the element are: Fixed operate threshold: Blocking current thresholds, and VN I0 Iph = = 0.75 x Vn; I2 = 0 to 1 x In; settable (defaulted to 0.05In), 2.5 x In.
4.2.5
Loss of All Three Phase Voltages Under Load Conditions Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no zero phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions, the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the VTS. The phase voltage level detectors is settable (default value is adjusted at 30V / setting range : min:10V to Max:70V). The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is settable and default value is adjusted at 0.1In (setting range : 0,01In to 5In).
4.2.6
Absence of Three Phase Voltages Upon Line Energisation If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3 phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation: in that case the SOTF logic is applied.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 114/220 4.2.7 Menu Settings
The VTS settings are found in the SUPERVISION column of the relay menu. The relevant settings are detailed below. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT Supervision VTS Time Delay VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit Detect 3P Threshold 3P Delta I> 5s 0.05 x In Disabled 30V 0.1In 1s 0 Enabled Disabled 10V 0.01In 70V 5In 1V 0.01In 20s 1 x In 1s 0.01 x In Max Step size
The relay responds as follows, on operation of any VTS element: VTS alarm indication (delayed by the set Time Delay); Instantaneous blocking of distance protection elements (if opto used); and others protection functions using voltage measurement Dedirectionalising of directionalised overcurrent elements with new time delays I>
VTS.(if selected) The VTS block is latched after a user settable time delay VTS Time Delay. Once the signal has latched then two methods of resetting are available. (See Reset logic description in section 4.2.3). If not blocked the time delay associated can be modified as well (Time VTS):
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.8 4.2.8.1 INPUT / OUTPUT used in VTS logic: Inputs
MCB/VTS Line
The DDB:MCB/VTS Line if linked to an opto in the PSL and when energized, informs the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for the impedance measurement reference. (Line in this case means Main VT ref measurement / even if the main VT is on the bus side and the Synchro VT is on the line side).
MCB/VTS Bus
The DDB:MCB/VTS Bus if linked to an opto in the PSL and when energized, informs the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for synchrocheck control (See CheckSync logic in section 4.4). 4.2.8.2 Outputs
VTS Fast
Set high for internal FFAilure detection made with internal logic.
VTS Fail Alarm

Set high Set highwhen Opto energised (copy of MCB) OR internal FFAilure confirmed at the end of VTS timer.
Any Pole Dead

The DDB Any Pole Dead if linked in the PSL, indicates that one or more poles is opened.
All Pole Dead

The DDB All Pole Dead if linked in the PSL, indicates all pole are dead (The 3 poles are open). 4.3 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT secondary voltages being generated. 4.3.1 The CT Supervision Feature The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived zero sequence current, in the absence of corresponding derived zero sequence voltage that would normally accompany it. The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer zero sequence voltages from the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where the VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and has the primary star point earthed. Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and event record (plus DDB 125: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from derived quantities (Broken Conductor, Earth Fault, Neg Seq O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT supervision element. The following table shows the relay menu for the CT Supervision element, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:-
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 116/220 Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 SUPERVISION CT SUPERVISION CTS Status CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay 4.3.2 Disabled 1 0.1 5 Enabled/Disabled 0.5 / 2V 0.08 x In 0s 22 / 88V 4 x In 10s max
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 step size
N/A 0.5 / 2V 0.01 x In 1s
Setting the CT Supervision Element
Ir> Temporisation 0<->10sec
&
Vr<
Calulation Part
Logical Part
P0554ENa
The residual voltage setting, CTS VN< Inhibit and the residual current setting, CTS IN> set, should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system conditions. For example CTS VN< Inhibit should be set to 120% of the maximum steady state residual voltage. The CTS IN> set will typically be set below minimum load current. The time-delayed alarm, CTS Time Delay, is generally set to 5 seconds. Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the element be disabled to prevent a protection elements being blocked during fault conditions. 4.3.2.1 Inputs/outputs in CTS logic:
CT Fail Alarm
The DDB cell indicates a CT Fail detected after timer is issued 4.4 Check synchronisation The check synchronism option is used to qualify reclosure of the circuit breaker so that it can only occur when the network conditions on the busbar and line side of the open circuit breaker are acceptable. If a circuit breaker were closed when the two system voltages were out of synchronism with one another, i.e. a difference in voltage magnitudes or phase angles existed, the system would be subjected to an unacceptable shock, resulting in loss of stability and possible damage to connected machines. Check synchronising therefore involves monitoring the voltage on both sides of a circuit breaker and, if both sides are live, the relative synchronism between the two supplies. Such checking may be required to be applied for both automatic and manual reclosing of the circuit breaker and the system conditions which are acceptable may be different in each case. For this reason, separate check synchronism settings are included within the relay for both manual and automatic reclosure of the circuit breaker. With manual closure, the CB close signal is applied into the logic as a pulse to ensure that an operator cannot simply keep the close signal applied and wait for the system to come into synchronism. This is often referred to as guard logic and requires the close signal to be released and then re-applied if the closure is unsuccessful.
The check synchronising element provides two output signals which feed into the manual CB control and the auto reclose logic respectively. These signals allow reclosure provided that the relevant check-synch criteria are fulfilled. Note that if check-synchronising is disabled, the DDB: automatically asserted and becomes invariant (logical status always forced at 1). signal is
For an interconnected power system, tripping of one line should not cause a significant shift in the phase relationship of the busbar and line side voltages. Parallel interconnections will ensure that the two sides remain in synchronism, and that autoreclosure can proceed safely. However, if the parallel interconnection(s) is/are lost, the frequencies of the two sections of the split system will begin to slip with respect to each other during the time that the systems are disconnected. Hence, a live busbar / live line synchronism check prior to reclosing the breaker ensures that the resulting phase angle displacement, slip frequency and voltage difference between the busbar and line voltages are all within acceptable limits for the system. If they are not, closure of the breaker can be inhibited. The SYSTEM CHECKS menu contains all of the check synchronism settings for auto (A/R) and manual (Man) reclosure and is shown in the table below along with the relevant default settings:Menu text Default setting Setting range Min GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS C/S Check Scheme for A/R 111 Bit 0: Live Bus / Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus / Live Line, Bit 2: Live Bus / Live Line. Dead / Dead made by PSL only (from version A3.0 model 05) C/S Check Scheme for Man 111 CB Bit 0: Live Bus / Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus / Live Line, Bit 2: Live Bus / Live Line. Dead / Dead made by PSL only (from version A3.0 model 05) V< Dead Line V> Live Line V< Dead Bus V> Live Bus Diff Voltage Diff Frequency Diff Phase Bus-Line Delay 13V 32V 13V 32V 6.5V 0.05Hz 20 0.2s 5V 30V 5V 30V 0.5V 0.02Hz 5 0.1s 30V 120V 30V 120V 40V 1Hz 90 2s 1V 1V 1V 1V 0.1V 0.01Hz 2.5 0.1s Max Step size
KEY: Diff denotes the differential between Line VT and Busbar VT measurements. At least one condition of c/s scheme must be selected in the 3 bits, to activate the c/s check logic. Man CB, check sync condition is tallen in account, only if a logic of STF has been enabled by S1. If SOTF is disabled in S1, a dedicated PSL must be created using Deb B (live L or live B/Dead L) live/live could not be managed in that case.
Note that the combination of the Diff Phase and Bus-Line Delay settings can also be equated to a differential frequency, as shown below: Diff Phase angle set to +/-20, Bus-Line Delay set to 0.2s. The phase angle window is therefore 40, which corresponds to 40/360ths of a cycle = 0.111 cycle. This equates to a differential frequency of: 0.111 / 0.2 = 0.55 Hz Thus it is essential that the time delay chosen before an in synchronism output can be given is not too long, otherwise the synchronising conditions will appear more restrictive than the actual Diff Frequency setting. The Live Line and Dead Line settings define the thresholds which dictate whether or not the line or bus is determined as being live or dead by the relay logic. Under conditions where either the line or bus are dead, check synchronism is not applicable and closure of the breaker may or may not be acceptable. Hence, setting options are provided which allow for both manual and auto-reclosure under a variety of live/dead conditions. The following paragraphs describe where these may be used. WARNING: THE SETTINGS VOLTAGE IN MiCOM S1 IS ALLWAYS CALCULATED IN PHASE TO GROUND EVEN IF PHASE/PHASE REF HAS BEEN SELECTED.
If the threshold : live line has been set too high the relay will never detect a healthy network (as the line voltage is always measured below the voltage threshold). Without live line condition, the distance protection cannot use the delta algorithms as no prefault detection has been previously detected. 4.4.1 Dead Busbar and Dead Line This mode is not integrated in the internal logic, however can be created using a dedicated PSL:
(This facility with cells (Dead Line/Dead Bus) is available since version A3.0 model 05) This setting might also be used to allow manual close with specific test conditions on the CB. 4.4.2 Live Busbar and Dead Line Where a radial feeder is protected, tripping the circuit breaker will isolate the infeed, and the feeder will be dead. Provided that there is no local generation which can backfeed to energise the feeder, reclosure for live busbar / dead line conditions is acceptable. This setting might also be used to allow re-energisation of a faulted feeder in an interconnected power system, which had been isolated at both line ends. Live busbar / dead line reclosing allows energising from one end first, which can then be followed by live line / live busbar reclosure with voltages in synchronism at the remote end. 4.4.3 Dead Busbar and Live Line If there was a circuit breaker and busbar at the remote end of the radial feeder mentioned above, the remote breaker might be reclosed for a dead busbar / live line condition.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.4.4 Check Synchronism Settings
Depending on the particular system arrangement, the main three phase VT for the relay may be located on either the busbar or the line. Hence, the relay needs to be programmed with the location of the main voltage transformer. This is done under the CT & VT RATIOS column in the Main VT Location cell, which should be programmed as either Line or Bus to allow the previously described logic to operate correctly. (See DDB description bellow) Note that the check synch VT input may be driven from either a phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage. The C/S Input cell in the CT & VT RATIOS column has the options of A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C or C-A, which should therefore be set according to the actual VT arrangement. If the VTS feature internal to the relay operates, the check synchronising element is inhibited from giving an Allow Reclosure output. This avoids allowing reclosure in instances where voltage checks are selected and a VT fuse failure has made voltage checks unreliable. Measurements of the magnitude angle and delta frequency (slip frequency - since version A4.0 with model 07) the rated frequency of network is displayed by default in case of problem with the delta f calculation : No line voltage or no bus voltage or both of the checksynch voltage are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS 1 column. Individual System Check logic features can be enabled or disabled by means of the C/S Check Scheme function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable the logic, setting bits to 0 will disable that part of the logic. Voltage, frequency, angle and timer thresholds are shared for both manual and autoreclosure, it is the live/dead line/bus logic which can differ.

Enable_SYNC VTS_Slow INP_Fuse Failure Bus AR_Force_Sync INP_AR_Cycle_1P INP_AR_Reclaim INP_AR_Cycle_Conf INP_AR_Reclaim_Conf Any_Pole_Dead & All_Pole_Dead & 0 t 1 S Q R 1
1 1 &
CHECK SYNC Conditions verified
200ms
Dead L/Live B V< Dead Line V> Live Bus & t 0
100ms
Live L/Dead B V> Live L V< Dead B & t 0
100ms
Live L/Live B V> Live B V> Live L Diff voltage Diff frequency Diff phase & t 0
Bus Line Delay
P0492ENa
FIGURE 69 CHECK SYNC LOGIC DESCRIPTION
X1
X2
b0
i0 i1
b1
sample
T sample
P0493ENa
FIGURE 70 CALCUL OF FREQUENCY Frequency tracking is calculated by: freq=1/((X2-X1+ Nbsamples)* Tsamples) With X1 = b0 /(b0 b1) et X2 = I0 /(I0 I1). Tsamples is the sampling period. Nbsamples is the number of samples per period (between b1 & i1 (b1 being excluded)) The Line & Bus frequencies are calculated with the same principle (described here after).
Trailing VLine phase

VLine VBus x1 x2
Ta
y1
y2
Leading VLine phase

VBus
VLine
y2
Ta
y3
x1
x2
P0494ENa
FIGURE 71 - CALCULATION OF DIFF. PHASE Phase shift = (T/ T) *360 T = Ta + (x1-y2) A phase shift calculation requests a change of sign from both signals. All the angles will be between 0 and 180. For a phase shift of 245, (360 245) = 115 will be displayed
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.4.5 4.4.5.1 Logic inputs / Outputs from synchrocheck function Logic DDB input from the check sync logic
MCB/VTS Bus
The DDB:MCB/VTS Bus if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will inform the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for synchrocheck ref. (BUS in that case means Checksync ref measurement / even if the main VT is on the bus side and the Synchro VT is on the line side) When this opto picks up it will block the internal logic of Synchrocheck.
MCB/VTS Line
The DDB:MCB/VTS Line if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will inform the P44X about an internal maloperation from the VT used for impedance measurement ref. (Line in that case means Main VT ref measurement / even if the main VT are bus side and the Synchro VT is line side) When that opto picks up it will block the internal logic of Synchrocheck. 4.4.5.2 Logic DDB outputs issued by the check sync logic
Check Sync OK
Set high when Check Synchro conditions are verified [Used with AR close in dedicated PSL "AND" gate : [(AR Close) & (CheckSync OK)]
A/R Force Sync

Simulates the CheckSync control and force the logical DDB output "CheckSync OK" at 1 during a 1 pole or 3 poles high speed AR cycle. Without CheckSync control (See the explanation in AR description Figure 76 and Figure 106)
V<Dead Line
Set high when the Dead line condition is verified (voltage below the V<Dead Line threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) The measured voltage is always calculated as a single phase voltage
V>Live Line
Set high when the Live line condition is verified (voltage above the V>Live Line threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) - always calculated as a single phase voltage ref
V<Dead Bus
Set high when the Dead Bus condition is verified (voltage below the V<Dead Bus threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) - always calculated as a single phase voltage ref
V>Live Bus
Set high when the Live Bus condition is verified (voltage above the V>Live Bus threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) - always calculated as a single phase voltage ref
Control No C/S
Set high when the internal Check Sync conditions are not verified
Ext Chk Synch OK

The DDB Ext Chk Synch OK if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, indicates that Check Sync conditions are verified by an external device The DDB cell should be assigned afterwards with an internal AR logic (See also AR description in section 4.5.1).
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 124/220 WARNING:
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 TO ENSURE THAT THE AR CLOSING COMMAND IS CONTROLED BY THE CHECK SYNC CONDITIONS, THE ABOVE PSL SHOULD BE SET.
(Different schemes can be created with internal AR & external CSync or internal Csync & external AR)
Synchro Check : Dead Bus / Dead Line
P0537ENa
FIGURE 72 CHECK SYNC PSL LOGIC

PSL Output assigned
Check Sync
SYNC
AR_Force_Sync
AR_Fail AReclose AR_Close AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P
1 CB Control CBC_Recl_3P CBC_No_Check_Sync
&
Closing command with check sync conditions verified
P0495ENa
FIGURE 73 INTERNAL CHECK SYNC AND INTERNAL AR LOGIC
External Check Sync
1 &
Closing command with external C. Sync conditions verified
Output_AR_force_Sync
Output_closing order
P0496ENa
FIGURE 74 - LOGIC WITH EXTERNAL SYNCHRO CHECK

Output_Sync 1 & Output_AR_Close 1 Output_closing order
P0497ENa
External AR close order
Output_AR_force_Sync
External closing order with internal C. Sync conditions verified
FIGURE 75 - LOGIC WITH EXTERNAL AR 4.5 4.5.1 Autorecloser Autorecloser Functional Description The relay autorecloser provides selectable multishot reclosure of the line circuit breaker. The standard scheme logic is configured to permit control of one circuit breaker. Autoreclosure of two circuit breakers in a 1 circuit breaker or mesh corner scheme is not supported by the standard logic (Dedicated PSL must be created & tested by user). The autorecloser can be adjusted to perform a single shot, two shot, three shot or four shot cycle. Dead times for all shots (reclose attempts) are independently adjustable (in MiCOM S1). Where the relay is configured for single and three pole tripping, the recloser can perform a high speed (HSAR) single pole reclose shot, for a single phase to earth fault. This single pole shot may be followed by up to three delayed (DAR) autoreclose shots, each with three phase tripping and reclosure. For a three pole trip, up to four reclose shots are available in the same scheme. Where the relay is configured for three pole tripping only, up to four reclose shots are available, each performing three phase reclosure.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 126/220 Menu text Default setting
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Setting range Min Max Step size
GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE MODE 1P Trip Mode Single Single Single/Three Single/Three/Three Single/Three/Three/Three Three Three/Three Three/Three/Three Three/Three/Three/Three 0.1s 0.1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 0.1s 1s 5s 60s 3600s 3600s 3600s 600s 10s 3600s 0.01s 0.01s 1s 1s 1s 1s 0.1s 1s
3P Trip Mode
Three
1P - Dead Time 1(HSAR) 3P - Dead Time 1(HSAR) Dead Time 2 (DAR) Dead Time 3 (DAR) Dead Time 4 (DAR) Reclaim Time Close Pulse Time A/R Inhibit Wind (CB healthy application) C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 (Check Sync with HSAR) AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT Block A/R
1s 1s 60s 180s 180s 180s 0.1s 5s
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
11111111 11111111
(Bit = 1 means AR blocked)
Bit 0: Block at tZ2, Bit 1: Block at tZ3, Bit 2: Block at tZp, Bit 3: Block for LoL Trip, Bit 4: Block for I2> Trip, Bit 5: Block for I>1 Trip, Bit 6: Block for I>2 Trip, Bit 7: Block for V<1 Trip, Bit 8: Block for V<2 Trip, Bit 9: Block for V>1 Trip, Bit 10: Block for V>2 Trip, Bit 11: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 12: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 13: Block for Aided DEF Trip. 0.1s 5s 0.01s
Discrim. Time Remark:
5s
1 PAR or/and 3 PAR logic must be enable in CB control:
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.5.2 Benefits of Autoreclosure
An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature. Lightning is the most common cause, other possibilities being clashing conductors and wind blown debris. Such faults can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to isolate the fault, followed by a reclose cycle for the circuit breakers. As the faults are generally self clearing non-damage faults, a healthy restoration of supply will result. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either semi-permanent or permanent. A semipermanent fault could be caused by a small tree branch falling on the line. The cause of the fault may not be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt away/thrown clear after several further reclose attempts or shots. Thus several time delayed shots may be required in forest areas. Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults or cable faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored. In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, reclosure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised, with obvious benefits. The main advantages to be derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows: Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer; A high speed trip and reclose cycle clears the fault without threatening system stability.
When considering feeders which are partly overhead line and partly underground cable, any decision to install auto-reclosing would be influenced by any data known on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of auto-reclosing are small, particularly since reclosing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage. At subtransmission and transmission voltages, utilities often employ single pole tripping for earth faults, leaving circuit breaker poles on the two unfaulted phases closed. High speed single phase autoreclosure then follows. The advantages and disadvantages of such single pole trip/reclose cycles are: Synchronising power flows on the unfaulted phases, using the line to maintain synchronism between remote regions of a relatively weakly interconnected system. However, the capacitive current induced from the healthy phases can increase the time taken to de-ionise fault arcs.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 128/220 4.5.3 Auto-reclose logic operating sequence
An autoreclose cycle is internally initiated by operation of a protective element (could be started by an internal trip or external trip), provided the circuit breaker is closed at the instant of protection operation. The appropriate dead timer for the shot is started (Dead Time 1, 2, 3 or 4; noting that separate dead times are provided for the first high speed shot of single pole (1P), and three pole (3P), reclosure). At the end of the dead time, a CB close command of set duration = Close Pulse is given, (See Figure 76 with AR Close logic) provided system conditions are suitable. The conditions to be met for closing are that the system voltages satisfy the internal check synchronism criteria (set in the System Checks section of the relay menu and in a dedicated PSL (needs to be created by user see section 4.2.8), and that the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully charged indicated from the DDB: CB Healthy input (Optional application / See Figure 78 and Figure 82 AR inputs). When the CB has closed the reclaim time (Reclaim Time) starts (See Figure 76 with AR Close logic). If the circuit breaker has been not retrip, the autoreclose logic is reset at the end of the reclaim time. The autorecloser is ready again to restart from the first shot a new cycle again (for future faults). If the protection retrips during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot in the programmed autoreclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts have been made, goes to lockout.
Trip_1P or Trip_3P Dead Time_1P or Dead Time_3P Close Pulse AR_Trip_3ph Reclaim Time
P0555ENa
FIGURE 76 - AR CYCLE GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AR_Trip_3ph and Reclaim Time stop with next Trip
Trip_1P or Trip_3P Dead Time_1P Dead Time_3P Close Pulse AR_Trip_3ph Reclaim Time
P0556ENa
FIGURE 77 - SUCCESSIVE AR CYCLE SECOND TRIP ORDER BEFORE RECLAIM TIME IS ISSUED
(The reclaim time is reset when the reclaim timer adjusted in MiCOM S1 Timer is issued or if a new trip order 1P or 3P occurs see Figure 78)
Any Pole Dead CHECK SYNC OK R End of Dead Time 2 Q & S AR_Fail
CHECK SYNC 3P HSAR & End of 3P Dead Time 1
& 1 End of 1P Dead Time 1 1 1 &
S Q R AR_Force_Sync
S Q R AR_RECLAIM 0 t Reclaim Time
AR_Enable
& 1
Block AR 1 INP_CBHealthy 1 TRIP_1P 1 TRIP_3P 1 S Q R
AR_Close 0 t Close pulse Time

P0498ENa
FIGURE 78 - LOGIC FOR RECLAIM TIME /AR CLOSE / AR FAIL AND AR FORCE_SYNC (AR FAIL is reseted with 3 pole closed)

AR_Enable Block AR AR lock out inhibit CBA_Discrepency
&
S Q R 0 t Reclaim Time S Q R 1
&
AR_lock out
End of 1P Dead Time 1 End of 3P Dead Time 1 1 & TRIP_1P TRIP_3P Reset TRIP 1P 1 Reset TRIP 3P 1
TPAR enable AR_Cycle_1P AR_Discrimination TRIP_3P Reset TRIP 3P 1 &
S Q R
&
S Q R
P0499ENa
FIGURE 79 - INTERNAL LOGIC OF AR LOCK OUT AR lockout logic picks up by: Block AR (see Figure 80) or AR BAR Shots (see Figure 81) or Inhibit (see Figure 82) or No pole discrepancy detected at the end of dead time1 (see Figure 83) or Trip order still present at the end of Dead time or Trip3P issued during 1P cycle after Discrimination Timer or Trip3P issued during 1P cycle with no 3PAR enable.
S Q
AR 1P in Prog
>1
>1
AR 3P in Prog
&
BAR_Block_T2 T2 BAR_Block_T3 T3 BAR_Block_Tzp Tzp T4 BAR_Block_LOL LOL_Trip_3P BAR_Block_I2 > Trip_I2>
Enable
& & &
Enable
Enable
Enable
& & & & & & & & & &
Enable
Enable
BAR_Block_I> Enable TRIP 3P_I>1 BAR_Block_I>2 TRIP 3P_I>2 BAR_Block_V<1 Enable TRIP 3P_V<1 BAR_Block_V<2 TRIP 3P_V<2 BAR_Block_V>1 Enable TRIP 3P_V>1 BAR_Block_V>2 TRIP 3P_V>2 BAR_Block_IN>1 Enable SBEF_TRIP 3P_IN>1 BAR_Block_IN>2 SBEF_TRIP 3P_IN>2 BAR_Block_DEF DEF_TripA DEF_TripB DEF_TripC
Enable Enable Enable Enable
>1
&
>1
Block AR
&
>1
BRK_Trip 3P SOTF_Enable SOTF/TOR trip PHOC_Trip_3P_I>4 CBF1_Trip_3P CBF2_Trip_3P INP_BAR
&
P0500ENa
FIGURE 80 BLOCK AR LOGIC With AR Lock out (Block AR) activated, the AR does not initiate any additional AR cycle. If AR lock out picks up during a cycle, the AR close is blocked. A dedicated PSL can be created, for performing an AR lock out in case of Fuse Failure confirmed.

AR_Enable
SPAR enable
&
&
S Q R
AR lockout_Shots>
TRIP_1P
Trip counter = setting
&
TRIP_3P
TPAR enable Reset TRIP_1P Reset TRIP_3P
&
P0501ENa
FIGURE 81 - AR LOCK OUT BY NUMBER OF SHOTS

AR_Enable
End of 1P_Dead Time 1 End of 3P_Dead Time & INP_CBHealthy & S Q R
t 0 Inhibit Window
inhibit
P0502ENa
FIGURE 82 - LOGIC OF INHIBIT WINDOW The inhibit timer is started at the end of dead time if CB healthy is absent
Trip1P Dead time(1P) AR_BAR AR_Trip_3ph CBA_Discrepency
P0503ENa
FIGURE 83 - POLES DISCREPENCY (CBA-DISC)

Trip1P or Trip 3P Dead time1 or Dead time 3P AR_Close AR_BAR
P0557ENa
FIGURE 84 - TRIP ORDER STILL PRESENT AT THE END OF DEAD TIME WILL FORCE AR LOCK OUT (AR _BAR)

CNF_52b CNF_52a
& INP_52a_A
& S Q
& INP_52b_A
&
R 1 CBA_A
&
& xor & INP_52a_B & INP_52b_B &
&
CBA_3P_C
& S Q & R 1 1 CBA_ANY
CBA_B
& xor & INP_52a_C & INP_52b_C &
&
CBA_3P
& S Q & R 1
&
CBA_C
& 1 xor
t 0
CBA_Status_Alarm
CBA_Time_Alarm
CBA_Time_Disc INP_DISCREPENCY 1 t 0 CBA_Disc
P0504ENa
FIGURE 85 - LOGICAL CBAUX SCHEME (CBA_DISC LOGIC FOR AR_BAR (AR LOCK OUT))
CBA TIME DISC=150MSEC FIXED VALUE
Logic of pole dead : CBA_A = Pole Dead A CBA_3P = All pole Dead CBA_3P_C = All pole Live CBA_Any = Minimum 1Pole dead
The total number of autoreclosures is shown in the CB Condition menu from LCD under Total Reclosures. Separate counters for single pole and three pole reclosures are available (See HMI description chapter P44x/EN HI). The counters can be reset to zero with the Reset Total A/R command; by LCD HMI
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 134/220 4.5.4 Scheme for Three Phase Trips
The relay allows up to four reclose shots. The scheme is selected in the relay menu as shown in Table 12:
(The first 3P_HSAR cycle can be controlled by the check Sync logic)
Reclosing Mode 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3
Number of Three Phase Shots 1 2 3 4
TABLE 12 - RECLOSING SCHEME FOR 3 PHASE TRIPS 4.5.5 Scheme for Single Pole Trips The relay allows up to four reclose shots, ie. one high speed single pole AR shot (HSAR), plus up to three delayed (DAR) shots. All DAR shots have three pole operation. The scheme is selected in the relay menu as follows: Scheme 1 1/3 1/3/3 1/3/3/3 Number of Single Pole HSAR Shots 1 1 1 1 Number of Three Pole DAR Shots None 1 2 3
TABLE 13 - RECLOSING SCHEME FOR SINGLE PHASE TRIPS Should a single phase fault evolve to affect other phases during the single pole dead time, the recloser will then move to the appropriate three phase cycle. When a single pole trip is issued by the relay, a 1 pole AR cycle is initiated. The Dead time1 and Discrimination timer (from version A3.0) are started. If the AR logic detects a single pole or three poles trip (internal or external) during the discrimination timer, the 1P HSAR cycle is disabled and replaced by a 3P HSAR cycle, if enable. If no AR 3P is enable in MiCOM S1, the relay trip 3 poles and AR is blocked. (see Figure 86)

Trip 1P Trip_1P or Trip_3P 1P_Dead Time AR_Discrimination Timer 3P_Dead Time AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR

Trip 3P during Discrimination Timer
P0505ENa
FIGURE 86 - FAULT DURING A HSAR 1P CYCLE DURING DISCRIMINATION TIMER If the AR logic detect a 3 poles trip (internal or external) when the Discrimination Timer is issued, and during the 1P dead time; the single pole AR cycle is stopped and the relay trip 3 phases and block the AR. (see Figure 87)
Trip 1P
Trip 3P after
Discrim Timer
Trip_1P or Trip_3P 1P_Dead Time AR_Discrimination Timer 3P_Dead Time AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR
P0506ENa
FIGURE 87 - FAULT DURING A HSAR 1P CYCLE WHEN DISCRIMINATION TIMER IS ISSUED - Figure 86 - Figure 87: Evolving fault during AR 1P cycle -
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 136/220 4.5.6 Logical Inputs used by the Autoreclose logic
Contacts from external equipment (External protection or external synchrocheck or external AR) may be used to influence the auto-recloser via opto-isolated inputs. Such functions can be allocated to any of the opto-isolated inputs on the relay via the programmable scheme logic (Ensure that optos1&2 are not set for setting group change- Otherwise, these optos cannot be mapped to functions in the PSL). The inputs can be selected to accept either a normally open or a normally closed contact, programmable via the PSL editor.
SPAR Enable
The DDB SPAR Enable if assigned to an opto input in the PSL (in default PSL is inverted and recorded to opto8) and when energized, will enable the 1P AR logic (The priority of that input is higher than the settings done via MiCOM S1 or by front panel - that means the 1P AR can be disabled even if activated in MiCOM S1; as the opto input is not energized. (to be valid opto must be energized >1,2 sec).
SPAR INP_SPAR
AR SPAR enable
P0507ENa
FIGURE 88
TPAR Enable
The DDB TPAR Enable if assigned to an opto input in the PSL (in default PSL is inverted and recorded to opto8) and when energized, will enable the 3P AR logic (The priority is higher than the settings done via MiCOM S1 or by front panel - that means the 3P AR can be disabled even if activated in MiCOM S1; as that opto is not energized. (to be valid opto must be energized >1,2 sec).
TPAR INP_TPAR
AR TPAR enable
P0508ENa
FIGURE 89 NOTE: After a new PSL loaded in the relay (which includes "TPAR" or "SPAR" cells); it is necessary to transfer again the settings configuration (from PC to relay) for adjusting the datas in RAM and EEPROM (otherwise discrepency could appear in the logic status of AR enable).
A/R Internal
The DDB A/R Internal if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will enable the internal AR logic. This opto input could be connected to an external condition like the Wdog of protection Main1 which activates the internal AR of Main 2 (P44x) in case of internal failure of the Main1.
AR_Internal SPAR enable TPAR enable 1 & AR_Enable
P0509ENa
FIGURE 90 - AR ACTIVATED CONDITIONS
A/R 1p in Prog
The DDB A/R 1P in Prog if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will block the internal DEF as an external single pole AR cycle is in progress.
A/R 3p in Prog
The DDB A/R 3P in Prog if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the P44X about the presence of an external 3P cycle.That data could be used in case of evolving fault
A/R Close
The DDB A/R Close if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, could be linked with the internal check sync condition to control the external CB closing command.
A/R Reclaim
The DDB A/R Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about an external reclaim time in progress; and will initiate the internal TOR logic. (That information extension logic, by using a dedicated PSL could be used also in Z1x.
BAR
Block Autoreclose (via Opto Input or PSL) see Figure 80. The DDB: BAR input will block the autoreclose and lockout the AR if in progress. If a single pole cycle is in progress a three pole trip and lockout will be issued. It can be used when protection operation without autoreclose is required. A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where autoreclosing may be initiated from the feeder protection but blocked from the transformer protection. Similarly, where a circuit breaker low gas pressure or loss of vacuum alarm occurs during the dead time, autoreclosure, should be blocked and BAR can be used to realise that blocking logic.
Ext Chk Synch OK

External Check Synchroniser Used (via Opto Input) Dedicated PSL required to be configured. If an opto input is assigned in the PSL (DDB: Ext Chk Synch OK), the AR close command will be controlled by an external check synchronism device. The input is energised when the Check Sync conditions are verified.
CB Healthy
(via Opto Input) The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle. It is necessary to re-establish sufficient energy in the circuit breaker before the CB can be reclosed. The DDB: CB Healthy input is used to ensure that there is sufficient energy available to close and trip the CB before initiating a CB close command. If on completion of the dead time, sufficient energy is not detected by the relay within a period given by the AR Inhibit Wind window, lockout will result and the CB will remain open (AR BAR Picks up see Figure 79) If the CB energy becomes healthy during the time window, autoreclosure will occur. This check can be disabled by not allocating an opto input. In this case, the DDB cell CB Healthy is considered invariant for the logic of the relay. This will mean that the signal is always high within the relay (when the logic required a high level) and at 0, if low level is requested. It is an invariant status for the firmware (Same logic is applied for every optional opto if not linked in the PSL these cells are managed as invariant data for internal logic).

Start of INhWind INhWind 1P Dead Time or 3P Dead Time INP_CB_Healthly Close pulse AR_Trip_3ph AR_RECLAIM

INP_CB_Healthy picks up, before issued of INhWind
P0510ENa
FIGURE 91 - CB_HEALTHY IS PRESENT BEFORE INHWIND IS ISSUED

Start of INhWind INhWind 1P_Dead Time or 3P_Dead Time INP_CB_Healthy AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph AR_BAR
P0511ENa
INhWind is issued
FIGURE 92 - CB_HEALTHY DID NOT PICKS UP WHEN INHWIND IS ISSUED (AR BAR PICKS UP) The CB healthy logic is used as a negative logic (due to an inverter in the scheme see Figure 82 (logic of inhibit window) but the DDB takes into account the CB healthy as a positive logic [1=opto energised during inhwind (MiCOM S1 setting) =AR close pulse]
Force 3P Trip
The DDB Force 3P Trip if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will force the internal single phase protection to trip three phases. (external order from Main1 to Main2 (P44x)) next Trip will be 3P (Figure 92 & Figure 93)
INP_Trp_3P 1 AR_Trip_3Ph SPAR enable AR_internal & BAN3
P0512ENa
FIGURE 93 3P TRIP LOGIC

Trip_3P_SBEF_IN>1 Trip_3P_SBEF_IN>2 Trip_3P_I2> TOR_Trip_3P LOL_Trip_3P BRK_Trip_3P Trip_3P_I>1 Trip_3P_I>2 Trip_3P_I>3 Trip_3P_I>4 Trip_3P_V<1 Trip_3P_V<2 Trip_3P_V>1 Trip_3P_V>2 PW_trip R 1 1 1
TRIP_Any Pole
Q & 1 BAN3 PDist_Trip_A Weak_Trip_A DEF_Trip_A User_Trip_A INP_EXTERNAL_ProtA 1 1 TRIP_Any_A 1 Trip_timer

Dwell Timer
Dwell Timer
Trip_A
80 ms
&
&
TRIP_3Poles
PDist_Trip_B Weak_Trip_B DEF_Trip_B User_Trip_B 1
Trip_timer
Dwell Timer
Trip_B
80 ms
INP_EXTERNAL_ProtB
TRIP_Any_B
xor
xor
&
TRIP_1Pole
PDist_Trip_C Weak_Trip_C DEF_Trip_C User_Trip_C 1
Trip_timer
Dwell Timer
Trip_C
80 ms
INP_EXTERNAL_ProtC
TRIP_Any_C
P0513ENa
FIGURE 94 - GENERAL TRIP LOGIC
Manual Close CB
(via Opto Input, Local or Remote Control) Manual closure of the circuit breaker will force the autorecloser in a lockout logic, if selected in the menu (see SOTF logic Figure 35).
Any fault detected within 500ms of a manual closure will cause an instantaneous three pole tripping, without autoreclosure (See next Figure 80 BAR logic) With AR Lock out (AR_BAR) activated, the AR does not initiate any additional AR cycle. If AR lock out picks up during a cycle, the AR close is blocked. This prevents excessive circuit breaker operations, which could result in increased circuit breaker and system damage, when closing onto a fault.
Manual Trip CB
The DDB Force Manual Trip CB if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about an external trip command on the CB by the CB control function (if activated).

SUP_Trip_Loc CBC_Local_Control & SUP_Close_Loc SUP_Trip_Rem CBC_Remote_Control & SUP_Close_Rem INP_CB_Trip_Man CBC_Input_Control & INP_CB_Man_Close & 1 Manual/Remote/Local Close & & 1 Manual/Remote/Local Trip
TRIP & CBC_Trip_Pulse Q R t 0 CBA_3P CLOSE CBA_Status_Alarm AR_Cycle_1P 1 INP_AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P INP_AR_Cycle_3P CBA_3P CBA_Disc TRIP_Any 1 INP_AR_Close
CBA_3P_C
CBC_Trip_3P
&
CBC_Failed_To_Trip
&
S Q R t 0 CBC_Delay_Close & S Q R
CBC_Close_In_Progress
AR_Close
1 R Q S
t 0
&
CBC_ Fail_To_Close
CBC_Recl_3P CBC_Close_Pulse
CBA_Any
INP_CB_Healthy
&
CBC_Healthy_Window t 0 & CBC_UnHeathly
1 CBC_CS_Window t 0 SYNC & CBC_No_Check_Syn
P0514ENa
FIGURE 95 - GENERAL CB CONTROL LOGIC
CB Discrepancy
The DDB CB Discrepancy if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will inform the protection about a pole Discrepancy status. 1 pole opened and two other poles closed. Must be Set to high logical level before Dead time 1 is issued (see Figure 83) -can be generated also internally (see Figure 85 and Figure 109 Cbaux logic).
External TripA External TripB External TripC

From External Protection Devices (via Opto Inputs)- see General trip logic Figure 94. Opto inputs are assigned as External Trip A, External Trip B and External Trip C (external Trip Order issued by main 2 or in order to initiate the internal AR backup protection). External trip is integrated in the DDB: Any Trip. No Dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip (see Figure 94: trip logic). 4.5.7 Logical Outputs generated by the Autoreclose logic The following DDB signals can be masked to a relay contact in the PSL or assigned to a Monitor Bit in Commissioning Tests, to provide information about the status of the autoreclose cycle. These are described below, identified by their DDB signal text.
AR Lockout Shot>
Indicates an unsuccessful autoreclose (definitive trip following the last AR shot). The relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition has been reset. An alarm, "AR Lockout Shots>" (along with AR Lockout) will be raised. (see Figure 79 and Figure 81)
AR Fail
If the check sync conditions are not meet prior to reclose within the time window, an alarm "AR Fail" will be raised. (see Figure 78)
AR Close
Initiates the reclosing command pulse for the circuit breaker. This output feeds a signal to the Reclose Time Delay timer, which maintains the assigned reclose contact closed for a sufficient time period to ensure reliable CB mechanism operation. This DDB signal may also be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle. Where three single pole circuit breakers are used, the AR Close contact will need to energise the closing circuits for all three breaker poles (or alternatively assign three CB Close contacts). (See Figure 78)
AR 1P In Prog.
A single pole autoreclose cycle is in progress. This output will remain activated from the initiating protection trip, until the circuit breaker is closed successfully, or the AR function is Locked Out, thus indicating that dead time timeout is in progress. This signal may be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle.

SPAR enable TRIP_1P AR_Cycle_3P & CBA_Discrepency S Q R t 0
&
AR__1P in prog
BAR TRIP_3P
1P Dead Time 1
S Q R 1 t 0 Discrimination Time
P0515ENa
AR_Discrimination
FIGURE 96 AR 1 POLE IN PROGRESS LOGIC
AR 3P In Prog.
A three phase autoreclose cycle is in progress. This output will remain activated from the initiating protection trip, until the circuit breaker is closed successfully, or the AR function is Locked Out, thus indicating that dead time timeout is in progress. This signal may be useful during relay commissioning to check the operation of the autoreclose cycle.
HS_AR_3P 1 DAR_3P
P0516ENa
AR_3P in prog
FIGURE 97 - OUTPUT AR 3 POLES IN PROGRESS

AR_1P in prog Trip counter = 0 TPAR enable TRIP_3P AR_discrimination & t 0 Block AR 1 Dead Time1 & &
S Q R HSAR_3P
P0517ENa
FIGURE 98 - HSAR 3 POLES (HIGH SPEED AR CYCLE 3 POLES)

3Par TRIP_3P 0 < Trip counter < setting Block AR
&
&
S Q R t 0 Dead Time 2
P0518ENa
DAR_3P
FIGURE 99 - DAR 3 POLES (DELAYED AR CYCLE 3 POLES)
AR 1st in Prog.
DDB: AR 1st in Prog. is used to indicate that the autorecloser is timing out its first dead time, whether a high speed single pole or three pole shot.
HSAR_3P 1 AR_1P in prog AR_1st_Cycle
P0519ENa
FIGURE 100 - OUTPUT HSAR (FOR DEAD TIME1)
AR 234 in Prog.
DDB: AR 234 in Prog. is used to indicate that the autorecloser is timing out delayed autoreclose dead times for shots 2, 3 or 4. Where certain protection elements should not initiate autoreclosure for DAR shots, the protection element operation is combined with AR 234 in Prog. as a logical AND operation in the Programmable Scheme Logic, and then set to assert the DDB: BAR input, forcing lockout.
DAR_3P
AR_234th_Cycle
P0520ENa
FIGURE 101 - OUTPUT DAR (FOR DEAD TIME2,3,4)
AR Trip 3 Ph
This is an internal logic signal used to condition any protection trip command to the circuit breaker(s). Where single pole tripping is enabled, fixed logic converts single phase trips for faults on autoreclosure to three pole trips.
AR_1P in prog 1 AR_3P in prog &
TRIP_1P
Block AR
AR_RECLAIM
& inhibit
AR_Trip_3Ph
AR_Internal SPAR enable
&
P0521ENa
FIGURE 102 - -AR LOGIC FOR 3P TRIP DECISION
AR Reclaim
Indicates that the reclaim timer following a particular autoreclose shot is timing out. The DDB: AR Reclaim output would be energised at the same instant as resetting of any Cycle outputs. AR Reclaim could be used to block low-set instantaneous protection on autoreclosure, which had not been time-graded with downstream protection. This technique is commonly used when the downstream devices are fuses, and fuse saving is implemented. This avoids fuse blows for transient faults. See Figure 78.
AR Discrim
Start with the trip order. When a single pole trip is issued by the relay, a 1 pole AR cycle is initiated. The Dead time1 and Discrimination timer (from version A3.0) are started. If the AR logic detects a single pole or three poles trip (internal or external) during the discrimination timer, the 1P HSAR cycle is disabled and replaced by a 3P HSAR cycle, if enable. If no AR 3P is enable in MiCOM S1, the relay trip 3 poles and AR is blocked. (see Figure 86) If the AR logic detect a 3 poles trip (internal or external) when the Discrimination Timer is issued, and during the 1P dead time; the single pole AR cycle is stopped and the relay trip 3 phases and block the AR. (see Figure 87 and Figure 96)
SPAR enable TRIP_1P AR_3P in prog
&
& CBA_Discrepency
S Q R t 0 1P Dead Time 1 AR_1P in prog
Block AR TRIP_3P
S Q R 1 t 0 Discrimination Time
P0522ENa
AR_Discrimination
FIGURE 103 AR DISCRIMINATION LOGIC See also Figure 86 & Figure 87 The discrimination timer is used to differentiate an evolving fault to a second fault in the power system or a long operation of the circuit breaker.
If an evolving occurs during the discrimination timer, the first single pole high speed AR cycle (1P HSAR) is stopped and removed by a 3 pole high speed AR cycle (3P HSAR)
P0523ENa
FIGURE 104 - DEAD TIME 1P=500MSEC / T DISCRIM=100MSEC If the evolving fault occurs after the discrimination timer, it is considered like a new fault. The 1P cycle is blocked and the CB is kept opened. (No 3P AR cycle is started) (definitive trip 3 poles are kept opened) see Figure 105.
FIGURE 105 To inhibit the discrimination timer logic (fixed logic) ; the value should be equal to the 1P cycle dead time. (1P Dead Time 1).
AR Enable
Indicates that the autoreclose function is in service. (See Figure 90)
AR SPAR Enable
Single pole AR is enabled. (See Figure 88)
AR TPAR Enable
Three poles AR is enabled. (See Figure 89)
AR Lockout
If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will be driven to lockout and the autoreclose function will be disabled until the lockout condition is reset. This will produce an alarm, AR Lockout. Secondly, the DDB: BAR input will block autoreclose and cause a lockout if autoreclose is in progress. Lockout will also occur if the CB energy is low and the CB fails to close. Once the autorecloser is locked out, it will not function until a Reset Lockout or CB Manual Close command is received (depending on the Reset Lockout method chosen in CB Monitor Setup). NOTE: Lockout can also be caused by the CB condition monitoring functions maintenance lockout, excessive fault frequency lockout, broken current lockout, CB failed to trip and CB failed to close, manual close no check synchronism and CB unhealthy. (See Figure 79 & Figure 80)
A/R Force Sync

Force the Check Sync conditions to high logical level used for SPAR or TPAR with SYNC AR3 fast (Enable by MiCOM S1) - signal is reset with AR reclaim
DEC_3P AR_Cycle_3P SYNC AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph RECLAIM AR_Force_Sync
P0558ENa
FIGURE 106 CHECK SYNC SIGNAL PICK-UP AT THE END OF THE DEAD TIME (AR CYCLE)
DEC_3P AR_Cycle_3P SYNC AR_Close AR_Trip_3ph AR_RECLAIM AR_Fail AR_Force_Sync

P0559ENa
FIGURE 107 - THE CHECK SYNC SIGNAL IS FORCED AT THE END OF DEAD TIME (SEE FIGURE 78)
Ext Chk Synch OK

The DDB Ext Chk Synch OK if linked to an opto in a dedicated PSL and when energized, indicates that external conditions of Synchro are fullfiled This can be linked afterwards with an internal AR logic (See also AR description in Figure 76).
Check Sync;OK
(See Checksync logic description section 4.4.5.2)
V<Dead Line
V>Live Line
V<Dead Bus
V>Live Bus
Ctrl Cls In Prog

Manual close in progress-using CB control (timer manual closing delay in progress)
Control Trip
CB Trip command by internal CB control
Control Close
CB close command by internal CB control 4.5.8 Setting Guidelines Should autoreclosure not be required, the function may be Disabled in the relay Configuration menu. Disabling the autorecloser does not prevent the use of the internal check synchronism element to supervise manual circuit breaker closing. If the autoreclose function is Enabled, the setting guidelines now outlined should be read: 4.5.9 Choice of Protection Elements to Initiate Autoreclosure In most applications, there will be a requirement to reclose for certain types of faults but not for others. The logic is partly fixed so that autoreclosure is always blocked for any Switch on to Fault, Stub Bus Protection, Broken Conductor or Zone 4 trip. Autoreclosure will also be blocked when relay supervision functions detect a Circuit Breaker Failure or Voltage Transformer/Fuse Failure. All other protection trips will initiate autoreclosure unless blocking bits are set in the A/R Block function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will block autoreclose initiation (forcing a three pole lockout), setting bits to zero will allow the set autoreclose cycle to proceed. When autoreclosure is not required for multiphase faults, DDB signals 2Ph Fault and 3Ph Fault can be mapped via the PSL in a logical OR combination onto input DDB: BAR. When blocking is only required for a three phase fault, the DDB signal 3Ph Fault is mapped to BAR alone. Three phase faults are more likely to be persistent, so many utilities may not wish to initiate autoreclose in such instances. 4.5.10 Number of Shots There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for any particular application. In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into account: An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip close operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period. The fact that 80 - 90% of faults are transient highlights the advantage of single shot schemes. If statistical information for the power system shows that a moderate percentage of faults are semi-permanent, further DAR shots may be used provided that system stability is not threatened. Note that DAR shots will always be three pole.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 150/220 4.5.11 Dead Timer Setting
High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimised by using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers <100 ms. For stability between two sources a system dead time of <300 ms may typically be required. The minimum system dead time considering just the CB is the trip mechanism reset time plus the CB closing time. Minimum relay dead time settings are governed primarily by two factors: Time taken for de-ionisation of the fault path; Circuit breaker characteristics.
Also it is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination will be maintained after reclosure onto a fault. For high speed autoreclose instantaneous reset of protection is required. For highly interconnected systems synchronism is unlikely to be lost by the tripping out of a single line. Here the best policy may be to adopt longer dead times, to allow time for power swings on the system resulting from the fault to settle. 4.5.12 De-Ionising Time The de-ionisation time of a fault arc depends on circuit voltage, conductor spacing, fault current and duration, wind speed and capacitive coupling from adjacent conductors. As circuit voltage is generally the most significant, minimum de-ionising times can be specified as in the Table below. NOTE: For single pole HSAR, the capacitive current induced from the healthy phases can increase the time taken to de-ionise fault arcs. Minimum De-Energisation Time (s) 0.1 0.15 0.17 0.28 0.3 0.5
Line Voltage (kV) 66 110 132 220 275 400
TABLE 14 - MINIMUM FAULT ARC DE-IONISING TIME (THREE POLE TRIPPING)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Example Minimum Dead Time Calculation The following circuit breaker and system characteristics are to be used:
CB Operating time (Trip coil energised Arc interruption): 50ms (a); CB Opening + Reset time (Trip coil energised Trip mechanism reset): 200ms (b); Protection reset time: < 80ms (c); CB Closing time (Close command Contacts make): 85ms (d).
De-ionising time for 220kV line: 280ms (e) for a three phase trip. (560ms for a single pole trip).
The minimum relay dead time setting is the greater of: (a) + (c) = 50 + 80 = 130ms, to allow protection reset; = 245ms, to allow de-ionising (three pole); = 525ms, to allow de-ionising (single pole).
(a) + (e) - (d) = 50 + 280 - 85 = 50 + 560 - 85
In practice a few additional cycles would be added to allow for tolerances, so 3P Rcl - Dead Time 1 could be chosen as 300ms, and 1P Rcl - Dead Time 1 could be chosen as 600ms. The overall system dead time is found by adding (d) to the chosen settings, and then subtracting (a). (This gives 335ms and 635ms respectively here). 4.5.13 Reclaim Timer Setting A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as; Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of recurrent lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults. Spring charging time - For high speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time. A minimum reclaim time of >5s may be needed to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close before it can perform another tripclose-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of the CB. For delayed autoreclose there is no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check AR Inhibit Wind window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance intervals. The Reclaim Time setting is always set greater than the tZ2 distance zone delay.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 152/220 4.6 Circuit breaker state monitoring
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The relay incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised. 4.6.1 Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Features MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b) auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one of the following conditions: Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would apply: Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted operation during normal switching duties. In the PSL CB AUX could be used or not, following the four options: None 52A 52B Both 52A and 52B (1 or 3 optos if it is a single pole logic) (1 or 3 optos) (2 optos or 6 optos) Sol1: One opto used for 52a (3 poles breaker)
Sol2: One opto used for 52b (3 poles breaker)
Sol3: Two optos used for 52a & 52b (3 poles breaker)
Sol4: Three optos used for 52a (1 pole breaker)
Sol5: Three optos used for 52b (1 pole breaker)
Sol6: Six optos used for 52a &52b (1 pole breaker)
FIGURE 108 DIFFERENTS OPTOS/CB AUX SCHEMES
Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, auto-reclose, etc. Where only 52a is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52b signal from the absence of the 52a signal. Circuit breaker status information will be available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also true where only a 52b is used. If both 52a and 52b are used then status information will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to the following table. 52a and 52b inputs are assigned to relay optoisolated inputs via the PSL. Auxiliary Contact Position 52a Open Closed Closed Open 52b Closed Open Closed Open Breaker Open Breaker Closed CB Failure State Unknown Circuit breaker healthy Circuit breaker healthy Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s Alarm raised if the condition persists for greater than 5s CB State Detected Action
Where single pole tripping is used (available on P442 and P444) then an open breaker condition will only be given if all three phases indicate and open condition. Similarly for a closed breaker condition indication that all three phases are closed must be given. For single pole tripping applications 52a-A, 52a-B and 52a-C and/or 52b-A, 52b-B and 52b-C inputs should be used. With 52a&52b both present, the relay memorizes the last valid status of the 2 inputs (52a=/52b). If no valid status is present (52a=52b) when the Alarm timer is issued (value=150 msec), CBA_Status Alarm is activated. See Figure 109.

CNF_52b CNF_52a
& INP_52a_A
& S Q
& INP_52b_A
&
R 1 CBA_A
&
& xor & INP_52a_B & INP_52b_B &
&
CBA_3P_C
& S Q & R 1 1 CBA_ANY
CBA_B
& xor & INP_52a_C & INP_52b_C &
&
CBA_3P
& S Q & R 1
&
CBA_C
CBA_Time_Alarm & 1 xor t 0 150 ms CBA_Status_Alarm
CBA_Time_Disc INP_DISC 1 t 0 150 ms CBA_Discrepancy

P0524ENa
FIGURE 109 - LOGICAL SCHEME OF CBAUX CBA_A = Dead PoleA CBA_B = Dead PoleB CBA_C = Dead PoleC CBA_3P_C = All Pole live CBA_3P = All Pole Dead CBA_ANY = Any Pole dead CBA_Disc = Pole Discrepancy detection
INP_52a_A
INP_52a_A
CBA_A
CBA_STATUS_ALARM
P0525ENa
FIGURE 110 - NON COMPLEMENTARY OF 52a/52b NOT LONG ENOUGH FOR GETTING THE ALARM

INP_52a_A
INP_52b_A
CBA_A
CBA_STATUS_ALARM
P0526ENa
FIGURE 111 - COMPLEMENTARY OF 52a/52b IS LONG ENOUGH FOR GETTING THE ALARM
INP_52a_A
CBA_A
CBA_STATUS_ALARM
P0527ENa
FIGURE 112 - WITH ONE OPTO 52a- POLE DEAD LOGIC
INP_52b_A
CBA_A
CBA_STATUS_ALARM
P0528ENa
FIGURE 113 - WITH ONE OPTO 52b POLE DEAD LOGIC 4.6.2 4.6.2.1 Inputs / outputs DDB for CB logic: Inputs
External TripA External TripB External TripC

From External Protection Devices (via Opto Inputs)- see General trip logic Figure 94. If these optos inputs are assigned as External Trip A, External Trip B and External Trip C their change will update the CB Operation counter. (External trip is integrated in the DDB: Any Trip.No Dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip. (see Figure 94: trip logic)
CB aux A(52a) CB aux B(52a) CB aux C(52a) CB aux A(52b) CB aux B(52b) CB aux C(52b)
The DDB CB Aux if assigned to an opto input in the PSL and when energized, will be used for Any pole dead & All pole dead internal logic & Discrepency logic
CB Discrepancy
Used for internal CBA_Disc issued by external (opto) or internal detection (CB Aux)
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.6.2.2 Outputs
CB Status Alarm
Picks up when CB Discrepancy status is detected after CBA timer issued externally by opto or internally by CB Aux
CB aux A CB aux B CB aux C

Pole A+B+C detected Dead pole by internal logic or CB status
Any Pole Dead

The DDB Any Pole Dead if assigned in the PSL, indicates that one or more poles is open
All Pole Dead

The DDB All Pole Dead if assigned in the PSL, indicates that all pole are dead (All 3 poles are open) 4.7 Circuit breaker condition monitoring Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section. 4.7.1 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These cells can not be set: Menu text Default setting Setting range Min CB CONDITION CB Operations {3 pole tripping} CB A Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} CB B Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} CB C Operations {1 & 3 pole tripping} Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Reset All Values 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yes, No 10000 10000 10000 10000 25000In^ 25000In^ 25000In^ 0.5s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1In^ 0.001 Max Step size
The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is taken from the relay menu. It includes the setup of the current broken facility and those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout.
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min Max Max 2
Step size
CB MONITOR SETUP Broken I^ I^ Maintenance I^ Maintenance I^ Lockout I^ Lockout N CB Ops Maint N CB Ops Maint N CB Ops Lock N CB Ops Lock CB Time Maint CB Time Maint CB Time Lockout CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Count Fault Freq Time
Default 2 Alarm Disabled 1000In^ Alarm Disabled 2000In^ Alarm Disabled 10 Alarm Disabled 20 Alarm Disabled 0.1s Alarm Disabled 0.2s Alarm Disabled 10 3600s
Min 1
Step 0.1
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 1In^ 25000In^ 1In^
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 1 10000 1
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 1 10000 1
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Alarm Disabled, Alarm Enabled 0 0 9999 9999s 1 1s
The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command.One counter is incremented by phase,.the highest counter value is compared to two thresholds values settable (value n):
Maintenance Alarm or Lock Out Alarm can be generated. A pre-lock out Alarm is generated at value n-1. All counters can be re-initiated with the command Reset all values (by HMI) In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the relays optoisolated inputs (via the programmable scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped to the opto is called External TripA or B or C.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters will not be updated. 4.7.2 Setting guidelines Setting the I^ Thresholds Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCBs), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The I^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t. This is where I is the fault current broken, and t is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting Broken I^ = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of Broken I^ = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications Broken I^ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or 1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example. The setting range for Broken I^ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturers instructions. 4.7.3 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear manufacturers maintenance instructions.
Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. The maintenance alarm threshold (N CB Ops Maint) may be set to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold (N CB Ops Lock) may be set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion. 4.7.4 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint / CB Time Lockout) are provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker. 4.7.5 Setting the Excessive Fault Frequency Thresholds A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of operations (Fault Freq Count) over a set time period (Fault Freq Time) to be monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set. 4.7.6 4.7.6.1 Inputs/Outputs for CB Monitoring logic Inputs
Reset Lock Out

Provides a reset of the CB monitoring lock out (all counters & values are reset)
Reset All Values

Provides a reset of the CB monitoring (all counters & values are reset) 4.7.6.2 Outputs
I^Maint Alarm
An alarm maintenance is issued when the maximum broken current (1st level) calculated by the CB monitoring function is reached
I^Lock Out Alarm

An alarm Lock Out is issued when the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by the monitoring function is reached
CB Ops Maint
An alarm is issued when the maximum of CB operations is reached [initiated by internal (any protection function) or external trip (via opto)] (1st level:CB Ops Maint)
CB Ops Lockout
An alarm is issued when the maximum of CB operations is reached [initiated by internal or external trip] (2nd level:CB Ops Lock)
CB Op Time Maint
An alarm is issued when the operating tripping time on any phase pass over the CB Time Maint adjusted in MiCOM S1 (slowest pole detection calculated by I< from CB Fail logic)
CB Op Time Lock
An alarm is issued when the operating tripping time on any phase pass over the CB Time Lockout adjusted in MiCOM S1 (slowest pole detection calculated by I< from CB Fail logic)
FF Pre Lockout
An alarm is issued at (n-1) value in the counters of Main lock out or Fault frequency
FF Lock
An alarm is issued at (n) value in the counters of Main lock out or Fault frequency
Lockout Alarm
An alarm is issued with: CBC Unhealthy or CBC No check sync or CBC Fail to close or CBC fail to trip or FF Lock or CB Op Time Lock or CB Ops Lock 4.8 Circuit Breaker Control The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker: Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications
It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote circuit breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown in Figure 114. Where this feature is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote tripping.
+ ve
Protection trip Remote control trip Remote control close
Trip 0 close
Local Remote
Trip
Close ve
P3078ENa
FIGURE 114 - REMOTE CONTROL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings and commands associated with circuit breaker control. Depending on the relay model some of the cells may not be visible:
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min Max
Step size
CB CONTROL CB Control by Disabled Disabled, Local, Remote, Local+Remote, Opto, Opto+local, Opto+Remote, Opto+Rem+local 0.1s 0.1s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 10s 5s 600s 9999s 9999s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
Close Pulse Time Trip Pulse Time Man Close Delay Healthy Window C/S Window A/R Single Pole {1&3 pole A/R only} A/R Three Pole
0.5s 0.5s 10s 5s 5s Disabled
Disabled, Enabled {Refer to Autoreclose notes for further information} Disabled, Enabled {Refer to Autoreclose notes for further information}
Disabled
If AR Enable in MiCOM S1 (2 additive lines):
(*) For P442 P444 only WARNING: Must be enabled for validating the AR function (if TPAR/SPAR optos are assigned in the PSL, these inputs have a higher priority from the MiCOM S1 settings). The AR single and three poles mode could be enabled in the menu "CB control" via MiCOM S1 or by the front panel. However, if the DDB signals TPAR/SPAR have been assigned in the PSL, these both inputs have a higher priority and depending of their status, will enable/disable the single or three poles AR function independing of the MiCOM S1 or front LCD settings. If TPAR is disable, the Dead Time 2 is not used when SPAR logic manages only 1PAR.
Remark:

SUP_Trip_Loc CBC_Local_Control & SUP_Close_Loc SUP_Trip_Rem CBC_Remote_Control & SUP_Close_Rem INP_CB_Trip_Man CBC_Input_Control & INP_CB_Man & 1 & & 1
CBA_3P_C
&
S Q R
CBC_Trip_Pulse 1 t 0 & CBC_Trip_3P

CBC_Failed_To_Trip
CBA_3P
CBA_Status_Alarm AR_Cycle_1P 1 INP_AR_Cycle_1P AR_Cycle_3P INP_AR_Cycle_3P CBA_3P CBA_Disc TRIP_Any 1 INP_AR_Close 1 1
&
S Q R t 0 CBC_Delay_Close & S Q R
CBC_Close_In_Progress
AR_Close
1 R Q S
t 0
&
CBC_ Fail_To_Close
CBC_Recl_3P CBC_Close_Pulse
CBA_Any
INP_CB_Healthy
&
CBC_Healthy_Window t 0 & CBC_UnHeathly
1 CBC_CS_Window t 0 SYNC & CBC_No_Check_Syn
P0529ENa
FIGURE 115 - CB CONTROL LOGIC A manual trip will be authorised if the circuit breaker has been initially closed. Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. Therefor it will be necessary to use the breaker positions 52a and/or 52b contacts via PSL. If no CB auxiliary contacts are available no CB control (manual or auto) will be possible. (See the different solutions proposed in the CBAux logic section 4.6.1) Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate following a user defined time delay (Man Close Delay). This would give personnel time to move away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands.
The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the ManualTrip Pulse Time and Close Pulse Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed. NOTE : The manual close commands for each user interface are found in the System Data column of the menu.
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command. Where the check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual circuit breaker close commands. A circuit breaker close output will only be issued if the check synchronism criteria are satisfied. A user settable time delay is included (C/S Window) for manual closure with check synchronising. If the checksynch criteria are not satisfied in this time period following a close command the relay will lockout and alarm. In addition to a synchronism check before manual reclosure there is also a CB Healthy check if required. This facility accepts an input to one of the relays opto-isolators to indicate that the breaker is capable of closing (circuit breaker energy for example). A user settable time delay is included (Healthy Window) for manual closure with this check. If the CB does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command then the relay will lockout and alarm. Where auto-reclose is used it may be desirable to block its operation when performing a manual close. In general, the majority of faults following a manual closure will be permanent faults and it will be undesirable to auto-reclose. The "man close" input without CB Control selected OR the "CBClose in progress" with CB control enabled: will initiate the SOTF logic for which auto-reclose will be disabled following a manual closure of the breaker during 500msec (see SOTF logic in section 2.12.1, Figure 35). If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state of CB Status inputs) a CB Fail Trip Control or CB Fail Close Control alarm will be generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can be viewed on the relay LCD display, remotely via the relay communications, or can be assigned to operate output contacts for annunciation using the relays programmable scheme logic (PSL).
CBA_3P_C
SUP_Trip OR INP_CB_Trip_Man CBC_Trip_3P CBC_Failed_To_Trip

P0560ENa
0.1 to 5 Sec
FIGURE 116 - STATUS OF CB IS INCORRECT CBA3P C (3POLES ARE CLOSED) STAYS AN ALARM IS GENERATED CB FAIL TO TRIP (SEE ALSO FIGURE 109 & FIGURE 115)

CBA_3P
SUP_Close OR INP_CB_Man CBC_Close_In_Progress

0 to 60 Sec 0.1 to 10 Sec
CBC_Recl_3P CBC_ Fail_To_Close
P0561ENa
FIGURE 117 - STATUS OF CB IS INCORRECT CBA3P (3POLES ARE OPENED) STAYS AN ALARM IS GENERATED CB FAIL TO CLOSE (SEE ALSO FIGURE 109 & FIGURE 115) Note that the Healthy Window timer and C/S Window timer set under this menu section are applicable to manual circuit breaker operations only. These settings are duplicated in the Auto-reclose menu for Auto-reclose applications. The Lockout Reset and Reset Lockout by setting cells in the menu are applicable to CB Lockouts associated with manual circuit breaker closure, CB Condition monitoring (Number of circuit breaker operations, for example) and auto-reclose lockouts. 4.9 Event Recorder The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile (battery backed up installed behind the plastic cover in front panel of the relay)) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the new one (First in first out). The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely, via the communications ports or via MiCOM S1 with a PC. connected to the relay (event extracted from relay & loaded in PC): 1. Established the communication [ Device\open connection\address (always1 by serial front port\Password (AAAA) ]
FIGURE 118 2. Select the extraction of events:
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 166/220 3.
Events must be listed, identified (file named) & Stored
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled VIEW RECORDS. This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records and is shown below:VIEW RECORDS LCD Reference Select Event Description Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest event and so on. Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real Time Clock Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to following sections) Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag or integer representative of the Event (refer to following sections) Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on. The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record. Select Report Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required maintenance report from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on. Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to following sections) These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to AREVA T&D.
Time & Date Event Text Event Value Select Fault
Report Text Report Type
Report Data Reset Indication Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications provided that the relevant protection element has reset.
For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to Chapter P44x/EN CM, (Commissioning) where the procedure is fully explained. Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in chapter P44x/EN GC (Configurations Mapping).
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Types of Event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that constitute an event:-
FIGURE 119 - FILE\OPEN\EVENTS FILE 4.9.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs. If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below; Time & Date of Event LOGIC INPUTS Event Value 0101010101010101 The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC. 4.9.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts. If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown below; Time & Date of Event OUTPUT CONTACTS Event Value 010101010101010101010 The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts, where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 168/220 4.9.3 Relay Alarm conditions.
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they appear in the event list:Alarm Condition Resulting Event Event Text Battery Fail Field Voltage Fail Battery Fail ON/OFF Field V Fail ON/OFF Event Value Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31 Number from 0 to 31
Setting group via opto invalid Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Protection Disabled Frequency out of range VTS Alarm CB Trip Fail Protection Prot'n Disabled ON/OFF Freq out of Range ON/OFF VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF CB Fail ON/OFF
The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the particular condition has become operated or has reset. 4.9.4 Protection Element Starts and Trips Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD. 4.9.5 General Events A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is shown below:Nature of Event Level 1 Password Modified Either from User Interface, Front or Rear Port A complete list of the General Events is given in chapter P44x/EN GC. Displayed Text in Event Record PW1 Edited UI, F or R Displayed Value 0
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.9.6 Fault Records
Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp. Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the Select Fault cell further down the VIEW RECORDS column, which is selectable from up to 5 records. These records consist of fault flags, fault location, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated. 4.9.7 Maintenance Reports Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure, field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the Select Report cell at the bottom of the VIEW RECORDS column. Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell, which are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail in Appendix A. Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp. Error codes are in hexadecimal format and must be recalculated in decimal format to check with the table in chapter P44x/EN GC. 4.9.8 Setting Changes Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are shown in the following table: Type of Setting Change Control/Support Setting Group 1 Change NOTE: Displayed Text in Event Record C & S Changed Group 1 Changed Displayed Value 0 1
Control/Support settings are communications, measurement, CT/VT ratio settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four setting groups. When any of these settings are changed, the event record is created simultaneously. However, changes to protection or disturbance recorder settings will only generate an event once the settings have been confirmed at the setting trap.
4.9.9
Resetting of Event / Fault Records If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be done from within the RECORD CONTROL column.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 170/220 4.9.10 Viewing Event Records via MiCOM S1 Support Software
When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1: Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:49 GMT I>1 Start ON 2147483881 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23 Event Type: Protection operation Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 01 Row: 00 Event Type: Fault record Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21 Event Type: relay output changed state As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/- symbol. For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to chapter P44x/EN GC.
FIGURE 120 4.10 Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. NOTE: 1. Compressed Disturbance Recorder used for Kbus/Modbus/DNP3 reach that typical size value (10.5 sec duration) 2. Uncompressed Disturbance Recorder used for IEC 60870-5/103 could be limited to 2 or 3 secondes.
Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 24 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu column is shown below: Menu text Default setting Setting range Min DISTURB RECORDER Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Inputs 1 to 32 1.5s 33.3% Single VA VB VC VN IA IB IC IN Relays 1 to 14/21 and Optos 1 to 8/16 0.1s 0 10.5s 100% 0.01s 0.1% Max Step size
Single or Extended VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN Any of 14 or 21 O/P Contacts or Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
No Trigger except No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L Dedicated Trip Relay O/Ps which are set to Trigger L/H
Note The available analogue and digital signals may differ between relay types and models and so the individual courier database in Appendix should be referred to when determining default settings etc. The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the Duration and Trigger Position cells. Duration sets the overall recording time and the Trigger Position sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times. If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger if the Trigger Mode has been set to Single. However, if this has been set to Extended, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time. As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the Input Trigger cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
FIGURE 121 Trigger choices:
(Minimum one trigger condition must be present ; for providing Drec file.) It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained in Chapter 6.
(Events or Disturbances can be extracted) This message is displayed if the memory is empty (control in that case the trigger condition):
After extraction the Drec file can be displayed by the viewer integrated in MiCOM S1(See Commissioning test section chap CT)
Click down to select :
5.
5.1 5.1.1
NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS VERSION B1.X

Maximum of Residual Power Protection Zero Sequence Power Protection Function description The aim of protection is to provide the system with selective and autonomous protection against resistive Phase to ground faults. High resistive faults such as vegetation fires cannot be detected by distance protection. When a phase to ground fault occurs, the fault can be considered as a zero-sequence power generator. Zero-sequence voltage is at maximum value at the fault point. Zero-sequence power is, therefore, also at maximum value at the same point. Supposing that zerosequence current is constant, zero-sequence power will decrease along the lines until null value at the sources neutral points (see below).
PA Z os1 x . Zol (1-x).Zol PB Z os2
P3100XXa
With:
Zos1: Zol: Zos2: x:
Zero-sequence source side 1 impedance of Zero-sequence line impedance Zero-sequence source side2 impedance of Distance to the fault From PA
Vo
Po 1 0,5 1
0,5
0 PA Fault PB
0
P3101ENa
Selective fault clearance of the protection for forward faults is provided by the power measurement combined with a time-delay inversely proportional to the measured power. The protection does not send any trip commands for reverse faults. In compliance with sign conventions (the zero-sequence power flows from the fault towards the sources) and with a mean characteristic angle of the zero-sequence source impedances of the equal to 75, the measured power is determined by the following formula: Sr = Vrr.m.s x Irr.m.s x cos( - 0) With: : 0: Vrr.m.s, Irr.m.s: Phaseshift between Vr and Ir 255 or 75 R.M.S values of the residual voltage and current
The Vr and Ir values are filtered in order to eliminate the effect of the 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Sr > Po
Fixed Time Delay

P3837ENa
3-pole trip is sent out when the residual power threshold Residual Power" is overshot, after a time-delay "Basis Time Delay" and a IDMT time-delay adjusted by the K time delay factor. The basis time-delay is set at a value greater than the 2nd stage time of the distance protection of the concerned feeder if the 3-pole trip is active, or at a value greater than the single-phase cycle time if single-pole autorecloser shots are active. The IDMT time-delay is determined by the following formula: T(s) = K x (Sref/Sr) With: K: Sref: Adjustable time constant from 0 to 2sec (Time delay factor) Reference residual power at: 10 VA for In = 1A 50 VA for In = 5A Sr: Residual power generated by the fault
The following chart shows the adjustment menu for the zero-sequence residual overcurrent protection, the adjustment ranges and the default in-factory adjustments. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min Group1 ZERO-SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status K Time Delay Factor Basis Time Delay Residual Current Po threshold Activated 0 1sec 0.1 x In 510mVA Activated / Disabled 0 0sec 0.05 x In 300mVA 2 10sec 1 x In 6.0VA N/A 0.2 0.01sec 0.01 x In 30.0mVA Max Step size
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.1.2 Settings & DDB cells assigned to zero sequence power (ZSP) function
DDB cell INPUT associated:
The ZSP TIMER BLOCK cell if assigned to an opto input in a dedicated PSL , Zero Sequence Power function will start, but will not perform a trip command - the associated timer will be blocked DDB cell OUTPUT associated:
The ZSP START cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has started - in the same time, it indicates that the timers associated have started and are running (fixed one first and then IDMT timer)
The ZSP TRIP cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has performed a trip command (after the start and when associated timers are issued)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 178/220 5.2 5.2.1 Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) Function description
This CVT supervision will detect the degradation of one or several capacitors of voltage dividers. It is based on permanent detection of residual voltage. A CVT fault signal is sent out, after a time-delay T which can be set at between 0 and 300 seconds, if the conditions are as follows: The residual voltage is greater than the setting threshold during a delay greater then T The 3 phase-phase voltages have a value greater than 0.4 Un
Vab(t)
Vab(t) > 0,8*Vn Vab(t) < 0,4*Vn
S Q R S Q R S Q R
Vbc(t)
Vbc(t) > 0,8*Vn
Vbc(t) < 0,4*Vn
Vca(t)
Vca(t) > 0,8*Vn Vca(t) < 0,4*Vn
T &
TCTs - Alarm
Vr(t)
Vr(t) > SVr

P3102ENa
FIGURE 122 - BASIC CVT SUPERVISION DIAGRAM The table below shows the CVT supervision settings menu, settings range and the default infactory settings. Menu text Default setting Setting range Min Group1 SUPERVISION CVTS Status CVTS VN> CVTS Time Delay Activated 1sec 100sec Activated / Disabled 0.5sec 0sec 22sec 300sec N/A 0.5 0.01sec Max Step size
Settings & DDB cells assigned to Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) function
FIGURE 123 - FOR ENABLING THE FUNCTION
FIGURE 124 SETTINGS DDB cell OUTPUT associated:
The CVT ALARM cell at 1 indicates that the residual voltage is greater than the threshold adjusted in the settings, during a delay greater than the timer adjusted in MiCOM S1. That alarm is also included in the general alarm.
6.

The relay includes programmable scheme logic (PSL)- one PSL by Group of settings enabled (maximum 4 groups of PSLogic can be assigned in the relay) The purpose of this logic is multi-functional and includes the following: Enables the mapping of opto-isolated inputs, relay output contacts and the programmable LEDs. Provides relay output conditioning (delay on pick-up/drop-off, dwell time, latching or self-reset). Fault Recorder start mapping, i.e. which internal signals initiate a fault record. Enables customer specific scheme logic to be generated through the use of the PSL editor inbuilt into the MiCOM S1 support software.
Further information regarding editing and the use of PSL can be found in the MiCOM S1 user manual. The following section details the default settings of the PSL. Note that changes to these defaults can only be carried out using the PSL editor and not via the relay front-plate. 6.1 HOW TO USE PSL Editor? OFF Line method: Open first the application free software delivered with the relay : MiCOM S1 (can be also downloaded from the web) Open the PSL Editor part. Open a blancking scheme or a default scheme with the good model number (File\New\Default Scheme or Blanck Scheme)
Selection of type of relay & model number is done in that window (Version software is displayed for compatibility ) Italian is available with model ?40X? ON Line method: Communication with the relay can be started (Device\open connection\address1\pword AAAA) and the PSL activated in the internal logic of the relay can be extracted, displayed, modified and loaded again in the protection.
Any group from 1 to 4 can be modified (ref of group must be validated before resenting the file from PC to relay)
Before creating a dedicated PSL for covering customized application ; please refer to the DDB description cell by cell (conditions of set & reset) in the table included in the annex A at the end of that technical guide. Some additive cells can be present regarding the type of model used by the software embedded in the relay. Software Version A2.11 A3.3 A4.5 B1.2 Model N 04 06 07 09
The type of model used by the relay in the settings or PSL is displayed in the bottom of your screen by that line:
and will inform about the : Model number used (last 2 digits:???07??) PSL activated for the logic of Group1 Number of timers still available (15 on a total of 16) Number of contacts still available (7 on a total of 21 for P442 model) Number of leds still available (0 on 8 if all already assigned in the PSL) Memory Capacity still available (decrease with the numbers of cells & logical gates linked in the dedicated PSL)
(See also the section commissioning for deeper tools explanations)
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 182/220 6.2 Logic input mapping
The default mappings for each of the opto-isolated inputs are as shown in the following table: Version A : Optos are in 48VDC polarised (can be energised with the internal field voltage offered by the relay (J7/J9-J8/J10 in a P441) Version B : Optos are universal and opto range can be selected in MiCOM S1 by:
Opto A - 48VDC: The opto inputs are specified to operate between 30 and 60V to ensure there is enough current flowing through the opto diode to guarantee operation with component tolerances, temperature and CTR degradation over time. Between 13-29V is the uncertainty band. Below 12V, logical status is guaranteed Off Opto B Universal opto inputs: Setting 24/27 30/34 48/54 110/125 220/250 Guaranteed No Operation <16,2 <20,4 <32,4 <75,0 <150 Guaranteed Operation >19,2 >24,0 >38,4 >88,0 >176,0
These margins ensure that ground faults on substation batteries do not create mal-operation of the opto inputs.
Or Custom can be selected in the menu to offer the possibility to adjust a different voltage pick-up for any optos inputs:
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 184/220 Opto Input N 1 2 3
P441 Relay
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
Channel Receive (Distance Channel Receive (Distance Channel Receive (Distance or DEF) or DEF) or DEF) Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF) MCB/VTS Line (Z measurement-Dist) Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF) MCB/VTS Line (Z measurement-Dist) Block Autoreclose(LockOut) Circuit Breaker Healthy Circuit breaker Manual Close external order Reset Lockout Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF) MCB/VTS Line (Z measurement-Dist) Block Autoreclose(LockOut) Circuit Breaker Healthy Circuit breaker Manual Close external order Reset Lockout Disable Autoreclose (1pole and 3poles) Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Block Autoreclose(LockOut) Circuit Breaker Healthy Circuit breaker Manual Close external order Reset Lockout
Disable Autoreclose (1pole Disable Autoreclose (1and 3poles) pole and 3poles) Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.3 Relay output contact mapping
The default mappings for each of the relay output contacts are as shown in the following table (PSL are equivalent for P441/442/444):Relay Contact P441 Relay N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TripA+B+C & Z1 Any Trip Phase A Any Trip Phase B Any Trip Phase C Any Protection Start Any Trip General Alarm DEF A+B+C Trip + IN>1Trip + IN>2Trip 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR Autoreclose lockout Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress A/R Close Power Swing Detected P442 Relay TripA+B+C & Z1 Any Trip Phase A Any Trip Phase B AnyTrip Phase C Any Protection Start Any Trip General Alarm DEF A+B+C Trip + IN>1Trip + IN>2Trip Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR Autoreclose lockout Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress A/R Close Power Swing Detected Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated P444 Relay TripA+B+C & Z1 Any Trip Phase A Any Trip Phase B Any Trip Phase C Any Protection Start Any Trip General Alarm DEF A+B+C Trip + IN>1Trip + IN>2Trip Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR Autoreclose lockout Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress A/R Close Power Swing Detected Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated
Signal send (Dist. or DEF) Signal send (Dist. or DEF) Signal send (Dist. or DEF)
Note that when 3 pole tripping is selected in the relay menu, all trip contacts: Trip A, Trip B, Trip C, and Any Trip close simultaneously.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 186/220 6.4 Relay output conditioning
The default conditioning for each of the relay output contacts are as shown in the following table: Relay Contact P441 Relay N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 NOTE: Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight P442 Relay Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated P444 Relay Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Straight Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Not allocated Others conditions of relays logic are available in the relays design by PSL. Pulse Timer Pick UP/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (Transparent)
Input
Pulse Timer
Output Input Output
Pulse setting
Pulse setting
Input
Pick Up/ Drop Off Timer
Output Input Output
Tp setting
Td setting
Tp setting
Td setting
Input Output
Timer setting
Dwell Timer
Input Output
Timer setting
Input
Pick Up Timer
Output Input Output
Timer setting
Timer setting
Input Output
Timer setting
Drop Off Timer
Input Output
Timer setting
P0562ENa
FIGURE 125 TIMER DEFINITION IN PSL
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 188/220 6.5 Programmable led output mapping
The default mappings for each of the programmable LEDs are as shown in the following table:LED N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P441 Relay Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip C Any Start Z1+Aided Trip Dist FWd Dist Rev A/R Enable NOTE: 6.6 P442 Relay Any Trip A AnyTrip B AnyTrip C Any Start Z1+Aided Trip Dist Fwd Dist Rev A/R Enable All the Leds are latched in the default PSL P444 Relay Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip C Any Start Z1+Aided Trip Dist Fwd Dist Rev A/R Enable
Fault recorder trigger The default PSL trigger which initiates a fault record is as shown in the following table:P441 Relay Any Start Any Trip P442 Relay Any Start Any Trip P444 Relay Any Start Any Trip
FIGURE 126 If the fault recorder trigger is not assigned in the PSL, no Fault recorder can be initiated and displayed in the list by the LCD front panel.
7.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

Two calculations must be performed once for the three phase fault current at the zone 1 reach, and once for earth (ground) faults. The highest of the two calculated Vk voltages must be used:
7.1
CT Knee Point Voltage for Phase Fault Distance Protection Vk KRPA x IF Z1 x (1+ X/R) . (RCT + RL)
Where: Vk KRPA IF Z1 X/R RCT RL 7.2 = = = = = = Required CT knee point voltage (volts), Fixed dimensioning factor = always 0.6
Max. secondary phase fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A), Primary system reactance / resistance ratio, CT secondary winding resistance (), Single lead resistance from CT to relay ().
CT Knee Point Voltage for Earth Fault Distance Protection Vk Where: KRPA IFe Z1 Xe/Re = = = Fixed dimensioning factor = always 0.6 KRPA x IFe Z1 x (1+ Xe/Re) . (RCT + 2RL)
Max. secondary earth fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A), Primary system reactance / resistance ratio for earth loop.
7.3
Recommended CT classes (British and IEC) Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be used. Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be approximated from: Vk Where: VA ALF In = = = Voltampere burden rating, Accuracy Limit Factor, CT nominal secondary current. = (VA x ALF) / In + (RCT x ALF x In)
7.4
Determining Vk for an IEEE C" class CT Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be checked to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC). The equivalence formula is: Vk = [ (C rating in volts) x 1.05 ] + [ 100 x RCT ]
8.
DDB DESCRIPTION FOR ALL TYPES P441/P442 & P444 MODELS
BLANK PAGE
Application Notes Page 191/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Changement of Group by Optos
DDB label
Default PSL
Reset with :
Out
No cell assigned
In
Opto1
opto energised (>1 sec)( ) Must be not assigned in the PSL At1 :LSB Bit (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
opto power off At 0 : (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP) opto power off At 0 : (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP) Set 0 : No alarm is present
No cell assigned
In
Opto2
opto energised (>1 sec)(*) Must be not assigned in the PSL At1 :MSB Bit (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
SG-opto Invalid
Out
Setting Group selected via opto are invalid Example :1group is requested by the optos status but that group is not present in the settings (Gr3 requested but only Gr1&2 are present in MiCOM S1-The settings restart with GR1 & that cell switch on at 1) OPTOS INPUTS P441 / P442 / P444 (48Vcc Version A / Universal Version B-C)
Opto Label 1/8
In
P441 / P442 / P444
Opto energised for a minimum time : 7 ms (48Vdc), 10 ms (universal) to be See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP P442 / P444 P442 / P444
Opto Label 9/16
In
Opto energised for a minimum time : 7 ms (48Vdc), 10 ms (universal) to be See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP P444 P444 See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
Opto Label 17/24
In
Opto energised for a minimum time : 1,2 sec to be validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
Opto Label 25/32
In
Not Used
Not Used
Minimum time >1 sec for: changement Gr/TPAR/SPAR/AR enable
P44x/EN AP/E33 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Page 192/220
In Set with : OUTPUT RELAYS P441 / P442 / P444 P441 / P442 / P444 Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Relay Label
Out
01/14
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relays : All relays are assigned in The default PSL (See DDB table description) Type of Logic: Pulse timer Pick Up/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (used in default PSL) P442 / P444
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: Pulse timer Pick Up/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (used in default PSL)
Relay Label
Out
P442 / P444
15/21
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relay Not assigned in default PSL Type of Logic: (See Description above) P444
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: (See Description above) P444
Relay Label
Out
22/32
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relay Not assigned in default PSL Type of Logic: (See Description above) LEDS (Right side Front panel)
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: (See Description above)
LED 1
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP A in the default PSL
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Reset with : Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched) Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
LED 2
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP B in the default PSL
LED 3
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP C in the default PSL
LED 4
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : General Start in the default PSL
LED 5
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Z1+Aided Trip in the default PSL
LED 6
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Dist FWD in the default PSL
LED 7
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Dist REV in the default PSL
LED 8
Led
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Auto Reclose Enable in the default PSL
Application Notes
Page 194/220
In Set with : AUTO RECLOSE (AR) Logic Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR 1P internal is disabled (even if selected enable by MiCOM S1) AR logic becomes 3P only with AR 3P cycle -if TPAR =1 Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR 3P internal is disabled (even if selected enable by MiCOM S1) logic becomes :no more 3P cycle available (1P could exist if SPAR at 1) Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 :no Ban Tri logic available. AR is disable Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
SPAR Enable
In
Opto8 +Inv
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :1P AR internal is enabled in the AR logic (higher priority than MiCOM S1)
TPAR Enable
In
Opto8 +Inv
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :3P AR internal is enabled in the AR logic (higher priority than MiCOM S1)
A/R Internal
In
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :AR internal becomes present [AR becomes enable by external contact example :Wdog of Main1 when pick up activates the internal AR in Main2(P44x)]
A/R 1p in Prog
In
Relay 12
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At1 : External 1P AR cycle in progress requested for blocking the internal DEF function Reset at 0 : opto power off
A/R 3p in Prog
In
Relay 12
opto energised if linked by PSL External 3P Arcycle in progress - requested for blocking the internal DEF function (pb of Pole Operating Time)
A/R Close
In
Relay 13
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External AR gives a CB closing order for using internal synchro conditions of P44X
Reset at 0 : opto power off
A/R reclaim
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Reclaim time from external AR in progress requested to initiate internal TOR logic / Used in Z1X logic (by specific PSL)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Reset at 0 : opto power off AR Lock out is reseted Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
BAR
In
Opto 4
opto energised if linked by PSL Set at1 :External condition which blocks the internal AR (other internal blocking conditions can be selected in MiCOM S1 :Autoreclose/Block AR) see also logic AR lockout figure..
Ext Chk Synch OK
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External check synchro condition satisfied to be used with internal AR close by specific PSL (With AND logic between Arclose&CsyncExt)
Reset at 0 : opto power off Conditiond of external synchro are unvailable
CB Healthy
In
Opto 5
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR cycle is stopped (if that cell is assigned in the At1 :contact from CB when CB is operationnal (gas pressure/mechanical state)- Must be at 1 inside the time window (adjusted by MiCOM S1 : PSL). At the end of InhWInd the signal AR BAR picks up. group1/Autoreclose mode/AR Inhibit Wind) during an AR cycle (signals :AR close & AR Reclaim pick up when CB healthy is detected during the InhWind timer) Reset at 0 : opto power off
Force 3P trip
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External command for tripping 3P only (Order issued from Main1 to Main2) next trip will be 3P
Man.Close CB
In
Opto 6
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External manual close command requested to initiate SOTF logic & to close CB (Arlock out during SOTF logic)
Man.Trip CB
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External manual trip command to provide a CB trip command by CB control if selected in MiCOM S1
CB Discrepancy
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 : Contact from external status of CB poles (one pole opened) that data must be at 1 before end of Dead time1 if assigned in the PSL OR Internal logic = Any pole &Not All pole Dead (CB Aux must be connected 52a or 52b)
Reset at 0 : opto power off OR drop Off Internal Logic At 0 : Stop the 1P cycle if absent at the end of dead time1. AR is ofrced in AR Lock Out
External TripA
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command A
Application Notes
Page 196/220
In Set with : Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Activate a Trip command phase A (DDB :Any TripA) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripA cell Reset at 0 : opto power off
External TripB
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command B Activate a Trip command phase B(DDB :Any TripB) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off
External TripC
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command C Activate a Trip command phase C(DDB :Any TripC) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripC cell
AR Lockout Shot>
Out
AR is blocked by passing over the number of shots selected in Auto Reclose/trip mode (in MiCOM S1) Set at 1 : (AR Enable) & [(Trip1P&No SPAR)+(Trip3P&NoTPAR) +(Trip1P+Trip3P)&(Number of shots=MiCOM S1 value)]
At0 : AR Cycles continue if fault still present (not erased by the previous Arcycle) Reset at 0 : Reset Trip1P + Reset Trip3P
AR Fail
Out
Set at 1 : Absence of check sync condition involve AR failure (For 3P cycle) Reset at 0 : by 3 Poles Closed Reset at 0 with : Close Pulse Time (Setting) OR Trip1P or Trip3P
A/R close
Out
Relay 13
Set at 1 :AR internal command :CB Close Starts as AR Reclaim
A/R 1p in Prog
Out
Relay 12
1P AR cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2 for Blocking Set 0 with : DEF) End of 1P Dead Time +AR Lock out (BAR) + 3P TRip
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR) Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR) Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR) Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
A/R 3p in Prog
Out
Relay 12
3P AR cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
A/R 1st in Prog
Out
First high speed AR Cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
A/R 234 in Prog
Out
Further delayed AR Cyles in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
A/R Trip 3P
Out
AR signal which force all trips to be 3P picks up at the end of the first trip At 0 : AR1P could operate if programmed (1P or 3P) - Can be connected to Main2 as an external Ban Tri Set at 1 : Reset at 0 : (AR enable MiCOM S1)&(No SPAR) SPAR & AR enable MiCOM S1 + (InhibitWind at 0) Reset at 0 with : End of Reclaim time (MiCOM S1) OR Reset (Trip1P or Trip3P) (See Figure 78 section 4.5.3)
A/R Reclaim
Out
Set at 1 :Reclaim timer in progress.(Value adjusted in MiCOM S1) Picks up at the end of the dead time in synchronism with AR Close order - Can be connected to Main2 for cycle in progress external information - Initiate the internal TOR logic
Application Notes
Page 198/220
In Set with : Rest 0 : End of Discrim timer (MiCOM S1) +Trip 3P (DEC 3P) +AR Lock Out (BAR) Reset at 0: If SPAR and TPAR Optos at 0 (if integrated in PSL) + AR Disable in MiCOM S1 Reset at 0: if SPARopto=0 or AR Disable in MiCOM S1 Reset at 0: if TPARopto=0 or AR Disable in MiCOM S1 At0 : AR is activated Reset at 0 = [Reset(Trip1P)+Reset(Trip3P)] & (End of RC timer) & Reset (BAR ) & Reset (AR BAR n shot>) & Reset (No CB Healty) & Reset (No Discrepancy) Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
AR Discrim
Out
Dicrim status detected (inter or Externaly)-timer in progress
A/R Enable
Out
Led 8
Copy of status AR Enable Set at 1 : [(optos SPAR) +(optoTPAR)]& (AR enable byMiCOM S1)
A/R SPAR Enable
Out
Set at 1 :1P AR activated (copy of opto SPAR or MiCOM S1)
A/R TPAR Enable
Out
Set at 1 :3P AR activated (copy of opto TPAR or MiCOM S1)
A/R Lockout
Out
Relay 11
AR function locked out/No more cycle is initiated by the AR (Pole is kept opened) Reset must be done for enabling the AR logic again (AR counters are resetted) Set at 1 = ARenable & [(BAR =1 (see internal logic figure.. section..) +(AR BAR n shot>) AR lockout by number of shots +(No CB Healthy at the end of InhWind(MiCOM S1)) +[No Discrepancy (opto or internal by CBAux if present in PSL) at the end of 1P Dead time1] + (Trip 1P or3P maintained /still present at the end of the1Por3P Dead time) +(After discrim timer if Trip3P occures during a 1PAR Cycle) ]
A/R Force Sync
Out
Force the Synchro condition ok at 1 (Could be used during test for getting Arclose whatever are the real conditions of CheckSyn )
Reset 0 : With Reset of A/R Reclaim (See DDB description) Latched by PSL design
LED 8
AR Enable (See DDB Description)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : CHECK SYNC Logic Set at 0 : Conditions of checksyn unsatisfied (thresholds of dead & live definied in MiCOM S1 :system checks) Set at 0 :CSYnc conditions available Set at 0 : Condition of Dead line at 0 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Set at 0 : Condition of Live line at 0 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Set at 0 : Condition of Dead Bus at 0 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Set at 0 : Condition of Live Bus at 0 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Check Synch .OK
Out
Set at 1 : Check Synchro conditions are satisfied Used with AR close in dedicated PSL AND gate : [(AR Close) or (Manual Close) & (Checksync OK)]
Control No C/S
Out
Set at 1 : Internal conditions of Csync are not fulfilled
V<Dead line
Out
Set at 1 : Condition of Dead line at 1 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Default value is 13V
V>Live line
Out
Set at 1: Condition of Live line at 1 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Default value is 32V
V<Dead Bus
Out
Set at 1: Condition of Dead Bus at 1 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Default value is 13V
V>Live Bus
Out
Set at 1: Condition of Live Bus at 1 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) Default value is 32V
MCB/VTS Bus
In
Set at 1 :Internal fault in VT used for synchro ref Csync function is blocked
MCB/VTS Line
In
Set at 1 :Internal fault in VT used for Z measurement ref (Main VT) Distance &all Directionnal functions are blocked(can unblocked with different VTS timer- see MiCOM S1 settings)
Ctrl Cls In Prog
Out
Set at 1 :Manual close in progress using CB control (Timer manual closing delay in progress)
Set at 0 :End of Timer manual closing Reset at 0 : End of Timer MiCOM S1 (Close pulse timer) +Any Trip +CBC No Csync +CBC Unhealthy See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115 Reset at 0 : End of timer MiCOM S1 (Trip pulse timer)
Control Close
Out
Set at1 :CB Close 3P command by internal CB Control (Control with synchrocheck manual condition could be used in dedicated PSL MiCOM S1Chk scheme ManCB) See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115
Control Trip
Out
Set at 1 :CB Trip 3P command by internal CB Control See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115
Application Notes
Page 200/220
In Set with : SOTF TOR Logic Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Man Close CB
In
Opto 6
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 : AND no CB Control is activated in MiCOM S1 External command for closing manualy the CB Will initiate SOTF logic if SOTF not disable in MiCOM S1(BitD) AND CB control enable will initiate CB close in progress if All pole dead = SOTF Enable Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset at 0 : opto power off
AR Reclaim
In
opto energised if linked by PSL When at 1 (See AR DDB) start the TOR logic
CB Aux A
In
opto energised if linked by PSL (See CB DDB ) used for Any pole dead/All pole dead
CB Aux B
In
CB Aux C
In
SOTF Enable
Out
When SOTF logic is enable Set at 1 : [Sotf not disable (Bit D in MiCOM S1)] AND All pole dead & End Timer (110sec/default) + Input Man Close + (CB control & Close in progress)
Timer 500msec issued after Any pole Dead + Reset of one conditions requested for SOTF enable
TOR Enable
Out
When SOTF logic is enable Set at 1 : By a Pulse of 500msec initiated by : AR Reclaim internal+AR reclaim External Input OR Any pole opened for more than 200ms
Reset 500ms after Any pole dead stops
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
TOC Start A
Out
Set1 :Trip order phase A initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
TOC Start B
Out
Set1 :Trip order phase B initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
TOC Start C Set 0 : (See AR DDB)
Out
Set1 :Trip order phase C initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
AR Reclaim
Out
When at 1 (See AR DDB) start the TOR logic
SOTF/TOR Trip
Out
Set1 :Trip order initiated by any condition fulfilled in the SOTF/TOR logic (See logic section 2.12 fig 37)
Set 0 :When conditions reset (See logic section 2.12 fig 37) Set 0 :All poles are detected not dead Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds Set 0 :1pole is detected not dead Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds
Any Pole Dead
Out
Set1 :Minimum 1 pole is open Pole Dead A+Pole DeadB+Pole Dead C Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds (see dead pole logic in SOTF section 2.12 fig 35)
All Pole Dead
Out
Set1 :All poles are open Pole DeadA & P.DeadB & P.Dead C Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds (see dead pole logic in SOTF section 2.12 fig 35)
CIRCUIT BREAKER Logic (CB Control / CB Monitoring / CB Fail) Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is opened Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is closed Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole B is opened Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole B is closed Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is opened
CB Aux A (52a)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole A is closed
CB Aux A (52b)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole A is opened
CB Aux B (52a)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole B is closed
CB Aux B (52b)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole B is opened
CB Aux C (52a)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole C is closed
Application Notes
Page 202/220
In Set with : Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole C is closed See DDB description of AR Logic See DDB Description in SOTF logic See DDB description of AR Logic See DDB description of AR Logic Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
CB Aux C (52b)
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole C is opened
CB Healthy
In
Opto 5
See DDB description of AR Logic (CB control not used)
Man Close CB
In
Opto 6
See DDB Description in SOTF logic (CB control not used)
Man Trip CB
In
See DDB description of AR Logic
CB Discrepancy
In
See DDB description of AR Logic
Reset Lockout
In
Opto 7
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Provides a CB monitoring lockout reset (all counters & values are reset)
Reset All Values
In
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Provides a CB monitoring reset (all counters & values are reset)
Reset at 0 : opto power off Reset 0 : (selectable in MiCOM S1 : CB fail & I< logic) Iphase< + CB open & Iphase< +Trip reset & Iphase +Trip reset OR Iphase<<
CB Fail Alarm
Out
Set 1 :For any Breaker failure on any trip for any phase
I^ Maint Alarm
Out
Set1 : :Alarm Maintenace picks up when the maximum broken current (1st level) calculated by monitoring task is reached (set in MiCOM S1 :I^Maintenance) (min1/Max 25000A) Set 0 :When the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by monitoring task is not reached
I^ Lockout Alarm
Out
Set1 : Lockout :Alarm picks up when the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by monitoring task is reached (set in MiCOM S1 :I^Maintenance) (min1/Max 25000A)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
CB Ops Maint
Out
Set1 :Alarm picks up when the maximum number of CB operations initiated Set 0 :untill number of operations is bellow the MiCOM S1 by internal or external Trip (set in MiCOM S1 :CB Ops Maint) is reached value (min1/Max 10000) Counter can be reseted by Reset all values Set 0 :untill number of operations is bellow the MiCOM S1 value Counter can be reseted by Reset all values
CB Ops Lockout
Out
Set1 :When CB is lockout due to number of CB operations bigger than in MiCOM S1 value(CB Ops Lock) (min1/Max 10000)
CB Op Time Maint
Out
Set1 :Alarm picks up for an excessive operating time on any phase (slowest Set 0 :untill operating time is bellow the MiCOM S1 value pole detection calculated by I< of CB Fail logic)) In MiCOM S1-CB Time maint (min5/Max 500 msec)
CB Op Time lock
Out
Set1 :Alarm picks up for an excessive operating time on any phase (slowest Set 0 :untill operating time is bellow the MiCOM S1 value pole detection calculated by I< of CB Fail logic) In MiCOM S1-CB Time Lockout (min5/Max 500 msec) ReSet 0 : end of timer in MiCOM S1 (Fault Freq Time) (min0/Max 9999 sec) Reset 0 : By user interface OR CB Close (selectable in MiCOM S1) Reset 0 : By user interface OR CB Close (selectable in MiCOM S1)
F.F Pre Lockout
Out
Set1 :CB Trip Prelockout Alarm With (Maint Lockout 1) + (Fault Frequency-1) at 1
F.F Lock
Out
Set1 : CB Trip Lockout Alarm With : (Maint Lockout =1) + (Fault Frequence=1)
Lockout Alarm
Out
Set1 :Lockout Alarm with CBC Unhealthy +CBC No Check Sync +CBC Fail to Close +CBC Fail To Trip +FF Lock +CB OpTime Lock +CB Ops Lock
CB Status Alarm
Out
Displayed with 2 LSB of Plan Status at 00 or 11 from LCD of relay Set1 :When CB discrepency status is detected after CBA timer issued by opto input or internaly by CBAux logic Alarm issued after 5 sec. See CB aux Logic in sect 4.7.1 Figure 109
Set 0 : When conditions reset Opto or internal logic
Man CB trip Fail
Out
Set1 :CB Fail on Manual Trip See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115
Set 0 : See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115
Application Notes
Page 204/220
In Set with : Set 0 : See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115 Set 0 : See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115 Set 0 :Pole A is closed CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109) Set 0 :Pole B is closed CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109) Set 0 :Pole C is closed CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109) See DDB Description in SOTF logic See DDB Description in SOTF logic Reset end of Timer tBF1 Reset end of Timer tBF2 Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Man CB Cls Fail
Out
Set1 :CB Fail on Manual Close See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115
Man CB Unhealthy
Out
Set1 : CB Unhealthy for Manual Control See CB Control logic section 4.8 Figure 115
CB Aux A
Out
Set1 :Pole A is opened CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109)
CB Aux B
Out
Set1 :Pole B is opened CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109)
CB Aux C
Out
Set1 :Pole C is opened CB Pole A Status detceted by internal logic & CBAux optos input status (See CB Section 4.6 Figure 109)
Any Pole Dead
Out
See DDB Description in SOTF logic
All Pole Dead
Out
See DDB Description in SOTF logic
TBF1 Trip
Out
Trip Order :Breaker Failure trip from timer tBF1 in CB Fail ogic
TBF2 Trip
Out
Trip order : Breaker Failure trip from timer tBF2 in CB Fail ogic DISTANCE PROTECTION Logic
DIST.Chan Recv
In
Opto1
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Signal (carrier)received on main channel for Distance scheme logic (depending on MiCOM S1 settings :Program mode/standard Mode)
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :No carrier received Reset at 0 : opto power off
DIST COS
In
Opto2
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Signal (Loss of carrier/Loss of Guard) is detected out of service by external device
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Z1X Extension
In
Reset at 0 : opto power off opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL At1 :Signal will initiate Z1 extension logic if selected in MiCOM S1. That cell can be assigned to any external/Internal condition for starting Z1X logic (See Z1X logic section 4.5.4 Figure 13 Figure 14)
MCB/VTS Line (Z measure VT main)
In
Opto3
Reset at 0 : opto power off opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Fuse Failure by external MCB status on Main VT (Z measurement) .All Distance & Directionnality will be blocked after a FFU timer adjusted by MiCOM S1 (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66) Even if Main VT are Bus side that cell must be linked to MCB status) See Check Sync DDB description (Used in Synchrocheck logic) Set 0 :Rest of one of the conditions (See FFailure logic in section 4.2 Figure 66)
MCB/VTS Bus (Sync Ref)
In
See Check Sync DDB description (Used in Synchrocheck logic)
VTS Fast
Out
Set1 :Copy of Instantaneous unconfirmed Fuse Failure (in internal logic detection) (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66) Protections blocked.Min Z can be unblocked by I>&I2>&IN&I (for 1P/2P/3P Failure)
VTS Fail Alarm
Out
Reset 0 : Healthy network detected + All pole Dead (See FFailure logic in section 4.2 Figure 66)
Set1 :VT Alarm indication with : internal logic after timer is issued+ MCB by opto at1 The Distance/WInfeed & Directionnal functions are blocked (only Non direc I> are working) (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66)
Dist Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto (Usefull during test) OR Set1 :The DIST Timer will be blocked & DIST will start but will not perform a DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Trip command. Set 0 : Rest of initiale condition Set 0 :
COS Alarm
Out
Set1 :Alarm for Carrier Out Of Service
DIST Sig Send
Out
Relay 05
Set1 :Signal send in Distance Protection scheme (See logic of distance section 2.8.2.4)
Application Notes
Page 206/220
In Set with : Set 0 : Set 0 : With reset of Any Start/Dist Start Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
DIST UNB CR
Out
Set1 :Unblock Main channel signal received See Led 5 / Relay 10 description
Dist Fwd
Out
Led6
Set1 :Directionnal Forward detected in distance Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) AND (CVMR) See Description of Algorithms in chapter P44x/EN HW, item 4) Assigned to Led 6 by default
Dist Rev
Out
Led7
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse detected in distance Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) AND (CVMR) (See Description of Algorithms in chapter P44x/EN HW, item 4) Assigned to Led 7 by default
Set 0 : With reset of Any Start/Dist Start
Dist Trip A
Out
Set1 :Trip Phase A with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms) Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms) Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested)
Dist Trip B
Out
Set1 :Trip Phase B with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
Dist Trip C
Out
Set1 :Trip Phase C with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
DIST Start A
Out
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase A (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
DIST Start B
Out
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase B (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Reset with : Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested) Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1 Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1 Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1 Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
DIST Start C
Out
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase C (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
DIST Sch Accel.
Out
Set1 :Distance scheme accelerating - POP (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
DIST Sch Perm
Out
Set1 :Distance scheme Permissive - PUP (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
DIST Sch Block
Out
Set1 :Distance scheme Blocking BOP Z1 BOP Z2 (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
Z1 = Z'1
Out
Led5 Relay 01-10
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z1(convergence of loop in Z1) See Led 5/Relay01/Relay 10 description
Z1X = Z'1x
Out
Led5 Relay 10
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z1x(convergence of loop in Z1x) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Led 5/Relay10 description
Z2 = Z'2
Out
Led5 Relay 10
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z2(convergence of loop in Z2) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Relay 10 / Led5 description
Z3 = Z'3
Out
Led5 Relay 10
Z4 = Z'4
Out
Led5 Relay 10
Application Notes
Page 208/220
In Set with : Reset with : Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Timer Distance T1 is not issued
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Zp
Out
Led5 Relay 10
Set1 :Fault is detected in Zp(convergence of loop in Zp) See Relay 10 / Led5 description
T1
Out
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z1 (tZ1 in MiCOM S1) is issued (If T1=0 picks up when relay starts (CVMR or Predef) End of Timer =1
T2
Out
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z2 (tZ2 in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Set 0 : Timer Distance T2 is not issued Set 0 : Timer Distance T3 is not issued Set 0 : Timer Distance T4 is not issued Set 0 : Timer Distance T Zp is not issued Set 0 : Identical to Dist Fwd reset logic
T3
Out
T4
Out
Tzp
Out
Set1 :Timer Distance for Zp (tZp in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Dist Fwd No Filt
Out
Set1 :Directionnal Forward decision made by Distance logic without any filter by CVMR or Zone Picks up quicker than Dist Fwd
Dist Rev No Filt
Out
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse decision made by Distance logic without any filter by CVMR or Zone Picks up quicker than Dist Rev
Set 0 : Identical to Dist Rev reset logic
Dist Convergency
Out
Set1 : logic with CVMR at 1 (Minimum 1 loop has been detected in the quad)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : With reset of initiale conditions Set 0 : See PSL logic
Cross Country Filt
Out
Set1 : Cross country logic is activated (1 Fault Fwd/1 Fault Rev detected)
Relay Label 01
Out
Assigned in default PSL : TRIP Z1 - Default logic Z1&[( Dist TripA)+ (Dist TripB)+ (Dist TripC)]
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Set 0 : See PSL logic Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
Relay Label 10 Set 0 : See PSL logic
Out
Assigned in default PSL : Dist Aided Trip - Default logic [( Dist TripA)+ (Dist TripB)+ (Dist TripC)] & Dist Unb CR & (Z1+Z1x+Z2+Z3+Zp+Z4)
LED 5 Associated DISTANCE PROTECTION Logic
Led
Assigned in default PSL : Z1+Aided Trip Relay10 + Z1 + Z1x
Power Swing Set 0 :
Out
Relay 14
Set1 : Power Swing detected (See description logic in section 2.14 Figure 40)
Set 0 : Reset of initiale conditions
Reversal Guard
Out
Set1 :Reversal guard logic is activated (Directionnal switching from Rev to Fwd in parallel line application) See Description logic in section 2.8.2.4 Figure 3)
WI Trip A
Out
Set1 : For Trip phase A in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24) Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24) Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
WI Trip B
Out
Set1 : For Trip phase B in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
WI Trip C
Out
Set1 : For Trip phase C in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24) Aided DEF PROTECTION Logic
DEF.Chan Recv
In
Opto1
opto energised if linked by PSL opto power off At1 :Signal (carrier)received on main channel for DEF scheme logic Set 0 :No carrier received (depending on MiCOM S1 settings :Aided DEF/Scheme logic) Selected shared by default Can operate as an independant scheme with adifferent opto from Dist
Application Notes
Page 210/220
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
DEF COS
In
Opto2
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At1 :Signal (Loss of carrier/Loss of Guard) is detected out of service by external device Selected shared by default Can operate as an independant scheme with adifferent opto from Dist Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Set 0 : Set 0 : Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
DEF Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The DEF Timer will be blocked & DEF will start but will not perform any Trip command.
DEF Sig Send
Out
Relay 05
Set1 :Signal send in DEF Protection scheme (See logic of DEF section 2.18 Figure 48 and Figure 49)
DEF UNB CR
Out
Set1 :Unblock DEF Channel
DEF Rev
Out
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse detected in DEF Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) See Description of Algorithms in section 2.18 Figure 50)
DEF Fwd
Out
Set1 :Directionnal Foward detected in DEF Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) (See Description of Algorithms in section 2.18 Figure 50) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order
DEF Start A
Out
Set1 :Start Phase A with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
DEF Start B
Out
Set1 :Start Phase B with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
DEF Start C
Out
Set1 :Start Phase C with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
DEF Trip A
Out
Relay 09
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase A (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
DEF Trip B
Out
Relay 09
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase B (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
DEF Trip C
Out
Relay 09
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase C (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : ZERO SEQUENCE POWER PROTECTION ZSP Logic (since version B1.0) Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Set 0:Reset with IN or SR below the threshold IN> or SR> Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0:Reset ZSP Trip Order Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
ZSP Timer Block
In
Input energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set 1:The ZSP Timer will be blocked & ZSP will start but will not perform any Trip command
ZSP Start
Out
Set 1:Zero sequence power function Start (Timer associated picks up) with fixed time delay first and IDMT curve timer
ZSP Trip BACK UP OVERCURRENT PROTECTION IN>1/IN>2/I2>/I>1/I>2/I>3/I>4 Logic
Out
Set 1:3P Trip order performed by Zero sequence power function when associated timers are issued
IN>1 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The IN>1 Timer will be blocked & IN>1 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
IN>2 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The IN>2 Timer will be blocked & IN>2 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
I>1 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I>1 Timer will be blocked & I>1 will start but will not perform any OR Trip command. DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
I>2 Timer Block
In
I>3 Timer Block
In
I>4 Timer Block
In
Application Notes
Page 212/220
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
I2> Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I2> Timer will be blocked & I2> will start but will not perform any OR Trip command with negative overcurrent detection DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Set 0 : Reset IN>1 Trip Order Set 0 : Reset IN>2Trip Order Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold IN>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold IN>2 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold I2> Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset I2> Trip Order Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with Iphase B below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with Iphase C below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
IN>1 Trip
Out
Relay 09
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 1 3Poles Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
IN>2 Trip
Out
Relay 09
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 2 3Poles Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
IN>1 Start
Out
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 1 Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Negative or positive sequence polarisation
IN>2 Start
Out
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 2 Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - DT only Negative or positive sequence polarisation
I2> Start
Out
Set1 : Negative sequence current detection Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - with DT curves Negative polarisation
I2> Trip
Out
Set1 : Negative sequence current detection 3P Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
I>Start Any A
Out
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase A
I>Start Any B
Out
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase B
I>Start Any C
Out
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase C
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Reset with : Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>2 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>3 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>4 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60) Set 0 : Reset I>1 Trip Order Set 0 : Reset I>2 Trip Order Set 0 : Reset I>3 Trip Order Set 0 : Reset I>4 Trip Order
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
I>1 Start
Out
Set1 :Overcurrent stage1 start Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Directionnal managed by Deltas Algorithms VTS Block timer facility
I>2 Start
Out
Set1 :Overcurrent stage2 start Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Directionnal managed by Deltas Algorithms VTS Block timer facility
I>3 Start
Out
Set1 :Overcurrent stage3 start Not Directionnal with DT curves Use without timer for SOTF (see description in section 2.12 Figure 35)
I>4 Start
Out
Set1 :Overcurrent stage4 start Not Directionnal with DT curves Use without timer for SOTF (see description in section 2.14)
I>1 Trip
Out
Set1 :Overcurrent Stage 1 Trip 3P performed when associated timer is issued
I>2 Trip
Out
I>3 Trip
Out
I>4 Trip
Out
Stub Bus Enable
Out
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto At1 :Status input from HV line isolator opened indicates that line is dead & disconnected At1 : I>4 is activated as a back up Stub Bus protection
Application Notes
Page 214/220
In Set with : BACK UP VOLTAGE PROTECTION V<1/V<2/V>1/V>2 Logic Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Set 0 : Reset with V measure over the threshold V<1 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure over the threshold V<2 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure below the threshold V>1 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure below the threshold V>2 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V phase A measure over the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V phase B measure over the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
V<1 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The V<1 Timer will be blocked & V<1 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
V<2 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The V<2 Timer will be blocked & V<2 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
V>1 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The V>1 Timer will be blocked & V>1 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
V>2 Timer Block
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The V>2 Timer will be blocked & V>2 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
V<1 Alarm
Out
Set1 :1st stage undervoltage Alarm picks up when V<1 starts
V<2 Alarm
Out
Set1 :2nd stage undervoltage Alarm picks up when V<1 starts
V>1 Alarm
Out
Set1 :1st stage Overvoltage Alarm picks up when V<1 starts
V>2 Alarm
Out
Set1 :2nd stage Overvoltage Alarm picks up when V<1 starts
V<Start Any A
Out
Set1 :Any Undervoltage function start for phase A
V<Start Any B
Out
Set1 :Any Undervoltage function start for phase B
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Reset with : Set 0 : Reset with V phase C measure over the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure over the threshold V<1 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure below the threshold V<2 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset of V<1 Trip order Set 0 : Reset of V<2 Trip order Set 0 : Reset with V phase A measure below the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V phase B measure below the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V phase C measure below the lowest threshold V< Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure below the threshold V>1 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset with V measure below the threshold V>2 Hysteresis= Set 0 : Reset of V>1 Trip order Set 0 : Reset of V>2 Trip order
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
V<Start Any C
Out
Set1 :Any Undervoltage function start for phase C
V<1 Start
Out
Set1 :1st Stage Undervoltage function start for any phase
V<2 Start
Out
Set1 :2nd Stage Undervoltage function start for any phase
V<1 Trip
nd
Out
Set1 :1st Stage Undervoltage function trip 3 phase
V<2 Trip
Out
Set1 :2 Stage Undervoltage function trip 3 phase
V>Start Any A
Out
Set1 :Any Overvoltage function start for phase A
V>Start Any B
Out
Set1 :Any Overvoltage function start for phase B
V>Start Any C
Out
Set1 :Any Overvoltage function start for phase C
V>1 Start
Out
Set1 :1st Stage Overvoltage function start for any phase
V>2 Start
Out
Set1 :2nd Stage Overvoltage function start for any phase
V>1 Trip
Out
Set1 :1st Stage Overvoltage function 3 phase TRIP
V>2 TRip
Out
Set1 :2nd Stage Overvoltage function 3 phase TRIP
Application Notes
Page 216/220
In Set with : ALARMS Set 0 : With frequency tracking operating correctly Set 0 :No CT Fail Alarm detected Set 0 :No Brok.Cond.Alarm detected Set 0 :No CVT Fail Alarm detected Set 0 :With reset of min Field voltage detection Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
F out of Range
Out
Set1 :Alarm when frequency tracking does not operate correctly and provides a Frequency out of range
CT Fail Alarm
Out
Set1 :Alarm from the current transformers supervision
Brok.Cond. Alarm
Out
Set1 : Alarm from the Start of Broken Conductor function
CVT Alarm
Out
Set 1:Alarm from the capacitive voltage transformers supervision
Field Volt Fail
Out
Set1 : Field Voltage Failure (Internal 48Vcc delivered by the relay can be used for Optos polarisation)
Alarm User1
In
Set1 : Alarm for user application customized must be linked to dedicated Set 0 :With reset of conditions linked to that cell DDB cells
Alarm User2
In
Alarm User3
In
Alarm User4
In
Alarm User5
In
Set1 : Alarm for user application customized must be linked to dedicated Set 0 :With reset of conditions linked to that cell DDB cells Set 0 : Reset if all initiale condition reset
General Alarm
Out
Relay 08
Set1 :For any Alarm started & included in the list : Battery Fail Field Volt Fail General Alarm Protn Disabled F out of range VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CVT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Set 0 : Reset if all initiale condition reset Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
General Alarm
Out
Relay 08
I^Maint Alarm I^Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock F.F. Pre Lockout F.F Lock Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy Control No C/C AR Lockout Shot> SG-opto Invalid A/R Fail V<1 Alarm V<2 Alarm V>1 Alarm V>2 Alarm COS Alarm User Alarlm1 User Alarm2 START LOGIC
Any Start
Out
Led4 Relay 06
Set1 :Any Protection start loig with any phase Assigned to Led 4 by default (Fault record Trigger in default PSL with 20ms Dwell Timer)
Set 0 :Reset with reset from all started function (21/67N/50/51) Set 0 : with Distance Reset Set 0 : with Distance Reset Set 0 : with Distance Reset
1ph Fault
Out
Set1 : Single phase fault detected with Distance Funct.
2ph Fault
Out
Set1 : Two phase fault detected with Distance Funct.
3ph Fault
Out
Set1 : Three phase fault detected with Distance Funct.
Application Notes
Page 218/220
In Set with : TRIP LOGIC Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell Set 0 :Reset conditions Set 0 :Reset conditions Set 0 :Reset conditions Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
User Trip A
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :Trip A Internal input managed with the general trip logic(With AR/Evolving fault) Can be assigned by external condition
User Trip B
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :Trip B Internal input managed with the general trip logic(With AR/Evolving fault) Can be assigned by external condition
User Trip C
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :Trip C Internal input managed with the general trip logic(With AR/Evolving fault) Can be assigned by external condition
Any Trip
Out
Relay 07
Set1 :Any Trip 1P or 3P initiated by internal Trip or external Trip decision (Fault record Trigger in default PSL)
Any Int Trip A
Out
Set1 : Any Internal Trip with Phase A with any internal protection decision
Any Int Trip B
Out
Set1 : Any Internal Trip with Phase B with any internal protection decision
Any Int Trip C
Out
Set1 : Any Internal Trip with Phase C- with any internal protection decision Set 0 :Reset conditions Set 0 :Reset conditions
Any Trip A
Out
Led1 Relay 02
Set1 :Any Internal or External Trip phase A with any protection decision (internal or external) Assigned to Led 1 by default
Any Trip B
Out
Led2 Relay 03
Set1 :Any Internal or External Trip phase B with any protection decision (internal or external) Assigned to Led 2 by default
Set 0 :Reset conditions
Any Trip C
Out
Led3 Relay 04
Set1 :Any Internal or External Trip phase C with any protection decision (internal or external) Assigned to Led 3 by default
1P Trip
Out
Set1 :Single pole Trip decision (int or Ext)
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
In Set with : Set 0 :Reset conditions Set 0 :Reset conditions Set 0 :Reset conditions Reset with :
DDB label
Default PSL
Out
3P Trip
Out
Set1 :Three pole Trip decision (int or Ext)
Brk Conduct. Trip
Out
Set1 :3P Trip decision by Broken Conductor protection
Loss.Load Trip MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC Set 0 :Reset conditions
Out
Set1 :3P Trip decision by Loss of Load protection (in application without communication scheme & a 3P Trip logic)
BLK Protection
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :All protections functions are blocked (21/67N/50/51)
Protn Disabled
Out
Set1 :When TEST MODE is enable All the protections functions are out of order.
Set 0 :Reset conditions No blocking conditions available : (Test mode disable) + (Opto BLK Protec =0) Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
Reset Latches
In
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :Permanent Alarms & Leds & relayslatched are reset
Application Notes
Page 220/220
BLANK PAGE
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN TD/E33
TECHNICAL DATA
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 1/30
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
RATINGS
Currents Voltages Auxiliary Voltage Frequency Logic inputs Output Relay Contacts Field Voltage Loop through connections Wiring requirements
5
5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 7
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
BURDENS
Current Circuit Voltage Circuit Auxiliary Supply Optically-Isolated Inputs
8
8 8 8 8
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3
ACCURACY
Reference Conditions Measurement Accuracy Protection accuracy Influencing Quantities High Voltage Withstand IEC60255-5:1977 Dielectric Withstand Impulse Insulation Resistance
9
9 9 10 12 12 12 12 12
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
Electrical Environment DC Supply Interruptions IEC60255-11:1979 AC Ripple on DC Supply IEC60255-11:1979 Disturbances on AC Supply - EN61000-4-11:1994 High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1:1988 Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4:1992 Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2:1996 Conducted Emissions EN 55011:1991 Radiated Emissions EN 55011:1991 Radiated Immunity IEC60255-22-3:1989
13
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 14
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 2/30 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1.13 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 Conducted Immunity IEC61000-4-6:1996 Surge Immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995 EMC Compliance Power Frequency Interference - Electricity Association (UK) Atmospheric Environment Temperature IEC60255-6:1988 Humidity IEC60068-2-3:1969 Enclosure Protection IEC60529:1989 Pollution degree IEC61010-1:1990/A2:1995 Mechanical Environment Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988 Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2:1988 Seismic IEC60255-21-3:1993
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3
ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS

ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1989 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1: 1989 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2: 1995
16
16 16 16
6.
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.7
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

Distance Protection Line Settings Zones settings Power-swing settings Distance protection schemes Programmable distance schemes Distance schemes settings Weak infeed settings Loss of load settings Back-up Overcurrent Protection Threshold Settings Time Delay Settings Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic Negative sequence overcurrent protection Broken Conductor Protection Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Threshold Settings Polarising Quantities For Earth Fault Measuring Elements Time Delay Characteristics Zero sequence Power Protection (since B1.0)
17
17 17 17 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 22 22 22 22 23
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.8 6.8.1 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 Channel Aided Directional Earth Fault Protection Threshold Settings Under Voltage Protection Threshold Settings Under Voltage Protection Time Delay Characteristics Over Voltage Protection Threshold Settings Time Delay Characteristics Voltage Transformer Supervision Capacitive Voltage Transformer Supervision (since B1.0) Current Transformer Supervision Undercurrent Element Breaker Fail Timers (TBF1 and TBF2)
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 3/30 23 23 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25
7.
7.1 7.2
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Disturbance Recorder Settings Fault Locator Settings
26
26 26
8.
8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.6 8.7
CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS

Communications Settings Auto-Reclose Options Auto-recloser settings Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Circuit Breaker Control Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Maintenance alarm settings Lockout Alarm Settings Programmable Logic CT and VT Ratio Settings
27
27 27 27 27 28 29 29 29 29 30 30
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
RATINGS
Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms (dual rated).

Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of each winding sharing one terminal. CT Type Standard Sensitive Operating range 0 to 64In 0 to 2In
All current inputs will withstand the following, with any current function setting: Withstand 4 n 4.5 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 30 n 50 n 100 n Duration Continuous rating 10 minutes 5 minutes 3 minutes 2 minutes 10 seconds 3 seconds 1 second
Pass Criteria
Winding temperatures <105 C Dielectric withstand and insulation resistance unimpaired
1.2
Voltages Nominal Voltage 100/120Vph - ph rms Operating range 0 to 200Vph - ph rms
Duration Continuous rating (2Vn) 10 seconds (2.6Vn)
Withstand (Vn = 100/120V) 240Vph - ph rms 312Vph - ph rms
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 6/30 1.3 Auxiliary Voltage
The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the table below: Nominal Ranges 24-48V dc 48-110 V dc (30 / 100 V ac rms) ** 110-250 V dc (100 / 240 V ac rms) ** ** rated for AC or DC operation. Pass Criteria All functions operate as specified within the operative ranges All power supplies operate continuously over their operative ranges, and environmental conditions 1.4 Frequency The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50/60Hz, the operate range is 45Hz to 65Hz. 1.5 Logic inputs All the logic inputs are independent and isolated, relay types P441 provide 8 inputs, 16 inputs are provided by the P442. Rating Logical off Logical on 0Vdc 50Vdc Range 0 - 12Vdc 30 - 60Vdc Operative dc range 19 - 65 V 37 - 150 V 87 - 300 V Operative ac range Not available 24 - 110 V 80 - 265 V
Higher voltages can be used in conjunction with an external resistor, value of the resistor is determined by the following equation: Resistor = (Required Input Level - 50) x 200. Hardware ref P441/442B or C or P444A or C (Universal Opto) : All the logic inputs are independent and isolated, relay types P441 provide 8 inputs, 16 inputs are provided by the P442 and 24 inputs for P444. Battery Voltage (V dc) 24/27 30/34 48/54 110/125 220/250 REMARK: Logical off (V dc) <16.2 <20.4 <32.4 <75 <150 Logical on (V dc) >19.2 >24 >38.4 >88 >176
Control the version compatibility in P44x/EN VC chapter
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.6 Output Relay Contacts Make & Carry Carry Break 30A for 3s 250A for 30ms 10A continuous DC: 50W resistive DC: 37.5W inductive (L/R = 40ms) AC: 1250VA AC: 1250VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7) 10A and 300V 10,000 operations minimum 100,000 operations minimum
Maxima: Loaded contact: Unloaded contact:
Watchdog Contact Break DC: 30W resistive DC: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms) AC: 275W inductive (P.F. = 0.7)
The maximum number of output relays that should be configured to be permanently energized is 50% of those available (minimum 4). 1.7 Field Voltage The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of 112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V. 1.8 Loop through connections Terminals D17-D18 and F17-F18 are internally connected together for convenience when wiring, Maxima 5A and 300V. 1.9 Wiring requirements The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in the installation section of the Operation Guide (Chapter P44x/EN IN).
2.
2.1
BURDENS
Current Circuit CT burden (at nominal current) 1A 5A <0.04VA <0.4VA
2.2
Voltage Circuit Reference voltage (Vn) Vn = 100/120V <0.03VA
2.3
Auxiliary Supply Case Size Size 8 Size 12 * ** Nominal* 15VA dc 18VA dc 16W ac 19W ac Maximum** 20VA dc 26VA dc 20W ac 26W ac
Nominal is with 50% of the optos energised and one relay per card energised Maximum is with all optos and all relays energised.
For each energised Opto powered from the Field Voltage or each energised Output Relay: Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised opto input Each additional energised output relay 2.4 Optically-Isolated Inputs DC Supply 5mA burden per input. (Current drawn at rated voltage) 2.5mA at minimum voltage (30V) Maximum input voltage 300V dc (any setting). 0.09W (24/27, 30/34, 48/54V) 0.12W (110/125V) 0.19W (220/250V) 0.13W
3.
ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is 2.5% unless otherwise specified. If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy shall be valid over the full setting range.
3.1
Reference Conditions Quantity General Ambient temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity 20 C 86kPa to 106kPa 45 to 75 % 2C Reference conditions Test tolerance
Input energising quantity Current Voltage Frequency Auxiliary supply
In
Vn 50 or 60Hz DC 48V or 110V AC 63.5V or 110V
5% 5% 0.5% 5%
3.2
Measurement Accuracy Quantity Current Voltage Frequency Phase Range 0.1 to 64In 1.0 Vn 45 - 65Hz 0 - 360 Accuracy 10mA or 1% 1% 0.025Hz 2
P44x/EN TD/E33 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Technical Data
Page 10/30
3.3 Range Accuracy: 5% 0 to 400/In 0.001/In to 500/In Accuracy: 10% 0 to 400/In 0.001/In to 500/In 2 to 20 Is [1] DT: Is5% IDMT: 1.05Is5% Accuracy: 2 1 0.95Is5% greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms 0.95Is5% Is5% Accuracy: 10% DT: Vs5% IDMT: 0.95Vs5% DT: Vs5% IDMT: 1.05Vs5% 60 - 185V 0 - 360 Accuracy: 2 0.95Is5% 5% greater of 5% or 40ms DT: Is5% IDMT: 1.05Is5% Accuracy: 10% at RCA 90 Accuracy: 5% Accuracy: 5% -95 to +95 2 to 20 Is [2] 0.95Is2% 0.95Is5% greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms 2ms 2ms Trigger Reset Timer Accuracy
Protection accuracy
Element
Distance elements: Zone 1 Resistance Impedance
Distance elements: Other zones Resistance Impedance
Phase Overcurrent elements (I>1, I>2, I>3, I>4)
Relay characteristic angle
Earth fault measuring elements (IN>1,IN>2, IN>)
Zero sequence voltage polarisation (Vop>) Vn = 100/120 V 0.5 - 25V 0.5 - 25V 0.08 - 1.0In 2 to 20 Is [1] 0.2 - 1.2 In
Negative sequence Polarisation: Voltage threshold (V2p>) Vn = 100/120 V
Negative sequence Polarisation: Current threshold (I2p>)
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (I2>)
Under Current element (I<)
Above setting: 10ms or less Below setting: 15ms or less 1.05Vs5% 0.95Vs5% greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms greater of 2% or 20ms
Under Voltage elements (V<) Vn = 100/120 V
10 - 120V
Over Voltage elements (V>&V>>) Vn = 100/120 V
Directional Operating Boundary
Technical Data Page 11/30
P44x/EN TD/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Element 0.2 to 1.0 2 to 20 Is 2 to 20 Is 0 to 10s <50ms <5% (for a system X/R of up to 90) --
Range
Trigger
Reset 0.95
Timer Accuracy
Broken conductor protection
I 2 I1
I 2 5% I1
I 2 5% greater of 2% or 20ms I1
Transient Overreach
Relay overshoot
Breaker fail timers
greater of 2% or 20ms
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 12/30 3.4 Influencing Quantities
No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities: Quantity Environmental Temperature Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, Bump, Seismic) -25C to +55C According to IEC 60255-21-1:1988 IEC 60255-21-2:1988 IEC 60255-21-3:1995 Operative range (typical only)
Quantity Electrical Frequency Harmonics (single) Auxiliary voltage range Aux. supply ripple Point on wave of fault waveform DC offset of fault waveform Phase angle Magnetising inrush
Operative range
45 Hz to 65 Hz 5% over the range 2nd to 17th 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac) 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn 0 - 360 No offset to fully offset -90 to + 90 No operation with OC elements set to 35% of peak anticipated inrush level.
3.5 3.5.1
High Voltage Withstand IEC60255-5:1977 Dielectric Withstand 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth. 2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped together and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and loop through connections D17/D18 and E17/E18. 1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays. 1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover pairs and watchdog outputs.
3.5.2
Impulse The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 0.5J across: Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected together. Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.
3.5.3
Insulation Resistance The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M at 500Vdc.
4.
ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE
The product complies with the following specifications :
4.1 4.1.1
Electrical Environment DC Supply Interruptions IEC60255-11:1979 The product will withstand a 20ms interruption in the auxiliary voltage in its quiescent condition.
4.1.2
AC Ripple on DC Supply IEC60255-11:1979 The product will operate with 12% AC ripple on the DC auxiliary supply without any additional measurement errors.
4.1.3
Disturbances on AC Supply - EN61000-4-11:1994 The products satisfies the requirements of EN61000-4-11 for voltage dips and short interruptions.
4.1.4
High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1:1988 The product complies with Class III 2.5kV common mode and 1kV differential mode for 2 seconds at 1MHz with 200 source impedance, without any mal-operations or additional measurement errors.
4.1.5
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4:1992 The product complies with all classes up to and including class IV/4kV without any maloperations or additional measurement errors. Fast transient disturbances on power supply 4kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time, 5kHz (common mode only) repetition time, 15ms burst, repeated every 300ms for 1min in each polarity, with a 50 source impedance. Fast transient disturbances on I/O signal, data and control lines (common mode only) 4kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time, 5kHz repetition time, 15ms burst, repeated every 300ms for 1min in each polarity, with a 50 source impedance.
4.1.6
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2:1996 The product will withstand application of all discharge levels up to the following without maloperation: Class IV 15kV discharge in air to the user interface, display and exposed metal work. Class III 8kV discharge in air to all communication ports, 6kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the product.
4.1.7
Conducted Emissions EN 55011:1991 Group 1 Class A limits. 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average). 0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average).
4.1.8
Radiated Emissions EN 55011:1991 Group 1 Class A limits. 30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance. 230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 14/30 4.1.9 Radiated Immunity IEC60255-22-3:1989 Class/Level III/3 - 10V/m at 1kHz 80% am., 20MHz to 1GHz. 4.1.10 Conducted Immunity IEC61000-4-6:1996 Level 3 - 10Vrms at 1kHz 80% am.- 0.15 to 80MHz. 4.1.11 Surge Immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995 Level 4 - 4kV peak, 1.2/50s between all groups and case earth 2kV peak, 1.2/50s between terminals of each group. 4.1.12 EMC Compliance
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route. Generic Standards EN 50081-2 :1994 and EN 50082-2 :1995 are used to establish conformity. 4.1.13 Power Frequency Interference - Electricity Association (UK) EA PAP Document, Environmental Test Requirements for Protection Relays and Systems Issue I, Draft 4.2.1 1995. Class Length of comms circuit 1 to 10 metres 10 to 100 metres 100 to 1000 metres Unbalanced Comms V rms 0.5 5 50 Balanced Comms (Unbalance 1%) Vrms 0.005 0.05 0.5 5 Balanced Comms (Unbalance 0.1%) Vrms 0.0005 0.005 0.05 0.5
1 2 3 4 4.2 4.2.1
1000 to 10,000m or > 500
Atmospheric Environment Temperature IEC60255-6:1988 Storage and transit 25C to +70C. Operating 25C to +55C. IEC60068-2-1:1990 Cold IEC60068-2-2:1974 Dry heat
4.2.2
Humidity IEC60068-2-3:1969 56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40C.
4.2.3
Enclosure Protection IEC60529:1989 IP52 - Protected against dust and dripping water at 15 to the vertical.
4.2.4
Pollution degree IEC61010-1:1990/A2:1995 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.3 4.3.1 Mechanical Environment Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988 Vibration Response Class 2 - 1g Vibration Endurance Class 2 - 2g. 4.3.2 Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2:1988 Shock response Class 2 - 10g Shock withstand Class 1 - 15g Bump Class 1 - 10g 4.3.3 Seismic IEC60255-21-3:1993 Class 2.
5.
ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS

The products shall meet the ANSI / IEEE requirements as follows:-
5.1
ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1989 Standards for relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus.
5.2
ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1: 1989 Surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems:Oscillatory test - 1MHz to 1.5MHz, 2.5kV to 3.0kV, Fast transient test 4kV to 5kV
5.3
ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2: 1995 Standard for withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic interference from transceivers: 35V/m, 25 to 1000Mhz.
6.
6.1 6.1.1
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

Distance Protection Line Settings Setting Length of line (Ln) Positive sequence angle (1) Range 0.3 - 1000 km 0.2 - 625 miles 90 - 90 Step size 0.010 km 0.005 miles 0.1
In = 1 A
Setting Positive sequence impedance (Z1) 6.1.2 Zones settings Setting Range 0.001 - 500 Step size 0.001
In = 5 A
Range 0.002 199,8 Step size 0.002
In = 1 A
Range Step size
In = 5 A
Range 0.0002 100 0 - 80 Step size 0.0002
Impedance reaches 0.001 - 500 0.001 (Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone P, Zone 4) Resistive reaches for phase earth faults (Zone 1, Zone 2, Zones 3 & 4, Zone P) Resistive reaches for phase earth faults (Zone 1, Zone 2, Zones 3 & 4, Zone P) 0 - 400 0.01
0.002
0 - 400
0.01
0 - 80
0.002
Setting Residual compensation angles (Zone 1, Zone 2, Zones 3 & 4, Zone P) Residual compensation factors (Zone 1, Zone 2, Zones 3 & 4, Zone P) Timer for zone 1/1X Timers for zone 2, Zone 3, Zone P, Zone 4
Range 180-180
Step size 0.1
0-7
0.001
0 - 10s 0 - 10s
0.002s 0.01s
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 18/30 6.1.3 Power-swing settings
In = 1 A
Setting Powerswing detection boundaries: Delta R Delta X Range 0 - 400 0 - 400 Step size 0.01 0.01
In = 5 A
Range 0 - 80 0 - 80 Step size 0.002 0.002
Setting Imax line IN threshold I2 threshold Trip mode Unblocking time delay Power-swing detection boundary Block zones
Range
Step size 0.01 In 1%Imax 1%Imax 0.1s 0.01
In - 20 In
10 - 100 % Imax 10 - 100 % Imax Single/Three pole 0 - 30s 0 - 25
Bit 0: Z1&Z1X-Block, Bit 1: Z2 block Bit 2: Z3 block, Bit 3: Zp block, Bit 4:Z4block
6.2
Distance protection schemes Basic scheme functions: Instantaneous zone 1 tripping Time delayed tripping for all zones Directional earth fault protection Zero sequence Power protection (since B1.0) Switch on to fault logic Trip on reclose logic Loss of load logic Conversion to three pole tripping Channel-aided distance schemes: Permissive Overreach Protection Overreaching Zone 1 (POP Z1) Permissive Overreach Protection Overreaching Zone 2 (POP Z2) with with
Permissive Underreach Protection, Accelerating Zone 2 (PUP Z2) Permissive Underreach Protection Tripping via Forward Start (PUP Fwd) Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 1 (BOP Z1) Blocking Overreach Protection with Overreaching Zone 2 (BOP Z2) Permissive Scheme Unblocking Logic Permissive Overreach Schemes Weak Infeed Features Permissive Overreach Schemes Current Reversal Guard Blocking Scheme Current Reversal Guard
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.2.1 Programmable distance schemes Setting Signal Send Zone Type of Scheme on signal Receive Range
No Signal Send/Signal send on Z1/ Signal send on Z2/ Signal send on Z4 None/None+Z1X/Aided scheme for Z1 faults/Aided scheme for Z2 faults/ Aided scheme for forward faults/ Blocking scheme for Z1 faults/ Blocking scheme for Z2 faults
6.2.2
Distance schemes settings Setting Fault Type/Signal Send Zone Range Step size
Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/ Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/Both Enabled Force 3 Pole Trip for all zones/1 Pole Trip for zone Z1/1 Pole trip for zones Z1 and Z2 0 - 1s 0 - 0,15s None (no control of Signal Receive)/Loss of carrier/Loss of Guard (HF Presence) 10 3600 s TOR Z1 enable/Z2 enable/Z3 enable/ All zones enable/ Distance scheme enable SOTF AllZones/Lev.Detect./Z1 enable/Z2 enable/Z3 enable/Z1+Rev en/Z2+Rev en/Dist Scheme/Disable 0,002s 0,002s -
Trip mode for the distance protection Signal Receive Time-Delay for Blocking Schemes (Tp) Time Delay for Reversal Guard Unblocking Logic/Type of TAC Receive SOTF Delay TOR-SOTF Mode
1.000 s -
6.2.3
Weak infeed settings Setting WI :Mode Status WI : Single Pole Trip WI : V< Thres. WI : Trip Time Delay Range Disabled/Echo/Trip&Echo Disabled/Enabled 10 - 70V 0 - 1s Step size 5V 0,002s
6.2.4
Loss of load settings Setting Mode status Chan. Fail I< Window NOTE: Range Disabled or enabled Disabled or enabled 0.05 x In - 1 x In 0.01s - 0.1s 0.05 In 0.01s Step Size
For detailed information on distance schemes, please refer to Chapter P44x/EN AP - Application notes.
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 20/30 6.3 6.3.1 Back-up Overcurrent Protection Threshold Settings Setting I>1 Current Set I>2 Current Set I>3 Current Set I>4 Current Set 6.3.2 Time Delay Settings Stage 1st Stage 2nd Stage TOR/SOTF protection Stub bus protection Range 0.08 - 4.0In 0.08 - 4.0In 0.08 - 32In 0.08 - 32In
Step size 0.01In 0.01In 0.01In 0.01In
Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay can be blocked by an optically isolated input: Element 1st Stage 2nd Stage 3rd Stage 4th Stage 6.3.3 Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US curves as shown in the table below. The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t = TMS K (I/Is)1 Time delay type Definite Time (DT) or IDMT(IEC/UK/IEEE/US curves) DT or IDMT DT DT
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t= TD 7
(I/I S )
+L 1
Where t K I IS L = = = = = = operation time constant measured current current threshold setting constant ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves) Time Multiplier Setting for IEC/UK curves Time Dial Setting for IEEE/US curves
TMS = TD =
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 IDMT Curve description Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Short Time Inverse IDMT Characteristics Name TMS Range 0.025 to 1.2 Step Size 0.025 Standard IEC IEC IEC UK IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02 K Constant 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394 Constant 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 2 2 2 0.02
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 21/30 L Constant
0.114 0.491 0.1217 0.18 0.01694
Time Multiplier Settings for IEC/UK curves Name TD Range 0.5 to 15 Step Size 0.1
Time Dial Settings for IEEE/US curves 6.3.3.1 Definite Time Characteristic Element All stages 6.3.3.2 Reset Characteristics Reset options for IDMT stages: Curve type IEC / UK curves All other Reset time delay DT only IDMT or DT Range 0 to 100s Step Size 10ms
The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT curve as shown in the table below. Thus if IDMT reset is selected the curve selection and Time Dial setting will apply to both operate and reset. All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:
tr TD t Re set = 7 1 ( I I ) S
Where tReset tr I IS = = = = = = reset time constant measured current current threshold setting constant Time Dial Setting (Same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)
TD
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 22/30 IEEE/US IDMT Curve description Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Inverse Short Time Inverse Inverse Reset Characteristics 6.4 Negative sequence overcurrent protection Setting I2> Current Set I2> time Delay Directional I2> Char Angle 6.5 Broken Conductor Protection Settings I2/I1 Setting I2/I1 Time Delay I2/I1 Trip 6.6 6.6.1 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Threshold Settings Setting IN>1 Current Set IN>2 Current Set 6.6.2 Range 0.08 - 4.0In 0.08 - 32In Range 0.2 - 1.0 0 - 100s Enabled / Disabled Step size 0.01 0.1s Range 0.08 - 4.0In 0 - 100s None/Fwd/Rev 95 - +95 1 Step size 0.01In 0.01s Standard IEEE IEEE IEEE US-C08 US-C02
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 tr Constant 0.0515 19.61 28.2 5.95 0.02394 Constant 0.02 2 2 2 0.02
Step Size 0.01In 0.01In
Polarising Quantities For Earth Fault Measuring Elements The polarising quantity for earth fault elements can be either zero sequence or negative sequence values. Setting IN> Char angle Range 95 to +95 Step Size 1
6.6.3
Time Delay Characteristics The time delay options for the two earth fault elements are identical, stage 1 may be selected to be either IDMT or definite time. Stage 2 will provide a definite time delay. The settings and IDMT characteristics are identical to those specified for the phase overcurrent elements. The setting range for the definite time delayed element is as specified below: Definite Time Characteristic Element All stages Range 0 to 200s Step Size 0.01s
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.7 Zero sequence Power Protection (since B1.0) Threshold Settings Setting Po Status Time Delay Fact. Fix Time Delay IN current set P0 Threshold 6.8 6.8.1 Range Enabled/Disabled. 0 2s 0 10s 0.05 - 4 In 0.05IN - IN
Step Size 0.200s 0.010s 0.01 In 0.1IN
Channel Aided Directional Earth Fault Protection Threshold Settings Setting Polarisation V> Voltage Set (Vn=100/120 V) IN Forward Teleprotection Time delay Scheme logic Tripping Range Zero seq. / Neg. seq. 0.500 - 20 V 0.05 - 4 In 0 - 10s Any Phase / Three Phases Step Size 0.010 V 0.01 In 0.1s
Shared / Blocking / Permissive
6.9 6.9.1
Under Voltage Protection Threshold Settings Setting V<1 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V) V<2 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V) Range 10 - 120V 10 - 120V Step Size 1V 1V
6.9.2
Under Voltage Protection Time Delay Characteristics The Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first stage has a time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The second stage has an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay can be blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristic is defined by the following formula :
t=
K (1 M )
Where K T M = = = Time Multiplier Setting Operating time in seconds Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs)
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 24/30 Setting DT setting TMS Setting (K) Definite time and TMS setting ranges 6.10 6.10.1 Over Voltage Protection Threshold Settings Setting V>1 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V) V>2 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V) 6.10.2 Time Delay Characteristics Range 60 - 185V 60 - 185V Range 0 - 100s 0.5 - 100
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Step Size 0.01s 0.5
Step Size 1V 1V
The Overvoltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first stage has a time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The second stage has an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay can be blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristic is defined by the following formula :
t=
K ( M 1)
Where K T M Setting DT setting TMS Setting (K) Definite time and TMS setting ranges 6.11 Voltage Transformer Supervision Setting VTS Time Delay 3 phase undervoltage threshold VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit Superimposed current Delta I> 6.12 Range 1.0 - 20s 10-70V 0 - In 0.01 - 5A Step Size 1s 1V 0.01In 0.01 A = = = Time Multiplier Setting Operating time in seconds Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs) Range 0 - 100s 0.5 - 100s Step Size 0.01s 0.5
Capacitive Voltage Transformer Supervision (since B1.0) Setting CVTS status CVTS VN> CVTS Time Delay Range Enabled / Disabled 0.500 - 22V 0 300s 0.500V 1s Step Size
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.13 Current Transformer Supervision Setting CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay 6.14 Undercurrent Element Range 0.5 - 22V (for Vn = 100/120V) 0.08In - 4In 0 - 10s
Step size 0.5V 0.01In 1s
This element is used by the breaker fail and circuit breaker monitoring functions of the relay. Name I< Current Set 6.15 Range 0.05 3.2In Step size 0.050In
Breaker Fail Timers (TBF1 and TBF2) There are two stages of breaker fail that can be used to re-trip the breaker and back trip in the case of a circuit breaker fail. The timers are reset if the breaker opens, this is generally detected by the undercurrent elements. Other methods of detection can be employed for certain types of trip (see Application notes Volume 1 Chapter 2). Timer tBF1 tBF2 CBF non Current reset CBF Ext reset Setting range 0 to 10s 0 to 10s I<Only/CB open&I</Prot Reset&I</Disable/Prot Reset Or I< I<Only/CB open&I</Prot Reset&I</Disable/Prot Reset Or I< Step 0.005s 0.005s
7.
7.1
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Disturbance Recorder Settings Setting Record Length Trigger position Trigger mode Sample Rate Digital Signals Trigger Logic Range 0 - 10.5s 0 - 100% Single / Extended 12 Samples/Cycle Fixed Step 0.1s 0.1%
Selectable from logic inputs and outputs and internal signals Each of the digital inputs can be selected to trigger a record
7.2
Fault Locator Settings Setting Mutual compensation factor Mutual compensation angle Range 0 to 7.000 0 to 360 Step size 0.001 1
8.
8.1
CONTROL FUNCTION SETTINGS

Communications Settings Front port Protocol Address Message format Baud rate Communication Parameters (Fixed) Courier 1 IEC60870FT1.2 19200 bits/s
Rear port settings Physical link Remote address Modbus address Baud rate Baud rate Inactivity timer Parity Measurement period 8.2 8.2.1 Auto-Reclose Options
Setting options RS485 or Fibre optic 0 - 255 (step 1) 1 - 247 (step 1) 9 600 or 19 200 bits/s 9 600, 19 200 or 38 400 bits/s 1 - 30 minutes (step 1) Odd, Even or None 1 - 60 minutes (step 1)
Setting available for: IEC only IEC / Courier Modbus only IEC only Modbus only All Modbus only IEC only
The Auto-recloser in the distance protection allows either single* or three pole for the first shot. The following shots are three pole only. Due to the complexity of the logic the Application notes should be referred to. NOTE: 8.2.2 Auto-recloser settings Setting AUTORECLOSE (Configuration Setting) Number of Shots 1P Dead Time 3P Dead Time Dead Time 2 Dead Time 3 Dead Time 4 Healthy Window Reclaim Time Discrimination time A/R Inhibit Window Range ENABLE/DISABLE 1, 1/3, 1/3/3, 1/3/3/3 3, 3/3, 3/3/3, 3/3/3/3 0.1 to 5s 0. 1 to 60s 1 to 3600s 1 to 3600s 1 to 3600s 0.01 to 9999s 1 to 600s 0.1 to 5s 1 to 3600s 1 0.01s 0.01s 1s 1s 1s 0.01s (in CB control) 1s 0.01s 1s Step Size *P442 and P444 only
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 28/30 Setting Block auto-recloser Range At T2 At T3 At Tzp LoL Trip I2> Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip Aided D.E.F Trip 0.1 to 10s 0.1s
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Step Size
AR Close pulse length Check synchronic settings Setting
Range
Step Size
C/S Check Scheme for A/R Bit 0: Live Bus/Dead Line, Bit 1: Dead Bus/Live Line Bit 2: Live Bus/Live Line. Dead Bus/Dead Line with special PSL C/S Check Scheme for Man Bit 0: Live Bus/Dead Line, CB Bit 1: Dead Bus/Live Line Bit 2: Live Bus/Live Line. Dead Bus/Dead Line with special PSL V< Dead Line V> Live Line V< Dead Bus V> Live Bus Diff Voltage Diff Frequency Diff Phase Bus-Line Delay 8.3 5-30V 30-120V 5-30V 30-120V 0.5-40V 0.02-1Hz 5-90 0.1 to 2s 1V 1V 1V 1V 0.1V 0.01Hz 2.5 0.1s
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring The relay can monitor the state of the circuit breaker using either a 52a or 52b signal, it is possible to select which of these is being used on the relay menu. If the menu is used to select the Both 52a and 52b option is selected then a discrepancy alarm can be detected. If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s, then the CB Status alarm will be indicated.
Technical Data MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.4 Circuit Breaker Control Name CB Control by Range Disabled/ Local/ Remote/ Local+Remote/ Opto/ Opto+local/ Opto+Remote/ Opto+Rem+local 0.1 to 10s 0.1 to 5s 0.01 to 600s 0.01 to 9999 0.01 to 9999 Disabled/Enabled Disabled/Enabled 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01 0.01 -
Step size
Manual close pulse time Trip pulse time Man Close Delay Healthy Windows C/S Window AR single pole AR three pole 8.5 8.5.1
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Maintenance alarm settings Name I^ Maintenance No. of CB Ops Maint CB Time Maint Range 1 to 25000A 1- 10000 5 - 500ms Step size 1 1 1ms Circuit breaker opening time Summated broken current
8.5.2
Lockout Alarm Settings Name I^ threshold No. of CB Ops Lock CB Time Lockout Fault Freq Count Fault Freq Time Lockout reset by: Manual close reset delay Range 1 to 25000 1- 10000 5 - 500ms 0 to 9999 0 to 9999s Step size 1 1 1ms 1 1s
CB close, User Interface 0.01 to 600s 0.01s
P44x/EN TD/E33 Page 30/30 8.6 Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is not editable from the relay menu, a dedicated support package is provided as part of the MiCOM S1 support software. This is a graphical editor for the programmable logic. The features of the programmable logic are more fully described within the application section of the user manual. As part of the logic each output contact has a programmable conditioner/timer, there are also eight general purpose timers for use in the logic. The output conditioners and the general-purpose timers have the following setting range: Time t1 to t8 8.7 CT and VT Ratio Settings The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase currents. Primary range Current transformer Voltage transformer 1 - 30000 Amps step size 1 A 100 V - 1000 kV step size 1 V Secondary range 1 or 5 Amps 80 - 140 V step size 1 V Range 0 to 4 hours Step size 0.001s
Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN IN/E33
INSTALLATION
P44x/EN IN/E33 Page 1/10
CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4.
4.1 4.2
RECEIPT OF RELAYS STORAGE UNPACKING RELAY MOUNTING

Rack mounting Panel mounting
3 3 3 4
5 6
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6
RELAY WIRING
Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections RS485 port IRIG-B connections (if applicable) RS232 port Download/monitor port Earth connection
8
8 8 9 9 9 9
BLANK PAGE
1.
RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D Protection & Control should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.
2.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it in the carton. To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side. Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency. Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between 25C to +70C.
3.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. NOTE: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
4.
RELAY MOUNTING
MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found in the product publication. Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE (GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001). Note that the 60TE cover also fits the 80TE case size of the relay. The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are closed. If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.
P0146XXa
FIGURE 1 - LOCATION OF BATTERY ISOLATION STRIP If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in figure 1, ie. with the strip behind the battery with the red tab protruding.
Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1 Rack mounting
MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number FX0021 001), as illustrated in figure 2. These frames have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483mm (19) rack system this enables combinations of widths of case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side. P545 and P546 relays in 80TE cases are also available as direct 19 rack mounting ordering variants, having mounted flanges similar to those shown in figure 2. The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of the tier.
P0147XXa
FIGURE 2 - RACK MOUNTING OF RELAYS Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting. Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions. Case size summation 5TE 10TE 15TE 20TE 25TE 30TE 35TE 40TE TABLE 1 - BLANKING PLATES 4.2 Panel mounting The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used. Blanking plate part number GJ2028 001 GJ2028 002 GJ2028 003 GJ2028 004 GJ2028 005 GJ2028 006 GJ2028 007 GJ2028 008
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of collars are available. Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel. NOTE: It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets as this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from the panel in the future if repair is necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529 IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the complete assembly.
Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Width 10TE 15TE 20TE 25TE 30TE 35TE 40TE 45TE 50TE 55TE 60TE 65TE 70TE 75TE 80TE Single tier GJ9018 002 GJ9018 003 GJ9018 004 GJ9018 005 GJ9018 006 GJ9018 007 GJ9018 008 GJ9018 009 GJ9018 010 GJ9018 011 GJ9018 012 GJ9018 013 GJ9018 014 GJ9018 015 GJ9018 016 TABLE 2 - IP52 SEALING RINGS
P44x/EN IN/E33 Page 7/10 Double tier GJ9018 018 GJ9018 019 GJ9018 020 GJ9018 021 GJ9018 022 GJ9018 023 GJ9018 024 GJ9018 025 GJ9018 026 GJ9018 027 GJ9018 028 GJ9018 029 GJ9018 030 GJ9018 031 GJ9018 032
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions.
5.
RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
5.1
Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per relay terminal. If required, AREVA T&D Protection & Control can supply M4 90 crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100. Part number ZB9124 901 ZB9124 900 ZB9124 904 Wire size 0.25 1.65mm2 (22 16AWG) 1.04 2.63mm2 (16 14AWG) 2.53 6.64mm2 (12 10AWG) Insulation colour Red Blue Uninsulated*
TABLE 3 - M4 90 CRIMP RING TERMINALS * To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping. The following minimum wire sizes are recommended: Current Transformers Auxiliary Supply, Vx RS485 Port Other circuits 2.5mm2 1.5mm2 See separate section 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not preinsulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay. The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms. It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used. 5.2 RS485 port Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be: Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: 16/0.2mm copper conductors PVC insulated 0.5mm2 per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed
Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath. 5.4 RS232 port Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations. 5.5 Download/monitor port Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations. 5.6 Earth connection Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used. NOTE: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipment's rating label
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN CM/E33
COMMISSIONING
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 1/54
CONTENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION SETTING FAMILIARISATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum Equipment Required Optional Equipment
3 4 5
5 5
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11
PRODUCT CHECKS
With the Relay De-energised Visual Inspection Current Transformer Shorting Contacts External Wiring Insulation Watchdog Contacts Auxiliary Supply With the Relay Energised Watchdog Contacts Date and Time With an IRIG-B signal Without an IRIG-B signal Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Field Voltage Supply Input Opto-isolators Output Relays Rear Communications Port Current Inputs Voltage Inputs
6
6 7 8 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 15 16 16
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5
SETTING CHECKS
Apply Application-Specific Settings Check Application-Specific Settings Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation Functional Tests : Start control & Distance characteristic limits Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL) Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST Weak infeed mode test Protection function during fuse failure
18
18 18 19 19 34 35 35 36
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 2/54 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation Connect the Test Circuit Perform the Test Check the Operating Time Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 37 37 38 38 39
6.
6.1 6.2
ON-LOAD CHECKS
Voltage Connections Current Connections
40
40 41
7. 8.
8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3
FINAL CHECKS MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Period Maintenance Checks Alarms Opto-isolators Output Relays Measurement accuracy Method of Repair Replacing the Complete Relay Replacing a PCB Recalibration Changing the battery Instructions for Replacing The Battery Post Modification Tests Battery Disposal
42 43
43 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 45 52 52 52 53 53
1.
INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P440 distance protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays. To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (Preferred method) Via the operator interface. To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relays internal programmable scheme logic. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter for completion as required. As the relays menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu is restored to the customers preferred language on completion. To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions, they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING, Cell Text]. For example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under the column heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would be given as [0001: SYSTEM DATA, Language]. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the safety section and chapter P44x/EN IN, installation, of this manual.
2.
SETTING FAMILIARISATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P440 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. Chapter P44x/EN IT contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the relays. With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are accessible. All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared. Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
3.
3.1
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum Equipment Required Overcurrent test set with interval timer 110V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional) Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0250V respectively Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter) Phase angle meter Phase rotation meter NOTE: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.
3.2
Optional Equipment Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed) An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (For insulation resistance testing when required). A portable PC, with appropriate software (This enables the rear communications port to be tested if this is to be used and will also save considerable time during commissioning). KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter (if RS485 K-Bus port is being tested and one is not already installed). RS485 to RS232 converter (if RS485 Modbus port is being tested). A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
4.
PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by: Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (This requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay) Extracting the settings from the relay itself (This again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software) Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings as the relays menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password 2 should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to commencement of testing. NOTE: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from AREVA by quoting the serial number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to that relay and will not work on any other relay.
4.1
With the Relay De-energised The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block. Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may also be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block. DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1 Visual Inspection
Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
P3001ENa
FIGURE 1A - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 40TE CASE (P441)
IRIG-B
TX RX
P3002ENa
FIGURE 1B - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 60TE CASE (P442)
B
1 2
C
1
3 19
D
1
E
1
H
1
J
1
K
1
L
1
1
2
2 3
3
20
IRIG-B
6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 8 9 21
7 8 9
7 8 9
10
11
12
22
10
10
10
10
10
10
11 10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
13 12
12
TX RX
13
14
15
23
13
13 15
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
15 14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
17
18
24
16
16
16
16
16
16
17 16
16
17
17
FIGURE 1C - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 80TE CASE (P444) 4.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference C in figure 1) is disconnected from the current input PCB. The heavy duty terminal block is fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws. These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third and fourth, columns of terminals. NOTE: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check that all the shorting switches being used are closed with a continuity tester. table 1 shows the terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.
19
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
P3003ENa
20
21
10
12
11
22
11
13
14
15
23
13
16
17
18
24
15
17
Heavy duty terminal block
Medium duty terminal block

P3004ENa
FIGURE 2 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR TERMINAL BLOCKS
18
16
14
12
10
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Current Input
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 9/54 Shorting contact between terminals 1A CTs 5A CTs C1-C2 C4-C5 C7-C8 C10-C11
IA IB IC IM
C3-C2 C6-C5 C9-C8 C12-C11
TABLE 1 - CURRENT TRANSFORMER SHORTING CONTACT LOCATIONS 4.1.3 External Wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA order acknowledgement for the relay. If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relays positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customers normal practice. 4.1.4 Insulation Insulation resistance tests only need to be done during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they havent been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together. The main groups of relay terminals are: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Voltage transformer circuits. Current transformer circuits Auxiliary voltage supply. Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs. Relay contacts. S485 communication port. Case earth.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the unit.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 10/54 4.1.5 Watchdog Contacts
Using a continuity tester, check that the normally closed watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 2 for a de-energised relay. Terminals Contact State Relay De-energised F11-F12 J11-J12 N11-N12 F13-F14 J13-J14 N13-N14 (P441) (P442) (P444) (P441) (P442) (P444) Closed Relay Energised Open
Open
Closed
TABLE 2 - WATCHDOG CONTACT STATUS 4.1.6 Auxiliary Supply The relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relays nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in table 3. Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC rms] 24/54V 48/110V 110/250V [-] [30/100V] [100/240V] 19 - 65V 37 - 150V 87 - 300V 24 - 110V 80 - 265V DC Operating Range AC Operating Range
TABLE 3 - OPERATIONAL RANGE OF AUXILIARY SUPPLY It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply. DO NOT ENERGISE THE RELAY USING THE BATTERY CHARGER WITH THE BATTERY DISCONNECTED AS THIS CAN IRREPARABLY DAMAGE THE RELAYS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY. Energise the relay if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an MMLG test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. 4.2 With the Relay Energised The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay. The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks. 4.2.1 Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 3 for an energized relay. 4.2.2 Date and Time The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.3 With an IRIG-B signal (models P442 or P444 only)
If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised. To allow the relays time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to Enabled. Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [0805: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Status] reads Active. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed. Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set manually in this cell. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay. Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal. 4.2.4 Without an IRIG-B signal If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to Disabled. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On reenergisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct. 4.2.5 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. Control the PSL activated in the internal logic. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing required for that LED because it is known to be operational. Testing the alarm and out of service leds The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSIONING TESTS menu column. Set cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to Enabled. Check that the alarm and out of service LEDs illuminate. It is not necessary to return cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to Disabled at this stage because test mode will be required for later tests. Testing the trip led The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later. Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 12/54 Testing the user-programmable leds
To test the user-programmable LEDs set cell [0F10: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test LEDs] to Apply Test. Check that all 8 LEDs on the right-hand side of the relay illuminate. 4.2.6 Field Voltage Supply The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that should be used to energise the opto-isolated inputs. Measure the field voltage across the terminals given in table 4. Check that the field voltage is present at each positive and negative terminal and that the polarity is correct. Repeat for terminals 8 and 10. Supply rail Terminals P441 +48 Vdc 48 Vdc F7 & F8 F9 & F10 P442 J7 & J8 J9 & J10 P444 N7 & N8 N9 & N10
TABLE 4 - FIELD VOLTAGE TERMINALS 4.2.7 Input Opto-isolators This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 8 opto-isolated inputs while P442 relays have 16 opto-isolated inputs and P444 relays have 24 opto-isolated inputs. The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested. The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in table 5. See hysteresis and settings about universal optos in chapter AP section 5. NOTE: The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V battery in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage otherwise damage to the relay may result.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using cell [0020: SYSTEM DATA, Opto I/P Status], a 1 indicating an energised input and a 0 indicating a de-energised input. When each opto-isolated input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change to the value shown in table 5 to indicate the new state of the inputs. Apply field voltage to terminals P441 -ve Opto input 1 Opto input 2 Opto input 3 Opto input 4 Opto input 5 Opto input 6 Opto input 7 Opto input 8 Opto input 9 Opto input 10 Opto input 11 D1 D3 D5 D7 D9 D11 D13 D15 +ve D2 D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 D14 D16 P442 -ve D1 D3 D5 D7 D9 D11 D13 D15 E1 E3 E5 +ve D2 D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 D14 D16 E2 E4 E6 P444 -ve D1 D3 D5 D7 D9 D11 D13 D15 E1 E3 E5 +ve D2 D4 D6 D8 D10 D12 D14 D16 E2 E4 E6
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Apply field voltage to terminals P441 -ve Opto input 12 Opto input 13 Opto input 14 Opto input 15 (P442 only) Opto input 16 (P442 only) Opto input 17 Opto input 18 Opto input 19 Opto input 20 Opto input 21 Opto input 22 Opto input 23 Opto input 24 TABLE 5 - OPTO-ISOLATED INPUT TERMINALS 4.2.8 Output Relays +ve P442 -ve E7 E9 E11 E13 E15 +ve E8 E10 E12 E14 E16
P444 -ve E7 E9 E11 E13 E15 F1 F3 F5 F7 F9 F11 F13 F15 +ve E8 E10 E12 E14 E16 F2 F4 F6 F8 F10 F12 F14 F16
This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 14 output relays , the P442 relays have 21 output relays and the P444 relays have 32 output relays. Ensure that the relay is still in test mode by viewing cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode]. The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for testing, set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Pattern] as shown in table 6. Connect an continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given in table 6. To operate the output relay set cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to Apply Test. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Reset the output relay by setting cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to Remove Test. NOTE: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
Repeat the test for relays 2 to 14 for P441 relays or relays 2 to 21 for P442 relays or relays 2 to 32 for P444 relays.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 14/54 Output Monitor terminals P441 N/C Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 Relay 17 Relay 18 Relay 19 Relay 20 Relay 21 Relay 22 Relay 23 Relay 24 Relay 25 Relay 26 Relay 27 Relay 28 Relay 29 Relay 30 Relay 31 Relay 32 E7-E9 E10-E12 E13-E15 E16-E18 B7-B9 B10-B12 B13-B15 B16-B18 N/O E1-E2 E3-E4 E5-E6 E8-E9 E11-E12 E14-E15 E17-E18 B1-B2 B3-B4 B5-B6 B8-B9 B11-B12 B14-B15 B17-B18 P442 N/C H7-H9 H10-H12 H13-H15 H16-H18 G7-G9 G10-G12 G13-G15 G16-G18 F7-F9 F10-F12 F13-F15 F16-F18 N/C H1-H2 H3-H4 H5-H6 H8-H9 H11-H12 H14-H15 H17-H18 G1-G2 G3-G4 G5-G6 G8-G9 G11-G12 G14-G15 G17-G18 F1-F2 F3-F4 F5-F6 F8-F9 F11-F12 F14-F15 F17-F18 P444 N/O
N/O M1-M2 M3-M4 M5-M6 M7-M8 M9-M10 M11-M12
M13-M15 M16-M18
M14-M15 M17-M18 L1-L2 L3-L4 L5-L6 L7-L8 L9-L10 L11-L12
L13-L15 L16-L18
L14-L15 L17-L18 K1-K2 K3-K4 K5-K6 K7-K8 K9-K10 K11-K12
K13-K15 K16-K18
K14-K15 K17-K18 J1-J2 J3-J4 J5-J6 J7-J8 J9-J10 J11-J12
J13-J15 J16-J18
J14-J15 J17-J18
TABLE 6 - RELAY OUTPUT TERMINALS AND TEST PATTERN SETTINGS Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to Disabled.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.9 Rear Communications Port
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relays rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary. 4.2.9.1 Courier Communications If a K-Bus to RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PC running the appropriate software to the incoming (remote from relay) side of the protocol converter. If a KITZ protocol converter is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PC to the type installed. In this case a KITZ protocol converter and portable PC running appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relays K-Bus port. The terminal numbers for the relays K-Bus port are given in table 7. However, as the installed protocol converter is not being used in the test, only the correct operation of the relays K-Bus port will be confirmed. Connection K-Bus Screen 1 2 Modbus or VDEW Screen +ve ve Terminal P441 F16 F17 F18 TABLE 7 - RS485 TERMINALS Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those on the protocol converter (usually a KITZ but could be a SCADA RTU). The relays Courier address in cell [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] must be set to a value between 0 and 255. Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC. 4.2.9.2 Modbus Communications Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to the relays RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relays RS485 port are given in table 7. Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address], [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E07: COMMUNICATIONS, Parity] of the relay. Check that communications with this relay can be established. 4.2.9.3 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communications If the relay has the optional fibre optic communications port fitted, the port to be used should be selected by setting cell [0E09: COMMUNICATIONS, Physical Link] to Fibre Optic or RS485. IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relays fibre optic or RS485 port, as appropriate, is working. Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] and [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] of the relay. Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established. P442 J16 J17 J18 P444 N16 N17 N18
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 16/54 4.2.10 Current Inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009: SYSTEM DATA, Frequency]. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to the each current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relays MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) Apply current to 1A line CT [0201: IA Magnitude] [0203: IB Magnitude] [0205: IC Magnitude] [0207: IM Magnitude] C3-C2 C6-C5 C9-C8 C12-C11 5A line CT C1-C2 C4-C5 C7-C8 C10-C11
TABLE 8 - CURRENT INPUT TERMINALS The measured current values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the VT and CT RATIOS menu column (see table 9). If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied current. The measurement accuracy of the relay is 1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) [0201: IA Magnitude] [0203: IB Magnitude] [0205: IC Magnitude] [022F: IM Mutual Current Mag] Corresponding CT Ratio (in VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu) [0A07:Phase CT Primary] [0A08:Phase CT Sec'y] [0A0B:MComp/CT Primary] [0A0C: MComp/CT Sec'y]
TABLE 9 - CT RATIO SETTINGS 4.2.11 Voltage Inputs This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relays MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) [021A: VAN Magnitude] [021C: VBN Magnitude] [021E: VCN Magnitude] [022B: C/S Voltage Mag]
Voltage applied To C19-C22 C20-C22 C21-C22 C23-C24
TABLE 10 - VOLTAGE INPUT TERMINALS

Voltage reference for synchrocheck Can be PGnd or PP reference with VT bus side or VT line (see setting description in chapter AP section 4.4)
The measured voltage values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary volts. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the VT and CT RATIOS menu column (see table 11). If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied voltage. The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) [021A: VAN Magnitude] [021C: VBN Magnitude] [021E: VCN Magnitude] [022B: C/S Voltage Mag] Corresponding VT Ratio (in VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu) [0A01:Main VT Primary] [0A02:Main VT Sec'y] [0A03:C/SVT Primary] [0A04: C/SVT Sec'y]
TABLE 11 - VT RATIO SETTINGS
5.
SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relays function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular installation have been correctly applied to the relay. If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2.
5.1
Apply Application-Specific Settings There are two methods of applying the settings: Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software (see compatibility with S1 version in chapter VC) via the relays front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). This method is the preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with which the relay is supplied are to be used then this is the only way of changing the settings. If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where programmable scheme logic changes are to be applied to the relay. Enter them manually via the relays operator interface. This method is not suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.
5.2
Check Application-Specific Settings The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not considered essential if a customer-prepared setting file has been transferred to the relay using a portable PC. There are two methods of checking the settings: Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available). Step through the settings using the relays operator interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests. Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it is beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be performed, written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation of the application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who created it. These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with the diskette containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3 5.3.1 Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation Functional Tests : Start control & Distance characteristic limits
Despite of working in 100% numeric technology some tests could be performed in order to control the good feature of the relay; regarding the different choices in the functions and settings (settings of protection (with S1/settings & records) and logical schemes (with S1/PSL Editor)) . Subsection 5.3.2. explains point by point the steps to follow for providing a complet control of every distance protection functions of the relay (with the factorys settings & PSL : "P&C by default"). In case of relays or applications failure : WARNING: COME BACK TO THE BASIC CONFIGURATION (SETTINGS & PSL) THEN VALID THE TESTS FOLLOWING THE ENCLOSED DESCRIPTION (this manipulation can be achieved by lcd in front face (configuration/restore defaults/all settings+valid)) see chapter ap section 4.9/4.10 & 5 as well "test tools" for a diagnosis help in case of failing (method/event/disturbance records/zgraph)
Default Password if requested for validation of settings is : AAAA
N.B. :
Every action managed by a laptop, could be done as well by the LCD front panel (only PSL and Text Editor use a computer)
5.3.1.1
Measurements control : Before starting tests, perform the following injections on secondary side of the relay : IA Currents TEST 1 Voltages IB IC VAN VBN VCN 0,2 IN 0,4 IN 0,8 IN 30 V 40 V 50 V 0 - 120 + 120 0 - 120 + 120
Control the displayed values in the relays front face (LCD) : "system/meas1" Secondary values in amplitude and phase Or primary values (control of ratios VT & CT) If selected in MiCOM S1 See Fig 3.

Control of ratios VT & CT
Control the measurement reference
W0001ENa
FIGURE 3 NB1 : Control the measurement reference (ref. angle of phase shift) in : "Measurt set up/Measurement ref." (VA by default).
The monitoring can be selected also in MiCOM S1 for providing a polling of the network parameters (I/U/P/Q/f) NB2 : In LCD : IN=3I0 After this step the mistakes on phases orders, ratios of CT, VT and wiring (Analogic input only) will be detected. See connections drawing in P44x/EN CO See LCD structure in test tools
NB3 : NB4 :
FIGURE 4 - MEASUREMENT 1/LCD MENU (see complete description of menu in chapter HI) Control of the polarisation of the protection : inject a three-phase symmetrical charge according to the following table : IA Currents TEST 2 Voltages IB IC VAN VBN VCN IN IN IN 57 V 57 V 57 V 20 -100 +140 0 -120 +120
If one phase is missing the output Fuse Failure alarm will pick up & the led general alarm in the front panel will light up (see FFU description P44x /EN AP) According to the measurement mode chosen we will get
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 (S1/Measurement setup/Measurement mode):
Measurement mode P Q Selected in S1 by:
0 + -
1 -
2 + +
3 +
W0002ENa
FIGURE 5
Mode 0
i u P u i Q i u i u i u i u
Mode 1
P u i Q u i i u i u
Mode 2
P u i Q u i i u i u
Mode 3
P u i Q u i
P3014ENa
FIGURE 6 Control the signs of values P,Q to LCD ("Measurements 2 ") settable with LCD (see figure 5) The primary side orientation remains previously points with a primary injection) See LCD Structure in chapter HI to be achieved (repeat
MEASURE'T SETUP Default Display Description Default Display Description Default Display Date and Time Default Display P-P Default Display U - I Freq Default Display Plant Reference Measurement Ref VA Measurement Ref VB Measurement Ref VA Measurement Ref IA Measurement Ref IB
Local Values Secondary
Local Values Secondary Local Values Primary
Measurt Mode 0
Measurt Mode 0 Measurt Mode 1
Remote Values Secondary
Remote Values Secondary Remote Values Primary
Demand Interval 30.00 mins
Demand Interval 30.00 mins Demand Interval 29.00 mins
P3016ENa
FIGURE 7 - MEASUREMENT SETUP/LCD MENU
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 24/54 5.3.1.2 Default simulation principle To simulate a single-phase fault
The distance protection detects a single-phase default in E if the impedance and phase of this point place it inside the characteristic. The relation of impedance and phase with the voltage and current injected is as follows : Fault Impedance Z = Vphase/Iphase ; Fault Phase = phase-shift(Vphase, Iphase) ; The Vphase voltage has to remain lower than the rated voltage value
Test of the impedance for zone 1 : I1 1 V1 I1 = 1A = line angle = 76 = Zfault = Zd (1 + k0) + Rfault
Rfault = R loop
Distance X Xlim
Z
-Rlim Resistance R Rlim
P3017ENa
FIGURE 8 - CHARACTERISTICS POINT DETERMINATION (RLIM BIPHASE & SINGLEPHASE CAN BE DIFFERENT) The angle of Characteristic is: For phase to phase: Argument of the positive impedance of the line (Z1) For phase to ground : Argument of 2Z1+Z0
Characteristic of the relay can be created and displayed with Zgraph (MiCOM Zgraph software is a tool delivered with the protection available in the CD-ROM "MiCOM P440 User " ) see the "test tools"
W0003ENa
FIGURE 9 - EXAMPLE OF ZGRAPH SCREEN (RIO FORMAT CAN BE CREATED AS WELL)
W0004ENa
FIGURE 10 - EVOLVING IMPEDANCE FROM THE LOAD AREA TO THE FINAL FAULT IMPEDANCE IN ZONE1 To simulate a default in a zone, its necessary to vary progressively the current to move the point from the load area inside the desired zone. A single-phase starting characteristic with different values of K0 can be created : (K0x = (Zx0 - Z1) /(3 Z1) (See P44x /EN AP). (In S1 there are up to four possibilities KZ1 & KZ2, KZp, KZ3/4) This solution is carried in case of the underground cable/overhead line section (KZ1 different from KZ2 = KZp = KZ3/4) where arguments between Z01 & Z02 can be very different (HV Line at 80 and cable at 45). Nevertheless the most common injection devices dont offer the possibility to manage several values of K0 (the same for ZGraph) ; so it will be necessary for an accurate control of zones limits,to generate several characteristics files (as much Rio file as KZ values ref to ZGraph user ).
W0005ENa
FIGURE 11 - SINGLE CHARACTERISTIC WITH P FORWARD ZONE Z1, Z2, Z3, Zp, Z4 R1G, R2G, R3G, RpG K01, K02, K03, K0p : limits of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 : limits in resistance of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 for single-phase fault. :ground compensation coefficient of zone 1, 2, 3, p
Zone 1, 2, 3 & P can have different limit in resistance and ground coefficient. Zones 3 et 4 (Starting zone) have the same resistance sensitivity and ground compensation coefficient. The ground compensation coefficient depends of the lines characteristic on each zone. Line angle : pg = Arg 2x Z1+Zx0 where Zx0 is the zero sequence impedance for zone x 3 and Z1 is the positive impedance. Cover of zones Different lines angles for each single-phase characteristic zone can be defined. And, following the configuration of each zone, some intersections between zone could occur.
W0006ENa
FIGURE 12
In the characteristic above, the marked parts A, B et C are intersections between several zones. The surface A is considered as being in zone 1. The surface B is not a part of the characteristic (no start element). The surface C is not a part of the starting characteristic.(New logic will be implemented in next version A4.0 for keeping fwd Z1 detection in the surface C (even with a negative fault reactance value bigger than the reverse limit X4) )
Coherency: To have a homogeneous characteristic, its necessary that the characteristics different parameters respect the equations as follows: (No blocking coherency test is provided by the internal logic control of the relay) if zone P is a forward zone : Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Zp < Z3 tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3 R1G R2G RpG R3G R1Ph R2Ph RpPh R3Ph
if zone P is a reverse zone : Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Z3 Zp < Z4 tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3 tZp < tZ4 R1G R2G R3G RpG R4G R1Ph R2Ph R3Ph RpPh R4Ph
The Z minimum value measured by the relay is: 60 mohms (Z1mini adjusted in S1, is 1ohm with CT 1Amp & 200 mohms with CT 5Amp) There is no limit for the R/X ratio, because a floating point processor is used for the R calculation & X calculation (separated dynamic range for each calculation). In consequence the limit will be given by the angle error of the CT.
For example in PUR with CT accuracy angle at 1 (for IN) it gives a R/X = 5,7 for keeping 10% of error in the X1 measurement. Limit of R: min 0 /Max 80 ohms (CT 5Amp) min 0/Max400 ohms (CT 1Amp) Limit of X: min0,2/100 ohms (CT 5Amp) min1/Max 500 ohms (CT 1Amp)
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 28/54 To simulate a two-phase fault
The two-phase fault simulation principle is the same as the one used to simulate a singlephase fault but : the voltage reference is the line to line voltage between phases, Uab for example; the reference current is the difference between the phases current, Ia - Ib for example; The fault impedance Z = (Uphase-phase/(Iphase1 - Iphase2)). the R1M point (single phase) is replaced by the R1ph point.(Biphase)
Two-phase characteristic with reverse zone P:
W0007ENa
Fault simulation With : U12 I1 1
U12 = 2 x Zd + Rfault I1
: fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle
Rfault = R loop For a triphase fault : Fault simulation With : V1 I1 1 : fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle Remark : With z graphs help a Rio format characteristic can be created. This Rio file can be loaded in a numeric injector which accept this kind of files. The active settings (distance elements) can be modified by Zgraph and relay can be upgraded with new distance parameters V1 Rfault = Zd + I1 2
For more precision refer to item: Test tools : "Z graph user "
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.1.3 Control & Test of starting characteristics
IN THIS PART TESTS ARE DESCRIBED WITH THE DEFAULT PARAMETERS (AREVA T&D EAI ) Open the file corresponding to the MiCOM characteristic. (see item :test tools/S1 user) If none change have been achieved, we get those values (Zgraph screen):
W0008ENa
FIGURE 13 Control of single-phase fault characteristic CAUTION : 1. IF DIFFERENT K0 ARE USED SEE 5.3.1.2
Energise MiCOM P440 with a healthy 3phase network (without unbalanced condition) with load (during a minimum time of 500 msec). This is for: Enabling the use of deltas algorithms Avoiding the start of SOTF logic (see SOTF logic description in P44x /EN AP) Reduce the current value to obtain a relation between V et I following the attached table (For Rlim phase-shift at 0, for Z limit phase-shift corresponding to Z1 (in multiphase default) or corresponding to 2Z1+Z0 (in single fault). Check that the tripping order (DDB: Any trip / Any Trip A/ Any Trip B/ Any Trip C see in the chapter AP section 6.3 output contact mapping, the description of DDB for models 01 to 06) is transmitted when the concerned zone time delay is issued.(For distance scheme with transmission and all distance trip logic see in P44x /EN AP). NOTE : The DDB signal any Trip A is a OR gate between Ext Trip A Int Trip A
2.
3.
4. 5.
See as well the test report model provided in chapter RS Test tools. Control also in the PSL (programmable scheme logic) the tripping orders addressing (Any Trip is linked by default to the relay 7).
By default: see the wiring diagram in chapter CO (for assignment of inputs/outputs). Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), all or part of the 8 red led in the front panel could be assigned using the PSL.

Z1
Z1 DDB #191
Latching
LED 8 DDB #069
Z2 DDB #193
Latching
LED 7 DDB #070
Z2
T2 DDB #198
NonLatching
LED 8 DDB #071
T2
P3018ENa
FIGURE 14 If Led are latched, the reset latch could be activated by a dedicated PSL, to avoid useless keyboard access: during the tests :
Any Start DDB #253 Reset Latches DDB #118
P3019ENa
FIGURE 15 Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), monitor bit control can be used in "commissioning Test/Opto/Relay/Test port status/Led status/Monitor bit1 to bit 8".Any cells from the DDB can be assigned and then displayed as 1 of the 8 bits.(See User Tools ) NB1: See LCD structure in chapter HI
COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1 Relay O/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1 64 Test port Status 00000000 Monitor Bit 1 64 Monitor Bit 1 64 64
Monitor Bit 2 65 LED Status 00000000 Monitor Bit 8 71
Monitor Bit 2 65
Monitor Bit 8 71
P3020ENa
FIGURE 16 - LCD MENU FOR A CONTROL OF INPUT/OUTPUT/ & MONITOR BITS CONTROL
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Test point B :Bi M :mono R1 B R1 M R2 B R2 M Rp B Rp M R3 B R3 M - R Lim = -R3 Z1 B Z1 M Z2 B Z2 M Zp B Zp M Z3 B Z3 M Z4 B Z4 M I,V phase shift (I is behind V) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Arg Zd Arg (2Zd+Z0) Arg Zd Arg (2Zd+Z0) Arg Zd Arg (2Zd+Z0) Arg Zd Arg (2Zd+Z0) Arg Zd Arg (2Zd+Z0)
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 31/54 Tripping time T1 T1 T2 T2 Tp Tp T3 T3 T4 T1 T1 T2 T2 Tp Tp T3 T3 T4 T4
TABLE 12 - PARAMETERS OF ZONE TO TEST (ZP CAN BE REVERSE OR FORWARD / EACH ZONES CAN BE ENABLE OR DISABLE Z IS ALWAYS ACTIVATED) NB : R3 represents the starting limit on R axis (detection sensitivity of resistive defaults The starting element for phase/ground can be superior to the phase/phase). If the reverse zone has been deactivated (Z4), it still exists a no-tripping zone (up to version A3.2 & 2.10) in the 4th quadrant below the R axis.
Zone has been deactivated (Z4)
W0009ENa
W0010ENa
If Z3 is deactivated, the resistance limits R3-R4 are not more visible in S1. NOTE : NOTE : All other characteristic point can be tested after having calculated the impedance and the phase shift between U et I. All these examples use the default settings.
W0011ENa
FIGURE 17 - EXAMPLE : AN- LIM Z1 VAN/IA = Zf =Z1(1+K01) Lim Z1=10 (si KO1=1) 40V/2A (phase shift of 70) =20 = Z1(1+1)
W0012ENa
FIGURE 18 - EXAMPLE : AB - LIMR2 VAB = 2 sin 34,72 * 35,12=40v / IAB=2A UAB/IA (in phase) =Rf=20=LimR2
W0013ENa
FIGURE 19 - EXAMPLE : ABC-LIMZ4 (REVERSE) VAN/IAN = Zf=Rf=20V/0,500mA=40=Lim Z4 with angle(VAN/IAN)=70-180=-110 NOTE : The simulator use generating transients superior to 0,2 In on currents when fault condition generation can induce mistake about the directional calculation with algorithms "Deltas". This mistake is du to simulator boxes which not always reflect the real conditions of fault appearance during the transient condition. To avoid this trouble during the starting zones checking we advice you to inhibit algorithms "Deltas" during the characteristics path by setting T1 at 50ms (beyond 40ms, algorithms "Deltas" are no more valid). It is the case about numeric injection boxes. Control in the injection device, if any possibility of DC component could be chosen to force the start of the faulty current at 0 (If not model network could be not realistic)
NOTE :
Z3
Z2
Z1
- Rlim
R1
R2
R3
-Zp
W0014ENa
FIGURE 20 - POINTS LIMIT OF THE CHARACTERISTIC TO BE TESTED (WITH ZP SELECTED AS A REVERSE ZONE)
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 34/54 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL) Control The type of distance scheme enable in S1 The DDB cells assigned for distance scheme Ref to the description feature in P44x /EN AP item 2.4 & 2.5: Settings in S1 DDB cells Internal logic in A2.10 & A3.2 REMINDER:
General equation to the tripping in distance protection since A2.9/A3.1 From A2.10/A3.2 could be found in the Chap EN AP item 2.5 Before tests, control the input presence /Output in PSL (See chapter AP section 6.2 & 6.3) linked to the selected teleaction scheme (DDB : DistCR/Dist CS/).Control as well the I/O condition change (on LCD in FAV in "system ") Output : (PSL by default "P&C ")
NOTE :
Input :(PSL by default "P&C ") WARNING :
TAKE CARE ABOUT THE CHANGEMENT OF GROUP BY OPTOS IF SELECTED IN S1 (OPTO 1 & 2 IN THAT CASE SWITCHING GROUPS BY OPTOS) IF USED FOR SWITCHING GROUP (OPTO 1 & 2 MUST BE ABSENT FROM THE PSL)
DEF. Chan Recv DDB #097
Opto Label 01 DDB #032
DEF. Chan Recv DDB #096
Signal Send (Dist + DEF)

DIST Sig Send DDB #178 DIST Sig Send DDB #207
DIST. COS DDB #099
Pick-Up
0
Relay Label 05 DDB #004
DIST. COS DDB #098
P3021ENa
1. 2. 3. 4.
From MiCOM S1, select a one of the mode in the table 5.6 in P44x /EN AP (last column). Implement the indicated default in the panel first column , The carrier signal input being activated (with TAC). Check the tripping contact have been energised at the issue of the indicated time delay indicated in the same column (With TAC). Repeat step 2 and 3 but without teleaction input and by checking the indicated time delay in the panels 2nd column (Without TAC).
Repeat step 2 and 4 for the others zones defaults by checking, whatever the teleaction input condition, the associated time delays to every zones are not modified (according to the 4th column equations) NOTE : TAC can be simulated by inverting the opto. TAC transmissions can also be checked by generating defaults according to the 3rd column. To make easy the relay I/O control condition, the LEDs affectation in PSL can be modified. Another possibility is in S1 See Testing tools (monitor bit control).
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.3 Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST If this function have been validated in S1 (See chap P44x /EN AP):
TEST : Follow the truth table in P44x /EN AP item 2.6.4 NOTE : 5.3.4 In case of TAC loss the scheme Z1X(out fail) will be applied if selected in S1
Weak infeed mode test From MiCOM S1 (If Permissive schemes validated in S1 :4 possible choices):fig winf1
FIG WINF2
Put into service the weak infeed mode (Possibility of Single pole except for P441) ; 1. 2. 3. Inhibit tripping authorisation and phase selection. Activate the teleaction input. Check : - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the tripping contact is not activated.
From MiCOM S1, validate the three-phase authorisation.
FIGURE 21 1. 2. Activate the teleaction input. Check: - the teleaction signal is activated ; - the tripping contacts closing.
From MiCOM S1, validate the minimum voltage phase selection, set under voltage threshold to 0,4 Vn, put VB = -VC = Vn, validate the single phase tripping authorisation. 1. 2. Activate the teleaction input. Check : - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the protection trips the phase A single phase.
5.3.5
Protection function during fuse failure See internal logic description in P44x /EN AP item 4.2 Relay locking (1 or 2 phases loss) 1. 2. 3. Supply MiCOM P440 with a "healthy" network with charge: Take off the A phase supply .((V0) & (/I0) creation) Check : - the fuse failure sign is activated at the end of the time delay sign; - The protection starting and tripping sign are not activated.
Relay unlocking 1. 2. Keep the A phase supply cut and make a fault (Single or two) of which the fault current (IR>3I0) is superior to the programmed threshold.(I2 or I0) Check the tripping contact is activated.
Relay locking (3 phases loss) 1. Repeat the 1 then open the 3 voltages channels without creating delta I. Check as in 3
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Outside sign : 1. Polarised the input : and check the outputs change condition :
Sign repercussions : The sign (VT fail alarm) fall if :
MCB/VTS Line DDB #101 MCB/VTS Bus DDB #100
VTS Fast DDB #263 VT Fail Alarm DDB #132

P3022ENa
Fuse_Failure = 0 and INP_FFUS_Line = 0 and (All Pole Dead Or healthy network) All Pole Dead : No current And no voltage on the line or open circuit-breaker Healthy network : Rated voltage on the line And 5.4 No zero sequence voltage and current And No starting And No pumping
Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function in setting group 1, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-specific settings. It is not considered necessary to check the boundaries of operation where cell [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to Directional Fwd or Directional Rev as the test detailed already confirms the correct functionality between current and voltage inputs, processor and outputs and earlier checks confirmed the measurement accuracy is within the stated tolerance.
5.4.1
Connect the Test Circuit Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I>1 trip occurs by viewing the relays programmable scheme logic. The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay allocations will still be applicable. If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on A phase faults should be used. If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme logic, output relay 3 should be used for the test as it operates for any trip condition. The associated terminal numbers can be found either from the external connection diagram (P44x/EN CO) or table 5. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer. Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current transformer input of the relay (terminals C3 and C2 where 1A current transformers are being used and terminals C1 and C2 for 5A current transformers).
If [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to Directional Fwd, the current should flow out of terminal C2 but into C2 if set to Directional Rev. If cell [351D: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, VCO Status] is set to Enabled (overcurrent function configured for voltage controlled overcurrent operation) or [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] has been set to Directional Fwd or Directional Rev then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C19 and C22. Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay. NOTE: If the timer does not start when the current is applied and stage 1 has been set for directional operation, the connections may be incorrect for the direction of operation set. Try again with the current connections reversed.
5.4.2
Perform the Test Ensure that the timer is reset. Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [3503: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Current Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
5.4.3
Check the Operating Time Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in table 13. NOTE: Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in table 13 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in table 13 must be multiplied by the setting of cell [3505: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 TMS] for IEC and UK characteristics or cell [3506: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time Dial] for IEEE and US characteristics. In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the relays acceptable range of operating times. For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Characteristic Operating Time at twice current setting and time multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0 Nominal (Seconds) DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse [3504: I>1 Time Delay] setting 10.03 13.50 26.67 120.00 0.64 1.42 1.46 0.46 0.26 Range (Seconds) Setting 2% 9.53 - 10.53 12.83 - 14.18 24.67 - 28.67 114.00 - 126.00 0.61 - 0.67 1.35 - 1.50 1.39 - 1.54 0.44 - 0.49 0.25 - 0.28
TABLE 13 - CHARACTERISTIC OPERATING TIMES FOR I>1
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.5 Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle
If the autoreclose function is being used, the circuit breaker trip and autoreclose cycle can be tested automatically at the application-specific settings. To test the first autoreclose cycle, set cell [0F11: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Autoreclose] to 3 Pole Test. The relay will perform a trip/reclose cycle. Repeat this operation to test the subsequent autoreclose cycles. Check all output relays used for circuit breaker tripping and closing, blocking other devices, etc. operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle.
6.
ON-LOAD CHECKS
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant being protected.
6.1
Voltage Connections Using a multimeter measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relays measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the VT & CT RATIOS menu column (see table 14). Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Voltage VAB VBC VCA VAN VBN VCN VCHECKSYNC Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) [0214: VAB Magnitude] [0216: VBC Magnitude] [0218: VCA Magnitude] [021A: VAN Magnitude] [021C: VBN Magnitude] [021E: VCN Magnitude] [022B: C/S Voltage Mag] [0A03: C/S VT Primary] [0A04: C/S VT Sec'y] Corresponding VT Ratio (in VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu) [0A01: Main VT Primary] [0A02: Main VT Sec'y]
TABLE 14 - MEASURED VOLTAGES AND VT RATIO SETTINGS
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.2 Current Connections
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each using a multimeter connected in series with corresponding relay current input. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed on site and known to be correct or by determining the direction of power flow by contacting the system control centre. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the relays measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. NOTE: Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these current transformer secondary windings.
If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in VT & CT RATIOS menu column. Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
7.
FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to Disabled. If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using cell [0608: CB CONDITION, Reset All Values]. If the required access level is not active, the relay will prompt for a password to be entered so that the setting change can be made. If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
8.
8.1
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Period It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D Protection & Control receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P440 distance relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact. If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular program. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as: the operating environment the accessibility of the site the amount of available manpower the importance of the installation in the power system the consequences of failure
8.2
Maintenance Checks Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself). BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE SAFETY SECTION AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, INSTALLATION, OF THIS MANUAL.
8.2.1
Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
8.2.2
Opto-isolators The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their energisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.5 of this chapter.
8.2.3
Output Relays The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.6 of this chapter.
8.2.4
Measurement accuracy If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of this chapter. Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 4.2.8 and 4.2.9 of this chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 44/54 8.3 Method of Repair
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found in Chapter P44x/EN PR, Problem Analysis. The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs. However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring. Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE SAFETY SECTION AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, INSTALLATION, OF THIS MANUAL. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. 8.3.1 Replacing the Complete Relay The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay. NOTE: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal block is removed.
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty, which are fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws. NOTE: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal connectors. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers fitted and open. IF THE TOP AND BOTTOM ACCESS COVERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE SMALLER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE FRONT PANEL ON THE RELAY. Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. carefully because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2 Replacing a PCB
If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to Chapter P44x/EN PR, Problem Analysis, to help determine which PCB has become faulty. To replace any of the relays PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel. Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must be removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated. Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE cases the access covers have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when the access covers are opened by more than 90, thus allowing their removal. If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do this is given in Chapter P44x/EN IT, Introduction. By slightly bending the access covers at one end, the end pivot can be removed from its socket and the access cover removed to give access to the screws that fasten the front panel to the case. The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case, one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE case has an additional two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate. Undo and remove the screws. DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE ACCESS COVERS ARE FITTED AND OPEN. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE RELAY IN ITS MOUNTING (PANEL OR CUBICLE). When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled forward and separated from the metal case. Caution should be observed at this stage because the front panel is connected to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel.
F E D C B A
Power supply board
Relay board
Input board
Transformer board
Not used
IRIG-B board
Power supply module
Input module
P0150ENa
FIGURE 22 - P441 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT)

J H G F E D

C B A
Power supply board
Relay board
Relay board
Opto board
Not used
Input board
Transformer board
Not used
IRIG-B board
Power supply module
Input module
P0151ENa
FIGURE 23 - P442 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT) The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. figure 22 and figure 23 show the PCB locations for the distance relays in size 40TE (P441) and size 60TE (P442) cases respectively. The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors. The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a rear terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are labelled from right to left. NOTE: To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical part number. table 15 lists the part numbers of each PCB type. Part Number ZN0001 001 ZN0001 002 ZN0001 003 ZN0002 001 ZN0005 001 ZN0005 002 ZN0007 001 ZN0007 002 ZN0007 003 ZN0003 003 TABLE 15 - PCB PART NUMBERS
PCB Power Supply Board (24/54V dc) (48/125V dc) (110/250V dc) Relay ETOpto Board Input ETOpto Board Opto Board IRIG-B Board (IRIG-B input only) (Fibre optic port only) (Both) Co-processor board
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board
The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all the other PCBs. Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws from the metallic screen, as shown in figure 24. Remove the metal plate. There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment moulding, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws. The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.
P3007XXa
FIGURE 24 - FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the reverse procedure, ensuring that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main processor board and all eight screws are re-fitted. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy of the applicationspecific settings is available on disk. Although this is not essential, it can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protection is out of service. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 48/54 8.3.2.2 Replacement of the IRIG-B board
Depending on the model number of the relay, the IRIG-B board may have connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications, both or not be present at all. To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay. The module is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in figure 25. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
IRIG-B
TX RX
P3008XXa
FIGURE 25 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR IRIG-B BOARD Gently pull the IRIG-B board forward and out of the case. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 26 illustrates the layout of the IRIG-B board with both IRIG-B and IEC60870-5-103 options fitted (ZN0007 003). The other versions (ZN0007 001 and ZN0007 002) use the same PCB layout but with less components fitted.
ZN0007
SERIAL No.
P3009XXa
FIGURE 26 - TYPICAL IRIG-B BOARD The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. Reconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.3 Replacement of the input module The input module comprises of two boards fastened together, the transformer board and the input board. The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible from the front of the relay, as shown in figure 27. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the front plate of the module.
Input module
Handle
P3010ENa
FIGURE 27 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR INPUT MODULE On the right-hand side of the analogue input module there is a small metal tab which brings out a handle. Grasping this handle firmly, pull the module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of two terminal blocks, one medium duty and one heavy duty. NOTE: Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it will suddenly come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks has been overcome. This is particularly important with loose relays as the metal case will need to be held firmly whilst the module is withdrawn.
Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all the relays input voltage and current transformers. The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. NOTE: The transformer and input boards within the module are calibrated together with the calibration data being stored on the input board. Therefore it is recommended that the complete module is replaced to avoid on-site recalibration having to be performed.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 50/54 8.3.2.4 Replacement of the power supply board
The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM distance relays. Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks. The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated by pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid damaging the interboard connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs towards the front of the power supply module. The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 28 illustrates the layout of the power supply board for all voltage ratings.
SERIAL No.
ZN0001
P3011XXa
FIGURE 28 - TYPICAL POWER SUPPLY BOARD Re-assemble the module with a replacement board ensuring the inter-board connectors are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are securely located in their respective holes in each PCB. Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module
Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in 8.3.2.4 above. The relay board is the one with the board with holes cut in it to allow the transformer and two large electrolytic capacitors to protrude through. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 illustrates the layout of the relay board.
1 2 3 4
PL2
ZN0002
SERIAL No.
P3012XXa
FIGURE 29 - TYPICAL RELAY BOARD Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in the relay case. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.6 Replacement of the extra relay board (P442 1 P444 only) The P442 distance relay has two additional boards to the P441 and the P444 four additional boards to the P441. Some of these boards provides extra output relays and opticallyisolated inputs. To remove it, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case. If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 and figure 30 illustrate the layout of the relay and Opto boards respectively. The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
P3013XXa
FIGURE 30 - TYPICALOPTO BOARD Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.4 Recalibration Recalibration is not usually required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of the two boards in the input module, the replacement of which directly affect the calibration. Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipment with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted to an approved service centre. 8.5 Changing the battery Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure. This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as part of the relays continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition. If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the battery, but do not replace with a new battery. 8.5.1 Instructions for Replacing The Battery Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay. Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize the battery free. Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket. NOTE: Only use a type AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the bottom access cover. 8.5.2 Post Modification Tests To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads Healthy. 8.5.3 Battery Disposal The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN RS/E33
COMMISSIONING TEST & RECORD SHEETS
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 1/10
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Product Checks With the Relay De-energised With the Relay Energised Setting Checks Application-specific function settings applied? Application-specific function settings verified? Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested? Protection Function Timing Tested? Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked On-load Checks VT wiring checked? CT wiring checked ? Final Checks
3
3 3 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 2/10
BLANK PAGE
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 3/10
1.
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date Engineer
Station
Circuit
System Frequency Front Plate Information Distance protection relay Model number Serial number Rated Current In Rated Voltage Vn Auxiliary Voltage Vx *Delete as appropriate P441/P442/P444*
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed?
Yes/No*
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.1.1
Product Checks With the Relay De-energised Visual Inspection Relay damaged? Rating information correct for installation? Case earth installed? Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No/Not checked*
1.1.1.2 1.1.1.3
Current transformer shorting contacts close? External Wiring Wiring checked against diagram? Test block connections checked?
Yes/No* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/Not tested*
1.1.1.4
Insulation resistance >100M at 500V dc
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 4/10 1.1.1.5 Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply off) Terminals 11 and 12 Contact closed? Contact resistance Terminals 13 and 14 1.1.1.6 1.1.2 1.1.2.1 Measured Auxiliary Supply With the Relay Energised Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply on) Terminals 11 and 12 Terminals 13 and 14 Contact open? Contact closed? Contact resistance 1.1.2.2 Date and Time Clock set to local time? Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? 1.1.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes Relay healthy (green) LED working? Alarm (yellow) LED working? Out of service (yellow) LED working? Trip (red) LED working? All 8 programmable LEDs working? 1.1.2.4 Field supply voltage Value measured between terminals 7 and 9 Value measured between terminals 8 and 10 Contact open?
Yes/No* ___/Not measured* Yes/No* ______V ac/dc*
Open/Closed* Open/Closed* ____/Not measured*
Yes/No* Yes/No*
Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No*
______V dc ______V dc
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.1.2.5 Input Opto-isolators Opto input 1 working? Opto input 2 working? Opto input 3 working? Opto input 4 working? Opto input 5 working? Opto input 6 working? Opto input 7 working? Opto input 8 working? Opto input 9 working? Opto input 10 working? Opto input 11 working? Opto input 12 working? Opto input 13 working? Opto input 14 working? Opto input 15 working? Opto input 16 working? Opto input 17 working? Opto input 18 working? Opto input 19 working? Opto input 20 working? Opto input 21 working? Opto input 22 working? Opto input 23 working? Opto input 24 working? 1.1.2.6 Output Relays Relay 1 Working? Contact resistance Relay 2 Working? Contact resistance Relay 3 Working? Contact resistance Relay 4 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 5 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O)
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 5/10
Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na*
Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Yes/No* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* (N/C) (N/O) ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured*
Page 6/10 Relay 6
Relay 7
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 8
Relay 9
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay 20 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 21 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 22 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 23 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 24 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 25 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 26 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 27 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 28 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 29 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 30 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 31 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O) Relay 32 Working? Contact resistance (N/C) (N/O)
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 7/10 Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured* Yes/No/na* ____/Not measured* ____/Not measured*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 8/10 1.1.2.7 Rear Communications Port Communication standard Communications established? Protocol converter tested? 1.1.2.8 Current Inputs Displayed Current
K-Bus/Modbus/ IEC608705-103* Yes/No* Yes/No/na*
Primary/Secondary*
Phase CT Ratio
[ Phase CT Primary] [ Phase CT Sec' y]

[ Mutual CT Primary] [ Mutual CT Sec' y]
_______A/na*
_______A/na* Displayed value _______A _______A _______A _______A
Mutual CT Ratio Input CT IA IB IC IM 1.1.2.9 Voltage Inputs Displayed Voltage
Applied value _______A _______A _______A _______A
Primary/Secondary*
[ Main VT Primary] [ Main VT Sec' y] [ C/S VT Primary] [ C/S VT Secondary]
_______V/na*
Main VT Ratio
_______V/na* Displayed value _______V _______V _______V _______V
C/S VT Ratio Input VT Va Vb Vc C/S Voltage
Applied value _______V _______V _______V _______V/na*
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2 1.2.1 Setting Checks Application-specific function settings applied? Application-specific programmable scheme logic settings applied? If settings applied using a portable computer and software, which software and version was used? 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 Application-specific function settings verified? Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested? Protection Function Timing Tested? Overcurrent type Applied voltage Applied current Expected operating time Measured operating time 1.2.5 1.3 Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked On-load Checks Test wiring removed? Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? On-load test performed? 1.3.1 VT wiring checked? Phase rotation correct? Displayed Voltage
[Main VT Primary] [Main VT Sec' y] [C/S VT Primary] [C/S VT Secondary]
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 9/10
Yes/No* Yes/No/na* __________________ Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No* Directional /Non-directional* _________V/na* _________A _________s _________s Yes/No/na*
(cell [3502 I>1 Direction])
Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No* Yes/No/na* Yes/No* Primary/Secondary* _______V/na*
Main VT Ratio
_______V/na* Displayed value _______V _______V _______V _______V
C/S VT Ratio Voltages Va Vb Vc C/S Voltage
Applied value _______V _______V _______V _______V/na*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Yes/No/na* Yes/No* Primary/Secondary*
[Phase CT Primary] [Phase CT Sec' y] [Mutual CT Primary] [Mutual CT Sec' y]
Page 10/10 1.3.2 CT wiring checked ? CT polarities correct ? Displayed Current
_______A/na*
Phase CT Ratio
_______A/na* Displayed value _______A _______A _______A _______A
Mutual CT Ratio Currents IA IB IC IM 1.4 Final Checks Test wiring removed ?
Applied value _______A _______A _______A _______A
Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No/na* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No* Yes/No*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked ? Circuit breaker operations counter reset ? Current counters reset ? Event records reset ? Fault records reset ? Disturbance records reset ? Alarms reset ? LEDs reset ?
Commissioning Engineer
Customer Witness
Date
Date
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN CO/E33
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P44x/EN CO/E33 Page 1/12
CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. MiCOM P441 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MiCOM P441 WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) MiCOM P441 WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) MiCOM P442 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MiCOM P442 WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) MiCOM P442 WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) MiCOM P444 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MiCOM P444 WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2) MiCOM P444 WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
BLANK PAGE
1.
23.3 1 19 HEAVY DUTY MEDIUM DUTY
155.4
8 OFF HOLES 3.4 1 2
TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
Connection Diagrams
159.0 168.0
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS 18
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
10.35 16 24
181.3 202.0
4.5
17
18
200.0 MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW. TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW. TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST
MiCOM P441 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED) 240.0 INCL. WIRING

A
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
B C D E F
MiCOM
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL

IRIG-B
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
CLEAR
READ
177.0
157.5 MAX.
TX RX
= = =
ENTER
THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
P44x/EN CO/E33
Page 3/12
206.0 30.0
SIDE VIEW
2.
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW P1
MiCOM P441 (PART)

F11 F12 F13 F14 E1 E2 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 WATCHDOG CONTACT WATCHDOG CONTACT
A B C PHASE ROTATION
P2
Page 4/12
S2
S1
MiCOM P441 (PART)

C1 E5 D1 1A 5A D4
C5
E3 E4 E6 + + + + + + + + COMMON CONNECTION DO-D7 TO-T7 0V NOT CONNECTED TEST/ DOWNLOAD 17 2-9 11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24 19,18,22,25 14 SK1 TX 1 2 RX SERIAL PORT 0V CTS 3 4 5 6 7 RTS 8 9 OPTO 8 DOWNLOAD COMMAND EXTERNAL RESET 16 OPTO 7 10 DATA ACKNOWLEDGE DATA READY 1 SK2 OPTO 6
F16 SCN
5A E7 OPTO 1 E9 OPTO 2 E10 E11 E12 OPTO 3

F17
IA
C2
P44x/EN CO/E33
NOTE 4.
C3 C4 IB D5 1A D6 D7 D8 1A 5A D11 D12 1A D14 D15 D16 D17 D18

B C PHASE ROTATION
D2 D3
E8
RELAY 4
n
C6 C7 IC OPTO 4
C8
RELAY 5 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 RELAY 14 RELAY 13 RELAY 12 RELAY 11 RELAY 6
a
D9 D10 OPTO 5
RS485 PORT F18
5A
C9 C10 IM
C11
RELAY 7
RELAY 8 RELAY 9 RELAY 10
SEE NOTE 2.
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

A
C12
D13
P2
P1
S2
S1
MiCOM P441 WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION
C19
VA C20
VB C21 VC C22 C23

V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)
Vx
AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY + + + 48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT -
F1 F2 F7 F8 F9 F10
NOTES 1.
C24
(a)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
CASE EARTH
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR. 3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED. 4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
(b)
PIN TERMINAL (P .C.B. TYPE)
POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET
3.
STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013(110V)

E 7 E 8 E 10 E 14 D 14 E 18 C 8 E 12 D 6 D 10 D 12 D 18 C 10 C 19 E 16 C 6 C 12 E 9 E 13 D 1 D 2 D 4 D 8 D 16 C 2 C 4 C 21 D 13 E 17 E 11 D 11 D 17 C 9 E 15 C 11 D 3 D 9 D 15 C 7 C 22 D 5 D 7 C 20 C 1 C 3 C 5 C 24 C 23
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F 8
F 9
F 10
F 11
F 12
F 13
F 14
F 15
F 16
F 17
F 18
E 1
E 2
E 3
E 4
E 5
E 6
Connection Diagrams
PL1
PL3
PL2
PL1
TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01 RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01
SK1
SK1
ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0005 01
SK1
SK1
*
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
PL1
PL1
PL1
PL1
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01
PL1
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0003 03
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERFACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
SK2
SK1
BATTERY
SERIAL
TEST/DOWNLOAD
B 1 B 3 B 2 B 5 B 4 B 7 B 6
PL3
B 9 B 8 B 11 B 10 B 13 B 12 B 15 B 14 B 17 B 16
B 18
P44x/EN CO/E33
Page 5/12
BOARD CONTAINS SAFETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.
4.
12 OFF HOLES 3 1 FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL 168.0 EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS 18 129.5 16 24 4.5 17 18 4 HEAVY DUTY MEDIUM DUTY 19 1 2 142.45
3.4 TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
Page 6/12
23.25
116.55
P44x/EN CO/E33
159.0
10.3
155.4
305.5
303.5 MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW. TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW. TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED) 240.0 INCL. WIRING

A B C
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
D E F G H J
MiCOM
TRIP
ALARM
IRIG-B
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
CLEAR
READ
177.0
157.5 MAX.
TX RX
= = =
ENTER
309.6
30.0
SIDE VIEW
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
5.
F1 RELAY 15 F2 F3 RELAY 16 F4 F5 RELAY 17 F6 F7

MV PLATFORM DISTANCE PROTECTION (PART)
J11 J12 J13 J14 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 RELAY 7 H18 G1 G2 SK2 G3 G4 G5 G6 RELAY 10 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 RELAY 11 RELAY 9 RELAY 8 RELAY 6 RELAY 5 RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1 WATCHDOG CONTACT WATCHDOG CONTACT
P2
P1
S2
S1
B C PHASE ROTATION
RELAY 18 F9 F10 D1 + + F16 OPTO 3 F18

J17
F8
C1 RELAY 19 OPTO 1 F13 RELAY 20 F15 F17 F14 F12 F11
5A
IA
C2
NOTE 4.
C3 C4 D4
C5
1A 5A OPTO 2 D3
D2
IB D5 1A D6 + + + + DATA READY OPTO 7 EXTERNAL RESET 16 17 2-9 11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24 19,18,22,25 14 OPTO 8 TEST/ DOWNLOAD DO-D7 TO-T7 + 0V NOT CONNECTED + + + + + + + OPTO 16 OPTO 15 OPTO 14 AC OR DC Vx AUX SUPPLY + + + COMMON CONNECTION 48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT OPTO 13 CTS RTS OPTO 12 SERIAL PORT OPTO 11 TX RX 0V OPTO 10 OPTO 9 DOWNLOAD COMMAND DATA ACKNOWLEDGE 10 1 + + COMMON CONNECTION OPTO 6
J16 SCN
Connection Diagrams
n
RELAY 21 C6 C7 D7 D8
C8
a
OPTO 4
RS485 PORT J18
b c
D9 D10 D11 D12 1A D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 C19 E7 E8 E9 C20 E10 E11 E12 C21 E14 E15 C22 E16 E17 E18 C24 C23 E13 E6 D13 OPTO 5
5A
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
IC 1A 5A
C9 C10
IM
C11
SEE NOTE 2.
C12
P2
P1
S2
S1
P442
B C PHASE ROTATION
RELAY 12 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1 J2

TX
RELAY 13
SK1
RELAY 14 G18 2nd REAR COM SK4 (OPTIONNAL) N.C. RxD 3 4 5 6 7 TxD. DTR# 0V N.C. RTS#
EIA485 -2(-ve) EIA485 -1(+ve)
VA
1 2
VB
8 9
CTS# N.C.
VC
J7 J8 J9 J10
RX
FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
NOTES 1.
IRIG-B INPUT (OPTIONAL) CASE EARTH
(a)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
(b)
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.
* POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.
4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
P44x/EN CO/E33
Page 7/12
P3909ENa
6.
STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013 (110V)

H 11 H 12 F 6 D 10 C 10 H 13 H 14 H 18 F 10 D 16 F 2 F 4 F 8 F 12 D 2 D 8 D 12 D 14 D 18 C 2 C 6 C 8 C 12 C 19 C 21 C 23 H 15 H 16 F 14 F 16 F 18 D 4
H 17
Page 8/12
J 1 F 1 F 13 F 15 D 6 C 4 D 11 C 9 C 24 D 9 C 7 F 3 F 5 F 7 F 11 F 17 D 1 D 3 D 7 D 15 D 17 C 1 C 3 C 5 C 11 C 20 C 22
J 2
J 3
J 4
J 5 F 9 D 5 D 13
J 6
J 7
J 8
J 9
J 10
J 11
J 12
J 13
J 14
J 15
J 16
J 17
J 18
H 1
H 2
H 3
H 4
H 5
H 6
H 7
H 8
H 9
H 10
P44x/EN CO/E33
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01
SK1 PL1 PL1
SK1
RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001 RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001 ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB ZN0005 001 ou ZN0017 001
SK1
SK1
*
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
PL1
*
PL1 PL1 PL1
IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 01 OPTO PCB ZN0005 002 ou ZN0017 002 (UI)
PL1
*
Rx1
G 15 G 16 E 2 E 10 E 16 G 17 G 18 E 4 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 12 E 14 E 18 E 1 E 5 E 11 E 13 E 15 E 17 E 3 E 9
*
Tx1
PL1
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
SK2
SK1
RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001
BATTERY
G 9 G 10 G 12 G 14 G 11 G 13
SERIAL
TEST/DOWNLOAD
G 1 G 8
G 2
G 3
G 4
G 5
G 6
G 7
BNC
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS
RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001
RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002
IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001
Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002
SK4
1 3 9 5 4 8 6 7 9 8 2 3 2 6 4 7 1 5
SK5 (unused) BNC
SK4
SK5 (unused)
Rx1
Tx1
BNC D-type D-type
D-type
D-type
P442
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.
P3911ENa
7.
74.9 3 1 4 168.0 4.5 EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS 18 16 17 18 24 HEAVY DUTY MEDIUM DUTY 19 1 2 TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
116.55
142.45
12 OFF HOLES Dia. 3.4
Connection Diagrams
159.0
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
62.0
155.4
129.5
408.9
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL.
406.9
MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW. TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 7 BRASS CHEESE HEAD SCREWS WITH TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST LOCK WASHERS PROVIDED.
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED) 240.0 INCL. WIRING REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
MiCOM
TRIP
IRIG-B
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
CLEAR
READ
177.0
157.5 MAX.
TX RX
16
= = =
ENTER
P44x/EN CO/E33
413.2
30.0
SIDE VIEW
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
Page 9/12
8.
N11 N12 N13 N14 WATCHDOG CONTACT WATCHDOG CONTACT
P2
P1
S2
S1
B C PHASE ROTATION
J1
D1 + OPTO 1 D2 D3 + OPTO 2
L1 RELAY 25 L2 L3 RELAY 26 L4 L5 RELAY 27 L6 L7 RELAY 28 L8 L9 RELAY 29 RELAY 30 L10 L11 L12 L13 RELAY 31 L14 L15 L16 RELAY 32 L17 L18 RELAY 16 RELAY 15 RELAY 14 RELAY 13 RELAY 12 RELAY 11 RELAY 10 RELAY 9
Page 10/12
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13

N17
C1
D4
5A
IA
C2
P44x/EN CO/E33
NOTE 4.
C3
D6
1A
+ + + + + OPTO 7 OPTO 6 OPTO 5 OPTO 4 OPTO 3
D5
N
D8
C4
D7
5A
IB
C5
D9
n
C6 C7
D12 D13
1A
D10 D11
a
J14 J15
RS485 PORT N18
C8
D14
b c
5A
IC 1A
D15 + COMMON CONNECTION OPTO 8
C9 C10
D16
J16 J17 J18 SK2
5A
D17
IM
C11
D18
N16 SCN
SEE NOTE 2.

+ + + OPTO 11 OPTO 10 E3 E4 E5
C12
OPTO 9 E2
1A DATA ACKNOWLEDGE 10 16 17 2-9 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 14 K10 K11

OPTO 15
E1
DATA READY
P444
M1 RELAY 17 RELAY 18 RELAY 19 RELAY 20 RELAY 21 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 RELAY 23 RELAY 22 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 RELAY 7 RELAY 6 RELAY 5 RELAY 4 RELAY 3 RELAY 2 RELAY 1
A
E6 E7 + + + + + OPTO 16 OPTO 14 OPTO 13 OPTO 12 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14
P2
P1
EXTERNAL RESET TEST/ DOWNLOAD DO-D7 TO-T7 0V NOT CONNECTED SK1 19,18,22,25 11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24 DOWNLOAD COMMAND
S2
S1
B C PHASE ROTATION
C19
E15 E16 E17 E18 COMMON CONNECTION + OPTO 17
TX RX 4 0V CTS RTS 5 6 7 8 9 + + + 48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT N1 N2 3
1 2
VA C20
F2 F3 + + + + + + + OPTO 24 OPTO 23 OPTO 22 OPTO 21 OPTO 20 OPTO 19 OPTO 18 F4 F5 F1
SERIAL PORT
RELAY 24 K18 2nd REAR COM SK4 (OPTIONNAL)
RELAY 8 M18
VB C21
F6 F7 F8
TX
1 2 3 4
RX FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
N.C. RxD TxD. DTR# N7 N8 N9 N10

EIA485 -1(+ve)
VC C22
F10 F9
AC OR DC Vx AUX SUPPLY
5 6 IRIG-B INPUT (OPTIONAL) 7 8 9 CASE EARTH
0V N.C. RTS# EIA485 -2(-ve) CTS# N.C.
C23
F11 F12 F13
NOTES 1.
C24
F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 COMMON CONNECTION
(a)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
(b)
POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.
3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.
4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P3910ENa
9.
N 1 M 12 M 16 L 6 C 10 L 10 L 14 D 6 C 4 L 18 D 10 M 13 M 14 M 18 L 16 D 16 L 2 L 4 L 8 L 12 D 2 D 8 D 12 D 14 D 18 C 2 C 6 C 8 C 12 C 19 C 21 C 23 M 15
M 17
N 2 D 4
N 3 L 13 L 15 D 9 D 11 C 9 C 7 C 24
N 4
N 5 M 11 L 1 L 3 L 5 L 7 L 11 L 17 D 1 D 3 D 7 D 13 D 15 D 17 C 1 C 3 C 5 C 11 C 20 C 22 L 9 D 5
N 6
N 7
N 8
N 9
N 10
N 11
N 12
N 13
N 14
N 15
N 16
N 17
N 18
M 1
M 2
M 3
M 4
M 5
M 6
M 7
M 8
M 9
M 10
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01 RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
SK1
SK1
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
UNIVERSAL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 01
SK1
SK1
Connection Diagrams
*
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
*
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01 UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 02
*
UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0017 02
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
SK2
SK1
BATTERY
J 7 J 8 J 12 K 2 J 14 J 10 J 16 K 10 K 16 F 8 J 18 K 4 K 6 K 8 E 12 K 14 K 18 F 2 F 4 F 6 K 7 F 10 F 12 J 9 J 11 J 13 J 17 K 1 K 5 K 11 K 13 K 15 K 17 F 1 F 3 F 5 F 7 J 15 K 3 K 9 F 11 F 9 F 13
SERIAL
TEST/DOWNLOAD
F 15 F 14 F 17 F 16 E 1 F 18 E 3 E 2 E 5 E 4 E 7 E 6 E 9 E 8 E 11 E 10 E 13 E 12 E 15 E 14 E 17 E 16
J 1
J 2
J 3
J 4
J 5
J 6
E 18
IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 03

RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03
RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002
IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001
Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002
Rx1 SK4
1 3 2 4 6 8 2 4 8 6 7 5 9 1 3 5 7 9
Tx1 SK5 (unused)

1 2
SK4
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SK5 (unused)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Rx1
Tx1
BNC BNC D-type D-type
D-type
D-type
BNC
P444
BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS. EXAMPLE FOR: P444114A3A????A
P44x/EN CO/E33
Page 11/12
P3912ENa
BLANK PAGE
Courrier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN GC/E44
CONFIGURATION / MAPPING
P44x/EN GC/E44 Page 2
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
This documentation version E44 is specific to the following models
Model number P441-------30-G or J P442-------30-G or J P444-------30-G or J or H
For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D Protection and Control for the relevant information.
Configuration / Mapping
This Chapter is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Part A: Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and the front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. Note: The following labels are used within the database Label V1 V2 Description Value
Main VT Rating 1 (100/110V) Checksync VT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08) 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E) 1 (100/110V)
I1 Phase CT Rating I4 Mutual CT Rating
Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the Menu Database using a G number. Part C: Internal digital signals (DDB) This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay. Part D: Menu Database for MODBUS This database defines the structure of the menu for the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part E: IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications Chapter of this Manual (P44x/EN CT).
Part F: DNP3.0 Database This database defines the structure of the menu for the DNP3.0 interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part G: Maintenance records This section of the Appendix specifies all the maintenance information that can be produced by the relay. DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL)
References Chapter IT: Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay Chapter CT: Communications: Overview of communication interfaces Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Courrier Data Base Page 1
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Comment Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * 2 0 2 2 * * 50 * 0 * * * 0 0 2 1 2 1 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 255 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Visible to LCD+Front Port Visible to Rear Port * * * Needs to be address of interface Rear Courier Address available via LCD 60 10 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Courier Data Type
SYSTEM DATA G19 G20 40004 40012 30020 30044 40020 2 G1 30002 30004 G1 G55 G55 30052 Data 30727 G9 G96 30007 30009 30011 30013 30015 G1 G22 G20 G20 40025 40026 40023 40024 G20 G20 40022 40022 G22 2 AAAA AAAA 30017 30017 G1 30016 G250 30014 G111 30012 G96 Data Data Data Data Setting Setting Setting 0 65 65 2 90 90 1 1 1 2 1 2 30010 G251 Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 30008 G9 Data Data Data 30728 G27 Data 30059 G3 Data 40021 40021 G55 No Operation Command No Operation Command 30006 30006 G1 Data 30004 G5 Data 30002 G4 Data 255 Setting Data 40020 G1 50 Setting 30051 G3 Serial Number Data 30035 G3 Model Number Data 40019 G3 AREVA Setting 32 163 1 40011 G3 MiCOM Setting 32 163 1 40001 40002 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 G19 English Setting 0 3 1
00
00
Language
00
01
Indexed String
Password
00
02
ASCII Password(4 bytes)
Description
00
04
ASCII Text(16 bytes)
Plant Reference
00
05
Model Number
00
06
Serial Number
00
08
ASCII Text(7 bytes)
Frequency
00
09
Unsigned Integer(1 byte)
Comms Level
00
0A
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Relay Address
00
0B
Plant Status
00
0C
Binary Flags(16 bits)
Control Status
00
0D
Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits)
Active Group
00
0E
CB Trip/Close
00
10
Indexed String(2)
CB Trip/Close
00
10
Indexed String(2)
Software Ref. 1
00
11
ASCII Text(16 characters)
Software Ref. 2
00
12
Opto I/P Status
00
20
Relay O/P Status
00
21
Alarm Status 1
00
22
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits)
Relay O/P Status 1
00
40
Relay O/P Status 2
00
41
Alarm Status 1
00
50
Alarm Status 2
00
51
Alarm Status 3
00
52
Access Level
00
D0
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Password Control
00
D1
Password Level 1
00
D2
ASCII Password(4 characters)
Password Level 2
00
D3
ASCII Password(4 characters)
Reserved for levels > 2
00
D4-D8 * 40100 40100 G1 0 Setting 0 249 1 0 * * * * * * * Max value is oldest record
VIEW RECORDS
01
00
Select Event
01
Unsigned Integer(2)
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data * * * * 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4 * * * * 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4 * 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4 * visible if Start DEF * visible if Trip DEF * 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2 * 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2 * 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2 * 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2 * VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS * visible if Trip LOL * visible if Start LOL * visible if Start LOL * visible if Start LOL * visible if Start LOL * visible if Start LOL * visible if Start LOL * A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N Data * * * A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N Data * * * # equal Zonr on the Trip ( Zone 1/ 2/ 3/ P/ 5) Data * * * * * * See Event sheet * * Indicates type of event See Event sheet
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End (From Record) 30103 Data 30108 40101 30113 Data * * 30113 G1 0 Data * * 40101 G1 0 Setting 0 4 1 0 * * 30109 G27 Data * * * * 30106 G12 (From Record) Data * * Data * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Menu Cell Ref
01
Cell Reference
Time & Date
01
IEC870 Time & Date
Event Text
01
Ascii String(32)
Event Value
01
Binary Flag(32)/UINT32
Select Fault
01
Unsigned Integer
Note DTL depends on event type See Event sheet of Spreadsheet Allows Fault Record to be selected
Active Group
01
Unsigned Integer
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Distance Trip Z# aided Started Phase ABCN Tripped Phase ABCN Overcurrent Start I> 1 2 3 4 Overcurrent Trip I> 1 2 3 4 Neg Seq O/C Start I2> Neg Seq O/C Trip I2> Broken Conductor Trip Earth Fault Start IN> 1 2 3 4 Earth Fault Trip IN> 1 2 3 4 Aided D.E.F Start Aided D.E.F Trip Undervoltage Start V< 1 2 Undervoltage Trip V< 1 2 Overvoltage Start V> 1 2 Overvoltage Trip V> 1 2 Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 2 Supervision VTS CTS CVTS LOL Trip SOTF/TOR Trip TOC Start TOC Trip Weak Infeed Trip ZSP Start ZSP Trip
N/A
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Data visible if Start LOL Data visible if Start LOL Data N/A G16 N/A G84 N/A G85 N/A G130 G12 G87 30126 30127 30129 30131 30133 30135 30137 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 40102 40102 G1 30153 G110 30152 G125 Data Data Manual override to s Setting Data 30036 30038 G11 30039 G27 No 30037 G27 Data Data Command 0 1 1 1 0 4 1 2 30150 G24 Data 30148 G24 Data 30146 G24 Data 30144 G24 Data 30142 G24 Data 30140 G24 Data 30138 G125 Data 30136 G125 Data 30134 G125 Data 30132 G125 Data 30130 G24 Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 30128 G24 Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 30126 G25 Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Resistor for Fault Laocator Resistor for Fault Laocator Allows Self Test Report to be selected ( (0D08=0 AND 0D07=0) AND 090D <> 0 ) ( (OD08=0 AND 0D07=1) AND 090D <> 0 ) ( 0D08 = 1 AND 090D <> 0 ) ( 0D08 = 2 AND 090D <> 0 ) 30124 30125 G87 Data * * * * 30120 30123 G12 Data * * * * Faullt Alarms/Warnings 30119 30119 G130 Data * * * * 30117 30118 G85 Data * * * * Tripped elements 1 Viliditie of Fault Report 30115 30116 G84 Data * * * * Started elements 30114 30114 G16 Data * * * * visible if Start LOL Started phases + tripped phases * * * * * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Comment Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * *
Courier Data Type
N/A
N/A
PAP Start PAP Trip USER Trip Faulted Phase
N/A
01
Binary Flags (8 Bits)
Start Elements
01
Trip Elements
01
0A
Validities
01
0B
Time Stamp
01
0C
IEC870 Time & Date
Fault Alarms
01
0D
System Frequency
01
0E
Courier Number (frequency)
Fault Duration
01
0F
Courier Number (time)
Relay Trip Time
01
10
Fault Location
01
11
Courier Number (Metres)
Fault Location
01
12
Courier Number (Miles)
Fault Location
01
13
Courier Number (ohms)
Fault Location
01
14
Courier Number(% )
IA
01
15
Courier Number (current)
IB
01
16
IC
01
17
VAN
01
1B
Courier Number(voltage)
VBN
01
1C
VCN
01
1D
Fault Resistance
01
1E
Courier Number (Ohms)
Fault in Zone
01
1F
Indexed string
Select Report
01
F0
Unsigned Integer
Report Text
01
F1
Ascii String(32)
Maint Type
01
F2
UINT32
Maint Data
01
F3
UINT32
Reset Indication
01
FF
Indexed String
MEASUREMENTS 1
02
00
IA Magnitude
02
IA Phase Angle
02
Courier Number (angle)
30200 30702 30202
30201 30703 30202
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
IB Magnitude
02
IB Phase Angle
02
30203 30704 30205
30204 30705 30205
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
IC Magnitude
02
IC Phase Angle 30212 30214 30218 30220 30222 30223 G24 Data * * * * 30221 G24 Data * * * * 30219 G24 Data * * * * 30214 G30 Data * * * * 30213 G24 Data * * * *
02
30206 30706 30208
30207 30707 30208
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
IN Derived Mag
02
IN Derived Angle
02
0A
I1 Magnitude
02
0D
I2 Magnitude
02
0E
I0 Magnitude
02
0F
VAB Magnitude
02
14
Courier Number (voltage)
VAB Phase Angle
02
15
30230 30708 30232
30231 30709 30232
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
VBC Magnitude
02
16
VBC Phase Angle
02
17
30233 30710 30235
30234 30711 30235
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
VCA Magnitude
02
18
VCA Phase Angle 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30253 30255 30256 G24 30254 G24 30252 G24 30250 G30 30249 G24 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data G30 30268 30269 G24 G30 Data Data Data 30247 G30 Data 30246 G24 Data 30244 G30 Data 30243 G24 Data 30241 G30 Data 30240 G24 Data
02
19
30236 30712 30238
30237 30713 30238
G24 G24 G30
Data Data Data
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
VAN Magnitude
02
1A
VAN Phase Angle
02
1B
VBN Magnitude
02
1C
VBN Phase Angle
02
1D
VCN Magnitude
02
1E
VCN Phase Angle
02
1F
VN Derived Mag
02
22
VN Derived Ang
02
23
V1 Magnitude
02
24
V2 Magnitude
02
25
V0 Magnitude
02
26
Frequency
02
2A
C/S Voltage Mag 30266 30267 30269 30266
02
2B
30263 30721 30264
30263 30721 30265
G30 G30 G24
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
C/S Voltage Ang
02
2C
IM Magnitude
02
2F
IM Angle
02
30
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Data * 30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315 30318 30321 30324 30326 G29 Data * * * 30323 G29 Data * * * * * 30320 G29 Data * * * * 30317 G29 Data * * * * 30314 G29 Data * * * * 30311 G29 Data * * * * 30308 G29 Data * * * * 30305 G29 Data * * * * 30302 G29 * * * * * * *
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 30270 30270 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G30 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * *
Courier Data Type
Slip Frequency
02
31
MEASUREMENTS 2
03
00
A Phase Watts
03
Courier Number (Power)
B Phase Watts
03
C Phase Watts
03
A Phase VArs
03
Courier Number (VAr)
B Phase VArs
03
C Phase VArs
03
A Phase VA
03
Courier Number (VA)
B Phase VA
03
Courier Number (VA)
C Phase VA
03
Courier Number (VA)
3 Phase Watts
03
0A
3 Phase VArs
03
0B
3 Phase VA 30336 30338 G29 Data
03
0C
Courier Number (VA)
30327 30714 30330 30717 30333
30329 30716 30332 30719 30335
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29
Data Data Data Data Data
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
Zero Seq Power
03
0D
Courier Number (VA)
3Ph Power Factor
03
0E
Courier Number (decimal)
APh Power Factor 30341 30342 30343 30346 30349 30352 40103 40103 G1 0 30354 G29 Data Command 0 1 30351 G29 Data 30348 G29 Data 30345 G29 Data 30342 G30 Data 30341 G30 Data
03
0F
30339 30720 30340
30339 30720 30340
G30 G30 G30
Data Data Data
* * * * * * * * * 1 * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * 3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand 3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand 3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand 3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
BPh Power Factor
03
10
CPh Power Factor
03
11
3Ph W Fix Demand
03
16
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
03
17
3Ph W Peak Demand
03
20
3Ph VArs Peak Demand
03
21
Reset Demand
03
25
MEASUREMENTS 3 30434 G11 40104 40104 G11 30434 G30
04
0 Data Command 0 1 1 1
Thermal State
04
Courier Number (percentage)
* * *
* * *
* * *
* * *
Reset Thermal
04
Indexed String
CB CONDITION 30600 30601 30602 30603 30600 30601 30602 30604
06
00 G1 G1 G1 G125 Data Data Data Data
CB A Operations
06
Unsigned Integer
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Number of Circuit Breaker Operations Number of Circuit Breaker Operations Number of Circuit Breaker Operations Broken Current A Phase
CB B Operations
06
Unsigned Integer
CB C Operations
06
Unsigned Integer
Total IA Broken
06
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 * * N/A 40300 42049 40303 42052 G12 G12 Setting Setting 0 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Front Panel Menu only Front Panel Menu only G37 G17 G59 G37 40305 40305 G37 Enabled 30091 30091 G59 30090 30090 G17 Data Data Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * G53 G61 G90 G62 G90 G98 40407 40406 40405 40405 40406 40407 40404 40404 40403 40403 G61 G90 G62 G90 G98 40402 40402 G53 No Operation Select via Menu Group 1 No Operation Group 1 No Operation Command Setting Setting Command Setting Command 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40304 40304 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Check Sync Window Manual Close Delay * * * * No of Autoreclosures Reset No of Autoreclosures * No of Autoreclosures * Reset All Values * Circuit Breaker operating time * Broken Current C Phase * Broken Current B Phase
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 30605 30607 30609 G11 30611 30612 G11 * G99 40201 40202 40203 40206 40208 G37 G37 40205 40205 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 40204 40204 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 40209 G35 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 40207 G35 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 40203 G2 10 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * 40202 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 * * 40201 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 * * 40200 40200 G99 Disabled Setting 0 7 1 2 * * * 40141 40141 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * 30612 G1 Data * * 30611 G1 Data * * 40140 40140 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * 30609 G25 Data * * 30608 G125 Data * * 30606 G125 Data * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Total IB Broken
06
Total IC Broken
06
CB Operate Time
06
Reset CB Data
06
Indexed String
Total 1P Reclosures
06
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Total 3P Reclosures
06
0A
Reset Total A/R
06
0B
Indexed String
CB CONTROL
07
00
CB Control by
07
Indexed String
Manual Close Pulse Time
07
Courier Number (Time)
Trip Pulse Time
07
Man Close Delay
07
Healthy Window
07
C/S Window
07
A/R Single Pole
07
Indexed String
A/R Three Pole
07
Indexed String
DATE and TIME
08
00
Date/Time
08
IEC870 Time & Date
N/A
Date 35807 Time 0,5 IRIG-B Sync
N/A
08
Indexed String
IRIG-B Status
08
ASCII String
Battery Status
08
Indexed String
Battery Alarm
08
Indexed String
CONFIGURATION
09
00
Restore Defaults
09
Indexed String
Setting Group
09
Indexed String
Active Settings
09
Indexed String
Save Changes
09
Indexed String
Copy From
09
Indexed String
Copy to
09
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Invisible unvisible Disabled 40440 Disabled 11 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 31 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * 0 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Disturbance recorder 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G37 40408 40408 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G131 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G80 G54 G80 G80 G80 G231 G37 G80 Invisible Secondary Visible Visible Invisible Invisible Invisible Visible Visible Visible 40424 40424 G37 Disabled 40423 40423 G37 Disabled 40422 40422 G37 Disabled 40421 40421 G37 Enabled 40420 40420 G37 Enabled 40419 40419 G37 Disabled 40418 40418 G37 Enabled 40417 40417 G131 Disabled 40416 40416 G37 Disabled 40415 40415 G37 Disabled 40414 40414 G37 Disabled 40413 40413 G37 Enabled 40412 40412 G37 Enabled 40411 40411 G37 Disabled 40410 40410 G37 Disabled 40409 40409 G37 Disabled Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G37 Enabled Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Setting Group 1
09
Indexed String
Setting Group 2
09
Indexed String
Setting Group 3
09
Indexed String
Setting Group 4
09
0A
Indexed String
Dist. Protection
09
0D
Indexed String
Power-Swing
09
10
Indexed String
Back-Up I>
09
11
Indexed String
Neg Sequence O/C
09
12
Indexed String
Broken Conductor
09
13
Indexed String
Earth Fault Prot
09
14
Indexed String
Aided D.E.F
09
15
Indexed String
Volt Protection
09
16
Indexed String
CB Fail & I<
09
17
Indexed String
Supervision
09
18
Indexed String
System Checks
09
19
Indexed String
Thermal Overload
09
1A
Indexed String
Internal A/R
09
24
Indexed String
Input Labels
09
25
Indexed String
Output Labels
09
26
Indexed String
CT & VT Ratios
09
28
Indexed String
Event Recorder
09
29
Indexed String
Disturb Recorder
09
2A
Indexed String
Measure't Setup
09
2B
Indexed String
Comms Settings
09
2C
Indexed String
Commission Tests
09
2D
Indexed String
Setting Values
09
2E
Indexed String
Control Input
09
2F
Indexed String
Ctrl I/P Config
09
35
Indexed String
Ctrl I/P Labels
09
36
Indexed String
Direct Acces
09
39
Indexed String
InterMicom
09
40
Indexed String
LCD Contrast
09
FF
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Setting Setting Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF G27 G27 G27 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT * * * * * * Label M1=0A01/0A02 Label V2=C/S VT Rating/110 * * Label V1=1 *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End * 40500 40502 40503 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 G302 G89 * G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF 40526 G37 No 40525 G37 No Command Command Setting 0 40524 G37 No Command 0 40523 G37 No Command 0 40522 G37 No Command 0 1 40521 G37 No Command 0 1 40520 G37 No Command 0 1 1 No Command 0 1 1 No Command 0 1 1 1 No Command 0 1 1 1 40511 40511 G89 Line Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 40510 40510 G302 A-N Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 40509 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * 40508 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * 40507 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * 40506 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * 40505 G2 110 Setting 80*V2 140*V2 1*V2 2 * * 40504 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * 40502 G2 110 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1 2 * * 40501 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
CT AND VT RATIOS
0A
00
Main VT Primary
0A
Courier Number (Voltage)
Main VT Sec'y
0A
C/S VT Primary
0A
C/S VT Secondary
0A
Phase CT Primary
0A
Courier Number (Current)
Check Sync VT Secondary Label M2=0A03/0A04 I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Phase CT Sec'y
0A
Mcomp CT Primary
0A
0D
Mcomp CT Sec'y
0A
0E
Label NM1 = 0A08^1001 Label M4=0A07/0A08 Label I4=Mcomp CT Rating Label M7=0A0D/0A0F Mutua compensation CT Secondary Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
C/S Input
0A
0F
Indexed String
Main VT Location
0A
10
Indexed String
RECORD CONTROL
0B
00
Clear Events
0B
Indexed String
Clear Faults
0B
Indexed String
Clear Maint
0B
Indexed String
Alarm Event
0B
Indexed String
Relay O/P Event
0B
Indexed String
Opto Input Event
0B
Indexed String
System Event
0B
Indexed String
Fault Rec Event
0B
Indexed String
Maint Rec Event
0B
Indexed String
Protection Event
0B
0A
Indexed String
DDB element 31 - 0
0B
0B
Binary Flag (32 bits)
DDB element 63 - 32
0B
0C
DDB element 95 - 64
0B
0D
DDB element 127 - 96
0B
0E
0B
0F
0B
10
0B
11
0B
12
0B
13
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 31 1 0 1 32 0 1 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 32 1 0 1 32 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40600 40601 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 40605 40606 40604 40603 40603 40604 40605 40606 40602 40602 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 40601 G2 40600 G2 1.5 33.3 Single VA VB VC VN Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 10.5 100 1 10 10 10 10 0.01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * 0 1 32 1 * * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT 0 1 32 Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 40545 40547 40549 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 G11 No G27 0x7FFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF G27 0xFFFFFFFF Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G27 0xFFFFFFFF Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 1 * * * *
Courier Data Type
0B
14
0B
15
0B
16
0B
17
0B
18
0B
19
0B
1A
0B
1B
0B
1C
0B
1D
0B
1E
0B
1F
0B
20
0B
21
0B
22
0B
23
0B
24
0B
25
0B
26
0B
27
0B
28
0B
29
0B
2A
Clear Dist Recs
0B
30
Indexed String
DISTURB RECORDER
0C
00
Duration
0C
Trigger Position
0C
Trigger Mode
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 1
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 2
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 3
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 4
0C
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 1 1 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 0 0 Setting Setting Setting Relay 12 No Trigger G32 40636 40637 G66 G32 Relay 13 No Trigger Relay 14 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model * * DDB Size different for each model * * DDB Size different for each model * * DDB Size different for each model * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 40637 40636 40635 40635 40634 40634 40633 40633 G32 G66 40632 40632 G66 40631 40631 G32 Relay 11 No Trigger 40630 40630 G66 No Trigger 40629 40629 G32 Relay 10 40628 40628 G66 No Trigger Setting Setting 40627 40627 G32 Relay 9 Setting 0 40626 40626 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 40625 40625 G32 Relay 8 Setting 0 40624 40624 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 40623 40623 G32 Relay 7 Setting 0 DDB Size 40622 40622 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 40621 40621 G32 Relay 6 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 40620 40620 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 40619 40619 G32 Relay 5 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 40618 40618 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * 40617 40617 G32 Relay 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40616 40616 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 40615 40615 G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40614 40614 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 40613 40613 G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40612 40612 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 40611 40611 G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40610 40610 G31 IN Setting 0 10 1 2 * * 40609 40609 G31 IC Setting 0 10 1 2 * * 40608 40608 G31 IB Setting 0 10 1 2 * * 40607 40607 G31 IA Setting 0 10 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Analog Channel 5
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 6
0C
Indexed String
Analog Channel 7
0C
0A
Indexed String
Analog Channel 8
0C
0B
Indexed String
Digital Input 1
0C
0C
Indexed String
Input 1 Trigger
0C
0D
Indexed String
Digital Input 2
0C
0E
Indexed String
Input 2 Trigger
0C
0F
Indexed String
Digital Input 3
0C
10
Indexed String
Input 3 Trigger
0C
11
Indexed String
Digital Input 4
0C
12
Indexed String
Input 4 Trigger
0C
13
Indexed String
Digital Input 5
0C
14
Indexed String
Input 5 Trigger
0C
15
Indexed String
Digital Input 6
0C
16
Indexed String
Input 6 Trigger
0C
17
Indexed String
Digital Input 7
0C
18
Indexed String
Input 7 Trigger
0C
19
Indexed String
Digital Input 8
0C
1A
Indexed String
Input 8 Trigger
0C
1B
Indexed String
Digital Input 9
0C
1C
Indexed String
Input 9 Trigger
0C
1D
Indexed String
Digital Input 10
0C
1E
Indexed String
Input 10 Trigger
0C
1F
Indexed String
Digital Input 11
0C
20
Indexed String
Input 11 Trigger
0C
21
Indexed String
Digital Input 12
0C
22
Indexed String
Input 12 Trigger
0C
23
Indexed String
Digital Input 13
0C
24
Indexed String
Input 13 Trigger
0C
25
Indexed String
Digital Input 14
0C
26
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Not Used G66 G32 40668 40669 G66 G32 No Trigger Not Used No Trigger Not Used Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 0 DDB Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 1 0 DDB Size 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 2 1 2 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model 0 2 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 2 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G66 40638 40638 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 40668 40669 40667 40666 40666 40667 40665 40665 G32 40664 40664 G66 40663 40663 G32 40662 40662 G66 No Trigger Not Used No Trigger 40661 40661 G32 Not Used 40660 40660 G66 No Trigger 40659 40659 G32 Not Used 40658 40658 G66 No Trigger 40657 40657 G32 Not Used 40656 40656 G66 No Trigger 40655 40655 G32 Not Used 40654 40654 G66 No Trigger 40653 40653 G32 Not Used 40652 40652 G66 No Trigger 40651 40651 G32 Not Used 40650 40650 G66 No Trigger 40649 40649 G32 Not Used 40648 40648 G66 No Trigger 40647 40647 G32 Not Used 40646 40646 G66 No Trigger 40645 40645 G32 Not Used 40644 40644 G66 No Trigger 40643 40643 G32 Not Used 40642 40642 G66 No Trigger 40641 40641 G32 Not Used 40640 40640 G66 No Trigger 40639 40639 G32 Not Used Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G66 No Trigger Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Input 14 Trigger
0C
27
Indexed String
Digital Input 15
0C
28
Indexed String
Input 15 Trigger
0C
29
Indexed String
Digital Input 16
0C
2A
Indexed String
Input 16 Trigger
0C
2B
Indexed String
Digital Input 17
0C
2C
Indexed String
Input 17 Trigger
0C
2D
Indexed String
Digital Input 18
0C
2E
Indexed String
Input 18 Trigger
0C
2F
Indexed String
Digital Input 19
0C
30
Indexed String
Input 19 Trigger
0C
31
Indexed String
Digital Input 20
0C
32
Indexed String
Input 20 Trigger
0C
33
Indexed String
Digital Input 21
0C
34
Indexed String
Input 21 Trigger
0C
35
Indexed String
Digital Input 22
0C
36
Indexed String
Input 22 Trigger
0C
37
Indexed String
Digital Input 23
0C
38
Indexed String
Input 23 Trigger
0C
39
Indexed String
Digital Input 24
0C
3A
Indexed String
Input 24 Trigger
0C
3B
Indexed String
Digital Input 25
0C
3C
Indexed String
Input 25 Trigger
0C
3D
Indexed String
Digital Input 26
0C
3E
Indexed String
Input 26 Trigger
0C
3F
Indexed String
Digital Input 27
0C
40
Indexed String
Input 27 Trigger
0C
41
Indexed String
Digital Input 28
0C
42
Indexed String
Input 28 Trigger
0C
43
Indexed String
Digital Input 29
0C
44
Indexed String
Input 29 Trigger
0C
45
Indexed String
Digital Input 30
0C
46
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * G71 255 40800 1 1 40801 G38v G38m G38d G39 G39 40803 40803 G39 None None 10 G21 G37 G210 G208 G1 G1 RS485 Disabled Disabled 19200 bits/s 40802 40802 G38 19200 bits/s 19200 bits/s Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data 40801 G2 15 Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Setting 0 Setting 0 40800 G1 1 Setting 0 247 255 65534 30 2 1 1 2 2 60 1 1 2 Setting 0 255 Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Build = Modbus Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = DNP Build = Modbus Build = DNP Build = IEC60870-5-103 Fibre Optic board fitted Build = DNP Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = Courier Build = Modbus Build = IEC60870-5-103 Build = DNP * * * Local Measurement Values Remote Measurement Values Measurement Phase Reference * * MEASUREMENT SETTINGS * DDB Size different for each model * * DDB Size different for each model *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 * G52 G54 G54 G56 G1 G2 G97 G51 40707 40707 G51 Distance Setting 0 2 1 2 40706 40706 G97 Kilometres Setting 0 1 1 2 40705 40705 G2 30 Setting 1 99 1 2 * 40704 40704 G1 0 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 40703 40703 G56 VA Setting 0 5 1 1 * * 40702 40702 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 40701 40701 G54 Secondary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 40700 40700 G52 Description Setting 0 6 1 2 * * * 40674 40674 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 40673 40673 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40672 40672 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 40671 40671 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * 40670 40670 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Input 30 Trigger
0C
47
Indexed String
Digital Input 31
0C
48
Indexed String
Input 31 Trigger
0C
49
Indexed String
Digital Input 32
0C
4A
Indexed String
Input 32 Trigger
0C
4B
Indexed String
MEASURE'T SETUP
0D
00
Default Display
0D
Indexed String
Local Values
0D
Indexed String
Remote Values
0D
Indexed String
Measurement Ref
0D
Indexed String
Measurement Mode
0D
Unsigned Integer
Demand Interval
0D
Courier Number (Time - Minutes)
Distance Unit
0D
Indexed String
Fault Location
0D
Indexed String
COMMUNICATIONS
0E
00
RP1 Protocol
0E
Indexed String
RP1 Address
0E
Unsigned integer
RP1 Address
0E
Unsigned integer
RP1 Address
0E
Unsigned integer
RP1 Address
0E
Unsigned integer
RP1 InactivTimer
0E
Courier Number (Time-minutes)
Baud Rate
0E
Indexed String
Baud Rate
0E
Indexed String
Baud Rate
0E
Indexed String
Parity
0E
Indexed String
Parity
0E
Indexed String
Measure't Period
0E
Physical Link
0E
Indexed String
Time Sync
0E
Indexed String
CS103 Blocking
0E
Indexed String
RP1 Status
0E
0B
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G207 G206 G38m G1 19200 bits/s G1 IEC60870 FT1.2 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G1 K Bus Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
RP1 Port Config
0E
0C
Indexed String
RP1 Comms Mode
0E
0D
Indexed String
RP1 Baud Rate
0E
0E
Indexed String
ETHERNET COMMS 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 0 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 15 2 10 0 900 Broadcast 0x00000000h 0x00000000h 00.00.00.00 00.00 00.00 000.000.000.000 Not Used 0 G220 Copper Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * * Setting Setting 0 Setting 0 Setting 0 Setting 0 2 Setting 1 30 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 48 57 1 Setting 48 57 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 48 57 1 1 Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * * * * * * Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * * * * * * * * Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * Setting 0 4 1 1 * * * * Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Build = UCA2.0 Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * Build = UCA2.0 Setting 48 57 1 1 * * * * Build = UCA2.0
0E
1F
(Sub-heading)
IP Address
0E
20
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Subnet Mask
0E
21
Number of Routes
0E
24
Router Address 1
0E
25
Target Network 1
0E
26
Router Address 2
0E
27
Target Network 2
0E
28
Router Address 3
0E
29
Target Network 3
0E
2A
Router Address 4
0E
2B
Target Network 4
0E
2C
Inactivity Timer
0E
2D
Default Pass Lvl
0E
2E
GOOSE Min Cycle
0E
2F
GOOSE Min Cycle
0E
30
GOOSE Increment
0E
31
GOOSE Startup
0E
32
Indexed String
GOOSE VIP Status
0E
34
NSAP Address
0E
36
ASCII Text
Transport Select
0E
37
ASCII Text
Session Select
0E
38
ASCII Text
Present. Select
0E
39
ASCII Text
AP Title
0E
3A
ASCII Text
AE Qual. Used
0E
3B
Indexed String
AE Qualifier
0E
3C
Ethernet Media
0E
3D
Indexed String
GOOSE STATISTICS
0E
3F
(Sub Heading) 0x00000000h Data
Enrolled Flags
0E
40
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Our IED No Action No Action Setting * G71 G204 G205 G206 255 15 G38 G38m 19200 bits/s Setting Setting Setting G206 IEC60870 FT1.2 Setting 0 0 1 0 G205 EIA232 (RS232) Setting 0 G204 Data 1 1 255 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 G71 Courier Data * * * * * * * * G27 G27 G27 30722 30722 G124 Data Data Data Data Data G32 40850 40849 G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB Size different for each model * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF Setting Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Our Tx Msg Cnt.
0E
41
Our Rx Msg Cnt.
0E
42
Our DDB Changes
0E
43
Our Last Seq Tx
0E
44
Our Last Msg Tx
0E
45
Our Msg Rjct Cnt
0E
46
IED View Select
0E
50
IED Recvd Msgs
0E
51
IED Last Seq Rx
0E
52
IED Last Msg Rx
0E
53
IED Missed Msgs
0E
54
IED Missed Chngs
0E
55
IED Timeouts
0E
56
IED Stats Reset
0E
5F
Indexed String
Loopback Mode
0E
60
Indexed String
Reload Mode
0E
61
Indexed String
REAR PORT2 (RP2)
0E
80
(Sub Heading)
RP2 Protocol
0E
81
Indexed String
RP2 Card Status
0E
84
Indexed String
RP2 Port Config
0E
88
Indexed String
RP2 Comms Mode
0E
8A
Indexed String
RP2 Address
0E
90
RP2 InactivTimer
0E
92
Courier Number (time-minutes)
RP2 Baud Rate
0E
94
Indexed String
COMMISSION TESTS
0F
00
Opto I/P Status
0F
Relay Status 1
0F
Relay Status 2
0F
Test Port Status
0F
LED Status
0F
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits)
Monitor Bit 1
0F
Unsigned Integer
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data G27 G27 30758 30760 G27 G27 Data Data Data Data 0 4 1 2 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 16383 1 2 * * * * * * Visible by Courier and Modbus N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 30757 30759 30755 30753 30754 30756 30751 30752 G27 30749 30750 G27 30747 30748 G27 30745 30746 G27 30743 30744 G27 30741 30742 G27 30739 30740 G27 30737 30738 G27 30735 30736 G27 30733 30734 G27 30731 30732 G27 30729 30730 G27 * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * Visible by Courier and Modbus * * * * 0924=1 AND 0F0E=2 0 4,295E+09 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * * DDB Size different for each model 0 DDB Size 1 DDB Size different for each model
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G32 40851 40850 G32 G32 G32 G32 G32 G32 G204 G9 G9 G93 G94 G36 N/A N/A N/A 30727 30728 G27 30725 30726 G27 30723 30724 G27 40865 40865 G36 No Operation 40864 40864 G94 No Operation 40863 40863 G93 No Operation 40861 40862 G9 0 40859 40860 G9 0 40858 40858 G204 Disabled 40857 40856 G32 Relay 8 40856 40855 G32 Relay 7 40855 40854 G32 Relay 6 40854 40853 G32 Relay 5 40853 40852 G32 Relay 4 40852 40851 G32 Relay 3 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G32 Relay 2 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Monitor Bit 2
0F
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 3
0F
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 4
0F
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 5
0F
0A
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 6
0F
0B
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 7
0F
0C
Unsigned Integer
Monitor Bit 8
0F
0D
Unsigned Integer
Test Mode
0F
0E
Indexed String
Test Pattern 1
0F
0F
Test Pattern 2
0F
10
Contact Test
0F
11
Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Test LEDs
0F
12
Autoreclose Test
0F
13
Binary Flags (8bits) Indexed String Indexed String
DDB element 31 - 0
0F
20
DDB element 63 - 32
0F
21
Relay Visible by Courier and Modbus Opto Visible by Courier and Modbus
DDB element 95 - 64
0F
22
0F
23
0F
24
0F
25
0F
26
0F
27
0F
28
0F
29
0F
2A
0F
2B
0F
2C
0F
2D
0F
2E
0F
2F
0F
30
0F
31
0F
32
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40151 G88 40153 G88 40156 G88 40159 G88 40161 G88 40163 G88 40166 G88 40169 40170 G11 40172 40169 40171 40172 40168 40168 40167 G35 G88 G1 G35 G11 40165 40165 G88 40164 G35 0,1 Alarm Disabled 0,2 Alarm Disabled 10 3600 No 40162 40162 G88 Alarm Disabled 40161 G1 20 40160 40160 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command 40159 G1 10 Setting 1 0 1 0 0,005 0 0,005 0 0 0 0 40158 40158 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 40157 G35 2000 Setting 1*NM1 40155 40155 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 40154 G35 1000 Setting 1*NM1 40152 40152 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 40151 G2 2 Setting 1 2 0,1 2 2 2 1 25000*NM1 1*NM1 1 10000 1 10000 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 9999 9999 1 1 1 1 1 1 0,001 1 0,001 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Broken Current Index Broken Current to cause maintenance alarm IX Maintenance Alarm Broken Current to cause lockout alarm IX Maintenance Lockout Circuit Breaker Trips to cause maintenance alarm * * * * * * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 30785 30786 G27 Data 30783 30784 G27 Data * 30781 30782 G27 Data * * 30779 30780 G27 Data * * 30777 30778 G27 Data * * 30775 30776 G27 Data * * 30773 30774 G27 Data * * 30771 30772 G27 Data * * 30769 30770 G27 Data * * 30767 30768 G27 Data * * 30765 30766 G27 Data * * 30763 30764 G27 Data * * 30761 30762 G27 Data * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
0F
33
0F
34
0F
35
0F
36
0F
37
0F
38
0F
39
0F
3A
0F
3B
0F
3C
0F
3D
0F
3E
0F
3F
CB MONITOR SETUP
10
00
Broken I^
10
Courier Number (Decimal)
I^ Maintenance
10
Indexed String
I^ Maintenance
10
25000*NM1 1*NM1
I^ Lockout
10
Indexed String
I^ Lockout
10
N CB Ops Maint
10
Indexed String
N CB Ops Maint
10
Unsigned Integer
N CB Ops Lock
10
Indexed String
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for maintenance alarm Circuit Breaker Trips to cause lockout alarm Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for lockout alarm
N CB Ops Lock
10
Unsigned Integer
CB Time Maint
10
0A
Indexed String
CB Time Maint
10
0B
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause maintenance alarm Circuit Breaker Operating time for maintenance alarm Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause lockout alarm Circuit Breaker Operating time for lockout alarm Excessive fault frequency Excessive Fault Frequency Counter Excessive Fault Frequency Time Reset Maintenance Alarms
CB Time Lockout
10
0C
Indexed String
CB Time Lockout
10
0D
Fault Freq Lock
10
0E
Indexed String
Fault Freq Count
10
0F
Unsigned Integer
Fault Freq Time
10
10
Lockout Reset
10
11
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting * G200 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 40927 40928 40926 40925 40925 40926 40927 40928 40924 40924 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 40923 40923 G201 40922 40922 G201 24-27V 24-27V 24-27V 24-27V 24-27V 24-27V 24-27V 40921 40921 G201 24-27V 40920 40920 G201 24-27V 40919 40919 G201 24-27V 40918 40918 G201 24-27V Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 40917 40917 G201 24-27V Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40916 40916 G201 24-27V Setting 0 40915 40915 G201 24-27V Setting 0 40914 40914 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 40913 40913 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 40912 40912 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 40911 40911 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 40910 40910 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 40909 40909 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 40908 40908 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * 40907 40907 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40906 40906 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40905 40905 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * 40904 40904 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * 40903 40903 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * 40902 40902 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * 40901 40901 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * * 40900 40900 G200 24-27V Setting 0 5 1 2 * * * * * * * 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * * Manual Close Reset Delay 0 1 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G81 40173 40173 40174 40174 G2 5 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G81 CB Close Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Reset Lockout by
10
12
Indexed String
Man Close RstDly
10
13
UNIVERSAL INPUTS
11
Global threshold
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 1
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 2
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 3
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 4
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 5
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 6
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 7
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 8
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 9
11
0A
Indexed String
Opto Input 10
11
0B
Indexed String
Opto Input 11
11
0C
Indexed String
Opto Input 12
11
0D
Indexed String
Opto Input 13
11
0E
Indexed String
Opto Input 14
11
0F
Indexed String
Opto Input 15
11
10
Indexed String
Opto Input 16
11
11
Indexed String
Opto Input 17
11
12
Indexed String
Opto Input 18
11
13
Indexed String
Opto Input 19
11
14
Indexed String
Opto Input 20
11
15
Indexed String
Opto Input 21
11
16
Indexed String
Opto Input 22
11
17
Indexed String
Opto Input 23
11
18
Indexed String
Opto Input 24
11
19
Indexed String
Opto Input 25
11
1A
Indexed String
Opto Input 26
11
1B
Indexed String
Opto Input 27
11
1C
Indexed String
Opto Input 28
11
1D
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G201 G201 G201 G201 G8 G237 0 * G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 40974 40973 40972 40971 40970 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 40969 G203 40968 G203 40967 G203 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation 40966 G203 No operation 40965 G203 No operation 40964 G203 No operation Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40963 G203 No operation Command 0 40962 G203 No operation Command 0 40961 G203 No operation Command 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 40960 G203 No operation Command 0 2 40959 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 40958 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 40957 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 40956 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 40955 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40954 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40953 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 40952 G203 No operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * * 40950 40951 G202 0x00000000 Setting 0x00000000 32 1 2 * * * * * * * 1 1 2 * * * * 40935 40935 G1 PLAT_OPTO_CHARSetting 40933 40934 G8 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 FFFFFFFF 1 2 * * * * visible if (bit14 of model number = J) 40932 40932 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 40931 40931 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 40930 40930 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 40929 40929 G201 24-27V Setting 0 4 1 2 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Opto Input 29
11
1E
Indexed String
Opto Input 30
11
1F
Indexed String
Opto Input 31
11
20
Indexed String
Opto Input 32
11
21
Indexed String
Opto Filter Cntl
11
50
Characteristic
11
80
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String
CONTROL INPUTS
12
Ctrl I/P Status
12
Control Input 1
12
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Control Input 2
12
Indexed String
Control Input 3
12
Indexed String
Control Input 4
12
Indexed String
Control Input 5
12
Indexed String
Control Input 6
12
Indexed String
Control Input 7
12
Indexed String
Control Input 8
12
Indexed String
Control Input 9
12
0A
Indexed String
Control Input 10
12
0B
Indexed String
Control Input 11
12
0C
Indexed String
Control Input 12
12
0D
Indexed String
Control Input 13
12
0E
Indexed String
Control Input 14
12
0F
Indexed String
Control Input 15
12
10
Indexed String
Control Input 16
12
11
Indexed String
Control Input 17
12
12
Indexed String
Control Input 18
12
13
Indexed String
Control Input 19
12
14
Indexed String
Control Input 20
12
15
Indexed String
Control Input 21
12
16
Indexed String
Control Input 22
12
17
Indexed String
Control Input 23
12
18
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command * G233 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 410021 410022 410020 410019 410018 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 410017 G232 410016 G234 Latched SET/RESET Latched SET/RESET Latched SET/RESET Latched 410015 G232 SET/RESET 410014 G234 Latched 410013 G232 SET/RESET 410012 G234 Latched Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 410011 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 410010 G234 Latched Setting 0 410009 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 410008 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 410007 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 410006 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 410005 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 410004 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 410003 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 410002 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Hotkey Menu - Control Input availability Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1 2 * * * * 0 2 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G203 40975 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 40983 G203 No operation 40982 G203 No operation 40981 G203 No operation 40980 G203 No operation 40979 G203 No operation 40978 G203 No operation 40977 G203 No operation 40976 G203 No operation Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G203 No operation Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Control Input 24
12
19
Indexed String
Control Input 25
12
1A
Indexed String
Control Input 26
12
1B
Indexed String
Control Input 27
12
1C
Indexed String
Control Input 28
12
1D
Indexed String
Control Input 29
12
1E
Indexed String
Control Input 30
12
1F
Indexed String
Control Input 31
12
20
Indexed String
Control Input 32
12
21
Indexed String
CTRL I/P CONFIG
13
Hotkey Enabled
13
Control Input 1
13
10
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Ctrl Command 1
13
11
Indexed String
Control Input 2
13
14
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 2
13
15
Indexed String
Control Input 3
13
18
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 3
13
19
Indexed String
Control Input 4
13
1C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 4
13
1D
Indexed String
Control Input 5
13
20
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 5
13
21
Indexed String
Control Input 6
13
24
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 6
13
25
Indexed String
Control Input 7
13
28
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 7
13
29
Indexed String
Control Input 8
13
2C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 8
13
2D
Indexed String
Control Input 9
13
30
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 9
13
31
Indexed String
Control Input 10
13
34
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 10
13
35
Indexed String
Control Input 11
13
38
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 1 1 3 1 3 0 0 Setting Setting Setting SET/RESET Latched G232 G234 G232 SET/RESET Latched SET/RESET Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text * Individual Control Input Command Text * Individual Control Input Type * Individual Control Input Command Text
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 410052 410053 410051 410050 410049 G232 G234 410048 G234 410047 G232 410046 G234 Latched SET/RESET Latched 410045 G232 SET/RESET 410044 G234 Latched Setting Setting 410043 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 410042 G234 Latched Setting 0 410041 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 410040 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 410039 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 410038 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 410037 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 410036 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 410035 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 410034 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * 410033 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 410032 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 410031 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 410030 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 410029 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 410028 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 410027 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 410026 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 410025 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * 410024 G234 Latched Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 410023 G232 SET/RESET Setting 0 3 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Ctrl Command 11
13
39
Indexed String
Control Input 12
13
3C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 12
13
3D
Indexed String
Control Input 13
13
40
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 13
13
41
Indexed String
Control Input 14
13
44
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 14
13
45
Indexed String
Control Input 15
13
48
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 15
13
49
Indexed String
Control Input 16
13
4C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 16
13
4D
Indexed String
Control Input 17
13
50
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 17
13
51
Indexed String
Control Input 18
13
54
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 18
13
55
Indexed String
Control Input 19
13
58
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 19
13
59
Indexed String
Control Input 20
13
5C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 20
13
5D
Indexed String
Control Input 21
13
60
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 21
13
61
Indexed String
Control Input 22
13
64
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 22
13
65
Indexed String
Control Input 23
13
68
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 23
13
69
Indexed String
Control Input 24
13
6C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 24
13
6D
Indexed String
Control Input 25
13
70
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 25
13
71
Indexed String
Control Input 26
13
74
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 26
13
75
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 3 1 2 * * * 310000 310001 410500 410501 G213 G218 410504 310002 310004 310006 310008 310010 310012 310014 410505 410506 G217 G217 G217 310017 310018 310016 410506 310016 310017 310018 410505 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 310015 G27 No Invisible 310013 G10 310011 G27 310009 G27 310007 G27 Data Data Data Data Data Setting Setting Data Data Data 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 310005 G27 Data 310003 G27 Data 410504 G1 Invisible Setting 0 410503 410503 G1 PX30 Setting 0 410502 410502 G1 9600 Setting 0 4 1 1 410501 G1 2 Setting 0 10 410500 G1 1 Setting 0 10 1 1 1 1 1 310001 G27 Data 2 2 2 2 2 310000 G27 Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 3 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * InterMiCOM input status InterMiCOM Output status 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 3 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 3 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text 0 3 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * * Individual Control Input Type Individual Control Input Command Text 0 3 1 2 * * * * Individual Control Input Command Text 0 1 1 Individual Control Input Type
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G234 410054 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 410065 G232 SET/RESET 410064 G234 Latched 410063 G232 SET/RESET 410062 G234 Latched 410061 G232 SET/RESET 410060 G234 Latched 410059 G232 SET/RESET 410058 G234 Latched 410057 G232 SET/RESET 410056 G234 Latched 410055 G232 SET/RESET Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G234 Latched Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Control Input 27
13
78
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 27
13
79
Indexed String
Control Input 28
13
7C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 28
13
7D
Indexed String
Control Input 29
13
80
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 29
13
81
Indexed String
Control Input 30
13
84
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 30
13
85
Indexed String
Control Input 31
13
88
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 31
13
89
Indexed String
Control Input 32
13
8C
Indexed String
Ctrl Command 32
13
8D
Indexed String
INTERMICOM COMMS
15
IM Input Status
15
Binary Flags (8 bits)
IM Output Status
15
Binary Flags (8 bits)
Source Address
15
10
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Received Address
15
11
Baud Rate
15
12
Indexed Strings
Remote Device
15
13
Indexed Strings
Ch Statistics
15
20
Indexed Strings
When enabled an idle char is inserted between messages Visble/invisible
Rx Direct Count
15
21
Rx Perm Count
15
22
Rx Block Count
15
23
Rx NewDataCount
15
24
Rx ErroredCount
15
25
Number of messages received at Direct security level Number of messages received at permissive security level Number of messages received at Blocking level Number of messages received with new data Number of errored messages
Lost Messages
15
26
Float
Elapsed Time
15
30
Reset Statistics
15
31
Indexed Strings
Number of lost messages. Value compared with cell 0x1611 Elapsed time since statistics were last reset Reset Statistical counters to 0 Channel diagnostics visibility Data Carrier Detect status Frame synchronisation status Message Alarm Status
Ch Diagnostics
15
40
Indexed Strings
Data CD Status
15
41
Indexed Strings
FrameSync Status
15
42
Indexed Strings
Message Status
15
43
Indexed Strings
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * Internal / External loopback * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G217 G216 G214 410508 G217 310021 310021 G1 Data * * 410508 G1 256 Setting 0 8 1 2 * 410507 410507 G1 Disabled Setting 0 1 2 2 * 310020 310020 G1 Data * 310019 310019 G1 Data * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Channel Status
15
44
Indexed Strings
IM H/W Status
15
45
Indexed Strings
Linked to cell 0x1611 Communication Link Fail status four power cycle test InterMiCOM hardware status
Loopback Mode
15
50
Indexed Strings
Test Pattern
15
51
Loopback Status
15
52
Binary Flags (8 bits) Indexed String Indexed Strings
Binary flags to set InterMiCOM signal Loopback test status
INTERMICOM CONF 410520 G211 G215 410524 410525 G211 G215 410529 410530 G211 G215 410534 410535 G211 G215 410539 410540 G212 G215 410544 410545 G212 G215 410549 410550 410548 410548 410549 410551 410547 410547 G1 G1 G1 G2 410546 G2 410544 G1 0 1,5 Direct Default 0 1,5 410543 410543 G1 Default 410542 410542 G1 Direct 410541 G2 1,5 410539 G1 0 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 410538 410538 G1 Default Setting 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 410537 410537 G1 Direct Setting 0 410536 G2 1,5 Setting 0,01 410534 G1 0 Setting 0 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 410533 410533 G1 Default Setting 0 1 410532 410532 G1 Direct Setting 0 2 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 410531 G2 1,5 Setting 0,01 1,5 0,01 410529 G1 0 Setting 0 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 410528 410528 G1 Default Setting 0 1 1 2 410527 410527 G1 Direct Setting 0 2 1 2 410526 G2 1,5 Setting 0,01 1,5 0,01 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 410524 G1 0 Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 410523 410523 G1 Default Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * 410522 410522 G1 Direct Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * 410521 G2 25 Setting 0 100 0,1 2 * * *
16
IM Msg Alarm Lvl
16
Float
IM1 Cmd Type
16
10
Indexed Strings
Alarm level before default data is assigned in inputs InterMiCOM signal 1 Latch or Default Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
IM1 FallBackMode
16
11
Indexed Strings
IM1 DefaultValue
16
12
IM1 FrameSyncTim
16
13
Float
IM2 Cmd Type
16
18
Indexed Strings
InterMiCOM signal 1 Latch or Default Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
IM2 FallBackMode
16
19
Indexed Strings
IM2 DefaultValue
16
1A
IM2 FrameSyncTim
16
1B
Float
IM3 Cmd Type
16
20
Indexed Strings
IM3 FallBackMode
16
21
Indexed Strings
IM3 DefaultValue
16
22
IM3 FrameSyncTim
16
23
Float
IM4 Cmd Type
16
28
Indexed Strings
IM4 FallBackMode
16
29
Indexed Strings
IM4 DefaultValue
16
2A
IM4 FrameSyncTim
16
2B
Float
IM5 Cmd Type
16
30
Indexed Strings
InterMiCOM signal 1 Latch or Defaut Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
IM5 FallBackMode
16
31
Indexed Strings
IM5 DefaultValue
16
32
IM5 FrameSyncTim
16
33
Float
IM6 Cmd Type
16
38
Indexed Strings
IM6 FallBackMode
16
39
Indexed Strings
IM6 DefaultValue
16
3A
IM6 FrameSyncTim
16
2B
Float
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0,01 1,5 0,01 2 * * * visible if bit6 of model number = A G300 G37 G37 G240 G3 G35 G2 G3 G35 G2 G3 G35 G302 G3 G35 G302 A-N 1 Logical Node 4 A-N Setting Setting Setting Setting 1 Setting 0,1 0 65 0,1 0 Logical Node 3 Setting 65 1 Setting 0,1 1 Setting 0,1 Logical Node 2 Setting 65 90 1000000 1000000 90 1000000 5 90 1000 5 1 Setting 0,1 1000000 0,1 1 0,1 0,1 1 0,1 1 1 0,1 1 1 Setting 0,1 1000000 0,1 Logical Node 1 Setting 65 90 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LN 1 Setting 0 10 1 2 0 Setting 0 0,003 0,00025 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 410100 410108 410116 410124 410132 410140 410123 410131 410139 410147 410115 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 410107 G3 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 32 32 32 32 32 32 163 163 163 163 163 163 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Electrical Setting 1 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB 0 1 1 2 * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * Latch or Default Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal 0 2 1 2 * * * InterMiCOM signal 1 0,01 1,5 0,01 2 * * * 0 1 1 2 * * * Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal 0 1 1 2 * * * Latch or Default 0 2 1 InterMiCOM signal 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G212 410552 410552 G215 410554 410555 G212 G215 410559 410560 410561 G2 1,5 410559 G1 0 410558 410558 G1 Default 410557 410557 G1 Direct 410556 G2 1,5 410554 G1 0 410553 410553 G1 Default Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G1 Direct Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * *
Courier Data Type
IM7 Cmd Type
16
40
Indexed Strings
IM7 FallBackMode
16
41
Indexed Strings
IM7 DefaultValue
16
42
IM7 FrameSyncTim
16
43
Float
IM8 Cmd Type
16
48
Indexed Strings
IM8 FallBackMode
16
49
Indexed Strings
IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue
16
4A
IM8 FrameSyncTim
16
4B
Float
ETHERNET NCIT
18
Physical Link
18
Indexed String
AntiAlaising Fil
18
Indexed String
Merge Unit Delay
18
Courier Number(Time)
L.N. Arrangement
18
Indexed String
Logical Node 1
18
LN1 VT Ratio
18
LN1 CT Ratio
18
Logical Node 2
18
LN2 VT Ratio
18
LN2 CT Ratio
18
0A
Logical Node 1B
18
0B
LN1B VT Ratio
18
0C
LN1B Input
18
0D
Indexed String
Logical Node 2B
18
0E
(1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10)
LN2B VT Ratio
18
0F
LN2B Input
18
10
Indexed String
CTRL I/P LABELS
29
Control Input 1
29
Control Input 2
29
Control Input 3
29
Control Input 4
29
Control Input 5
29
Control Input 6
29
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 1 1 163 163 163 32 32 Setting Setting Setting 32 32 32 163 163 163 163 163 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB * Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB * Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 410148 410156 410164 410172 410180 410188 410196 410204 410212 410220 410228 410236 410244 410252 410260 410268 410276 410284 410292 410300 410308 410316 410324 410332 410340 410348 410355 G3 410347 G3 410339 G3 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 410331 G3 Control Input 29 410323 G3 Control Input 28 Setting Setting 410315 G3 Control Input 27 Setting 410307 G3 Control Input 26 Setting 32 32 410299 G3 Control Input 25 Setting 32 410291 G3 Control Input 24 Setting 32 163 410283 G3 Control Input 23 Setting 32 163 410275 G3 Control Input 22 Setting 32 163 1 410267 G3 Control Input 21 Setting 32 163 1 410259 G3 Control Input 20 Setting 32 163 1 2 410251 G3 Control Input 19 Setting 32 163 1 2 410243 G3 Control Input 18 Setting 32 163 1 2 * 410235 G3 Control Input 17 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410227 G3 Control Input 16 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410219 G3 Control Input 15 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410211 G3 Control Input 14 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410203 G3 Control Input 13 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410195 G3 Control Input 12 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410187 G3 Control Input 11 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410179 G3 Control Input 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410171 G3 Control Input 9 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410163 G3 Control Input 8 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * 410155 G3 Control Input 7 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Control Input 7
29
Control Input 8
29
Control Input 9
29
Control Input 10
29
0A
Control Input 11
29
0B
Control Input 12
29
0C
Control Input 13
29
0D
Control Input 14
29
0E
Control Input 15
29
0F
Control Input 16
29
10
Control Input 17
29
11
Control Input 18
29
12
Control Input 19
29
13
Control Input 20
29
14
Control Input 21
29
15
Control Input 22
29
16
Control Input 23
29
17
Control Input 24
29
18
Control Input 25
29
19
Control Input 26
29
1A
Control Input 27
29
1B
Control Input 28
29
1C
Control Input 29
29
1D
Control Input 30
29
1E
Control Input 31
29
1F
Control Input 32
29
20
GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS Line Setting 41000 41002 41001 41003
30
00
* * G35 G35 100000 62 Setting Setting 300 0.2 1000000 625 10 0.005 2 2 * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * * Length in Km Setting strored in Km, displayed using miles
30
(Sub Heading)
Line Length
30
Courier Number (metres)
Line Length
30
Courier Number (miles)
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting * G120 41007 41008 41009 41011 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41018 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41025 41027 41028 41029 41030 41032 41033 41034 41035 41036 41038 41039 41040 41037 41038 41039 41040 41035 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 41034 G2 1 0 25 25 25 0.4 41033 G123 41032 G2 1 Directional Fwd 41031 G35 40 41029 G2 0.6 41028 G2 30 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 41027 G2 30 Setting 0 0 0 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 41026 G35 30 Setting 41024 G2 0 Setting -180 0.001*V1/I1 41023 G2 1 Setting 0 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 500*V1/I1 10 1 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 41022 G2 0.2 Setting 0 10 41021 G2 20 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 41020 G2 20 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 0.001 0.1 41019 G35 20 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 2 2 2 2 2 0.001*V1/I1 2 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 2 2 2 0.001*V1/I1 2 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 2 2 2 2 0.001*V1/I1 2 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 2 2 2 41017 G2 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 41016 G2 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 41015 G2 0 Setting 0 10 0.002 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 41014 G2 10 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 000010b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 001000b) > 0 (3007 AND 010000b) > 0 (3007 AND 010000b) > 0 41013 G2 10 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * * 41012 G35 15 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * * 41010 G35 10 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * * (3007 AND 000001b) > 0 41008 G2 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * * * 41007 G2 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * * * G120 000011110 Setting 0 31 1 2 * * * * * * * -90 90 0.1 2 * * * * Positive Sequence Angle 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 Positive Sequence Impedance
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41004 41005 41006 41006 G2 70 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G35 12 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Line Impedance
30
Courier Number(Ohms)
Line Angle
30
Courier Number (Angle)
Zone Setting
30
(Sub Heading)
Zone Status
30
kZ1 Res Comp
30
Binary Flag (8 bits) Courier Number
kZ1 Angle
30
Z1
30
0A
Courier Number(Ohm)
Z1X
30
0B
R1G
30
0C
R1Ph
30
0D
tZ1
30
0E
kZ2 Res Comp
30
0F
Courier Number
kZ2 Angle
30
10
Z2
30
11
R2G
30
12
R2Ph
30
13
tZ2
30
14
kZ3/4 Res Comp
30
15
Courier Number
kZ3/4 Angle
30
16
Z3
30
17
R3G - R4G
30
18
R3Ph - R4Ph
30
19
tZ3
30
1A
Z4
30
1B
tZ4
30
1C
Zone P - Direct.
30
1D
Indexed String
kZp Res Comp
30
1E
Courier Number
kZp Angle
30
1F
Zp
30
20
RpG
30
21
RpPh
30
22
tZp
30
23
((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) 41041 41042 41043 41044 41046 41046 G2 0 Setting -45 45 1 2 * * * * 41044 G2 0 Setting -45 45 1 2 * * * * 41043 G2 0 Setting -45 45 1 2 * * * * 41042 G37 Disableb Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * 41041 G37 Disableb Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Serial Comp Line
30
24
Indexed String
Zone Overlap Mode
30
25
Indexed String
Z1m Tilt Angle
30
26
Z1p Tilt Angle
30
27
Z2/Zp Tilt Angle
30
28
Fwd Zone Chg Del * 41047 41048 41048 G2 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * * * 41047 G2 0 Setting 0 7 0,01 2 * * * * * * *
30
29
41045
41045
G2
0,03
Setting
0,1
0,01
(3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) (3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) (((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) AND (301D = 0)) OR (3007 AND 001000b) > 0) AND (3007 AND 000010b)) OR (((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) AND (301D = 0)) AND (3007 AND 001000b) > 0) (3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
Fault Locator
30
2A
(Sub Heading)
kZm Mutual Comp
30
2B
Courier Number
kZm Angle
30
2C
DISTANCE ELEMENTS GROUP 1 DISTANCE SCHEMES Program Mode * G106 G107 G115 G114 G108 G109 41056 41057 G113 G118 41060 G37 41061 41061 G37 Disabled 41060 G2 110 41059 41059 G118 48 Setting Setting Setting 41058 41058 G113 None Setting 0 0 10 0 41057 G2 0.02 Setting 0 41056 G2 0.02 Setting 0 1 0.15 2 8192 3600 1 41055 41055 G109 None Setting 0 5 41054 41054 G108 None Setting 0 3 41053 41053 G114 Force 3 Poles Trip Setting 0 2 1 1 1 0.002 0.002 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 41052 41052 G115 Both Enabled Setting 0 2 1 41051 41051 G107 Basic + Z1X Setting 0 6 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * G116 G37 41064 41065 G37 G37 G37 41067 41068 41066 41065 41066 41067 41068 41064 G2 G2 G37 G37 G37 41063 41063 G37 41062 41062 G116 Disabled Disabled 45 0.06 Disabled Disabled Disabled Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 3 1 70 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 0.002 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * 41050 41050 G106 Standard Scheme Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
31
00
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Trip mode for the distance protection Signal Send Zone Type of Scheme on signal Recieve
31
Indexed String
Standard Mode
31
Indexed String
Fault Type
31
Indexed String
Trip Mode
31
Indexed String
Sig. Send Zone
31
Indexed String
DistCR
31
Indexed String
Tp
31
tReversal Guard
31
(((3102 = 5) OR (3102 = 6)) AND (3101 = 0)) OR (((3106 = 4) OR (3106 = 5)) AND (3101 = 1)) OR (3901 = 1 AND 3906 = 1)Time Delay Reversal Guard Type of TAC Receive
Unblocking Logic
31
Indexed String
TOR-SOTF Mode
31
0A
Binary Flags (16bits)
SOFT Delay
31
0B
Z1Ext On Chan.Fail
31
0C
Indexed String
Weak Infeed
31
0D
(Sub Heading)
WI :Mode Status
31
0E
Indexed String
WI : Single Pole Trip
31
0F
Indexed String
WI : V< Thres.
31
10
WI : Trip Time Delay
31
11
PAP : TeleTrip Enable
31
12
Indexed String
PAP : Trip Delayed Enable
31
13
Indexed String
PAP : P1
31
14
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 1 1 1 20*I1 1 0 0 Setting Setting 1 1 30 15 255 255 1 0.01*I1 1 0.1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * (3112=1) OR (3113=1) * (3112=1) OR (3113=1) * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41069 G37 G37 41072 41073 41074 * G37 G37 41077 41078 * 41150 41151 G37 41153 G37 41155 G37 41157 G37 41159 G119 41161 41162 41162 1 41161 1 41160 41160 G119 0 41159 G2 30 Setting Setting 41158 41158 G37 Enabled Setting 0 41157 G2 3 Setting 1*I1 41156 41156 G37 Enabled Setting 0 41155 G2 30 Setting 10 100 41154 41154 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 41153 G2 40 Setting 10 100 1 41152 41152 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 41151 G2 0.5 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 41150 G2 0.5 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 41078 G2 0.04 Setting 0.01 0.1 0.01 2 * * 41077 G2 0.5 Setting 0.05*I1 1*I1 0.05*I1 2 * * 41076 41076 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41075 41075 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * 41074 G2 0,5 Setting 0,5 1 0,05 2 * * 41073 G2 0.5*I1 Setting 0.1*I1 1*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * 41072 G2 2 Setting 1 12 0,1 2 * * 41071 41071 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41070 41070 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41069 G2 0,5 Setting 0,1 1,5 0,1 2 * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay
31
15
PAP : P2
31
16
Indexed String
PAP : P3
31
17
Indexed String
PAP : 3P Trip Delay
31
18
PAP : Residual Current
31
19
PAP : K
31
1A
Courier Number
Loss Of Load
31
1B
(Sub Heading)
LoL: Mode Status
31
1C
Indexed String
LoL. Chan. Fail
31
1D
Indexed String
LoL: I<
31
1E
31
1F
LoL: Window DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1 POWER-SWING DR
32
00
32
DX
32
IN > Status
32
Indexed String
IN > (% Imax)
32
Courier Number (%)
I2 > Status
32
Indexed String
I2 > (% Imax)
32
Courier Number (%)
Imax Line > Status
32
Indexed String
Imax Line >
32
Delta I Status
32
Indexed String
Unblocking Time-Delay
32
0A
Blocking Zones
32
0B
Out of Step
32
0C
Binary Flag(8 bits) Indexed String Unisgned Integer (16 bits)
Stable Swing
32
0D
Unisgned Integer (16 bits)
POWER-SWING GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function G43 G44 G45 41253 41254 41252 41251 41251 41252 41253 41254 41250 41250 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2
35
00 DT Directional Fwd Non-Directional 1.5 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 10 2 1 4.0*I1 100 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
35
Indexed String
I>1 Directional
35
Indexed String
I>1 VTS Block
35
Indexed String
I>1 Current Set
35
I>1 Time Delay
35
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 0.01*I1 0.01 1 32*I1 100 1 0.01*I1 0.01 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 5>=350B>=1 OR (3513=0 AND 350B >=6) 350B <> 0 AND 350C<>0 AND 350D = 1 5>=350B>=2 * * * * * * 5>=3501>=1 OR (3509=0 AND 3501 >=6) * * 5>=3501>=2 * 3501 <> 0 AND 3502<>0 AND 3503 = 1
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41255 41256 41257 G60 41259 G43 G44 G45 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 G60 41269 G37 41271 41272 G37 41274 41275 41275 G2 4 Setting 0 41274 G2 4 Setting 0.08*I1 41273 41273 G37 Disabled Setting 0 41272 G2 3 Setting 0 100 41271 G2 3 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 41270 41270 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 41269 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 41268 41268 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 41267 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 41266 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * 41265 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * 41264 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * 41263 G2 2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * 41262 41262 G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41261 41261 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * 41260 41260 G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 * * 41259 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * 41258 41258 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41257 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * 41256 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * 41255 G2 0.2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
I>1 Time Delay VTS
35
I>1 TMS
35
I>1 Time Dial
35
I>1 Reset Char
35
Indexed String
I>1 tRESET
35
0A
I>2 Function
35
0B
Indexed String
I>2 Directional
35
0C
Indexed String
I>2 VTS Block
35
0D
Indexed String
I>2 Current Set
35
0E
I>2 Time Delay
35
0F
I>2 Time Delay VTS
35
10
I>2 TMS
35
11
I>2 Time Dial
35
12
I>2 Reset Char
35
13
Indexed String
I>2 tRESET
35
14
I>3 Status
35
15
Indexed String
I>3 Current Set
35
16
I>3 Time Delay
35
17
I>4 Status
35
18
Indexed String
I>4 Current Set
35
19
I>4 Time Delay
35
1A
BACK-UP I> GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2> Status G37 G44 G45 41303 41304 41305 41305 41304 G2 G2 41303 G2 41302 41302 G45 41301 41301 G44 41300 41300 G37 Enabled Non-Directional Non-Directional 0.2 10 -45
36
00 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 -95 1 2 1 4*I1 100 95 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * *
36
Indexed String
I2> Directional
36
Indexed String
I2> VTS
36
Indexed String
I2> Current Set
36
I2> Time Delay
36
I2> Char Angle
36
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor G37 41350
37
00 41350 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2
* *
* *
* *
* *
37
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * 0 100 0.1 2 * * * * 0.2 1 0.01
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41351 41351 41352 41353 G37 Disabled 41352 G2 60 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G2 0.2 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
I2/I1 Setting
37
I2/I1 Time Delay
37
I2/I1 Trip
37
Indexed String
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function * G43 G44 G45 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 G60 41409 G37 G44 G45 41413 41414 41415 G37 G44 G45 41419 41420 41421 G37 G44 G45 41425 41426 41424 41424 41425 41426 41423 41423 41422 41422 G37 G44 G45 G2 G2 41421 G2 2 Enabled Non-Directional Non-Directional 0.3 2 41420 G2 2 41419 G2 0.3 41418 41418 G45 Non-Directional 41417 41417 G44 Non-Directional Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 41416 41416 G37 Enabled Setting 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 41415 G2 2 Setting 0 41414 G2 2 Setting 0 41413 G2 0.3 Setting 0.08*I1 41412 41412 G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 32*I1 200 200 1 2 1 32*I1 200 200 1 2 1 32*I1 200 41411 41411 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 41410 41410 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 41409 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 41408 41408 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 41407 G2 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 41406 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 41405 G2 0.2 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 3811<>0 AND 3813=1 380B<>0 AND 380D=1 41404 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * * 41403 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * * Change scaling factor 41402 41402 G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * 41401 41401 G44 Directional Fwd Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * * 41400 41400 G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 * * * * I>2 Overcurrent Status * * *
38
00
38
Indexed String
IN>1 Directional
38
Indexed String
IN>1 VTS Block
38
Indexed String
IN>1 Current Set
38
IN>1 Time Delay
38
IN>1 Time Delay VTS
38
3801<>0 AND 3802<>0 AND 3803=1 5>=3801>=2
IN>1 TMS
38
IN>1 Time Dial
38
IN>1 Reset Char
38
Indexed String
IN>1 tRESET
38
0A
5>=3801>=1 OR (3809=0 AND 3801>=6)
IN>2 Status
38
0B
Indexed String
IN>2 Directional
38
0C
Indexed String
IN>2 VTS Block
38
0D
Indexed String
IN>2 Current Set
38
0E
IN>2 Time Delay
38
0F
IN>2 Time Delay VTS
38
10
IN>3 Status
38
11
Indexed String
IN>3 Directional
38
12
Indexed String
IN>3 VTS Block
38
13
Indexed String
IN>3 Current Set
38
14
IN>3 Time Delay
38
15
IN>3 Time Delay VTS
38
16
IN>4 Status
38
17
Indexed String
IN>4 Directional
38
18
Indexed String
IN>4 VTS Block
38
19
Indexed String
IN>4 Current Set
38
1A
IN>4 Time Delay
38
1B
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting 2 41428 G46 41429 41429 G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * 41428 G2 -45 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * * * 3802 >0 OR 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818 3802 >0 0R 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818 > 0 3802 > 0 0R 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818 > 0 0 200 0.01 3817<>0 AND 3819=1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41427 41427 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G2 2 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
IN>4 Time Delay VTS
38
1C
IN> Directional
38
1D
(Sub Heading)
IN> Char Angle
38
1E
Courier Number(Angle)
Polarisation
38
1F
Indexed String
EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1 AIDED DEF Channel Aided DEF Status G37 G46 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41458 G2 0,6 Setting 0,1 1 0,1 2 41457 G2 0.02 Setting 0 1 0.002 2 41456 G48 Three Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41455 G112 Shared Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * * * 41454 G2 0 Setting 0 10 0,002 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * 41453 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * * 41452 G2 1 Setting 0.5 20 0.01 2 * * * * 41451 41451 G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * 41450 41450 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * * * *
39
00
39
Indexed String
Polarisation
39
Indexed String
V> Voltage Set
39
IN Forward
39
Time Delay
39
Scheme Logic
39
Indexed String
Tripping
39
Indexed String
Tp
39
IN Rev Factor
39
Courier Number()
AIDED DEF GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD Characteristic G67 41501 41502 41503 41504 41504 G2 5 Setting 1 41503 G2 10 Setting 1 41502 G2 70 Setting 50 41501 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 3.2*I1 100 200 200 41500 G67 Single Setting 0 1 2
3A
0 2 0.01*I1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
3A
Indexed String
Thermal Trip
3A
Thermal Alarm
3A
Time Constant 1
3A
Time Constant 2
3A
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1 ZERO SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status G37 41601 41602 41603 41604 41604 G2 41603 G2 0,1 0,5 41602 G2 1 41601 G2 0 41600 41600 G37 Enabled
3C
00 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0 0.05*I1 0.3*I1*V1 1 2 10 1*I1 6*I1*V1 1 0,2 0,01 0,01 0.01*I1*V1 2 2 2 2 2
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
Indexed String
K Time Delay Factor
Basis Time Delay
Residual Current
Residual Power
ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1 VOLT PROTECTION V< & V> MODE G121 41949 41949
42
00 G121 0 Setting 0 15 1 2
* *
* *
* *
* * 4204 <> 0 OR 4208 <> 0 OR 420D <> 0 OR 4211 <> 0
42
UNDER VOLTAGE G47
42
(Sub Heading) 41950 41950 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * *
V< Measur't Mode
42
Indexed String
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * Phase-Neutral * * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G23 41952 41953 41954 G37 41956 41957 41957 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * 41956 G2 38 Setting 10 120 1 2 * * 41955 41955 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 41954 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * 41953 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * 41952 G2 50 Setting 10 120 1 2 * * 41951 41951 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
V<1 Function
42
Indexed String
V<1 Voltage Set
42
V<1 Time Delay
42
V<1 TMS
42
V<2 Status
42
Indexed String
V<2 Voltage Set
42
V<2 Time Delay
42
0A
OVERVOLTAGE G47 G23 41960 41961 41962 G37 41964 41965 41965 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 41964 G2 90 Setting 60 185 1 0.01 41963 41963 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 2 2 41962 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 41961 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * * * 41960 G2 75 Setting 60 185 1 2 * * * * * * * 41959 41959 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 41958 41958 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * *
42
0B
(Sub Heading)
V> Measur't Mode
42
0C
Indexed String
V>1 Function
42
0D
Indexed String
V>1 Voltage Set
42
0E
V>1 Time Delay
42
0F
V>1 TMS
42
10
V>2 Status
42
11
Indexed String
V>2 Voltage Set
42
12
V>2 Time Delay
42
13
VOLT PROTECTION GROUP 1 CB FAIL & I< BREAKER FAIL G37 G2 G37 G2 G205 G205 42105 42105 G205 1 42104 42104 G205 1 42103 42103 G2 0.4 42102 42102 G37 Disabled Setting Setting Setting Setting 42101 42101 G2 0.2 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 42100 42100 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 10 1 10 3 3
45
00
* * 1 0.005 1 0.005 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * * * * * G2 42106 42106 G2 0.05*I1 Setting 0.05*I1 3.2*I1 0.1*I1 2 *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
45
(Sub Heading)
CB Fail 1 Status
45
Indexed String
CB Fail 1 Timer
45
CB Fail 2 Status
45
Indexed String
CB Fail 2 Timer
45
CBF Non I Reset
45
Indexed String
CBF Ext Reset
45
Indexed String
UNDER CURRENT
45
(Sub Heading)
I < Current Set
45
CB FAIL & I< GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT SUPERVISION 42150 42151 42150 42151
46
00
* * G2 G2 5 0.05 Setting Setting 1 0 20 1.0*I1 1 0.01*I1 2 2 * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
46
(Sub Heading)
VTS Time Delay
46
Courier Number (Time s)
VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit
46
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Setting Setting Setting 0.01*I1 5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * * 10 70 1 2 * * * * 0 1 1
CourierRef Col Row Cell Type Min Max Step Comment LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G37 G2 G2 0.1*I1 30 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G37 Disabled Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Courier Data Type
Detect 3P
46
Indexed String
Threshold 3P
46
Delta I>
46
CT SUPERVISION G37 42153 42154 42155 42155 G2 5 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * * * 42154 G2 0.1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * * 42153 G2 1 Setting 0.5 22 0.5 2 * * * * 42152 42152 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * *
46
(Sub Heading)
CTS Status
46
Indexed String
CTS VN< Inhibit
46
CTS IN> Set
46
0A
CTS Time Delay
46
0B
CVT SUPERVISION G37 42157 42158 42158 G2 100 Setting 0 300 1 2 * * 42157 G2 1 Setting 0,5 22 0,5 2 * * * * 42156 42156 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * * * *
46
0C
(Sub Heading)
CVTS Status
46
0D
Indexed String
CVTS VN>
46
0E
CVTS Time Delay
46
0F
SUPERVISION GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS C/S Check Schem. for A/R G103 G103 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42259 G2 0.2 42258 G2 20 Setting Setting 42257 G2 0.05 Setting 42256 G2 6.5 Setting 0.5 0.02 5 0.1 42255 G2 32 Setting 30 42254 G2 13 Setting 5 30 120 40 1 90 2 42253 G2 32 Setting 30 120 42252 G2 13 Setting 5 30 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.01 2.5 0.1 42251 42251 G103 7 Setting 0 7 1 42250 42250 G103 7 Setting 0 7 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
48
00
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * (((4801 OR 4802) AND 001b) > 0 AND (0A10=1)) OR 0A10=0 (((4801 OR 4802) AND 110b) > 0 AND (0A10=1)) OR 0A10=0 (((4801 OR 4802) AND 010b) > 0 AND (0A10=0)) OR 0A10=1 (((4801 OR 4802) AND 101b) > 0 AND (0A10=0)) OR 0A10=1 (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0 (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0 (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0 (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0
48
C/S Check Schem. for Man CB
48
V< Dead Line
48
V> Live Line
48
V< Dead Bus
48
V> Live Bus
48
Diff Voltage
48
Diff Frequency
48
Courier Number (Frequency)
Diff Phase
48
Courier Number(Degre)
Bus-Line Delay
48
0A
SYSTEM CHECKS GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE MODE G101 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 42304 42305 42303 42302 42302 42303 42304 42305 42301 42301 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 42300 42300 G101 1 1 1 1 60 180
49
00
* * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0 0.1 0.1 1 1 3 3 5 60 3600 3600 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 * * * *
* *
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * Mode on Single Phase Tripping Mode on Three Phase Tripping Single Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1 Three Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1 ( (3>= 4902>=1) AND 0707=1) OR ( (3>= 4903>=1) AND 0708=1 ) ( (3>= 4902>=2) AND 0707=1) OR ( (3>= 4903>=2) AND 0708=1 )
49
(Sub Heading)
1P Trip Mode
49
Indexed String
3P Trip Mode
49
Indexed String
1P Rcl - Dead Time 1
49
3P Rcl - Dead Time 1
49
Dead Time 2
49
Dead Time 3
49
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * Select Synchro Check * * * * * (4902=3 AND 0707=1) OR (4903=3 AND 0708=1)
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 42311 42311 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * 42310 42310 G2 5 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * 42309 42309 G2 5 Setting 0,1 5 0,01 2 * * 42308 42308 G2 0.1 Setting 0.1 10 0.1 2 * * 42307 42307 G2 180 Setting 1 600 1 2 * * 42306 42306 G2 180 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Dead Time 4
49
Reclaim Time
49
Reclose Time Delay
49
0A
Discrimination Time
49
0B
A/R Inhbit Wind
49
0C
C/S on 3P Rcl DT1
49
0D
Indexed String
AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT G117 42312 41313 G117 524287 Setting 0 524287 1 2 * * * *
49
0E
(Sub Heading)
Block A/R
49
0F
AUTORECLOSE GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS Opto Input 1 * 42400 42408 42416 42424 42432 42440 42448 42456 42464 42472 42480 42488 42496 42504 42512 42520 42528 42536 42544 42552 42560 42568 42551 42559 42567 42575 42543 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 42535 G3 42527 G3 42519 G3 Opto Label 15 Opto Label 16 Opto Label 17 Opto Label 18 Opto Label 19 Opto Label 20 Opto Label 21 Opto Label 22 42511 G3 Opto Label 14 42503 G3 Opto Label 13 42495 G3 Opto Label 12 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 42487 G3 Opto Label 11 Setting 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 42479 G3 Opto Label 10 Setting 32 42471 G3 Opto Label 09 Setting 32 42463 G3 Opto Label 08 Setting 32 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 42455 G3 Opto Label 07 Setting 32 163 42447 G3 Opto Label 06 Setting 32 163 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 42439 G3 Opto Label 05 Setting 32 163 1 42431 G3 Opto Label 04 Setting 32 163 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 42423 G3 Opto Label 03 Setting 32 163 1 2 42415 G3 Opto Label 02 Setting 32 163 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 42407 G3 Opto Label 01 Setting 32 163 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1 1 1
4A
00
4A
Opto Input 2
4A
Opto Input 3
4A
Opto Input 4
4A
Opto Input 5
4A
Opto Input 6
4A
Opto Input 7
4A
Opto Input 8
4A
Opto Input 9
4A
Opto Input 10
4A
0A
Opto Input 11
4A
0B
Opto Input 12
4A
0C
Opto Input 13
4A
0D
Opto Input 14
4A
0E
Opto Input 15
4A
0F
Opto Input 16
4A
10
Opto Input 17
4A
11
Opto Input 18
4A
12
Opto Input 19
4A
13
Opto Input 20
4A
14
Opto Input 21
4A
15
Opto Input 22
4A
16
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 42576 42584 42591 G3 Opto Label 24 Setting 32 163 1 2 42583 G3 Opto Label 23 Setting 32 163 1 2 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Opto Input 23
4A
17
Opto Input 24
4A
18
INPUT LABELS GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS Relay 1 * 42600 42608 42616 42624 42632 42640 42648 42656 42664 42672 42680 42688 42696 42704 42712 42720 42728 42736 42744 42752 42760 42768 42776 42784 42792 42800 42808 42816 42799 42807 42815 42823 42791 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 42783 G3 42775 G3 42767 G3 42759 G3 Relay Label 20 Relay Label 21 Relay Label 22 Relay Label 23 Relay Label 24 Relay Label 25 Relay Label 26 Relay Label 27 Relay Label 28 42751 G3 Relay Label 19 42743 G3 Relay Label 18 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 42735 G3 Relay Label 17 Setting 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 42727 G3 Relay Label 16 Setting 32 42719 G3 Relay Label 15 Setting 32 42711 G3 Relay Label 14 Setting 32 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 42703 G3 Relay Label 13 Setting 32 163 42695 G3 Relay Label 12 Setting 32 163 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 42687 G3 Relay Label 11 Setting 32 163 1 42679 G3 Relay Label 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 42671 G3 Relay Label 09 Setting 32 163 1 2 42663 G3 Relay Label 08 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 42655 G3 Relay Label 07 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 42647 G3 Relay Label 06 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 42639 G3 Relay Label 05 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * 42631 G3 Relay Label 04 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * 42623 G3 Relay Label 03 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * 42615 G3 Relay Label 02 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * 42607 G3 Relay Label 01 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * * * * * *
4B
00
4B
Relay 2
4B
Relay 3
4B
Relay 4
4B
Relay 5
4B
Relay 6
4B
Relay 7
4B
Relay 8
4B
Relay 9
4B
Relay 10
4B
0A
Relay 11
4B
0B
Relay 12
4B
0C
Relay 13
4B
0D
Relay 14
4B
0E
Relay 15
4B
0F
Relay 16
4B
10
Relay 17
4B
11
Relay 18
4B
12
Relay 19
4B
13
Relay 20
4B
14
Relay 21
4B
15
Relay 22
4B
16
Relay 23
4B
17
Relay 24
4B
18
Relay 25
4B
19
Relay 26
4B
1A
Relay 27
4B
1B
Relay 28
4B
1C
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 2 1 1 2 2 * * * * * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 42824 42832 42840 42848 42856 42864 42872 42880 42888 42896 42904 42912 42920 42928 42936 42944 42952 42960 42967 G3 Relay Label 46 Setting 32 163 42959 G3 Relay Label 45 Setting 32 163 42951 G3 Relay Label 44 Setting 32 163 1 42943 G3 Relay Label 43 Setting 32 163 1 42935 G3 Relay Label 42 Setting 32 163 1 2 42927 G3 Relay Label 41 Setting 32 163 1 2 42919 G3 Relay Label 40 Setting 32 163 1 2 42911 G3 Relay Label 39 Setting 32 163 1 2 42903 G3 Relay Label 38 Setting 32 163 1 2 42895 G3 Relay Label 37 Setting 32 163 1 2 42887 G3 Relay Label 36 Setting 32 163 1 2 42879 G3 Relay Label 35 Setting 32 163 1 2 42871 G3 Relay Label 34 Setting 32 163 1 2 42863 G3 Relay Label 33 Setting 32 163 1 2 42855 G3 Relay Label 32 Setting 32 163 1 2 42847 G3 Relay Label 31 Setting 32 163 1 2 42839 G3 Relay Label 30 Setting 32 163 1 2 42831 G3 Relay Label 29 Setting 32 163 1 2 Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
Relay 29
4B
1D
Relay 30
4B
1E
Relay 31
4B
1F
Relay 32
4B
20
Relay 33
4B
21
Relay 34
4B
22
Relay 35
4B
23
Relay 36
4B
24
Relay 37
4B
25
Relay 38
4B
26
Relay 39
4B
27
Relay 40
4B
28
Relay 41
4B
29
Relay 42
4B
2A
Relay 43
4B
2B
Relay 44
4B
2C
Relay 45
4B
2D
Relay 46
4B
2E
OUTPUT LABEL GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 43000 44999
50
00
GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 45000 46999
70
00
GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 47000 48999
90
00
65535
Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
(No Header) Select Event Time & Date Record Type Faulted Phases Active Setting Group Time Stamp UNUSED Started Elements (1) Tripped Elements (1) UNUSED System Frequency
B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01] 00 Auto extraction Event Record ColumN/A 1 Unsigned Integer(2) Setting 0 2 IEC870 Time & Date (From Record) Data 3 Ascii String(32) Data 4 Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String Data 5 Unsigned Integer Data 6 7 8 Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 0..31 1 bit per elementLSBData 9 Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 0..31 1 bit per elementLSBData 0A 0B Courier Number (frequency) Data
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Comment Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Courier Data Type
Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time Fault Location Fault Location Fault Location Fault Location IA IB IC UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED VAN VBN VCN Fault Resistor Fault in Zone Data Data Data Data Data * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D
Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number(metres) Courier Number(miles) Courier Number(ohms) Courier Number(%) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (ohms) Indexed String
No Header Select Record Time and Date Record Text Error No1 Error No2 65535 1 * * * * * * * * * *
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01] 00 N/A 1 UINT16 Setting 0 2 IEC Date and Time Data 3 ASCII Text Data 4 UINT32 Data 5 UINT32 Data * * * * *
* * * * *
Text Description of Error Error Code Error Code
G57 G90
PSL Settings Group 1 256 6 Setting Setting 0 7 1
Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0
1 3 65535
1 1 1
2 2 2 2
DATA TRANSFER (No Header) Domain Sub-Domain Version Reference Transfer Mode Data Transfer G76 N/A 0 0 Samples Data
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2
00 4 8 0C 18 1C 20
N/A Indexed String Indexed String Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) Not Used Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings G76 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
RECORDER CONTROL (No Header)B3 UNUSED B3 Recorder Source B3 Reserved for future use B3
00 1 2 03-1F
Indexed String
RECORDER EXTRACTION COLUMN B4 Select Record Number - n B4 Trigger Time B4 Active Channels B4 Channel Types B4 Channel Offsets B4 Channel Scaling B4 Channel SkewVal B4 Channel MinVal B4 Channel MaxVal B4 No. Of Samples B4 Trig Position B4 Time Base B4 Sample Times B4 Dist. Channel 1 B4 Dist. Channel 2 B4 Dist. Channel 3 B4 Dist. Channel 4 B4 Dist. Channel 5 B4 Dist. Channel 6 B4 Dist. Channel 7 B4 Dist. Channel 8 B4 0 Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
N/A Unsigned Integer IEC870 Time & Date Binary Flag(32 Bits) N/A Binary Flag(32 Bits) N/A Repeated Group of Courier Number N/A Repeated Group of Courier Number N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Unsigned integer (16-bit) N/A Integer (16-bit) N/A Courier Number(Seconds) N/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A
-199
199
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
CourierRef Col Row Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Comment Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Courier Data Type
Dist. Channel 9 Dist. Channel 10 Dist. Channel 11 Dist. Channel 12 Dist. Channel 13 Dist. Channel 14 Dist. Channel 15 Dist. Channel 16 Dist. Channel 17 Dist. Channel 18 Dist. Channel 19 Dist. Channel 20 Dist. Channel 21 Dist. Channel 22 Dist. Channel 23 Dist. Channel 24 Dist. Channel 25 Dist. Channel 26 Dist. Channel 27 Dist. Channel 28 Dist. Channel 29 Dist. Channel 30 Dist. Channel 31 Dist. Channel 32
B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4
28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A
Calibration Coefficients (Hidden) (NotB5 Cal Software Version B5 Cal Date and Time B5 Channel Types B5 Cal Coeffs B5 N/A
00 1 2 3 4
N/A ASCII text 16 chars IEC Date and time Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel)
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
Comms Diagnostics (Hidden) Bus Comms Err Count Front Bus Message Count Front Protocol Err Count Front Busy Count Front Reset front count Bus Comms Err Count Rear Bus Message Count Rear Protocol Err Count Rear Busy Count Rear Reset rear count
B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A
Note: No text in column text UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only)
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
Default PSL "model number" 0 Default PSL "model number" 0 Default PSL "model number" 0 Default PSL "model number" 0
PSL Data Grp1 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp2 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID 31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086 N/A B300 B400 31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27
B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7
00 01 02 03 11 12 13 21 22 23 31 32 33
ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits)
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
COMMS SYS DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfer UNUSED
BF BF BF BF BF
00 1 2 3 5
Menu Cell(2) Menu Cell(2) Unsigned Integer
Data Data Setting
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * *
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text Data
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Cell Type Min Max Step Comment Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus B200 Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * *
Courier Data Type
Block Transfer Ref
BF
Menu Cell(2)
UCA 2 Only Data Cells
FE
CheckSync Bus Volts
FE
(Note: No Text)
UCA 2 Only
CheckSync Line Volts
FE
(Note: No Text)
UCA 2 Only
YN> Set
FE
Special cell that points to the correct PU setting cell - E/F Pu or SEF Pu.
GN> Set
FE
BN> Set * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
FE
Control Input 1 Config
FE
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
FE
FE
FE
FE
0A
FE
0B
FE
0C
FE
0D
FE
0E
FE
0F
FE
10
FE
11
FE
12
FE
13
FE
14
FE
15
FE
16
FE
17
FE
18
FE
19
FE
1A
FE
1B
FE
1C
FE
1D
FE
1E
P44x/EN GC /E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courier Text 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CourierRef Col Row LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End * * * * * * * * * Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Cell Type Min Max Step Password Model Level 1 2 Comment
Courier Data Type
FE
1F
FE
20
FE
21
FE
22
FE
23
FE
24
FE
25
Num Unextracted DR
FE
26
(Note: No Text) - Returns the number of unextracted Disturbance Records
Fault Locator Line Length
FE
27
Special cell that references [47 01] / [47 02] depending upon the selected distance unit (miles or metres)
Binary Flags (16bits) Binary Flags(16 bits)
N/A N/A
30001 30701
Data
* No of event records stored Number of Fault records stored
Unsigned Integer
N/A
30112
30929 30933 0 0 (From Record) 1 0 0 65535 24 4
1 1 1
2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Cell Reference Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer
Modbus Status Register FF Modbus Status Register FF Number of Event records stored FF Number of Fault records stored FF Number of Maint records stored FF Additionnal data present FF Number of disturbance records. FF Oldest stored disturbance record. FF Number registers in current page. FF Disturbance record data [1-127] FF Disturbance record time stamp. FF SelectDisturbance record. FF Record Selection Command Register FF Record Control Command Register FF Event Type FF Modbus Adress FF Event Index FF Disturbance recorder status FF FileFormat FF IEC Time Format FF A Phase Watts FF B Phase Watts FF C Phase Watts FF A Phase VArs FF B Phase VArs FF C Phase VArs FF A Phase VA FF B Phase VA FF C Phase VA FF 3 Phase Watts FF 3 Phase VArs FF 3 Phase VA FF Zero Seq Power FF 3Ph W Fix Demand FF 3Ph VArs Fix Dem FF 3Ph W Peak Demand FF 3Ph VArs Peak Demand FF N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 1 40400 40401 30107 30110 30111 30934 40251 40306 30361 30363 30365 30367 30369 30371 30373 30375 30377 30379 30381 30383 30385 30387 30389 30391 30393 Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Command Command Data Data Data Data Setting Setting 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
01 01 02 03 04 05 6 7 8 09-87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
30001 30701 30100 30101 30102 30112 30800 30801 30802 30803 30930 40250 40400 40401 30107 30110 30111 30934 40250 40306 30360 30362 30364 30366 30368 30370 30372 30374 30376 30378 30380 30382 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392
G26 G26 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G18 G6 G13 G1 G1 G1 G1 G37 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Number of Disturbance Records (0 to 200) Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to 65535) Number of Registers in Current Page Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535) Timestamp of selected record Select Disturbance Record Record Selection Command register Record Control Command register Indicates type of event
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G1 VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION UNSIGNED INTEGER eg. 5678 stored as 5678 NUMERIC SETTING See 50300.3110.004 ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS Second character First character PLANT STATUS (1 REGISTER) Reg 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 G5 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 G6 0 1 2 3 4 G7 0 1 G8 (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 Plant Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On) CONTROL STATUS (1 REGISTER) Control Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Record Control Command Register No Operation Clear event Records Clear Fault Record Clear Maitenance Records Reset Indications VTS Indicate/Block Blocking Indication LOGIC INPUT STATUS Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
G2
G3 0x00FF 0xFF00 G4
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 DESCRIPTION Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 17 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 18 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 19 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 20 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 21 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 22 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 23 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 24 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 G10 0 1 2 G11 0 1 G12 0x007F 0x0FFF 0x9FBF 0xFFFF G13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 2 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 3 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 4 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 5 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 6 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 7 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 15 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 16 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 17 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 18 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 19 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 20 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 21 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 22 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 23 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 24 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 25 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 26 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 27 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 28 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 29 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 30 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 31 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 32 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) PASSWORD LEVEL (May not be needed see modbus) Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 YES/NO No Yes TIME AND DATE (4 REGISTERS) This will take the IEC 870 format as shown in ref [J] section 5.1.16 First register - Years Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes Fourth Register - Milli-seconds EVENT RECORD TYPE Latched alarm active Latched alarm inactive Self reset alarm active Self reset alarm inactive Relay event Opto event Protection event
G9
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 7 8 9 PAS UTILISE Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 DESCRIPTION Platform event Fault logged event Maintenance Record logged event I> Function Link I>1 VTS Block I>1 VTS Block Non-Directionnal I>2 VTS Block I>2 VTS Block Non-Directionnal I>3 VTS Block I>4 VTS Block Not Used Not Used DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS No Record Un-extracted Extracted FAULTED PHASE Start A Start B Start C Start N Trip A Trip B Trip C Trip N ACTIVE/INACTIVE Card not fitted Card failed Signal healthy No Signal Record Selection Command Register No Operation Select next event Accept Event Select next Disturbance Record Accept disturbance record Select Next Disturbance record page LANGUAGE English Francais Deutsch Espanol PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS) First password character Second password character Third password character Fourth password character NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD SECURITY. IEC870 Interface RS485 Fibre Optic PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2. Level 1 - Password required for level 2. Level 2 - No passwords required. Voltage Curve selection Disabled DT IDMT UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
G14
G15 0 1 2 G16 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 G17 0 1 2 3 G18 0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 G19 0 1 2 3 G20 (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000, 0x00FF 0x0000, 0xFF00 0x00FF, 0x0000 0xFF00, 0x0000
G21 0 1 G22 0 1 2 G23 0 1 2 G24 2 REGISTERS
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789 G25 1 REGISTER UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES Example 50.050 stored as 50050
G26 VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 G27 2 REGISTERS
Modbus Status Register RELAY STATUS In Service Status (1 = In Service / 0= Out Of Service) Minor Self Test Failure (1 = Failure / 0 = No failure) New autoextraction event available (1 = Available / 0 = Not Available) Time Synchronisation (=1 after Modbus time synch. Resets to 0 after 5 minutes unless it is time synched again. Other time sources do not affect this bit). New auto extraction disturbance record available (1 = Available / 0 = Not available) Fault (Not used - always 0). Trip LED status (1 = LED on, 0 = LED off). Alarm status summary (logical OR of all alarm status bits). Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused UNSIGNED LONG VALUE High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456 stored as 123456 SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary) POWER MULTIPLER All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a 2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27 Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary) For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110 For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110 SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (Product Dependent) VA VB VC VN IA IB IC IN IM V Checksync unasigned this mapping depend of the model (P441 P442 P444) 8/16/24 Optos These are example values. Need one to be unassigned 14/21/32 Relays 8 Feedback 72 - 1024 Internal Signals RECORDER TRIGGERING (2 REGISTERS, 32 BINARY FLAGS)
G28
1 REGISTER
G29
3 REGISTER
G30 G31
1 REGISTER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 G32 Digital channel assignment 0 to 1024 G33 (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010
Digital Channel 1 Bit 0 Digital Channel 1 Bit 1 Digital Channel 1 Bit 2 Digital Channel 1 Bit 3 Digital Channel 1 Bit 4
(0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 DESCRIPTION Digital Channel 1 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 0 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 1 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 2 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 3 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 4 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) TRIGGER MODE Single Extended Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers) Number of steps from minimum value expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G34 0 1 G35
G36 0 1 2 3 4 G37 0 1 G38c 0 1 2
Test Mode No Operation 3 Pole Test Pole A Test Pole B Test Pole C Test ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Enabled COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (Courier - EIA485) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
G38m 0 1 2 G38v 0 2 G38d 0 1 2 3 4 5 G39 0
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870) 1200 bits/s 2400 bits/s 4800 bits/s 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s COMMUNICATIONS PARITY Odd
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 1 2 DESCRIPTION Even None CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING None Undervoltage Differential Both CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL None Timer Frequency Both IDMT CURVE TYPE Disabled DT IEC S Invervse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse DIRECTION Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev VTS BLOCK Block Non-Directional POLARISATION Zero Sequence Neg Sequence MEASURING MODE Phase-Phase Phase-Neutral OPERATION MODE Any Phase Three Phase V0 INPUT Measured Derived FAULT LOCATION Distance Ohms % of Line DEFAULT DISPLAY Date & Time Description Plant Reference U, I, Freq Freq, P, Q
G40 0 1 2 3 4 5 G41 0 1 2 3 G42 0 1 2 3 G43 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 G44 0 1 2 G45 0 1 G46 0 1 G47 0 1 G48 0 1 G49 0 1 G51 0 1 2 G52 0 1 2 3 4
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G53 VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3 4 5 G54 0 1 G55 0 1 2 G56 0 1 2 3 4 5 G57 0 1 G58 0 1 2 G59 0 1 G60 0 1 G61 0 1 G62 0 1 2 DESCRIPTION SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS Primary Secondary CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL No Operation Trip Close PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE VA VB VC IA IB IC Data Transfer Domain PSL Settings PSL Configuration SEF SELECTION SEF Enabled Wattmetric SEF REF Enabled BATTERY STATUS Dead Healthy IDMT CURVE TYPE DT Inverse ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL Select via Menu Select via Optos SAVE AS No Operation Save Abort
G64 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G65 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G66
ISEF> Func Link ISEF>1 VTS Block ISEF>2 VTS Block ISEF>3 VTS Block ISEF>4 VTS Block ISEF>3 Block A/R ISEF>4 Block A/R Not Used Not Used F< Function Link F<1 U/V Block F<2 U/V Block F<3 U/V Block F<4 U/V Block Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used MESSAGE FORMAT
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 DESCRIPTION No Trigger Trigger L/H Trigger H/L THERMAL OVERLOAD Disabled Single Dual CB Fail Reset Options I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< VTS RESET MODE Manual Auto AUTORECLOSE MODE Opto Set Auto User Set Pulse Set
G67 0 1 2 G68 0 1 2 G69 0 1 G70 0 1 2 3
G71 0 1 2 3 G72 0 1 G73 0 1 G74 0 1 G75 0 1 G76 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G77 0 1 G78 0 1 2 G79 0 1 2 G80
PROTOCOL Courier IEC60870-5-103 Modbus DNP 3.0 START DEAD TIME Protection Reset CB Trips RECLAIM TIME if PROTECTION START Suspend Continue RESET LOCKOUT User Interface Select NonAuto Auto-Reclose after Control Close Enabled Inhibited TRANSFER MODE Prepare Rx Complete Rx Prepare Tx Complete Tx Rx Prepared Tx Prepared OK Error Auto-Reclose Out of Service In Service A/R Telecontrol No Operation Auto Non-auto Custom Settings Disabled Basic Complete Visible/Invisible
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 DESCRIPTION Invisible Visible Reset Lockout by User Interface CB Close A/R Protection blocking No Block Block Inst Prot A/R Status Auto Mode Non-auto Mode Live Line Started Elements(Product Specific) General Start Start I>1 Start I>2 Start I>3 Start I>4 Start I2> Start IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start DEF Start V<1 Start V<2 Start V>1 Start V>2 Start Broken Cond Start LOL Start Distance Start TOC Start Zero Seq. Pow. Start PAP Thermal Alarm
G81 0 1 G82 0 1 G83 0 1 2 G84 Modbus value+bit pos (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 Modbus value+bit pos (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000, 0x0001 0x0000, 0x0002 0x0000, 0x0004 0x0000, 0x0008 0x0000, 0x0010 0x0000, 0x0020 0x0000, 0x0040 0x0000, 0x0080 0x0000, 0x0100 0x0000, 0x0200 0x0000, 0x0400 0x0000, 0x0800 0x0000, 0x1000 0x0000, 0x2000 0x0000, 0x4000 0x0000, 0x8000 0x0001, 0x0000 0x0002, 0x0000 0x0004, 0x0000 0x0008, 0x0000 0x0010, 0x0000 0x0020, 0x0000 0x0040, 0x0000 0x0080, 0x0000 0x0100, 0x0000 0x0200, 0x0000
G85
Tripped Elements(1)(Product Specific) Any Trip Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip I2> Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip DEF Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip Broken line Trip Z1 Trip Z2 Trip Z3 Trip Zp Trip Z4 Trip Z2 Aided Trip LOL Trip Soft Tor Trip WI Trip CB Fail1
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0400, 0x0000 0x0800, 0x0000 0x1000, 0x0000 0x2000, 0x0000 0x4000, 0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 DESCRIPTION Trip CB Fail2 Trip Zero Seq. Pow. Trip PAP Trip Thermal Trip User
G86
Bit Description Tripped Elements(2) (Product Specific) (Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Bit Description Fault Alarms (Product Specific) (Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position) 0x0000,0x0001 VT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0002 CT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0004 CB Status Alarm 0x0000,0x0008 AR Lockout Shot > 0x0000,0x0010 V<1 Alarm 0x0000,0x0020 V<2 Alarm 0x0000,0x0040 V>1 Alarm 0x0000,0x0080 V>2 Alarm 0x0000,0x0100 COS Alarm 0x0000,0x0200 CVT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000
G87
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 DESCRIPTION
G88 0 1 G89 0 1 G90 0 1 2 3 G91 0 1 G92 0 1 G93 0 1 2 G94 0 1 G96 Bit Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Alarms Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled Main VT Location Line Bus Group Selection Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 A/R Protection Blocking Allow Tripping Block Tripping Lockout No Lockout Lockout Commission Test No Operation Apply Test Remove Test Commission Test No Operation Apply Test Alarm 1 Indexed Strings
General Alarm Prot'n Disabled f out of Range VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm Broken Cond. Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lockout F.F. Pre Lockout F.F. Lock Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy Control No C/S AR Lockout Shot > SG-Opto Invalid A/R Fail V<1 Alarm V<2 Alarm V>1 Alarm V>2 Alarm COS Alarm CVT Fail Alarm
G97 0 1
Distance Unit Kilometres Miles
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G98 VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3 4 G99 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G100 to G500 G101 0 1 2 3 G102 0 1 2 3 G103 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 DESCRIPTION Copy to No Operation Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 CB Control Disabled Local Remote Local+Remote Opto Opto+local Opto+Remote Opto+Rem+local ADD PRODUCT SPECIFIC DATA GROUPS HERE
Reclosing Mode on Single Phase tripping 1 1/3 1/3/3 1/3/3/3 Reclosing Mode on Three Phase tripping 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3 Synchro Check Mode Live Bus / Dead Line Dead Bus / Live Line Live Bus / Live Line
G105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G106 0 1 G107 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 G108 0 1 2 3 G109 0 1 2 3
Blocking type None Zone 1 unblocking Zones 1 and 2 unblocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 unblocking Blocking all zones Zone 1 blocking Zones 1 and 2 blocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 blocking Program Mode Standard Scheme Open Scheme Standard Scheme Basic + Z1X P.O.P. Z1 P.O.P. Z2 P.U.P. Z2 P.U.P. Fwd B.O.P. Z1 B.O.P. Z2 Signal Send Zone None CsZ1 CsZ2 CsZ4 Type of Scheme None PermZ1 PermZ2 PermFwd
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 4 5 DESCRIPTION BlkZ1 BlkZ2 Zone in Fault None Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone Programmable Zone 4 Alarm 2 Indexed Strings Alarm No Presents Datas Acq Alarm Validity Failure Acq Alarm Mode Test Acq Alarm Not Synchro Datas Acq Alarm user 1 Alarm user 2 Alarm user 3 Alarm user 4 Alarm user 5
G110 0 1 2 3 4 5 G111 Bit Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G112 0 1 2 G113 0 1 2 G114 0 1 2 G115 0 1 2 G116 0 1 2 3 G117 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 G118 Bit 0 Bit 1
Type of Scheme Logic on Aided DEF Shared Blocking Permissive Unblocking Mode None Loss of Guard Loss of Carrier Trip Mode for the distance protection Force 3 Poles Trip 1 Pole Trip before T2 1 Pole Trip before T3 Fault Type Phase-to-ground Fault Enabled Phase-to-phase Fault Enabled Both Enabled Weak-infeed Mode Disabled PAP Echo WI Trip & Echo Block A/R At T2 At T3 At Tzp LoL Trip I2> Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip Aided D.E.F Trip Zero. Seq. Power Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip PAP Trip Thermal Trip TOR SOTF Mode TOR Z1 Enabled TOR Z2 Enabled
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 DESCRIPTION TOR Z3 Enabled TOR All Zones Enabled TOR Dist. Scheme Enabled SOTF All Zones SOTF Level Detectors SOTF Z1 Enabled SOTF Z2 Enabled SOTF Z3 Enabled SOTF Z1 + Rev Enabled SOTF Z2 + Rev Enabled SOTF Dist. Scheme Enabled SOFT Disable Not Used Not Used Power-Swing Zone Blocking Z1&Z1x blocking Z2 Blocking Z3 Blocking Zp Blocking Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Zone Status Z1x Enabled Z2 Enabled Zp Enabled Z3 Enabled Z4 Enabled Not Used Not Used Not Used V<&V> MODE V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V>1 Trip V>2 Trip Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Plant Status All Poles Open Any Poles Closed Not used DIRECTION Directional Fwd Directional Rev TEST PORT STATUS (1 REGISTER) (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 Test Port Status 1 Test Port Status 2 Test Port Status 3 Test Port Status 4 Test Port Status 5 Test Port Status 6 Test Port Status 7 Test Port Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G119 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G120 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G121 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 G122 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit x G123 0 1 G124
G125
2 REGISTER
Measurements in IEEE floating point format
G130
1REGISTER Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Measurements Measurements and Location are not valid Measurements is valid Location is valid
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G131 0 1 2 G200 0 1 2 3 4 5 G201 0 1 2 3 4 G202 (2nd Reg, 1st Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 G203 0 1 2 G204 0 1 2 G205 0 1 2 3 4 VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Earth Fault O/C Zero Seq. Power Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Custom Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Controll Input Status (2 REGISTERS) Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Virtual Input No Operation Set Reset TEST MODE Disabled Test Mode Blocked CB Fail Reset Options I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< Disable Prot Reset Or I<
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G206 VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 G207 0 1 G208 0 1 2 G211 0 1 2 G212 0 1 2 G213 0 1 2 3 4 5 G215 0 1 G218 0 1 G231 0 1 G232 0 1 2 3 G233 0x00000001 0x00000002 0x00000004 0x00000008 0x00000010 0x00000020 0x00000040 0x00000080 0x00000100 0x00000200 0x00000400 0x00000800 0x00001000 0x00002000 0x00004000 0x00008000 0x00010000 0x00020000 0x00040000 0x00080000 0x00100000 0x00200000 0x00400000 DESCRIPTION COMMS MODE (RCUR1) IEC60870 FT1.2 10-bit PORT CONFIG (RCUR1) K Bus EIA485 (RS485) STATUS (RCUR1) K Bus OK EIA485 OK Fibre Optic Blocking Command Blk_Disable Blk_Direct Blk_Blocking Trip Command Trip_Disable Trip_Permissive Trip_Direct Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Trip Default Latched Remote device type Remote_PX40 Remote PX30 DIRECT ACCESS KEYS Disabled Enabled CONTROL INPUT COMMAND TEXT ON/OFF SET/RESET IN/OUT ENABLED/DISABLED HOTKEY ENABLED CONTROL INPUTS Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23
Part B: Data Types

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK 0x00800000 0x01000000 0x02000000 0x04000000 0x08000000 0x10000000 0x20000000 0x40000000 0x80000000 DESCRIPTION Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL TYPE Latched Pulsed ETHERNET PROTOCOL UCA 2.0 UCA 2.0 GOOSE Characteristic Standard 60%-80% 50% - 70 % Alarm Status 3 Battery fail Field Volt Fail Rear Comms fail GOOSE IED Absent NIC Not Fitted NIC No Response NIC Fatal Error NIC Soft. Reload Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Bad OSI Config. NIC Link Fail NIC SW Mis-Match IP Addr Conflict Reserved for InterMiCOM and other platform alarms RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000 Relay 33 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 34 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 35 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 36 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 37 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 38 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 39 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 40 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 41 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 42 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 43 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 44 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 45 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 46 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
G234 0 1 G235 0 1 G237 0 1 G250 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 G251
Part B: Data Types

TYPE G239 VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 G240 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 G302 0 1 2 3 4 5 DESCRIPTION IEC61850-9.2LE Electrical Fibre Optic Logical Node Arrangement LN 1 LN1(without I0)-LN2(I0) LN1-LN2(I0) LN1-LN2(6I) LN1-LN2(3 I) LN1-LN1B LN1-LN1B-LN2B LN1-LN2(6I)-LN1B LN1-LN2(I0)-LN1B 4 LN (I0) 4 LN (6i) CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element

DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_33 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_34 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_35 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_36 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_37 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_38 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_39 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_40 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_41 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_42 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_43 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_44 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_45 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_46 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_47 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_48 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_49 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_50 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_51 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_52 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_53 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_54 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_55 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_56 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_57 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_58 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_59 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_60 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_61 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_62 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_63 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_64 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_B Ordinal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 English Text
Relay Label 01 Relay Label 02 Relay Label 03 Relay Label 04 Relay Label 05 Relay Label 06 Relay Label 07 Relay Label 08 Relay Label 09 Relay Label 10 Relay Label 11 Relay Label 12 Relay Label 13 Relay Label 14 Relay Label 15 Relay Label 16 Relay Label 17 Relay Label 18 Relay Label 19 Relay Label 20 Relay Label 21 Relay Label 22 Relay Label 23 Relay Label 24 Relay Label 25 Relay Label 26 Relay Label 27 Relay Label 28 Relay Label 29 Relay Label 30 Relay Label 31 Relay Label 32 Relay Label 33 Relay Label 34 Relay Label 35 Relay Label 36 Relay Label 37 Relay Label 38 Relay Label 39 Relay Label 40 Relay Label 41 Relay Label 42 Relay Label 43 Relay Label 44 Relay Label 45 Relay Label 46 Relay Label 47 Relay Label 48 Relay Label 49 Relay Label 50 Relay Label 51 Relay Label 52 Relay Label 53 Relay Label 54 Relay Label 55 Relay Label 56 Relay Label 57 Relay Label 58 Relay Label 59 Relay Label 60 Relay Label 61 Relay Label 62 Relay Label 63 Relay Label 64 Opto Label 01 Opto Label 02 Opto Label 03 Opto Label 04 Opto Label 05 Opto Label 06 Opto Label 07 Opto Label 08 Opto Label 09 Opto Label 10 Opto Label 11 Opto Label 12 Opto Label 13 Opto Label 14 Opto Label 15 Opto Label 16 Opto Label 17 Opto Label 18 Opto Label 19 Opto Label 20 Opto Label 21 Opto Label 22 Opto Label 23 Opto Label 24 Opto Label 25 Opto Label 26 Opto Label 27 Opto Label 28 Opto Label 29 Opto Label 30 Opto Label 31 Opto Label 32 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 CB Aux A (52-A) CB Aux A (52-B) CB Aux B (52-A) CB Aux B (52-B)
Description
OUTPUT RELAY 1 OUTPUT RELAY 2 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 7 OUTPUT RELAY 8 OUTPUT RELAY 9 OUTPUT RELAY 10 OUTPUT RELAY 11 OUTPUT RELAY 12 OUTPUT RELAY 13 OUTPUT RELAY 14 OUTPUT RELAY 15 OUTPUT RELAY 16 OUTPUT RELAY 17 OUTPUT RELAY 18 OUTPUT RELAY 19 OUTPUT RELAY 20 OUTPUT RELAY 21 OUTPUT RELAY 22 OUTPUT RELAY 23 OUTPUT RELAY 24 OUTPUT RELAY 25 OUTPUT RELAY 26 OUTPUT RELAY 27 OUTPUT RELAY 28 OUTPUT RELAY 29 OUTPUT RELAY 30 OUTPUT RELAY 31 OUTPUT RELAY 32 OUTPUT RELAY 33 OUTPUT RELAY 34 OUTPUT RELAY 35 OUTPUT RELAY 36 OUTPUT RELAY 37 OUTPUT RELAY 38 OUTPUT RELAY 39 OUTPUT RELAY 40 OUTPUT RELAY 41 OUTPUT RELAY 42 OUTPUT RELAY 43 OUTPUT RELAY 44 OUTPUT RELAY 45 OUTPUT RELAY 46 OUTPUT RELAY 47 OUTPUT RELAY 48 OUTPUT RELAY 49 OUTPUT RELAY 50 OUTPUT RELAY 51 OUTPUT RELAY 52 OUTPUT RELAY 53 OUTPUT RELAY 54 OUTPUT RELAY 55 OUTPUT RELAY 56 OUTPUT RELAY 57 OUTPUT RELAY 58 OUTPUT RELAY 59 OUTPUT RELAY 60 OUTPUT RELAY 61 OUTPUT RELAY 62 OUTPUT RELAY 63 OUTPUT RELAY 64 OPTO ISOLATOR 1 OPTO ISOLATOR 2 OPTO ISOLATOR 3 OPTO ISOLATOR 4 OPTO ISOLATOR 5 OPTO ISOLATOR 6 OPTO ISOLATOR 7 OPTO ISOLATOR 8 OPTO ISOLATOR 9 OPTO ISOLATOR 10 OPTO ISOLATOR 11 OPTO ISOLATOR 12 OPTO ISOLATOR 13 OPTO ISOLATOR 14 OPTO ISOLATOR 15 OPTO ISOLATOR 16 OPTO ISOLATOR 17 OPTO ISOLATOR 18 OPTO ISOLATOR 19 OPTO ISOLATOR 20 OPTO ISOLATOR 21 OPTO ISOLATOR 22 OPTO ISOLATOR 23 OPTO ISOLATOR 24 OPTO ISOLATOR 25 OPTO ISOLATOR 26 OPTO ISOLATOR 27 OPTO ISOLATOR 28 OPTO ISOLATOR 29 OPTO ISOLATOR 30 OPTO ISOLATOR 31 OPTO ISOLATOR 32 Programmable LED 1 (By default TRIP A) Programmable LED 2 (By default TRIP B) Programmable LED 3 (By default TRIP C) Programmable LED 4 (By default GENERAL START) Programmable LED 5 (By default ZONE 1 + AIDED TRIP) Programmable LED 6 (By default FORWARD) Programmable LED 7 (By default REVERSE) Programmable LED 8 (By default AUTORECLOSE ENABLE) Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB
Source
RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS

DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_INTERNAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_1P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CLOSING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CTL_CHECK_SYNCH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_HEALTHY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BLK_PROTECTION DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRP_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_TRIP_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTA DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTB DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_Z1X_EXT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DEF_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISTANCE_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_ALL_VALUES DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_STUB_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_A_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_B_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_C_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_ZSP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_REC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_HEALT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_THERMAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TIMESYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_GENERAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_F_OUT_OF_RANGE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PRE_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_EFF_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LOCKOUT_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_STATUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_CONTROL_UNHEALTHLY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NO_CHECK_SYNC_CONTROL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_AR_LOCKOUT_MAX_SHOTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_SG_OPTO_INVALID DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_AR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_COS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BROKEN_COND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CVTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOPRESENTS_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VALIDITY_FAILURE_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_MODE_TEST_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOTSYNCHRO_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1ST_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_234TH_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_TRIP_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_DISCRIM Ordinal 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 English Text
CB Aux C (52-A) CB Aux C (52-B) SPAR Enable TPAR Enable A/R Internal A/R 1p In Prog. A/R 3p In Prog. A/R Close A/R Reclaim BAR Ext Chk Synch OK CB Healthy BLK Protection Force 3P Trip Man. Close CB Man. Trip CB CB Discrepancy External Trip A External Trip B External Trip C DIST. Chan Recv DEF. Chan Recv DIST. COS DEF. COS Z1X Extension MCB/VTS Bus MCB/VTS Line IN>1 Timer Block IN>2 Timer Block DEF Timer Block I>1 Timer Block I>2 Timer Block I>3 Timer Block I>4 Timer Block I2> Timer Block V<1 Timer Block V<2 Timer Block V>1 Timer Block V>2 Timer Block DIST. Tim. Block Reset Lockout Reset All values Reset Latches Stub Bus Enable User Trip A User Trip B User Trip C ZSP Timer Block PAP Tele Trip CR PAP Tele Trip Hea PAP Timer Block IN>3 Timer Block IN>4 Timer Block Reset Thermal Time Synchro General Alarm Prot'n Disabled F out of Range VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock F.F. Pre Lockout
Description
Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Enable internal single pole autorecloser Enable internal three pole autorecloser Give internal autorecloser present (visible) One-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress Three-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress Circuit Breaker closing order from external autoreclose External autorecloser in reclaim Block internal autoreclose Autorisation signal from external check Synchroniser for reclosing with internal A/R Circuit breaker operational (gas pressure, mechanical state) Block all protection functions (21/67N/50/51/) Three pole tripping only Circuit breaker manual close - order received Circuit breaker manual trip - order received CB Discrepancy (one pole open) Phase A trip by external protection relay Phase B trip by external protection relay Phase C trip by external protection relay Signal receive on main channel (Distance) Signal receive on DEF channel Distance scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard (Carrier out of service) DEF scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard Zone 1 Extension Input Fuse failure on busbar VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Fuse failure on line VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Block earth fault stage 1 time delay Block earth fault stage 2 time delay Block aided DEF time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 1 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 2 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 3 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 4 time delay Block negative sequence overcurrent time delay Block phase undervoltage stage 1 time delay Block phase undervoltage stage 2 time delay Block phase overvoltage stage 1 time delay Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delay Block distance element time delay CB monitoring lockout reset Reset all values of CB monitoring Reset all permanent alarms + led and relay lached Enable I>4 Element for stub bus protection (isolator of HV line open status isolator must be connected to an opto input) Internal input for trip logic A Internal input for trip logic B Internal input for trip logic C Zero Sequence Power - Timer Block PAP Carrier Receive for teletransmission PAP Carrier Out of Service (DT trip decision) Timer Block for frosen every timer initiated with PAP function Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>3 function Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>4 function Reset Thermal Overload Protection External time synchronisation input Groupment of all alarms Test mode enabled every protection out of order Frequency tracking not working correctly Fuse failure indication (VT alarm) Current transformers supervision indication Circuit breaker failure on any trip Broken current maintenance alarm (1st level) Broken current lockout alarm (2nd level) Alarm on number of circuit breaker operations Lockout on number of circuit breaker operations Alarm on CB excessive operating time CB locked out due to excessive operating time Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip pre lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Lockout alarm Alarm Circuit Breaker Alarm CB Fail for manual trip command Alarm CB fail for manual closing command Alarm CB performed by unhealthy condition Autoreclosed works without checksynchronism Autoreclose lockout following final programmed attempt Setting group selected via opto (1 & 2 only) input invalid No check sync / autorecloser failed 1st stage undervoltage alarm 2nd stage undervoltage alarm 1st stage overvoltage alarm 2nd stage overvoltage alarm HF carrier anomaly alarm broken Conductor Alarm Alarm for capacitive voltage transformer Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units missing Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units failed Alarm NCIT - Merge Units in test mode Alarm NCIT - frames not syncho Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Autorecloser Close command to CB One-pole autoreclose cycle in progress Three-pole autoreclose cycle in progress First high speed autoreclose cycle in progress Further autoreclose cycles in progress Autorecloser signal to force all trips to be 3 Ph Reclaim timer timeout in progress Discrim. Time window in progress
Source
PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) All protection PSL (IN) PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) PSL (IN) VTS PSL (IN) VTS PSL (IN) Earth Fault PSL (IN) Earth Fault PSL (IN) DEF PSL (IN) I>1 PSL (IN) I>2 PSL (IN) I>3 PSL (IN) I>4 PSL (IN) I>4 PSL (IN) V<1 PSL (IN) V<2 PSL (IN) V>1 PSL (IN) V>2 PSL (IN) Distance PSL (IN) CB Monitoring PSL (IN) CB Monitoring PSl (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) ZSP PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) VT Supervision PSL (OUT) CT Supervision PSL (OUT) Breaker Fail PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) V<1 PSL (OUT) V<2 PSL (OUT) V>1 PSL (OUT) V>2 PSL(OUT) Unblocking logic PSL(OUT) Broken conductor PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser
F.F. Lock
Lockout Alarm CB Status Alam Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthty Control No C/S AR Lockout Shot> SG-opto Invalid A/R Fail V<1 Alarm V<2 Alarm V>1 Alarm V>2 Alarm COS Alarm Brok. Cond. Alarm CVT Alarm Analog In Alarm Val/Fail Acq Al. Test Mode Acq Synchro Acq Al. alarm user 1 alarm user 2 alarm user 3 alarm user 4 alarm user 5 A/R Close A/R 1P In Prog A/R 3P In Prog A/R 1st In Prog A/R 234 In Prog A/R Trip 3P A/R Reclaim AR Discrim.

DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_FORCE_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_ACC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_PERM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1X DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Zp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rdinal 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 English Text
A/R Enable A/R SPAR Enable A/R TPAR Enable A/R Lockout A/R Force Sync. Check Synch. OK V< Dead Line V> Live Line V< Dead Bus V> Live Bus Ctrl Cls In Prog DIST Sig. Send DIST UNB CR DIST Fwd DIST Rev DIST Trip A DIST Trip B DIST Trip C DIST Start A DIST Start B DIST Start C DIST Sch. Accel. DIST Sch. Perm. DIST Sch. Block. Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Zp T1 T2 T3 T4 Tzp WI Trip A WI Trip B WI Trip C Power Swing Reversal Guard DEF Sig. Send DEF UNB CR DEF Rev DEF Fwd DEF Start A DEF Start B DEF Start C DEF Trip A DEF Trip B DEF Trip C IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>1 Start IN>2 Start V< Start Any A V< Start Any B V< Start Any C V<1 Start V<2 Start V<1 Trip V<2 Trip V> Start Any A V> Start Any B V> Start Any C V>1 Start V>2 Start V>1 Trip V>2 Trip I2> Start I2> Trip I> Start Any A I> Start Any B I> Start Any C I>1 Start I>2 Start I>3 Start I>4 Start I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip SOTF Enable TOR Enable TOC Start A TOC Start B TOC Start C Any start 1ph Fault 2ph Fault 3ph Fault Any Trip Any Int. Trip A Any Int. Trip B Any Int. Trip C Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip C 1P Trip 3P Trip Brk.Conduct.Trip Loss. Load Trip SOTF/TOR Trip tBF1 Trip tBF2 Trip Control Trip Control Close VTS Fast CB Aux A
Description
Autorecloser enabled / in service Single pole autorecloser activated Three pole autorecloser activated Autorecloser locked-out (no autoreclosure possible until reset) Force synchronism check to be made Check Synchronism conditions satisfied Check Synch. Dead Line Check Synch. Live Line Check Synch. Dead Bus Check Synch. Live Bus Manual (control) close in progress Distance protection schemes - Signal Send Unblock main channel received Distance protection: Forward fault detected Distance protection: Reverse fault detected Distance protection: Phase A trip Distance protection: Phase B trip Distance protection: Phase C trip Distance protection started on phase A Distance protection started on phase B Distance protection started on phase C Distance scheme Accelerating Distance scheme Permissive Distance scheme Blocking Fault in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 extended Fault in zone 2 Fault in zone 3 Fault in zone 4 Fault in zone P Timer in zone 1 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 2 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 3 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 4 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone p elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Phase A trip on weak infeed Phase B trip on weak infeed Phase C trip on weak infeed Power swing detected Current reversal guard logic in action DEF protection schemes - Signal Send Unblock DEF channel Channel Aided DEF: reverse fault Channel Aided DEF: forward fault Channel Aided DEF: start phase A Channel Aided DEF: start phase B Channel Aided DEF: start phase C Channel Aided DEF: trip phase A Channel Aided DEF: trip phase B Channel Aided DEF: trip phase C Earth fault stage 1 trip Earth fault stage 2 trip Earth fault stage 1 start Earth fault stage 2 start Any undervoltage start detected on phase A Any undervoltage start detected on phase B Any undervoltage start detected on phase C Undervoltage stage 1 start Undervoltage stage 2 start Undervoltage stage 1 trip Undervoltage stage 2 trip Any overvoltage start detected on phase A Any overvoltage start detected on phase B Any overvoltage start detected on phase C Overvoltage stage 1 start Overvoltage stage 2 start Overvoltage stage 1 trip Overvoltage stage 2 trip Negative Sequence Current Start Negative Sequence Current Trip Any overcurrent start for phase A Any overcurrent start for phase B Any overcurrent start for phase C Overcurrent stage 1 start Overcurrent stage 2 start Overcurrent stage 3 start Overcurrent stage 4 start Overcurrent stage 1 trip Overcurrent stage 2 trip Overcurrent stage 3 trip Overcurrent stage 4 trip Switch On To Fault enable Trip On Reclose enable Trip on Close start on phase A Trip on Close start on phase B Trip on Close start on phase C Any protection start Single phase fault Two phase fault Three phase fault Single or three pole trip or external protection trip Any internal protection A phase trip Any internal protection B phase trip Any internal protection C phase trip Any trip A (internal or external protection) Any trip B (internal or external protection) Any trip C (internal or external protection) Single pole trip (internal or external) Three pole trip (internal or external) Broken conductor trip Loss of load trip Switch on to fault trip or trip on reclose Breaker fail trip from tBF1 Breaker fail trip from tBF2 Control trip command from user Control close command from user Unstantaneous unconfirmed fuse failure internal detection CB Phase A status
Source
PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) CB Control PSL (OUT) Distance PSL(OUT) Unblocking Logic PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Unblocking logic PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 1 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 2 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 1 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 2 PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) TOR PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) Broken Cond. PSL (OUT) Loss of load PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) Breaker failure PSL (OUT) Breaker failure PSL (OUT) CB control PSL (OUT) CB control PSL (OUT) VTS PSL (OUT) CB status

DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ALL_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AV_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AM_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CVMR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CROSS_COUNTRY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_N DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRES_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRE_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TRACE_TRIG_OK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED371 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED372 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED373 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED374 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED375 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED376 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED377 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED378 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED379 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED380 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED381 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED382 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED383 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED384 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED385 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED386 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED387 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED388 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED389 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED390 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED391 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED392 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED393 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED394 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED395 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED396 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED397 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED398 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED399 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED400 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED401 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED402 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED403 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED404 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED405 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED406 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED407 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED408 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED409 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED410 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED411 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED412 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED413 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED414 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED415 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED416 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED417 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED418 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED419 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED420 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED421 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED422 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED423 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED424 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED425 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED426 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED427 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_11 Ordinal 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 English Text
CB Aux B CB Aux C Any Pole Dead All Pole Dead DIST Fwd No Filt DIST Rev No Filt DIST Convergency Cross Count. Flt ZSP Start ZSP Trip Z1 Not Filtrated Out Of Step S. Swing Out Of Step Conf S. Swing Conf Dist Start N IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IN>3 Start IN>4 Start PAP Trip A PAP Trip B PAP Trip C PAP Trip IN PAP Start A PAP Start B PAP Start C
Description
CB Phase B status CB Phase C status Any circuit breaker pole dead (one or more poles open) All circuit breaker poles dead (breaker open 3 phase) Distance protection: Forward fault detected not filted Distance protection: Reverse fault detected not filted Distance protection: Internal characteristic Cross Country Fault Zero Sequence Power - Start Zero Sequence Power - Trip Z1 decision not filtered by phase selection Start of an Out of Step Detection (1st cycle) Start of Stable Swing (1st cycle) Out of Step Confirmed (number of cycles reached) Stable Swing confirmed (number of cycles reached) Start of distance protection for phase to ground fault Trip decision from IN>3 function (timer issued) Trip decision from IN>4 function (timer issued) Start of IN>3 fucntion (timer initiated) Start of IN>4 fucntion (timer initiated) Trip A Phase decision from PAP function Trip B Phase decision from PAP function Trip C Phase decision from PAP function Trip decision from PAP function (Ground Fault detected) Phase A Start with PAP function Phase B Start with PAP function Phase C Start with PAP function Residual current detected by PAP function PAP Picks up by voltage detectors (timer initiated) Triggering trace has operated correctly Alarm from Thermal Overload function picks up Trip with Thermal Overload fucntion (timer issued) PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 1 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 2 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 3 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 4 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 5 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 6 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 7 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 8 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 9 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 10 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 11
Source
PSL (OUT) CB status PSL (OUT) CB status PSL (OUT) Poledead PSL (OUT) Poledead PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) ZSP PSL (OUT) ZSP PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer
PAP Pres IN
PAP Pre Start Trace Trig OK Thermal Alarm Trip Thermal Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 Relay 17 Relay 18 Relay 19 Relay 20 Relay 21 Relay 22 Relay 23 Relay 24 Relay 25 Relay 26 Relay 27 Relay 28 Relay 29 Relay 30 Relay 31 Relay 32 Relay 33 Relay 34 Relay 35 Relay 36 Relay 37 Relay 38 Relay 39 Relay 40 Relay 41 Relay 42 Relay 43 Relay 44 Relay 45 Relay 46 Relay 47 Relay 48 Relay 49 Relay 50 Relay 51 Relay 52 Relay 53 Relay 54 Relay 55 Relay 56 Relay 57 Relay 58 Relay 59 Relay 60 Relay 61 Relay 62 Relay 63 Relay 64 LED Con IN 1 LED Con IN 2 LED Con IN 3 LED Con IN 4 LED Con IN 5 LED Con IN 6 LED Con IN 7 LED Con IN 8 Timer in 1 Timer in 2 Timer in 3 Timer in 4 Timer in 5 Timer in 6 Timer in 7 Timer in 8 Timer in 9 Timer in 10 Timer in 11

DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FAULT_RECORD_TRIG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_FIELD_VOLT_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_REAR_COMMS_FAIL_ALARM_66 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSE_IED_MISSING_ALARM_67 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM_68 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_69 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_70 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_71 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_TCP_IP_CONFIG_72 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_OSI_CONFIG_73 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_74 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_SOFTWARE_MISMATCH_ALARM_75 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_76 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_LOOPBACK_ALARM_77 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE_ALARM_78 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_DCD_ALARM_79 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_CHANNEL_ALARM_80 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_BACKUP_SETTING_ALARM_81 Ordinal 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 English Text
Timer in 12 Timer in 13 Timer in 14 Timer in 15 Timer in 16 Timer out 1 Timer out 2 Timer out 3 Timer out 4 Timer out 5 Timer out 6 Timer out 7 Timer out 8 Timer out 9 Timer out 10 Timer out 11 Timer out 12 Timer out 13 Timer out 14 Timer out 15 Timer out 16 Fault_REC_TRIG Battery Fail Field Volt Fail Comm2 H/W FAIL GOOSE IED Absent NIC Not Fitted NIC No Response NIC Fatal Error NIC Soft. Reload Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Bad OSI Config. NIC Link Fail NIC SW Mis-Match IP Addr Conflict IM Loopback IM Message Fail IM Data CD Fail IM Chanel Fail Back Up Setting
Description
PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 12 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 13 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 14 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 15 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 16 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 1 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 2 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 3 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 4 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 5 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 6 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 7 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 8 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 9 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 10 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 11 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 12 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 13 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 14 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 15 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 16 Trigger for Fault Recorder Alarm battery fail Alarm field voltage Alarm second rear port Absence of GOOSE message from dedicated IED Alarm Ethernet (board not fitted) Alarm no response from Ethernet Board Alarm Fatal Error from Ethernet Board Alarm Ethernet Board (Configuraiton in progress) Alarm bad configuration TCP/IP Address Alarm Ethernet Alarm Ethernet Link Fail Alarm Ethernet version not compatible Alam Ethernet IP Adress Conflict InterMiCOM indication that loopback testing is in progress InterMiCOM message failure alarm InterMiCOM data channel detect fail InterMiCOM message channel fail Back up setting alarm
Source
Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer FRT PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT)
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS
Modbus Address Start End Col FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 8 8 FF FF FF 1 FF 1 FF FF FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Row A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 01 0C 0D 0E 40 41 50 51 52 D0 6 F2 F3 8 11 5 6 02 03 04 3 8C 5 8D 8E 05 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 Group Modbus GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB G26 G4 G5 G1 G9 G9 G96 G96 G96 G1 G3 G27 G27 G3 G3 G17 G59 G1 G1 G1 G12 G13 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G16 G84 G85 G130 G12 G87 G25 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Cell Type Min
Max
Step
Read and write access of Output Relays 1 Contact -1. 2 Contact -2. 3 Contact -3. 4 Contact - 4. 5 Contact - 5. 6 Contact - 6. 7 Contact - 7. 8 Contact -8. 9 Contact - 9. 10 Contact -10. 11 Contact -11. 12 Contact -12. 13 Contact -13. 14 Contact -14. 15 Contact -15. 16 Contact -16. 17 Contact -17. 18 Contact -18. 19 Contact -19. 20 Contact -20. 21 Contact -21. 22 Contact -22. 23 Contact -23. 24 Contact -24. 25 Contact - 25. 26 Contact - 26. 27 Contact - 27. 28 Contact - 28. 29 Contact - 29. 30 Contact -30. 31 Contact -31. 32 Contact -32. 33 Contact -33. 34 Contact -34. 35 Contact -35. 36 Contact -36. 37 Contact -37. 38 Contact -38. 39 Contact -39. 40 Contact -40. 41 Contact -41. 42 Contact -42. 43 Contact -43. 44 Contact -44. 45 Contact -45. 46 Contact -46. Read only access of the Opto-Isolators 10001 Input -1 10002 Input -2 10003 Input -3 10004 Input -4 10005 Input -5 10006 Input -6 10007 Input -7 10008 Input -8 10009 Input -9 10010 Input -10 10011 Input -11 10012 Input -12 10013 Input -13 10014 Input -14 10015 Input -15 10016 Input -16 10017 Input -17 10018 Input -18 10019 Input -19 10020 Input -20 10021 Input -21 10022 Input -22 10023 Input -23 10024 Input -24 Read only access of Data 30001 30001 Modbus Status Register 30002 30002 Plant Status 30004 30004 Control Status 30006 30006 Active Group 30007 30008 Relay O/P Status 1 30009 30010 Relay O/P Status 2 30011 30012 Alarm Status 1 30013 30014 Alarm Status 2 30015 30016 Alarm Status 3 30017 30017 Access Level 30020 30035 Model Number 30036 30037 Maint Type 30038 30039 Maint Data 30044 30051 Serial Number 30052 30059 Software Ref. 1 30090 30090 IRIG-B Status 30091 30091 Battery Status 30100 30100 Number of Event records stored 30101 30101 Number of Fault records stored 30102 30102 Number of Maint records stored 30103 30106 Time & Date 30107 30107 Event Type 30108 30109 Event Value 30110 30110 Modbus Adress 30111 30111 Event Index 30112 30112 Additionnal data present 30113 30113 Active Group 30114 30114 Faulted Phase 30115 30116 Start Elements 30117 30118 Trip Elements 30119 30119 Validities 30120 30123 Time Stamp 30124 30125 Fault Alarms 30126 30126 System Frequency 30127 30128 Fault Duration 30129 30130 Relay Trip Time 30131 30132 Fault Location 30133 30134 Fault Location 30135 30136 Fault Location
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
Modbus Address Start 30137 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 30200 30202 30203 30205 30206 30208 30212 30214 30218 30220 30222 30230 30232 30233 30235 30236 30238 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30253 30255 30263 30264 30266 30267 30269 30270 30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315 30318 30321 30324 30327 30330 30333 30336 30339 30340 30341 30342 30343 30346 30349 30352 30360 30362 30364 30366 30368 30370 30372 30374 30376 30378 30380 30382 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392 30434 30600 30601 30602 30603 30605 30607 30609 30611 30612 30701 30702 30704 30706 30708 30710 30712 30714 30717 30720 30721 30722 30723 30725 30727 30729 30731 30733 30735 30737 30739 End 30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30153 30201 30202 30204 30205 30207 30208 30213 30214 30219 30221 30223 30231 30232 30234 30235 30237 30238 30240 30241 30243 30244 30246 30247 30249 30250 30252 30254 30256 30263 30265 30266 30268 30269 30270 30302 30305 30308 30311 30314 30317 30320 30323 30326 30329 30332 30335 30338 30339 30340 30341 30342 30345 30348 30351 30354 30361 30363 30365 30367 30369 30371 30373 30375 30377 30379 30381 30383 30385 30387 30389 30391 30393 30434 30600 30601 30602 30604 30606 30608 30609 30611 30612 30701 30703 30705 30707 30709 30711 30713 30716 30719 30720 30721 30722 30724 30726 30728 30730 30732 30734 30736 30738 30740 Fault Location IA IB IC VAN VBN VCN Fault Resistance Fault in Zone IA Magnitude IA Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC Phase Angle IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude VCN Phase Angle VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude Frequency C/S Voltage Mag C/S Voltage Ang IM Magnitude IM Angle Slip Frequency A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand Thermal State CB A Operations CB B Operations CB C Operations Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Total 1P Reclosures Total 3P Reclosures Modbus Status Register Measurements1 - IA Magnitude Measurements1 - IB Magnitude Measurements1 - IC Magnitude Measurements1 - VAB Magnitude Measurements1 - VBC Magnitude Measurements1 - VCA Magnitude Measurements2 -3 phase Watts Measurements2 -3 phase Vars Measurements2 -3 phase powerFactor Measurements1 -Frequency Test Port Status DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128 DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256 Col 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 FF 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F Row 14 15 16 17 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0A 0D 0E 0F 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 22 23 24 25 26 2A 2B 2C 2F 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 16 17 20 21 EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0A 01 Group Modbus G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G110 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G30 G30 G30 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G30 G1 G1 G1 G125 G125 G125 G25 G1 G1 G26 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G30 G30 G124 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Min
Max
Step
4 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Modbus Address Start 30741 30743 30745 30747 30749 30751 30753 30755 30757 30759 30761 30763 30765 30767 30769 30771 30773 30775 30777 30779 30781 30783 30785 30800 30801 30802 30803 30930 30934 31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086 310000 310001 310002 310004 310006 310008 310010 310012 310014 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021 End 30742 30744 30746 30748 30750 30752 30754 30756 30758 30760 30762 30764 30766 30768 30770 30772 30774 30776 30778 30780 30782 30784 30786 30800 30801 30802 30929 30933 30934 31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087 310000 310001 310003 310005 310007 310009 310011 310013 310015 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021 DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1022 - 992 Number of disturbance records. Oldest stored disturbance record. Number registers in current page. Disturbance record data [1-127] Disturbance record time stamp. Disturbance recorder status Grp1 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp2 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID IM Input Status IM Output Status Rx Direct Count Rx Perm Count Rx Block Count Rx NewDataCount Rx ErroredCount Lost Messages Elapsed Time Data CD Status FrameSync Status Message Status Channel Status IM H/W Status Loopback Status Col 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F FF FF FF FF FF FF B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Row 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 6 7 8 09-87 88 8F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 1 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 30 41 42 43 44 45 52 Group Modbus G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G10 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Min
Max
Step
Read and write access of Settings 40001 40002 Password 40004 40011 Description 40012 40019 Plant Reference 40020 40020 Frequency 40021 40021 CB Trip/Close 40022 40022 Password Control 40023 40024 Password Level 1 40025 40026 Password Level 2 40100 40100 Select Event 40101 40101 Select Fault 40102 40102 Select Report 40103 40103 Reset Demand 40104 40104 Reset Thermal 40140 40140 Reset CB Data 40141 40141 Reset Total A/R 40151 40151 Broken I^ 40152 40152 I^ Maintenance 40153 40154 I^ Maintenance 40155 40155 I^ Lockout 40156 40157 I^ Lockout 40158 40158 N CB Ops Maint 40159 40159 N CB Ops Maint 40160 40160 N CB Ops Lock 40161 40161 N CB Ops Lock 40162 40162 CB Time Maint 40163 40164 CB Time Maint 40165 40165 CB Time Lockout 40166 40167 CB Time Lockout 40168 40168 Fault Freq Lock 40169 40169 Fault Freq Count 40170 40171 Fault Freq Time 40172 40172 Lockout Reset 40173 40173 Reset Lockout by 40174 40174 Man Close RstDly 40200 40200 CB Control by 40201 40201 Manual Close Pulse Time 40202 40202 Trip Pulse Time 40203 40203 Man Close Delay 40204 40204 A/R Single Pole 40205 40205 A/R Three Pole 40206 40207 Healthy Window 40208 40209 C/S Window 40250 40250 SelectDisturbance record. 40251 40251 Select dist data format 40300 40303 Date/Time 40304 40304 IRIG-B Sync 40305 40305 Battery Alarm 40306 40306 IEC Time Format 40400 40400 Record Selection Command Register 40401 40401 Record Control Command Register 40402 40402 Restore Defaults 40403 40403 Setting Group 40404 40404 Active Settings
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 FF FF 8 8 8 FF FF FF 9 9 9
2 4 5 9 10 D1 D2 D3 1 6 F0 25 3 8 0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 7 8 5 6 89 90 1 4 7 91 8A 8B 1 2 3
G20 G3 G3 G1 G55 G22 G20 G20 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G11 G11 G2 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G88 G1 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G35 G11 G81 G2 G99 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G35 G35 G1 G1 G12 G37 G37 G37 G18 G6 G53 G61 G90
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Setting Setting
65 32 32 50 0 0 65 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1*NM1 0 1*NM1 0 1 0 1 0 0,005 0 0,005 0 0 0 0 0 0.01 0 0.1 0.1 0.01 0 0 0.01 0.01 1
90 163 163 60 2 2 90 90 249 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 1 25000*NM1 1 25000*NM1 1 10000 1 10000 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 9999 9999 1 1 600 7 10 5 600 1 1 9999 9999 65535
1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0,1 1 1*NM1 1 1*NM1 1 1 1 1 1 0,001 1 0,001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.01 0.01 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 24 4 5 1 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Modbus Address Start 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40440 40500 40502 40503 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 40520 40521 40522 40523 40524 40525 40526 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 40545 40547 40549 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638 40639 40640 40641 End 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40440 40501 40502 40504 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 40520 40521 40522 40523 40524 40525 40526 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 40545 40547 40549 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638 40639 40640 40641 Save Changes Copy From Copy to Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Dist. Protection Power-Swing Back-Up I> Neg Sequence O/C Broken Conductor Earth Fault Prot Aided D.E.F Volt Protection CB Fail & I< Supervision System Checks Thermal Overload Internal A/R InterMiCOM Main VT Primary Main VT Sec'y C/S VT Primary C/S VT Secondary Phase CT Primary Phase CT Sec'y Mcomp CT Primary Mcomp CT Sec'y C/S Input Main VT Location Alarm Event Relay O/P Event Opto Input Event System Event Fault Rec Event Maint Rec Event Protection Event DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128 DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256 DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1022 - 992 Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Input 1 Input 1 Trigger Digital Input 2 Input 2 Trigger Digital Input 3 Input 3 Trigger Digital Input 4 Input 4 Trigger Digital Input 5 Input 5 Trigger Digital Input 6 Input 6 Trigger Digital Input 7 Input 7 Trigger Digital Input 8 Input 8 Trigger Digital Input 9 Input 9 Trigger Digital Input 10 Input 10 Trigger Digital Input 11 Input 11 Trigger Digital Input 12 Input 12 Trigger Digital Input 13 Input 13 Trigger Digital Input 14 Input 14 Trigger Digital Input 15 Input 15 Trigger Digital Input 16 Col 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C Row 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0D 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 24 40 1 2 3 4 7 8 0D 0E 0F 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A Group Modbus G62 G90 G98 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G131 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G35 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G40 G89 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G2 G2 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cell Type Command Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 80*V1 100 80*V2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000000 140*V1 1000000 140*V2 30000 5 30000 5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10.5 100 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1*V1 1 1*V2 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 31 0.01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Modbus Address Start 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40859 40861 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40933 40935 40950 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964 40965 40966 End 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40860 40862 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40934 40935 40951 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964 40965 40966 Input 16 Trigger Digital Input 17 Input 17 Trigger Digital Input 18 Input 18 Trigger Digital Input 19 Input 19 Trigger Digital Input 20 Input 20 Trigger Digital Input 21 Input 21 Trigger Digital Input 22 Input 22 Trigger Digital Input 23 Input 23 Trigger Digital Input 24 Input 24 Trigger Digital Input 25 Input 25 Trigger Digital Input 26 Input 26 Trigger Digital Input 27 Input 27 Trigger Digital Input 28 Input 28 Trigger Digital Input 29 Input 29 Trigger Digital Input 30 Input 30 Trigger Digital Input 31 Input 31 Trigger Digital Input 32 Input 32 Trigger Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Demand Interval Distance Unit Fault Location Remote Address Inactivity Timer Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity Parity Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8 Test Mode Test Pattern 1 Test Pattern 2 Contact Test Test LEDs Autoreclose Test Global threshold Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 Opto Filter Cntl Characteristic Ctrl I/P Status Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Col 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Row 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 50 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 Group Modbus G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G52 G54 G54 G56 G1 G2 G97 G51 G1 G2 G38 G38 G39 G39 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G204 G9 G9 G93 G94 G36 G200 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G8 G1 G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Min
Max 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 6 1 1 5 3 99 1 2 247 30 1 1 2 2 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 1 4294967295 16383 2 1 4 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4294967295 1 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Modbus Address Start 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410100 410108 410116 410124 410132 410140 410148 410156 410164 410172 410180 410188 410196 410204 410212 410220 410228 410236 410244 410252 410260 410268 410276 410284 410292 410300 410308 410316 410324 410332 410340 End 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410107 410115 410123 410131 410139 410147 410155 410163 410171 410179 410187 410195 410203 410211 410219 410227 410235 410243 410251 410259 410267 410275 410283 410291 410299 410307 410315 410323 410331 410339 410347 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 Control Input 1 Ctrl Command 1 Control Input 2 Ctrl Command 2 Control Input 3 Ctrl Command 3 Control Input 4 Ctrl Command 4 Control Input 5 Ctrl Command 5 Control Input 6 Ctrl Command 6 Control Input 7 Ctrl Command 7 Control Input 8 Ctrl Command 8 Control Input 9 Ctrl Command 9 Control Input 10 Ctrl Command 10 Control Input 11 Ctrl Command 11 Control Input 12 Ctrl Command 12 Control Input 13 Ctrl Command 13 Control Input 14 Ctrl Command 14 Control Input 15 Ctrl Command 15 Control Input 16 Ctrl Command 16 Control Input 17 Ctrl Command 17 Control Input 18 Ctrl Command 18 Control Input 19 Ctrl Command 19 Control Input 20 Ctrl Command 20 Control Input 21 Ctrl Command 21 Control Input 22 Ctrl Command 22 Control Input 23 Ctrl Command 23 Control Input 24 Ctrl Command 24 Control Input 25 Ctrl Command 25 Control Input 26 Ctrl Command 26 Control Input 27 Ctrl Command 27 Control Input 28 Ctrl Command 28 Control Input 29 Ctrl Command 29 Control Input 30 Ctrl Command 30 Control Input 31 Ctrl Command 31 Control Input 32 Ctrl Command 32 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Col 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 Row 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 10 11 14 15 18 19 1C 1D 20 21 24 25 28 29 2C 2D 30 31 34 35 38 39 3C 3D 40 41 44 45 48 49 4C 4D 50 51 54 55 58 59 5C 5D 60 61 64 65 68 69 6C 6D 70 71 74 75 78 79 7C 7D 80 81 84 85 88 89 8C 8D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Group Modbus G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cell Type Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Max 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Modbus Address Start 410348 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410520 410522 410523 410524 410525 410527 410528 410529 410530 410532 410533 410534 410535 410537 410538 410539 410540 410542 410543 410544 410545 410547 410548 410549 410550 410552 410553 410554 410555 410557 410558 410559 410560 End 410355 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410521 410522 410523 410524 410526 410527 410528 410529 410531 410532 410533 410534 410536 410537 410538 410539 410541 410542 410543 410544 410546 410547 410548 410549 410551 410552 410553 410554 410556 410557 410558 410559 410561 Control Input 32 Source Address Received Address Baud Rate Remote Device Ch Statistics Reset Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test Pattern IM Msg Alarm Lvl IM1 Cmd Type IM1 FallBackMode IM1 DefaultValue IM1 FrameSyncTim IM2 Cmd Type IM2 FallBackMode IM2 DefaultValue IM2 FrameSyncTim IM3 Cmd Type IM3 FallBackMode IM3 DefaultValue IM3 FrameSyncTim IM4 Cmd Type IM4 FallBackMode IM4 DefaultValue IM4 FrameSyncTim IM5 Cmd Type IM5 FallBackMode IM5 DefaultValue IM5 FrameSyncTim IM6 Cmd Type IM6 FallBackMode IM6 DefaultValue IM6 FrameSyncTim IM7 Cmd Type IM7 FallBackMode IM7 DefaultValue IM7 FrameSyncTim IM8 Cmd Type IM8 FallBackMode IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue IM8 FrameSyncTim Col 29 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Row 20 10 11 12 20 31 40 50 51 1 10 11 12 13 18 19 1A 1B 20 21 22 23 28 29 2A 2B 30 31 32 33 38 39 3A 2B 40 41 42 43 48 49 4A 4B Group Modbus G3 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01
Max 163 10 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 8 100 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 0,1 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01
Group 1 41000 41002 41004 41006 41007 41008 41009 41011 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41018 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41025 41027 41028 41029 41030 41032 41033 41034 41035 41036 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41044 41045 41046 41047 41048 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41059 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075
41001 41003 41005 41006 41007 41008 41010 41012 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41019 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41026 41027 41028 41029 41031 41032 41033 41034 41035 41037 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41044 41045 41046 41047 41048 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41059 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075
Line Length Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle kZ1 Res Comp kZ1 Angle Z1 Z1X R1G R1Ph tZ1 kZ2 Res Comp kZ2 Angle Z2 R2G R2Ph tZ2 kZ3/4 Res Comp kZ3/4 Angle Z3 R3G - R4G R3Ph - R4Ph tZ3 Z4 tZ4 Zone P - Direct. kZp Res Comp kZp Angle Zp RpG RpPh tZp Serial Comp line Zone Overlap mode Z1m Tilt Angle Z1p Tilt Angle Z2/Zp Tilt Angle Fwd Zone Chg Del kZm Mutual Comp kZm Angle Program Mode Standard Mode Fault Type Trip Mode Sig. Send Zone DistCR Tp tReversal Guard Unblocking Logic TOR-SOTF Mode SOFT Delay Z1Ext On Chan.Fail WI :Mode Status WI : Single Pole Trip WI : V< Thres. WI : Trip Time Delay PAP : TeleTrip Enable PAP : Trip Delayed Enable PAP : P1 PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay PAP : P2 PAP : P3 PAP : 3P Trip Delay PAP : Residual Current PAP : K LoL: Mode Status
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
2 3 4 5 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2B 2C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C
G35 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G123 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G106 G107 G115 G114 G108 G109 G2 G2 G113 G118 G2 G37 G116 G37 G2 G2 G37 G37 G37 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G37
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
300 0.2 0.001*V1/I1 -90 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 0 -45 -45 -45 0 0 -180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0,1 0 0 1 0.2*I1 0.5*V1 0
1000000 625 500*V1/I1 90 7 180 500*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 500*V1/I1 10 1 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 1 1 45 45 45 0,1 7 180 1 6 2 2 3 5 1 0.15 2 127 3600 1 3 1 70 1 1 1 1 1,5 1 1 12 1*I1 1*V1 1
10 0.005 0.001*V1/I1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.002 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 0.001*V1/I1 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 0,1 0,01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.002 0.002 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 0.002 1 1 1 0,1 1 1 0,1 0.01*I1 0.05*V1 1
Modbus Address Start 41076 41077 41078 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41427 41426 41427 41428 41429 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 End 41076 41077 41078 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41427 41426 41427 41428 41429 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957 LoL. Chan. Fail LoL: I< LoL: Window DR DX IN > Status IN > (% Imax) I2 > Status I2 > (% Imax) Imax Line > Status Imax Line > Delta I Status Unblocking Time-Delay Blocking Zones Out Of Step Stable Swing I>1 Function I>1 Directional I>1 VTS Block I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 Time Delay VTS I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function I>2 Directional I>2 VTS Block I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 Time Delay VTS I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay I2> Status I2> Directional I2> VTS I2> Current Set I2> Time Delay I2> Char Angle Broken Conductor I2/I1 Setting I2/I1 Time Delay I2/I1 Trip IN>1 Function IN>1 Directional IN>1 VTS Block IN>1 Current Set IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 Time Delay VTS IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Status IN>2 Directional IN>2 VTS Block IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 Time Delay VTS IN>3 Status IN>3 Directional IN>3 VTS Block IN>3 Current Set IN>3 Calcul Mode IN>3 Time Delay IN>3 Time Delay VTS IN>4 Status IN>4 Directional IN>4 VTS Block IN>4 Current Set IN>4 Calcul Mode IN>4 Time Delay IN>4 Time Delay VTS IN> Char Angle Polarisation Channel Aided DEF Status Polarisation V> Voltage Set IN Forward Time Delay Scheme Logic Tripping Tp IN Rev Factor Characteristic Thermal Trip Thermal Alarm Time Constant 1 Time Constant 2 Zero Seq. Power Status K Time Delay Factor Basis Time Delay Residual Current Residual Power V< & V> MODE V< Measur't Mode V<1 Function V<1 Voltage Set V<1 Time Delay V<1 TMS V<2 Status V<2 Voltage Set V<2 Time Delay Col 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3C 3C 3C 3C 3C 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 Row 1D 1E 1F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C 1B 1C 1D 1E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A Group Modbus G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G37 G2 G119 G1 G1 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G37 G43 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G60 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G2 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G132 G2 G2 G37 G44 G45 G2 G132 G2 G2 G2 G46 G37 G46 G2 G2 G2 G112 G48 G2 G2 G67 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G121 G47 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min
Max 1 1*I1 0.1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 1 100 1 100 1 20*I1 1 30 15 255 255 10 2 1 4.0*I1 100 100 1.2 15 1 100 10 2 1 4.0*I1 100 100 1.2 15 1 100 1 32*I1 100 1 32*I1 100 1 2 1 4*I1 100 95 1 1 100 1 10 2 1 4.0*I1 200 200 1.2 15 1 100 1 2 1 32*I1 200 200 1 2 1 32*I1 1 200 200 1 2 1 32*I1 1 200 200 95 1 1 1 20 4*I1 10 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 10 1 0,6 15 1 2 120 100 100 1 120 100
Step 1 0.05*I1 0.01 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01*I1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 1 1 0.01 0.1 1 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 0.025 0.1 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01*I1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01*I1 0.1 1 1 0,002 0,1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0,2 0,01 0,01 0,03 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.5 1 1 0.01
0 0.05*I1 0.01 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 1*I1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 -95 0 0.2 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0.025 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.08*I1 0 0 0 -95 0 0 0 0.5 0.05*I1 0 0 0 0 0,1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.05*I1 0,3 0 0 0 10 0 0.5 0 10 0
Modbus Address Start 41958 41959 41960 41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 42049 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 42106 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 42155 42156 42157 42158 42250 42251 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42300 42301 42302 42303 42304 42305 42306 42307 42308 42309 42310 42311 42312 42400 42408 42416 42424 42432 42440 42448 42456 42464 42472 42480 42488 42496 42504 42512 42520 42528 42536 42544 42552 42560 42568 42576 42584 42600 42608 42616 42624 42632 42640 42648 42656 42664 42672 42680 42688 42696 42704 42712 42720 42728 42736 42744 42752 42760 42768 42776 42784 42792 42800 42808 42816 42824 42832 42840 42848 42856 42864 42872 42880 42888 42896 42904 42912 End 41958 41959 41960 41961 41962 41963 41964 41965 42052 42100 42101 42102 42103 42104 42105 42106 42150 42151 42152 42153 42154 42155 42156 42157 42158 42250 42251 42252 42253 42254 42255 42256 42257 42258 42259 42300 42301 42302 42303 42304 42305 42306 42307 42308 42309 42310 42311 41313 42407 42415 42423 42431 42439 42447 42455 42463 42471 42479 42487 42495 42503 42511 42519 42527 42535 42543 42551 42559 42567 42575 42583 42591 42607 42615 42623 42631 42639 42647 42655 42663 42671 42679 42687 42695 42703 42711 42719 42727 42735 42743 42751 42759 42767 42775 42783 42791 42799 42807 42815 42823 42831 42839 42847 42855 42855 42863 42871 42879 42887 42895 42903 42911 V> Measur't Mode V>1 Function V>1 Voltage Set V>1 Time Delay V>1 TMS V>2 Status V>2 Voltage Set V>2 Time Delay Date/Time 1 CB Fail 1 Status CB Fail 1 Timer CB Fail 2 Status CB Fail 2 Timer CBF Non I Reset CBF Ext Reset I < Current Set VTS Time Delay VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit CTS Status CTS VN< Inhibit CTS IN> Set CTS Time Delay CVTS Status CVTS VN> CVTS Time Delay C/S Check Schem. for A/R C/S Check Schem. for Man CB V< Dead Line V> Live Line V< Dead Bus V> Live Bus Diff Voltage Diff Frequency Diff Phase Bus-Line Delay 1P Trip Mode 3P Trip Mode 1P Rcl - Dead Time 1 3P Rcl - Dead Time 1 Dead Time 2 Dead Time 3 Dead Time 4 Reclaim Time Reclose Time Delay Discrimination Time A/R Inhbit Wind C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Block A/R Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 Relay 17 Relay 18 Relay 19 Relay 20 Relay 21 Relay 22 Relay 23 Relay 24 Relay 25 Relay 26 Relay 27 Relay 28 Relay 29 Relay 30 Relay 31 Relay 32 Relay 33 Relay 34 Relay 35 Relay 36 Relay 37 Relay 38 Relay 39 Relay 40 Col 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B Row 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 2 3 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Group Modbus G47 G23 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G12 G37 G2 G37 G2 G68 G68 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G2 G37 G2 G2 G103 G103 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G101 G102 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G37 G117 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min 0 0 60 0 0.5 0 60 0
Max 1 2 185 100 100 1 185 100 1 10 1 10 2 2 3.2*I1 20 1.0*I1 1 22 4*I1 10 0 0,1 300 7 7 30 120 30 120 40 1 90 2 3 3 5 60 3600 3600 3600 600 10 5 3600 1 524287 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 0.01 0.5 1 1 0.01 1 0.005 1 0.005 1 1 0.1*I1 1 0.01*I1 1 0.5 0.01*I1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.01 2.5 0.1 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.1 0,01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.05*I1 1 0 0 0.5 0.08*I1 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 5 30 5 30 0.5 0.02 5 0.1 0 0 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0,1 1 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Modbus Address Start 42920 42928 42936 42944 42952 42960 43000 45000 47000 End 42919 42927 42935 42943 42951 42959 44999 46999 48999 Relay 41 Relay 42 Relay 43 Relay 44 Relay 45 Relay 46 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows Col 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 50 70 90 Row 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 00 00 00 Group Modbus G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min 32 32 32 32 32 32
Max 163 163 163 163 163 163
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part E: IEC870-5-103 (VDEW)
ASDU COT INF FUN Description GI P441 System Functions(Monitor) 8 6 5 5 5 5 10 8 3 4 5 6 0 0 2 3 4 5 128 128 128 128 128 128 End of General Interrogration Time Syncronisation Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart Power On * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Model Number P442 P444G P444H
Interpretation
Note: Identification message in ASDU 5: ALSTOM P44x Software ref i.e. ALSTOM P444 3.0 Status Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 9,11 9,11 9,11 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Auto-recloser active Tele-protection active Protection active LED Reset Monitor direction blocked Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxillary input 1 Auxillary input 2 Auxillary input 3 Auxillary input 4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * PG1 Changed PG2 Changed PG3 Changed PG4 Changed DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 * * * * * DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED * * * * RESET_INDICATIONS * * * * DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE
Supervision Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 32 33 35 36 37 38 39 46 47 128 128 128 Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up supervision VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm * * * * * * * * * * DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW DDB_ALARM_COS * * * * * DDB_ALARM_CTS
Earth Fault Indications 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 48 49 50 51 52 128 128 128 128 128 Earth Fault L1 Earth Fault L2 Earth Fault L3 Earth Fault Fwd Earth Fault Rev * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB_PRT_DEF_START_AN DDB_PRT_DEF_START_BN DDB_PRT_DEF_START_CN DDB_PRT_DEF_FWD DDB_PRT_DEF_REV
Fault Indications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Start /pickup L1 Start /pickup L2 Start /pickup L3 Start /pickup N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (backup) Fault Location in ohms Fault forward Fault reverse Teleprotection signal sent Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 General Start Breaker Failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>> * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP1_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP2_TRIP * * * * * * * * * DDB_PRT_ANY_START DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_PRT_ZP * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C
Auto-Reclose Indications (Monitor) 1 1 1 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 128 129 130 128 128 CB 'on' by A/R CB 'on' by long time A/R AR blocked * * * * DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT * * * DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE

Measurands (Monitor) 3,1 3,2 3,3 3,4 9 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 2,7 144 145 146 147 148 128 128 128 128 128 Measurand I Measurands I,V Measurands I,V,P,Q Measurands IN,VEN Measurands IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f * * * *
Generic Functions(Monitor) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 42,43 42,43 42,43 10 41,44 40,41 40 240 241 243 245 249 250 251 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Read Headings Read attributes of all entries of a group Read directory of entry Real attribute of entry End of GGI Write entry with confirm Write entry with execute Write entry aborted
1,2,7,9,11,12,42,43 244
System Functions (Control) 7 6 9 8 0 Init General Interrogation Time Syncronisation * * * * * * * *
General Commands 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 128 128 128 128 128 128 Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED Reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Generic Functions 21 21 21 21 21 10 10 10 10 42 42 42 42 9 40 40 40 40 240 241 243 244 245 248 249 250 251 Read headings of all defined groups Read single attribute of all entries of a group Read directory of single entry Read attribute of sngle entry Generic General Interrogation (GGI) Write entry Write with confirm Write with execute Write entry abort
Non Standard Actual Channel for disturbance recorder in monitor direction ASDU 27,30,31 COT 31 ACC 245 FUN 128 Description GI 1 * 2 * 4G * 4H *
Private channel for frequency
Non Standard Information numbers in monitor direction ASDU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COT 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 INF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 FUN 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 Description GI * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 2 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4G * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 4H * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DDB Element Name
DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_2 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_3 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_4 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_5 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_6 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_7 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_8 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_9 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_10 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_11 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_12 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_13 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_14 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_15 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_16 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_17 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_18 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_19 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_20 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_21 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_22 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_23 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_24 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_25 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_26 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_27 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_28 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_29 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_30 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_31 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_32 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_33 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_34 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_35 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_36 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_37 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_38 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_39 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_40
Ordinal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,11 1,7,9,12 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 40 41 42 43 44 45 27 28 29 30 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 128 128 128 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 Opto 1 Opto 2 Opto 3 Opto 4 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_41 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_42 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_43 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_44 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_45 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_46 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_5 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_6 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_9 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_10 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_11 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_12 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_13 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_14 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_15 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_16 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_17 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_18 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_19 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_20 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_21 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_22 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_23 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_24 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_1 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_2 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_3 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_4 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_5 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_6 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_7 DDB_OUTPUT_LED_8 DDB_INP_52A_A DDB_INP_52B_A DDB_INP_52A_B DDB_INP_52B_B DDB_INP_52A_C DDB_INP_52B_C DDB_INP_SPAR DDB_INP_TPAR DDB_INP_AR_INTERNAL DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_1P DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_3P DDB_INP_AR_CLOSING DDB_INP_RECLAIM DDB_INP_BAR DDB_INP_CTL_CHECK_SYNCH DDB_INP_CB_HEALTHY DDB_INP_BLK_PROTECTION DDB_INP_TRP_3P DDB_INP_CB_MAN DDB_INP_CB_TRIP_MAN DDB_INP_DISC DDB_INP_PROTA DDB_INP_PROTB DDB_INP_PROTC DDB_INP_CR DDB_INP_CR_DEF DDB_INP_COS DDB_INP_COS_DEF DDB_INP_Z1X_EXT DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_BUS DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_LINE DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_DEF_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_DISTANCE_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_CB_RESET_LOCKOUT DDB_INP_CB_RESET_ALL_VALUES DDB_INP_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS DDB_INP_STUB_BUS DDB_INP_TRIP_A_USER DDB_INP_TRIP_B_USER DDB_INP_TRIP_C_USER
40 41 42 43 44 45 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7,9 9,11 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,10 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7 1,7,9 1,7,9 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 174 21 176 38 36 85 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 39 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 128 224 225 226 227 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 228 229 230 16 232 233 130 235 236 237 238 239 240 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 241 76 77 74 75 69 70 71 64 65 66 252 253 254 78 0 79 80 81 82 5 6 7 8 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 130 128 128 128 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 130 130 128 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 130 130 130 128 131 128 128 128 128 131 131 131 131 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 1 Teleprotectioon signal sent Teleprotection signal received Fault forward Fault reverse Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Start/Pickup L1 Start/Pickup L2 Start/Pickup L3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * AR blocked Auto-recloser active * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * CB 'on' by A/R * * Teleprotection disturbed VT fuse failure Trip circuit supervision Breaker Failure * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Test mode * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

DDB_INP_ZSP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_REC DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_HEALT DDB_INP_PAP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_INP_RESET_THERMAL DDB_INP_TIMESYNC DDB_ALARM_GENERAL DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED DDB_ALARM_F_OUT_OF_RANGE DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW DDB_ALARM_CTS DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_MAINT DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_LOCKOUT DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_MAINT DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_LOCKOUT DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_MAINT DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT DDB_ALARM_PRE_LOCKOUT DDB_ALARM_EFF_LOCKOUT DDB_LOCKOUT_ALARM DDB_ALARM_CB_STATUS DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_TRIP DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_CLOSE DDB_ALARM_CB_CONTROL_UNHEALTHLY DDB_ALARM_NO_CHECK_SYNC_CONTROL DDB_ALARM_AR_LOCKOUT_MAX_SHOTS DDB_ALARM_SG_OPTO_INVALID DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_AR DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_1 DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_2 DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_1 DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_2 DDB_ALARM_COS DDB_ALARM_BROKEN_COND DDB_ALARM_CVTS DDB_ALARM_NOPRESENTS_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ALARM_VALIDITY_FAILURE_ACQ DDB_ALARM_MODE_TEST_ACQ DDB_ALARM_NOTSYNCHRO_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ALARM_USER1 DDB_ALARM_USER2 DDB_ALARM_USER3 DDB_ALARM_USER4 DDB_ALARM_USER5 DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE DDB_PRT_AR_1POLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_3POLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_1ST_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_234TH_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_AR_RECLAIM DDB_PRT_AR_DISCRIM DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_1PAR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_3PAR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT DDB_PRT_AR_FORCE_SYNC DDB_PRT_SYNC DDB_PRT_DEAD_LINE DDB_PRT_LIVE_LINE DDB_PRT_DEAD_BUS DDB_PRT_LIVE_BUS DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_ACC DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_PERM DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_BLOCK DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_PRT_Z1X DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_PRT_Zp DDB_PRT_T1 DDB_PRT_T2 DDB_PRT_T3 DDB_PRT_T4
155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264

9 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 52 51 48 49 50 22 23 24 92 93 67 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 90 91 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 84 62 63 64 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 68 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 128 128 128 128 128 131 131 131 128 128 128 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 128 128 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 128 131 131 131 128 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * General Trip * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * General Start * * * * * * Trip I> Trip I>> * * * * * * * * * * * * * Trip IN> Trip IN>> Start/Pickup N * * * * * * * Earth Fault Rev Earth Fault Fwd Earth Fault L1 Earth Fault L2 Earth Fault L3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
DDB_PRT_TZP

265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353
DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_POWER_SWING DDB_PRT_REVERSAL_GUARD DDB_PRT_DEF_CARRIER_SEND DDB_PRT_UNB_CR_DEF DDB_PRT_DEF_REV DDB_PRT_DEF_FWD DDB_PRT_DEF_START_AN DDB_PRT_DEF_START_BN DDB_PRT_DEF_START_CN DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_PRT_SOTF_ENABLE DDB_PRT_I_TOR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_TOC_START_A DDB_PRT_TOC_START_B DDB_PRT_TOC_START_C DDB_PRT_ANY_START DDB_PRT_1PH DDB_PRT_2PH DDB_PRT_3PH DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_1P_TRIP DDB_PRT_3P_TRIP DDB_PRT_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP DDB_PRT_LOSS_OF_LOAD_TRIP DDB_PRT_SOTF_TOR_TRIP DDB_PRT_TBF1_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_TBF2_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_CONTROL_TRIP DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE DDB_PRT_VTS_FAST DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_A DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_B DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_C DDB_PRT_ANY_POLE_DEAD DDB_PRT_ALL_POLE_DEAD DDB_PRT_DIR_AV_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_DIR_AM_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_CVMR DDB_PRT_CROSS_COUNTRY DDB_PRT_ZSP_START DDB_PRT_ZSP_TRIP DDB_PRT_Z1_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP_CONF DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING_CONF

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 1 1 1 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 1,7,9 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 131 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

DDB_PRT_DIST_START_N DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_IN DDB_PRT_PAP_START_A DDB_PRT_PAP_START_B DDB_PRT_PAP_START_C DDB_PRT_PAP_PRES_IN DDB_PRT_PAP_PRE_START DDB_PRT_TRACE_TRIG_OK DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_ALARM DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_TRIP DDB_LED_CON_1 DDB_LED_CON_2 DDB_LED_CON_3 DDB_LED_CON_4 DDB_LED_CON_5 DDB_LED_CON_6 DDB_LED_CON_7 DDB_LED_CON_8 DDB_TIMERIN_1 DDB_TIMERIN_2 DDB_TIMERIN_3 DDB_TIMERIN_4 DDB_TIMERIN_5 DDB_TIMERIN_6 DDB_TIMERIN_7 DDB_TIMERIN_8 DDB_TIMERIN_9 DDB_TIMERIN_10 DDB_TIMERIN_11 DDB_TIMERIN_12 DDB_TIMERIN_13 DDB_TIMERIN_14 DDB_TIMERIN_15 DDB_TIMERIN_16 DDB_TIMEROUT_1 DDB_TIMEROUT_2 DDB_TIMEROUT_3 DDB_TIMEROUT_4 DDB_TIMEROUT_5 DDB_TIMEROUT_6 DDB_TIMEROUT_7 DDB_TIMEROUT_8 DDB_TIMEROUT_9 DDB_TIMEROUT_10 DDB_TIMEROUT_11 DDB_TIMEROUT_12 DDB_TIMEROUT_13 DDB_TIMEROUT_14 DDB_TIMEROUT_15 DDB_TIMEROUT_16 DDB_FAULT_RECORD_TRIG DDB_PLAT_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM DDB_PLAT_FIELD_VOLT_FAIL_ALARM DDB_REAR_COMMS_FAIL_ALARM_66 DDB_GOOSE_IED_MISSING_ALARM_67 DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM_68 DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_69 DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_70 DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_71 DDB_INVALID_NIC_TCP_IP_CONFIG_72 DDB_INVALID_NIC_OSI_CONFIG_73 DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_74 DDB_SOFTWARE_MISMATCH_ALARM_75 DDB_NIC_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_76 DDB_INTERMICOM_LOOPBACK_ALARM_77 DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE_ALARM_78 DDB_INTERMICOM_DCD_ALARM_79 DDB_INTERMICOM_CHANNEL_ALARM_80 DDB_BACKUP_SETTING_ALARM_81 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_487 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_488 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_489 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_490 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_491 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_492 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_493 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_494 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_495 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_496 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_497 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_498 DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_499
354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499

244 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 1 9,11,12,20,21 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 131 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

DDB_ALARM_UNUSED_500 DDB_GOOSEIN_1 DDB_GOOSEIN_2 DDB_GOOSEIN_3 DDB_GOOSEIN_4 DDB_GOOSEIN_5 DDB_GOOSEIN_6 DDB_GOOSEIN_7 DDB_GOOSEIN_8 DDB_GOOSEIN_9 DDB_GOOSEIN_10 DDB_GOOSEIN_11 DDB_GOOSEIN_12 DDB_GOOSEIN_13 DDB_GOOSEIN_14 DDB_GOOSEIN_15 DDB_GOOSEIN_16 DDB_GOOSEIN_17 DDB_GOOSEIN_18 DDB_GOOSEIN_19 DDB_GOOSEIN_20 DDB_GOOSEIN_21 DDB_GOOSEIN_22 DDB_GOOSEIN_23 DDB_GOOSEIN_24 DDB_GOOSEIN_25 DDB_GOOSEIN_26 DDB_GOOSEIN_27 DDB_GOOSEIN_28 DDB_GOOSEIN_29 DDB_GOOSEIN_30 DDB_GOOSEIN_31 DDB_GOOSEIN_32 DDB_GOOSEOUT_1 DDB_GOOSEOUT_2 DDB_GOOSEOUT_3 DDB_GOOSEOUT_4 DDB_GOOSEOUT_5 DDB_GOOSEOUT_6 DDB_GOOSEOUT_7 DDB_GOOSEOUT_8 DDB_INTERIN_1 DDB_INTERIN_2 DDB_INTERIN_3 DDB_INTERIN_4 DDB_INTERIN_5 DDB_INTERIN_6 DDB_INTERIN_7 DDB_INTERIN_8 DDB_INTEROUT_1 DDB_INTEROUT_2 DDB_INTEROUT_3 DDB_INTEROUT_4 DDB_INTEROUT_5 DDB_INTEROUT_6 DDB_INTEROUT_7 DDB_INTEROUT_8 DDB_CTRL_IP_1 DDB_CTRL_IP_2 DDB_CTRL_IP_3 DDB_CTRL_IP_4 DDB_CTRL_IP_5 DDB_CTRL_IP_6 DDB_CTRL_IP_7 DDB_CTRL_IP_8 DDB_CTRL_IP_9 DDB_CTRL_IP_10 DDB_CTRL_IP_11 DDB_CTRL_IP_12 DDB_CTRL_IP_13 DDB_CTRL_IP_14 DDB_CTRL_IP_15 DDB_CTRL_IP_16 DDB_CTRL_IP_17 DDB_CTRL_IP_18 DDB_CTRL_IP_19 DDB_CTRL_IP_20 DDB_CTRL_IP_21 DDB_CTRL_IP_22 DDB_CTRL_IP_23 DDB_CTRL_IP_24 DDB_CTRL_IP_25 DDB_CTRL_IP_26 DDB_CTRL_IP_27 DDB_CTRL_IP_28 DDB_CTRL_IP_29 DDB_CTRL_IP_30 DDB_CTRL_IP_31 DDB_CTRL_IP_32
500 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part F: DNP3
P444 DDB Name /*Output Relay Status*/ 0 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1 1 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_2 2 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_3 3 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_4 4 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_5 5 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_6 6 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_7 7 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_8 8 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_9 9 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_10 10 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_11 11 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_12 12 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_13 13 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_14 14 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_15 15 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_16 16 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_17 17 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_18 18 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_19 19 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_20 20 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_21 21 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_22 22 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_23 23 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_24 24 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_25 25 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_26 26 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_27 27 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_28 28 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_29 29 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_30 30 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_31 31 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_32 32 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_33 33 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_34 34 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_35 35 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_36 36 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_37 37 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_38 38 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_39 39 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_40 40 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_41 41 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_42 42 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_43 43 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_44 44 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_45 45 DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_46 /*Opto Isolator Status*/ 46 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 47 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 48 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 49 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 50 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_5 51 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_6 52 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 53 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 54 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_9 55 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_10 56 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_11 57 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_12 58 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_13 59 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_14 60 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_15 61 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_16 62 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_17 63 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_18 64 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_19 65 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_20 66 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_21 67 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_22 68 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_23 69 DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_24 /*Alarm Indications*/ 70 DDB_ALARM_GENERAL 71 DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED 72 DDB_ALARM_F_OUT_OF_RANGE 73 DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW 74 DDB_ALARM_CTS 75 DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL 76 DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_MAINT 77 DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_LOCKOUT 78 DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_MAINT Col Row Event Class 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 P444H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 P444G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
P442G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
P441G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
P444 DDB Name 79 DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_LOCKOUT 80 DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_MAINT 81 DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT 82 DDB_ALARM_PRE_LOCKOUT 83 DDB_ALARM_EFF_LOCKOUT 84 DDB_LOCKOUT_ALARM 85 DDB_ALARM_CB_STATUS 86 DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_TRIP 87 DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_CLOSE 88 DDB_ALARM_CB_CONTROL_UNHEALTHLY 89 DDB_ALARM_NO_CHECK_SYNC_CONTROL 90 DDB_ALARM_AR_LOCKOUT_MAX_SHOTS 91 DDB_ALARM_SG_OPTO_INVALID 92 DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_AR 93 DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_1 94 DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_2 95 DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_1 96 DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_2 97 DDB_ALARM_COS 98 DDB_ALARM_BROKEN_COND 99 DDB_ALARM_CVTS 100 DDB_ALARM_NOPRESENTS_DATAS_ACQ 101 DDB_ALARM_VALIDITY_FAILURE_ACQ 102 DDB_ALARM_MODE_TEST_ACQ 103 DDB_ALARM_NOTSYNCHRO_DATAS_ACQ 104 DDB_ALARM_USER1 105 DDB_ALARM_USER2 106 DDB_ALARM_USER3 107 DDB_ALARM_USER4 108 DDB_ALARM_USER5 109 DDB_PLAT_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM 110 DDB_PLAT_FIELD_VOLT_FAIL_ALARM 111 DDB_REAR_COMMS_FAIL_ALARM_66 112 DDB_GOOSE_IED_MISSING_ALARM_67 113 DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM_68 114 DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_69 115 DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_70 116 DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_71 117 DDB_INVALID_NIC_TCP_IP_CONFIG_72 118 DDB_INVALID_NIC_OSI_CONFIG_73 119 DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_74 120 DDB_SOFTWARE_MISMATCH_ALARM_75 121 DDB_NIC_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_76 122 DDB_INTERMICOM_LOOPBACK_ALARM_77 123 DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE_ALARM_78 124 DDB_INTERMICOM_DCD_ALARM_79 125 DDB_INTERMICOM_CHANNEL_ALARM_80 126 DDB_BACKUP_SETTING_ALARM_81 /*Miscellaneous Indications*/ 127 128 /*Protection Events (DDB Signals)*/ 129 DDB_INP_52A_A 130 DDB_INP_52B_A 131 DDB_INP_52A_B 132 DDB_INP_52B_B 133 DDB_INP_52A_C 134 DDB_INP_52B_C 135 DDB_INP_SPAR 136 DDB_INP_TPAR 137 DDB_INP_AR_INTERNAL 138 DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_1P 139 DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_3P 140 DDB_INP_AR_CLOSING 141 DDB_INP_RECLAIM 142 DDB_INP_BAR 143 DDB_INP_CTL_CHECK_SYNCH 144 DDB_INP_CB_HEALTHY 145 DDB_INP_BLK_PROTECTION 146 DDB_INP_TRP_3P 147 DDB_INP_CB_MAN 148 DDB_INP_CB_TRIP_MAN 149 DDB_INP_DISC 150 DDB_INP_PROTA 151 DDB_INP_PROTB 152 DDB_INP_PROTC 153 DDB_INP_CR 154 DDB_INP_CR_DEF 155 DDB_INP_COS 156 DDB_INP_COS_DEF 157 DDB_INP_Z1X_EXT 158 DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_BUS Col Row Event Class 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 P444H 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 P444G 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144
P442G 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125
P441G 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
0x08 0x08
0x06 0x05
P444 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 DDB Name
DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_LINE DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_DEF_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_INP_DISTANCE_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_CB_RESET_LOCKOUT DDB_INP_CB_RESET_ALL_VALUES DDB_INP_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS DDB_INP_STUB_BUS DDB_INP_TRIP_A_USER DDB_INP_TRIP_B_USER DDB_INP_TRIP_C_USER DDB_INP_ZSP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_REC DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_HEALT DDB_INP_PAP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_INP_RESET_THERMAL DDB_INP_TIMESYNC DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE DDB_PRT_AR_1POLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_3POLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_1ST_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_234TH_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_AR_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_AR_RECLAIM DDB_PRT_AR_DISCRIM DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_1PAR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_3PAR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT DDB_PRT_AR_FORCE_SYNC DDB_PRT_SYNC DDB_PRT_DEAD_LINE DDB_PRT_LIVE_LINE DDB_PRT_DEAD_BUS DDB_PRT_LIVE_BUS DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROG DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_ACC DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_PERM DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_BLOCK DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_PRT_Z1X DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_PRT_Zp DDB_PRT_T1 DDB_PRT_T2 DDB_PRT_T3 DDB_PRT_T4 DDB_PRT_TZP DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_WI_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_POWER_SWING DDB_PRT_REVERSAL_GUARD DDB_PRT_DEF_CARRIER_SEND DDB_PRT_UNB_CR_DEF DDB_PRT_DEF_REV DDB_PRT_DEF_FWD DDB_PRT_DEF_START_AN
Col
Row
Event Class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
P444H 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240
P444G 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226
P442G 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
P441G 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192
P444 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 DDB Name
DDB_PRT_DEF_START_BN DDB_PRT_DEF_START_CN DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_DEF_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_UNDER_V_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_OVER_V_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_OVER_V_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I2_SUP_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_A DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_B DDB_PRT_I_SUP_ANY_PICK_UP_C DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_1_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_2_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_PRT_I_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_PRT_SOTF_ENABLE DDB_PRT_I_TOR_ENABLE DDB_PRT_TOC_START_A DDB_PRT_TOC_START_B DDB_PRT_TOC_START_C DDB_PRT_ANY_START DDB_PRT_1PH DDB_PRT_2PH DDB_PRT_3PH DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_ANY_INTERNAL_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_A DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_B DDB_PRT_ANY_TRIP_C DDB_PRT_1P_TRIP DDB_PRT_3P_TRIP DDB_PRT_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP DDB_PRT_LOSS_OF_LOAD_TRIP DDB_PRT_SOTF_TOR_TRIP DDB_PRT_TBF1_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_TBF2_TRIP_3PH DDB_PRT_CONTROL_TRIP DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE DDB_PRT_VTS_FAST DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_A DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_B DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_C DDB_PRT_ANY_POLE_DEAD DDB_PRT_ALL_POLE_DEAD DDB_PRT_DIR_AV_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_DIR_AM_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_CVMR DDB_PRT_CROSS_COUNTRY DDB_PRT_ZSP_START DDB_PRT_ZSP_TRIP DDB_PRT_Z1_WIT_FILT DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP_CONF DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING_CONF DDB_PRT_DIST_START_N DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP
Col
Row
Event Class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
P444H 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322
P444G 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308
P442G 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289
P441G 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274
P444 DDB Name 323 DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_PICK_UP 324 DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_A 325 DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_B 326 DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_C 327 DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_IN 328 DDB_PRT_PAP_START_A 329 DDB_PRT_PAP_START_B 330 DDB_PRT_PAP_START_C 331 DDB_PRT_PAP_PRES_IN 332 DDB_PRT_PAP_PRE_START 333 DDB_PRT_TRACE_TRIG_OK 334 DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_ALARM 335 DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_TRIP /*InterMiCOM*/ 336 DDB_INTERIN_1 337 DDB_INTERIN_2 338 DDB_INTERIN_3 339 DDB_INTERIN_4 340 DDB_INTERIN_5 341 DDB_INTERIN_6 342 DDB_INTERIN_7 343 DDB_INTERIN_8 344 DDB_INTEROUT_1 345 DDB_INTEROUT_2 346 DDB_INTEROUT_3 347 DDB_INTEROUT_4 348 DDB_INTEROUT_5 349 DDB_INTEROUT_6 350 DDB_INTEROUT_7 351 DDB_INTEROUT_8 /*Control Inputs (DDB Signals)*/ 352 DDB_CTRL_IP_1 353 DDB_CTRL_IP_2 354 DDB_CTRL_IP_3 355 DDB_CTRL_IP_4 356 DDB_CTRL_IP_5 357 DDB_CTRL_IP_6 358 DDB_CTRL_IP_7 359 DDB_CTRL_IP_8 360 DDB_CTRL_IP_9 361 DDB_CTRL_IP_10 362 DDB_CTRL_IP_11 363 DDB_CTRL_IP_12 364 DDB_CTRL_IP_13 365 DDB_CTRL_IP_14 366 DDB_CTRL_IP_15 367 DDB_CTRL_IP_16 368 DDB_CTRL_IP_17 369 DDB_CTRL_IP_18 370 DDB_CTRL_IP_19 371 DDB_CTRL_IP_20 372 DDB_CTRL_IP_21 373 DDB_CTRL_IP_22 374 DDB_CTRL_IP_23 375 DDB_CTRL_IP_24 376 DDB_CTRL_IP_25 377 DDB_CTRL_IP_26 378 DDB_CTRL_IP_27 379 DDB_CTRL_IP_28 380 DDB_CTRL_IP_29 381 DDB_CTRL_IP_30 382 DDB_CTRL_IP_31 383 DDB_CTRL_IP_32
P444 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Object Name CB A Operations CB B Operations CB C Operations Total 1P Reclosures Total 3P Reclosures Direct Trip statistics Permissive statistics Blocking statistics New Data statistics Rx Error statistics Lost Message statistics Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken
Col
Row
Event Class 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
P444H 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383
Frozen Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
P444G 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369
P442G 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350
P441G 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335
Col 0x06 0x06 0x06 0x06 0x06 0x15 0x15 0x15 0x15 0x15 0x15 0x06 0x06 0x06
Row 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x09 0x0A 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x04 0x05 0x06
Running Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
P444
Object Name
Col
Row
Event Class
Type
Deadband
Scaling
Units
P444
/*Active group*/ 0 Active group 0x00 0x0E 1 D9 1 x1
DDB Name
Col
Row
Event Class
P444H
P444G
P442G
[None]
P441G
/*Measurements 1*/ 1 IA Magnitude 2 IA Phase Angle 3 IB Magnitude 4 IB Phase Angle 5 IC Magnitude 6 IC Phase Angle 7 IN Derived Mag 8 IN Derived Angle 9 I1 Magnitude 10 I2 Magnitude 11 I0 Magnitude 12 VAB Magnitude 13 VAB Phase Angle 14 VBC Magnitude 15 VBC Phase Angle 16 VCA Magnitude 17 VCA Phase Angle 18 VAN Magnitude 19 VAN Phase Angle 20 VBN Magnitude 21 VBN Phase Angle 22 VCN Magnitude 23 VCN Phase Angle 24 VN Derived Mag 25 VN Derived Ang 26 V1 Magnitude 27 V2 Magnitude 28 V0 Magnitude 29 Frequency 30 C/S Voltage Mag 31 C/S Voltage Ang 32 IM Magnitude 33 IM Angle 34 A Phase Watts 35 B Phase Watts 36 C Phase Watts 37 A Phase VArs 38 B Phase VArs 39 C Phase VArs 40 A Phase VA 41 B Phase VA 42 C Phase VA 43 3 Phase Watts 44 3 Phase VArs 45 3 Phase VA 46 Zero Seq Power 47 3Ph Power Factor 48 APh Power Factor 49 BPh Power Factor 50 CPh Power Factor 51 3Ph W Fix Demand 52 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 53 3Ph W Peak Demand 54 3Ph VArs Peak Demand 55 Slip Frequency 56 Thermal State 57 Fault Location 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x02 0x04 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x09 0x0A 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x2A 0x2B 0x2C 0x2F 0x30 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x16 0x17 0x20 0x21 0x31 0x02 0x14 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D4 D1 D1 D1 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D3 D3 D5 D3 D4 D1 D4 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D8 D8 D8 D8 D6 D6 D6 D6 D5 D7 D7 0,005 0,01 0,005 0,01 0,005 0,01 0,005 0,01 0,005 0,005 0,005 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,005 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,01 0,0100 10 x In / 500 /100 x In / 500 /100 x In / 500 /100 x In / 500 /100 x In / 500 x In / 500 x In / 500 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) x Vn /(110 x 100) x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 x In / 500 /100 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 /1000 /1000 /1000 /1000 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 /100 /100 100 A deg A deg A deg A deg A A A V deg V deg V deg V deg V deg V deg V deg V V V Hz V deg A deg W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA [None] [None] [None] [None] W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA W/Var/VA Hz % %
Data Type D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Description Phase, RMS and sequence currents Sensitive neutral currents Voltages Angles Frequency Power Percentage Power Factor Setting Group Energy Admittance (I Earth Fault) Admittance (I Sensitive) Time (minutes) Temperature (Celsius) Time (ms) CLIO input measurements
Scaling x In / 500 x In / 10,000 x Vn /(110 x 100) /100 /100 0,1 x In .Vn / 110 /100 /1000 x1 x In .Vn / 110 x (In / 1000).(110 / Vn) x (In / 10000).(110 / Vn) /100 /10 /100000 /10
Units A A V deg Hz W/Var/VA % [None] [None] Wh/Varh/Vah S S min C ms
Deadband 0,0050 0,0010 0,0100 0,0100 0,0100 0,0100 0,0100 0,0100 1,0000 1,0000 0,0100 0,0010 0,5000 0.01. 0,0001 0,0100
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN GC/E44
DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL)
P44x/EN GC/E44 Page 1/4
Input-Opto Couplers
DIST. Chan Recv DDB #128 Opto Label 01 DDB #064 DEF. Chan Recv DDB #129
DIST. COS DDB #130 Opto Label 02 DDB #065 DEF. COS DDB #131
MCB/VTS Line DDB #134
BAR DDB #117
CB Healthy DDB #119
Man. Close CB DDB #122
Reset Lockout DDB #148
SPAR Enable DDB #110 Opto Label 08 DDB #071 TPAR Enable DDB #111
Files:p441uk30.psl, p442uk30.psl and p444uk30.psl
Output Contact
Z1 DDB #255 0
Straight
0
Trip Z1
DIST Trip A DDB #246 DIST Trip B DDB #247 DIST Trip C DDB #248
DIST UNB CR DDB #243
Z1 DDB #255 Z1X DDB #256 Z2 DDB #257 Zp DDB #260 Z3 DDB #258 Z4 DDB #259 0
Straight
0
Distance Aided Trip
LED
Z1 DDB #255 Z1X DDB #256
Latching
LED 5 DDB #100
Z1 + Aided Trip
0 Any Trip A DDB #325
Straight
0
Trip A
0 Any Trip B DDB #326
Straight
0
Trip B
0 Any Trip C DDB #327
Straight
0
Trip C
DIST Sig. Send DDB #242 DEF Sig. Send DDB #271
Straight
0
Signal Send (Dist. + DEF)
Output Contact
0 Any Start DDB #317
Straight
0
General Start
LED
Any Start DDB #317 20 Any Start DDB #317 Any Trip DDB #321
Latching
LED 4 DDB #099
General Start
Dwell
0 Fault_REC_TRIG DDB #468
Starting Fault R ecorder
0 Any Trip DDB #321
Straight
0
General T rip
0 General Alarm DDB #174
Straight
0
General Alarm
IN>1Trip DDB #281 IN>2Trip DDB #282 DEF Trip A DDB #278 DEF Trip B DDB #279 DEFTrip C DDB #280
Straight
0
T rip DEF + SBEF
A/R Lockout DDB #234
Straight
0
A/R lock out
A/R 1P In Prog DDB #224 A/R 3P In Prog DDB #225
Straight
0
Relay Label 12 DDB #01 1
A/R in Progress
A/R Close DDB #223
Straight
0
A/R Close
Power Swing DDB #269
Straight
0
P ower Swing
Leds Front Panel
Any Trip A DDB #325
Latching
LED 1 DDB #096
Trip A
Any Trip B DDB #326
Latching
LED 2 DDB #097
Trip B
Any Trip C DDB #327
Latching
LED 3 DDB #098
Trip C
DIST Fwd DDB #244
Latching
LED 6 DDB #101
Forward
DIST Rev DDB #245
Latching
LED 7 DDB #102
Reverse
A/R Enable DDB #231
Non Latching
LED 8 DDB #103
A/R Enable
Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN HI/E44
MENU CONTENT TABLES
Menu Content Tables MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN HI/E44
Note 1: * Group 1 is shown on the menu map, Groups 2, 3 and 4 are identical to Group 1 and therefore omitted
Menu Content Tables Page 1/6
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Description MiCOM
Plant Reference ALSTOM
0.000 V A 50.00Hz
0.000
0.000 W 0.000 Var
16:26:14 18 Mar 2004
SYSTEM DATA
VIEW RECORDS
MEASUREMENTS 1
MEASUREMENTS 2
MEASUREMENT 3
CB CONDITION
CB CONTROL
DATE and TIME
CONFIGURATION
CT AND VT RATIOS
Idem for Group 2, 3 and 4
PSL DATA GROUP 1
RECORD CONTROL
OUTPUT LABELS GROUP 1
DISTURB RECORDER
INPUT LABELS GROUP 1
MEASURE'T SETUP
AUTORECLOSE GROUP 1
COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM CHECK GROUP 1
COMMISSION TESTS
SUPERVISION GROUP 1
CB MONITOR SETUP
CB FAIL & I<
OPTO CONFIG
VOLT PROTECTION GROUP 1
CONTROL INPUT
ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP 1
CTRL I/P CONFIG
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1
AIDED DEF GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP1
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1
BACK-UP I> GROUP 1
POWER-SWING GROUP 1
DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1
DISTANCE GROUP 1
CTRL I/P LABEL
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
SYSTEM DATA
VIEW RECORDS
MEASUREMENTS 1
MEASUREMENTS 2
MEASUREMENTS 3 CB CONDITION CB CONTROL
DATE and TIME
Language English 0A IA Phase Angle 0 0 VBN Magnitude 0A IB Phase Angle 0 IC Magnitude 0A IC Phase Angle 0 IN Derived Mag 0A IN Derived Angle 0 I1 Magnitude 0A I2 Magnitude 0A I0 Magnitude 0A VAB Magnitude 0V VAB Phase Angle 0 VBC Magnitude 0V VBC Phase Angle 0 VCA Magnitude 0V VCA Phase Angle 0
o o o o o o o o o
Select Event [0256] 0V VAN Phase Angle 0W C Phase Watts 0V VBN Phase Angle 0o VCN Magnitude 0V C Phase VArs 0 Var A Phase VA 0V VN Derived Ang 0 V1 Magnitude 0V V2 Magnitude 0V V0 Magnitude 0V Frequency 0 C/S Voltage Mag 0V C/S Voltage Ang 0 IM Magnitude 0A IM Angle 0
o o o
IA Magnitude 0W B Phase Watts No CB C Operations 0W A Phase VArs 0 Var B Phase VArs 0 Var Total IC Broken 0A CB Operate Time 0 VA B Phase VA 0 VA C Phase VA 0 VA 3 Phase Watts 0W 3 Phase VArs 0 Var 3 Phase VA 0 VA Zero Seq Power 0 3Ph Vars Fix Dem 0 Varh 3Ph W Peak Dem 0 Wh BPh Power Factor 0 3 Ph W Fix Dem 0 Wh Total 3P Reclose 0 0s Total IB Broken 0A (1) C/S Window 0A (1) Healthy Window Total IA Broken 0 (1) Man Close Delay 0 (1) Trip Pulse Time Reset Thermal CB B Operations Close Pulse Time 0.00 % 0
VAN Magnitude
A Phase Watts
Thermal Status
CB A Operations
CB Control by Opto + Rem + Local
Date 01 June 2005
Password XXXX IB Magnitude
Menu Cell Ref (From Record)
0.5 ms
Time 16:25:53
Description MiCOM
Time & Date (From Record)
0.5 ms
IRIG-B Sync Disabled IRIG-B Status 10 s 0
Plant Reference AREVA
Event Text
Model Number
Event Value
P442311B1M0300J
5s
Battery Status Healthy
Serial Number 123456A VN Derived Mag
Select Fault [04]
VCN Phase Angle 0
5s
Battery Alarm Enabled
Frequency
Active Group
50
A/R Single Pole Disabled
Comms Level
Select Maintenance [00] 0
Reset CB Data No Total 1P Reclose 0
A/R Three Pole Disabled
Relay Address
Alarm Status 1
255
0000000000000000
Reset Indication No
Plant Status
Relay Status 1
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
Control Status
Alarm Status 1
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
Reset Total A/R No
Active Group
Alarm Status 2
0000000000000000
Alarm Status 3
(1) CB Trip/Close No Operation
0000000000000000
Software Ref. 1 C2.6
Access Level
3Ph Power Factor 0
Software Ref.2
C2.6
Password Control 2
APh Power Factor 0
Opto I/P Status
0001100100001000
Password Level 1 ****
3Ph VArs Peak Dem 0 Varh
Relay Status 1
0000000000000000
Password Level 2 ****
Slip Frequency 50 Hz
CPh Power Factor 0 Wh
Reset Demand No (1) CB control must be enable to display the cells above
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
CONFIGURATION
CT AND VT RATIOS
RECORD CONTROL
DISTURB RECORDER MEASURE'T SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
Restore Defaults No Operation 1.500 s Trigger Position 33.30 % Trigger Mode Single 1 Remote Address 1 Remote Address 0 1 Analog Channel 1 VA Measurement Mode Measurement Ref VA Remote Values Primary Remote Address Subnet Mask 255.255.242.000 Mac Address 00.02.86.92.01.4 255 RP1 Address
Aided D.E.F Enabled
Main VT Primary 110.0 V
Clear Events No
Duration
Default Display Description
RP1 Protocol Courier
(2) ETHERNET COMMS 0
NSAP Address 0x00000000h
Setting Group Select via Menu 110.0 V Clear Maint No Alarm Event Enabled
Volt Protection Disabled
Main VT Sec'y
Clear Faults No
Local Values Secondary
IP Address 010.022.094.092
Transport Select 00.00.00.00 Session Select 00.00 Present. Select 00.00
Active Settings Group 1
CB Fail & I< Enabled
C/S VT Primary 110.0 V
Save Changes No Operation
Supervision Enabled
C/S VT Secondary 110.0 V
Copy From Group 1 1A
System Checks Disabled
Phase CT Primary
Relay O/P Event Enabled
Analog Channel 2 VB
Number of Routes 0
AP Title 000.000.000.000
Copy to No Operation 1A General Event Enabled Analog Channel 4 VN Distance Unit Kilometres Baud Rate 19200 bits/s
Thermal Overload Disabled
Phase CT Sec'y
Opto Input Event Enabled
Analog Channel 3 VC
Demand Interval 30.00 mins
RP1 Inactiv Timer 15.00 mins
Router Address 1 000.000.000.000 Target Network 1 000.000.000.000
AE Qual. Used Not Used AE Qualifier 0
Setting Group 1 Enabled
Internal A/R Disabled
Mcomp CT Primary 1A
Setting Group 2 Disabled 1A Maint Rec Event Enabled Protection Event Enabled
DDB element 31 - 0
Input Labels Visible Analog Channel 6 IB Analog Channel 7 IC
Mcomp CT Sec'y
Fault Rec Event Enabled
Analog Channel 5 IA
Fault Location Distance
Baud Rate 19200 bits/s Baud Rate 19200 bits/s Parity None Target Network 4 000.000.000.000 NIC Inactiv Timer 15 mn Default Pass Lvl 2 Measure't Period 10 Physical Link RS485
Ethernet Media Copper GOOSE STATISTICS
Setting Group 3 Disabled
Output Labels Visible
C/S Input A-N
Setting Group 4 Disabled
CT & VT Ratios Visible
Main VT Location Line
Enrolled Flags 0x00000000h Tx Msg count 0 Rx Msg count 0 GOOSE Max Cycle 60 s DDB Changes 0 Last Seq Tx 0 CS103 Blocking Disabled GOOSE Startup Broadcast Last Msg Tx 0
Dist. Protection Enabled 1111111111111111

DDB element 63 - 32
Record Control Invisible
Analog Channel 8 IN
Parity None
Power-Swing Enabled 1111111111111111 Input 1 Trigger No Trigger

DDB element 639-608
Disturb Recorder Invisible
Digital Input 1 Relay Label 01
GOOSE Min Cycle 10.0 s
Back-Up I> Disabled
Measure't Setup Invisible
Neg Sequence O/C Disabled 1111111111111111 Clear Dist -Recs Decs No
Comms Settings Visible
Ctrl I/P Config Visible
Time Sync Disabled Digital Input 32 Unused
GOOSE Increment 900
Broken Conductor Disabled
Commission Tests Invisible
Ctrl I/P Labels Visible
Earth Fault Prot Zero Seq. Power Earth Fault O/C Disabled 11
Setting Values Secondary
Direct Access Enabled
(2) Ethernet available with UCA2 protocol
GOOSE VIP Status 000000000000000
Control Inputs Visible
LCD Contrast
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
COMMISSION TESTS OPTO CONFIG CONTROL INPUT CTRL I/P CONFIG CTRL I/P LABEL Ctrl I/P Status
0000000000000000
CB MONITOR SETUP R2G 20 R2Ph 100 km tZ2 200 ms 20 tZp
DISTANCE GROUP 1
IED View Select 2 Line Length
Opto I/P Status
Broken I^
0001011001000011
Global Nominal V 24-27V
Hotkey Enabled 111--111--111
Control Input 1 Control Input 1
Line Setting Group 1
400 ms
IED Recvd Msgs
Relay Status 1
0001011001000011
Opto Filter Cntl 11111111111
Ctrl Input 1 No Operation
Control Input 1 Latched
Serial Comp Line Disabled
Test Port Status
IED Last Seq/Msg Rx 0 Line Angle 70 Ctrl Command 32 Set/Reset Zone Setting Group 1
00010110
I^ Maintenance Alarm Disabled (3) I^ Maintenance 1.000 KA Opto Input 1 24-27V Ctrl Command 1 Set/Reset Control Input 32 Control Input 32 Line Impedance 12
Overlap Z Mode Disabled Z1m Tilt Angle 0
LED Status
IED Missed Msgs 0 Opto Input 32 24-27V
00010110
Ctrl Input 32 No Operation
kZ3/4 Res Comp 1 kZ3/4 Angle 0 Z3 30 R3G - R4G 30
IED Missed Chngs 0
Monitor Bit 1 Relay Label 01
I^ Lockout Alarm Disabled (3) I^ Lockout 2.000 KA
Z1p Tilt Angle 0
IED Timeouts
Zone Status 11110 kZ1 Res Comp 1 kZ1 Angle 0 Z1 10 (3) Z1X 15 R1G 10 R1Ph 10 tZ1 0s
Z2/Zp Tilt Angle 0 Fwd Z Chgt Delay 30.00 ms R3Ph - R4Ph 30 tZ3 600 ms Z4 40 tZ4 1.000 s Fault Locator Group 1
IED Stats Reset Our IED
Monitor Bit 8 Relay Label 08
N CB Ops Maint Alarm Disabled (3) N CB Ops Maint 10
Loopback Mode No Action
Test Mode Disabled
Reload Mode No Action
Test Pattern 1
N CB Ops Lock Alarm Disabled (3) N CB Ops Lock 20
kZm Mutual Comp 0 kZm Angle 0
RP2 Protocol Courier
Test Pattern 2
RP2 Card Status
Contact Test No Operation
CB Time Maint Alarm Disabled (3) CB Time Maint 100.0 ms
RP2 Port Config EIA232 (RS232)
Test LEDs No Operation
Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd kZp Res Comp 1 kZp Angle
RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2
Autoreclose Test No Operation
CB Time Lockout Alarm Disabled (3) CB Time Lockout 200.0 ms
RP2 Address
Msg Reject Count
255
kZ2 Res Comp 1 kZ2 Angle 0 Z2 20
0 Zp 25 RpG 25 RpPh 25
RP2 InactivTimer 15
Report Link Test Alarm
RP2 Baud Rate 19200 bits/s
Link Time Out 60.0 s
Fault Freq Lock Alarm Disabled (3) Fault Freq Count 10 (3) Fault Freq Time 3.600 Ks (3) Reset Lockout by CB Close (3) Man Close RstDly 5s
Lockout Reset No
(3) Cells activated, only if functions enabled
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
(7) BACK-UP I> GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1 IN>1 Function
Channel Aided DEF Status
(7) NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. GROUP 1 I2> Status Enabled DT Thermal Trip 1.000 A Thermal Alarm 1.0 V IN Forward 100.0 mA Time Delay 1s Scheme Logic Shared Tripping 1 IN>1 Time Dial 7 IN>1 Reset Char 0s IN>1 tRESET 0s I>2 tRESET 0s IN>2 Status Enabled DT Tp 20.00 ms IN Rev Factor 0.600 Three Phase 0s Time Constant 2 5.00 70.0% Time Constant 1 10.00 Enabled Characteristic Simple/Dual I2> Directional Non-Directional 0.2 I2/I1 Time Delay 60 s I2/I1 Trip Disabled IN>1 Time Delay 10 s I2> Char Angle 1 -45 IN>1 TMS 7 IN>1 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s IN>1 Current Set 200.0 mA IN>1 VTS Block Non-Directional V> Voltage Set I2> VTS Non-Directional I2> Current Set 200 mA I2> Time Delay I2/I1 Setting IN>1 Directional Directional Fwd Polarisation Zero Sequence Broken Conductor Enabled BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP1 THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1
(7)
(7)
DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1 I>1 Function DT I>1 Directional Directional Fwd I>1 VTS Block Non-Directional I>1 Current Set 1.500 A I>1 Time Delay VTS 1.000 s I>1 TMS
1 POWER-SWING GROUP 1
ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1 Po status Enabled Time Delay Factor 0.00 s Fix Time Delay 1.00 s IN Current Set 100.0 mA Po Threshold 0.5 mVA
Program Mode Standard Scheme
Delta R
500 m
Standard Mode Basic + Z1X
Delta X
500 m
Fault Type Both Enabled
IN > Status Enabled
PAP: Tele Trip En Disabled
IN > (% Imax) 40 %
PAP: Del. Trip En Disabled
I2 > Status Enabled
PAP: P1 Disabled I>1 Time Dial
Trip Mode Force 3 Poles (5) Sig. Send Zone None (5) DistCR None (6) Tp 20.0 ms I>1 Reset Char DT I>1 tRESET
I2 > (% Imax) 30 %
PAP: 1P Time Del 500 ms
Imax Line > Status Enabled
tReversal Guard 20.0 ms
PAP: P2 Disabled
Imax Line> 3.000 A
Unblocking Logic None
PAP: P3 Disabled
Delta I Status Enabled
TOR-SOTF Mode
00000000110000
PAP 3P Time Del 2.000 s I>2 Directional Non-Directional
Unblocking Delay 30.0 s
I>2 Function DT
SOFT Delay 110 s
PAP: IN Thres 500.0 mA
Blocking Zones 00000
Z1Ext Fail Disabled I>2 Current Set 2A I>3 Time Delay 3s 3A I>3 Current Set
PAP; K (%Un) 0.500
Out Of Step
I>2 VTS Block Non-Directional
I>3 Status Enabled
IN>2 Directional Non-Directional
Weak Infeed Group 1
Loss Of Load Group 1
Stable Swing
IN>2 VTS Block Non-Directional
WI :Mode Status
Disabled/PAP/Trip Echo
LoL: Mode Status Disabled I>2 TMS 1 I>2 Time Dial 7 I>4 Time Delay 4s I>4 Status Disabled I>4 Current Set 4A
I>2 Time Delay VTS 2s
IN>2 Current Set 300.0 mA IN>2 Time Delay VTS 2.0 s
LoL. Chan. Fail Disabled
LoL: I<
500 mA
Idem for IN>3 & IN>4 IN> Char Angle -45
WI: Single Pole Disabled (4) WI : V< Thres. 45 V (4) WI : Trip Time Delay 60 ms
LoL: Window
40ms
I>2 Reset Char DT (4) Cells activated with WI Trip & Echo (5) Enable with Open Scheme (6) Enable with Blocking Scheme
Polarisation Zero Sequence
(7) Activated if enable in Configuration
P44x/EN HI/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
VOLT PROTECTION GROUP 1 PSL DATA C/S Check Schem A/R 7

C/S check Schem Man CB AUTORECLOSE MODE
CB FAIL & I< GROUP 1 Relay 1 Relay Label 01 P441/2/4 Grp 1 PSL Ref
SUPERVISION GROUP 1
SYSTEM CHECK GROUP 1
AUTORECLOSE GROUP 1
INPUT LABELS GROUP 1
OUTPUT LABELS GROUP 1
V< & V> MODE GROUP 1 1P Trip Mode 111 V< Dead Line 13.0 V V> Live Line Disabled Threshold 3P 0.4 Delta I> 100.0 mA Diff Voltage 6.50 V Dead Time 4 180.0 s Reclaim Time 20 180.0 s 180.0 s Dead Time 3 32.0 V 60.0 s V> Live Bus s Dead Time 2 P444 P444 30.0 V 13.0 V 1.0 V< Dead Bus 3P - Dead Time 1 Opto Input 16 Opto Label 16 32.0 V P442/4 P442/4 3/3 3P Trip Mode Opto Input 8 Opto Label 08 Relay 14 Relay Label 14 1/3 P441/2/4
0000 VTS Time Delay 5.0 s VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit 50.0 mA Detect 3P
BREAKER FAIL GROUP 1 26 May 2005 11:21:14:441
VT SUPERVISION GROUP 1
Opto Input 1 Opto Label 01
UNDER VOLTAGE GROUP 1
CB Fail 1 Status Enabled
V< Measur't Mode Phase-Neutral
CB Fail 1 Timer 200.0 ms
Grp 1 PSL ID -481741114 Grp 2 PSL Ref
V<1 Function
DT
CB Fail 2 Status Disabled
1P - Dead Time 1 1.0 s
V<1 Voltage Set 50.0 V
CB Fail 2 Timer
Relay 21 Relay Label 21
Idem Group 3 & 4
V<1 Time Delay
10.0 s
CBF Non I Reset CB Open & I<
V<1 TMS
1 CTS Status Disabled CTS VN< Inhibit 1.0 V CTS IN> Set 100.0 mA CTS Time Delay 5.0 s CVT SUPERVISION GROUP 1 CVTS Status Disabled CVTS VN> 1.0 V Diff Phase
CBF Ext Reset CB Open & I<
CT SUPERVISION GROUP 1
Opto Input 24 Opto Label 24
Relay 32 Relay Label 32
V<2 Status
Disabled
Under Current I< GROUP 1
Diff Frequency 50.00 mHz
P444 with Option Relay 46 Relay Label 46
V<2 Voltage Set 38.0 V
I < Current Set 50.00 mA
V<2 Time Delay
5.0 s
Bus-Line Delay 200.0 ms Discrimination Time 5.0 s A/R Inhbit Wind 5.0 s
Close Pulse Time 100.0 ms
OVERVOLTAGE GROUP 1
V> Measur't Mode Phase-Neutral
V>1 Function
DT
C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Enabled

AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT
V>1 Voltage Set 75.0 V
GROUP 1
V>1 Time Delay
10.0 s
CVTS Time Delay 100.0 s
Block A/R 1111111111
V>1 TMS
V>2 Voltage Set 90.0 V
V>2 Status
Enabled
V>2 Time Delay 500.0 ms
Hardware / Software-Version MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN VC/E44
HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY

(Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only)
Hardware / Software-Version Page 1/8 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files
P44x/EN VC/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Software Hardware version suffix Full description of changes
Model number
Date of issue
S1 Compatibility
Branch A2.x: First Model P441/P442 (P444 not available) Modbus/Kbus/IEC103 4 languages Optos 48Vcc (Hardware suffix: A)
Documentation: TG 1.1671-C & OG 1.1671-B VDEW-ModBus-Kbus cells/CBaux/IRIG-B/Weak Infeed/Reset IDMT/SyncCheck/AR LED V1.09 VDEW-ModBus-Kbus cells/CBaux/IRIG-B/ Weak Infeed/Reset IDMT/ SyncCheck/AR LED V2.0 New S1 version Frequency out of range (major correction)- 1/3 pole AR logic VTS Frequency out of range (major correction)- 1/3 pole AR logic New S1 version Communication improvement / Fault location with 5A / IRIGB V1.10 No compatibility with branch A1.x (model 02) V2.0 V2.0 V2.0 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 No compatibility with branch A1.x (model 02)
03
10/2000
A2.6
04
10/2000
03
03
03
03
04/2001
A2.7
04
04/2001
A2.8
04
07/2001
A2.9
04
3P fault in Power Swing/SOTF logic/CB Fail/Ext. Trip + 5ms/Z101/ 2002 Z2 measurement for small characteristic /SOTF-TOR / U-I prim sec EEPROM correction/RCA angle/DEF correction/New general distance Trip equation (Blocking scheme) / Fault Locator
A2.10
04
05/2002
V2.0
03
03
03
A2.11
04
09/2003
Last A2.x branch version: Retrip CB/Fuse failure/31st December for Disturbance recording/Disturbance compressed function and communication correction/Voltage memory/DEF/Ext CheckSync/P-Phase ref CheckSync/Sync live-live/2UN Vref Sync/Z1 & Angle<55
V2.0
03
03
03
Note: The software version / hardware suffix / model number can be found through the settings in system data via MiCOM S1 or LCD front panel.
P44x/EN VC/E44 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility PSL Setting Files Menu Text Files
Hardware / Software-Version
Page 2/8
Software- Hardware version suffix Full description of changes
Model number
Date of issue
S1 Compatibility
Branch A3.x: P444 model with 24 optos/32 outputs (Omron) -Universal optos Italian Language DNP3
Documentation: TG 1.1671-C & OG 1.1671-B P444/DNP3/NCIT/universal input/5 languages Italian model 4050A for P444 P441/P442 models 050A (48Vcc) or 050B (Universal optos) DDB with 1022 cells/Discrimination timer in AR/New DDB distance cells/DEF logic/SOTF timer/Broken Conductor/Com. 05 V2.02 + patch
(Same DDB)
A3.0
05
05/2001
V2.02 + patch
No compatibility with branch A2.x (model 03 or 04)
A or B
A3.1
for P441/442
06
12/2001
SOTF-TOR/Z4 block Power swing/CB Fail/IEC103 disturbance/U-I Prim-sec/kms-miles/3P fault in Power Swing/Z1-Z2 measurement for small characteristic/Ext Trip+5ms/New settings
N/A
05
A3.2
for P444
06
05/2002
V2.02 + patch
05
(Same DDB)
EEPROM correction/New general distance Trip equation (Block scheme)/RCA angle/IEC103 correction/Fault Location/DEF phase selection
N/A
05
A3.3
06
09/2003
V2.02 + patch
05
(Same DDB)
Last A3.x branch version: Retrip CB/Fuse failure/31st December for disturbance recording/Disturbance (compressed or non-compressed) and communication correction / Voltage memory / DEF/ Ext CheckSync/P-Phase ref CheckSync / Sync live-live / I broken conductor/ Px4x with Px3x in IEC103/2UN Vref Sync/Z1 & Angle<55
N/A
05
Hardware / Software-Version Page 3/8 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Full description of changes PSL S1 Compatibility Setting Files Menu Text Files
P44x/EN VC/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Software- Hardware version suffix
Model number
Date of issue
Branch A4.x: Second Rear Port - more alarms - new application feature
Documentation: P44x/EN T/B22
A4.0
07
09/2002
Second rear port/Slip frequency/Retrip CB/VTS phase selection/P-P-Ground phase selection/PSL Extraction/Seriescompensated Line/New DDB cells/Overlap Z/ Reverse with X4 limit/Weak infeed/Fault location in IEC /Dead time2/I Broken conductor V2.05 + patch V2.07 V2.07
A4.1 Voltage memory improvement/IEC103 compliance with Px3x /DEF/Power swing & glitchZ
07
12/ 2002 2-phase-ground & phase selection/Sync VT bus side
A4.3
07
04/ 2003
A or B
for P441/442
No compatibility with branch A3.x (model 05 or 06) V2.07
A4.5
07
09/2003
for P444
Disturbance (compressed or non-compressed) and communication correction / DEF/ Ext CheckSync/P.Phase ref CheckSync / Sync live-live / I broken conductor/ Px4x with Px3x in IEC103/Battery Alarm IEC103/31st December for Disturbance recording/2UN Vref Sync/Z1 & Angle<55/Zn-Zn+1 with +30ms
A4.8
07
Last A4.x branch version: Time sync cell in ModBus/Sync. TP bus/Optos tagging in event/Dynamic management of Bus-Line 09/2004 for checksync /ModBus correction /DNP3/Frequency tracking/Directional with Deltas&Conventional are computed in parallel (No delay between the algorithms)
V2.07
Note 1: The software version / hardware suffix / model number can be found through the settings in system data via MiCOM S1 or LCD front panel.
Note 2: Versions A4.2 - A4.4 A4.6 A4.7 are not distributed
P44x/EN VC/E44 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Full description of changes PSL S1 Compatibility Setting Files Menu Text Files
Page 4/8
Model number
Date of issue
Branch B1.x: New Hardware Platform (Coprocessor Board 150MHz-2nd rear port-Trip time= 1.1Cycle - 48 samples/T) & New functions (32N & 59N)
Documentation: P44x/EN T/E33
B1.0
08
12/2002
New platform/model 080C/coprocessor board at 150 MHz/ZSP (32N)/CVTS (59N) new functions/ Px4X with Px3x in IEC103 / Retrip CB/Fuse failure/31st December for Disturbance recording/I Broken conductor/DEF polarisation V2.09 Ext checksync correction & P-Phase ref & L-Live / 32N correction / Line angle<55 / Voltage memory / Power swing & Z glitch Disturbance (compressed & non-compressed) function and communication correction/2UN Vref Sync/Zn-Zn+1 with +30ms Sync. TP bus/Optos tagging in event/ZSP angle/Dynamic management of Bus-Line for checksync New platform /Time sync cell in ModBus /DNP3 V2.09 + patch*
No compatibility with branch A.x
B1.1
09
07/2003
08
08
08
B1.2
09
09/2003
V2.09 + patch* V2.09 + patch* V2.09 + patch* V2.09 + patch* V2.09 + patch*
08 08 08 08 08
08 08 08 08 08
08 08 08 08 08
B1.3
09
07/2004
B1.4
09
09/2004
B1.5
09
11/2004
B1.6
09
CB close command is applied twice from DNP3 Fault location-Settings group by opto-DNP3 & model Nr Latest version: 32N corrected (5A) 04/2005 Primary measurement & Im
Patch 09 is included with MiCOM S1 release V2.11
P44x/EN VC/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Model number
Date of issue
Branch C1.x: New Hardware Platform (New CPU Board 150MHz + Coprocessor Board 150MHz-2nd rear port-Trip time= 1.1Cycle - 48 samples/T) & Functions as B1.4+ New Distance Features
Documentation: P44x/EN T/E44 New platform/model 20G or 20H/Cpu board at 150 MHz/Fast tripping board/46 outputs-P444 model 20H/Power swing for China V2.09 + patch* or V2.10 No compatibility with branch A.x
C1.0
20
04/2004
for P441/442
G-H Relay-opto event log/Z4Zp indication
Distance feature: timer from Zn to Zn-1/Tilt settable in Z1Z2Zp/Output Phase-ground detection/PAP (Weak infeed for RTE France)/Non-compressed disturbance recording at 24 samples per cycle/Control input/InterMicom/Tp in DEF/DEF timer from 2 to 100ms/3rd&4th IN>/Internal trace by Zgraph
No compatibility with branch B.x V2.09 + patch* or V2.10
for P444
C1.1
20
12/2004
Last C1.x branch version:UCA2 / InterMicom with UCA2/Time sync cell in ModBus/Sync. TP bus/Optos tagging in event/Dynamic management of Bus-Line for checksync
P44x/EN VC/E44 MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay type: P441/P442 & P444 Backward Compatibility Full description of changes PSL S1 Compatibility Setting Files Menu Text Files
Page 6/8
Model number
Date of issue
Branch C2.x: Same as C1.x with UCA2 (Ethernet optical support) & new functions (49+NCIT)
Documentation: P44x/EN T/E44
G-J or V2.11
for P441/442
V2.10 + patch*
No compatibility with branch A.x No compatibility with branch B.x No compatibility with branch C1
C2.0
30
08/2004
G-J-H
New platform- NCIT/ Thermal Overload as in P540/Sync. TP bus/Optos tagging in event/ZSP angle/Dynamic management of Bus-Line for checksync/DEF Reverse sensitivity/Time sync input/ZSP start/Ethernet module NCIT 61850.9.2
for P444
P44x/EN VC/E44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Model number
Date of issue
Branch C2.x: Same as C1.x with UCA2 (Ethernet optical support) & new function (49)
Documentation: P44x/EN T/A44 V2.10 + patch* Timer 0/DNP3 correction or V2.11 V2.10 + patch* InterMicom/DEF primary scale/AREVA name in UCA2 or V2.11 V2.10 + patch* P-P-ground phase selection/Reset IN dead/DNP3 & CB Close/Fault location/Opto & Change of group/DNP3 or V2.11 V2.10 + patch* or V2.11 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
C2.1
G-J
30
09/2004
for P441/442
G-J-H
C2.2
for P444
30
10/2004
C2.5
30
11/2004
C2.6
30
Latest C2.x branch version: Primary measurement & Im - Error during flash with optic fibre 05/2005 Fault location & Broken currents new cells in DNP3-E2.0 official platform with NCIT
Note 1: The software version / hardware suffix / model number can be found through the settings in system data via MiCOM S1 or LCD front panel.
Note 2: Versions C2.3 C2.4 are not distributed
Note 3: Patches 20 & 30 are included with MiCOM S1 release V2.11
P44x/EN VC/E44 Page 8/8
Hardware / Software-Version MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Publication: P44x/EN T/E44

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

P44x Ent E44 Web PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P44x Ent E44 Web PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Numerical Distance Protection

Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

P44x/EN T/E44 Page 1/2

Numerical Distance Protection MiCOM P44x GENERAL CONTENT

P44x/EN T/E44 Page 2/2

Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section Page 1/10

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 2/10 Safety Section

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section Page 3/10

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 4/10 Safety Section

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section Page 5/10

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 8/10 Safety Section

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section Page 9/10

COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.

Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 10/10 Safety Section

RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

UPDATE DOCUMENTATION VERSION C2.X

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 1/82

P44X UPDATE DOCUMENTATION

3.1.2 3.2 3.6.3 3.9 3.10 3.11 P44x/EN HW/E33 1.1.5

6/24 9/24 14/24 23/24 24/24 24/24 5/44

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 2/82

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

P44x/EN AP/E33 NEW SECTION

9 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 3/82

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 4/82

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 5/82

P44X/ EN IT/ E33 : INTRODUCTION

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 7/82

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 8/82

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

Fixed function LEDs

ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY = CLEAR = READ = ENTER

User programable function LEDs

Bottom cover Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 9/82

Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

(See CB Control in Application Notes)